vehicles Audi 2019 A4 Vehicle Owner's Manual

Owner's Manual for vehicles models including: Audi 2019 A4 Vehicle

audi-a4-s4-2019-owner-manual

Audi A4 S4 2019 Owner's Manual – PDF Download

File Info : application/pdf, 392 Pages, 99.53MB

audi-a4-s4-2019-owner-manual

Owner's Manual 2019 A4
Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

Foreword
Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trustin us.
Your new Audi will allow you to experience the best in groundbreaking technology and premium quality equipment that a vehicle has to offer. We recommend that you read your Owner's Manual thoroughly so that you quickly become acquainted with your Audi and makeuseofall of its features.
In addition to explaining how the different features work, we provide manyuseful tips and information concerning your safety, how to care for your vehicle, and how to maintain your vehicle's value. We also give you useful tips and information on how to drive your vehicle more efficiently and in an environmentally-friendly manner.
Wehope you enjoy driving your Audi and we wish you safe and pleasant motoring.
AUDI AG
A WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do notidle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings. ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

8W0012721BG

Table of contents

About this Owner's Manual......

SUIMIMAFY: « « 225% : 222% : seen s eos
Quik aCCESS his: 6 i esi a 6 wees as ewe Cockpit overview.............-0000-5 Indicator lights overview...........0.. 10

Display and operation............ 13

Instrument cluster............... 13

Instrumentcluster overview........... 13

Coolant temperature indicator......... 14

Tachometer......... 0.0 eee ee eee

Fulellevélse. : 2 wes sy sews so eee so ees 15

Odometer sic eo sisiecs ores e seem ee omens 15

Multifunction steering wheel plus...... 15

Multifunction steering wheel.......... 18

Vehicle functions « csv. ee ve ewe veo 19

MessageS ... 0... eee eee 21

Head-up display.................. 27 Description...............0..000000. 27

Starting and driving.............

Opening and closing............. 28

Central locking..................000- 28

Luggage compartment lid............. 35

Childisatiety, LOK secnsice x + emersin « i wnisne + oi sens 40

Power windowS............000e0 eee 41

Sliding/tilting sunroof................ 42

Panoramic glass roof................. 43

Valet parking............-.000 eee eee 43

Garage door opener........eeeeeeneee 44

Lights and Vision................. 47 EXterior lighting sas y ¢ sews zo eee s 2 eee 47
Interior lightingie: + « sews ss wes se eee 50 Vision... eee ee SL
Windshield wipers...............0005 53 Digital.compass': « sci: «5 eews ee meee eee 56

co © ©

Stowing and using............... 62 Ashtray... 6.6 cece eee eee eee eee 62 Cigarette light@r': secs ss news 2 2 sews x ee 62 POWEPSOUNCES sisicca co cncivene oo ores wv aero 62 Storage... eee eee eee 63 Luggage compartment............... 64 ROOPPACKE. 5 & income «wv senvave w a amines aw ara ww 70
Warm and cold................... va Climate control system............... ZA 3-zone deluxe automatic climate control. 72 Steering wheel heating............... 74
BGR AINGE: & csevess a 6 smswes 5 & eueence oo areas wo aa 76 General information................. 76 STEERING & qua 5 = nowy 2 & OEE EE Res te 7 Shifting into Getic vs secs so comers ve oe 77 Starting and stopping the engine....... 78 Start/Stop System « exes ss eve a x oes ge 80 Electromechanical parking brake....... 82 Starting to drive....... 2... eee eee 83 Driving OfffOad « 2e0: : = 2ae8 se meee s eee 84 Automatic transmission.............. 85
Trailer towing.................... 93 Driving withia trailers « sae « » sau so caw 93
Driver assistance................. 95 Assist systems................... 95
Speed warning system..............-- 95 Cruise control system.............0-. 95 Camera-based traffic sign recognition... 97 Wea PeCHIM)H awcsis & ws aeewnss « suawess a x ssi eo ants 99 Predictive efficiency assist............. 100 Audi adaptive cruise control........... 102 Audi prevsensess = sscos x 6 sews sv eae oo awe 112 Audi active lane assist................ 117 Audi Sidé SSSiStisy: « qwax: « 3 wmee 2s meme = 2 121 Audi driverselect)s «isis i isn sa va a ve 126

58 58
FROMUESCALS cnnisens 6 & casiseis wo eeocins © # somes & ot 58 Head restraints. ..........0 0.00 eee eee 59 MEIOry FUTICEION « ccs : © nem & o aes yee 60

Parking aid....................... 129 General information................. 129 Rear parking system............-.4.. 130 Parking system plus.............-.05. 130 Rearview camera sacs < . eeu is sees oes 132 Peripheral cameraS........ 0.02. eee 133

8W0012721BG

Adjusting the parking aid............. Error mesSageS........ 00 esses eee eee
Intelligent Technology...........
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)....
Electromechanical steering, Dynamic SEESTHAG one « causes 0 mnmens 4» cyienoite «9 enamine All wheel drive (quattro).............. Energy management................Notice about data recorded by the Event Data Recorder and vehicle control
Infotainment system............ Multi Media Interface............
Traffic safety information............. Introduction................2.00 0005 MMI On/Off knob with joystick function. . Infotainment system display.......... MMI operation...............0-.0005 MMICGUICHs « = cee & neue © 2 seus ¢ 2 ee Control knob with joystick function..... Shortcut keys.........-.. 0c eee eee Letter/number speller................ Pree:textisearch s osvs i 2 sonsos o 2 maim oo a0 Menus and Symbols...............--.
Multifunction steering wheel.... Introduction. ...............0 eee eee
Te@lephome ince: + a sane + crease ou soon oo aeons Navigation..................0..000.
Voice recognition system........ Operating............ 0. cece eee eee Command overview information........ COMMANAS « wise s & woe we wan vo mS ow External voice operation..............
TelephoOne:.:: «2 cis ss eces se cows s ees Introduction. ...............0 02a ee
Using the Audi phone box............. Using the telephone..............000% U0) MO@SSAGES aces « > wes = y neues y 2 Rees xe oe

Table of contents
Listening to voicemail................ 181 Directory... 2... cece eee eee eee 181 Additional settings...............005 183 Troubleshooting wicsc. ss wean oe vsiene =e mere 184
Audi CONNECE : sce: ¢ e e605 +f ees ss os 186 Introductions « «see so wear so econ 3» oe 186 Audi connect Infotainment............ 186 Audi connect Infotainmentservices..... 187 Audi connect vehicle control services.... 190 SOECINOS cosas « w eneuvire & prienens « x somes w 4 stones 192 Data Privacy............ 002. .e ee eee 194 Troubleshooting ............ceeee veces 195
Emergencycall................... 1956. TrithOdUGtiOn:: x « coms = « eames x ¥ eee * Bee 196 Emergency call«sci 2 ves: oo ewe eo emcee 196 Online roadside assistance............ 197
Navigation.....................00. 198 Opening navigation.................. 198 Entering adestination................ 198 Personal route assistance............. 204 Alternative routes.............0.000. 205 Additional settings................0. 205 Mapes ¢ & saves ¥ 5 sae go eae 2 8 wee 2 os 207 Satellite map...............0 22.00 210 Map update................0 00s 211 Traffic information................005 212 Troubleshooting «ence n seca w & wenene © 0 sine 214
Radio: «as ts sews ss pews to wows se eS 215 Opening the radio................... 215 Radio functions...............000005 216 Radio Menu ¢ » eves ¢ s eeen ts pees ee een 218 PreSCESE: «swam @ eanim a 2 emo a 2 come WH Oe 218 Additional settings...............005 218 TROUBLESHOOTING vn + : gece « 2 nome 2 2 eae 219
Media............... 0. cece eee eee 220 Introduction............. ee eee ee eee 220 NOLES « seus ee meses & © seine & ¥ cava & » saves 220 Media drives. ........... 0.00 e eee ee 221 Bluetooth audio player............... 223 Wi-Fi audio player................... 224 Online media and Internet radio........ 225 Multimedia connections.............. 226 Playing tedia': = ¢ sees y= sees 5s eee so xe 229

Table of contents
Additional settings.................. Supported media and file formats...... Troubleshooting woz: « & sees se ors ss ee
Operating). « vie wv swine we arsem «> mee ¥ o TrOUBLESHOOEIAG vcsives sv erminoe su enetnre ww ven
SYSTEM SECtINGS:. « «cas is wes sce Setting the date andtime............. MMI settings..............2-.02005Connection manager................. System: updater + « arene se eerme se onewe s Sound settings.............-.-000005 NVOLUMESEELINGS wien x s game < ¢ cams 5 aoe Restarting the MMI.................. Software license information..........
Safety FIrst). « ssces ss sic 4 2 sree 2 6 ower Driving safety....................
Correct passenger seating positions..... Driver's and front passenger's footwell. . Pedalarea............. 000 cece eee
Sefby Betts «ess. . vicseu ss messes 6 oimaece Generalinformation.................
Safety Delts « swiss 2 seria = 2 arena 6 nnn © Belt tensioners...............0000005
Airbag system.................... Important information............... FRONUSINDAQS: wacs s & oan a 4 caes se ree Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System . Knee airbags....................000, Sid@aifbagS as < = ses ¢ esas xo KGS ed oe Side curtain airbags...............0..
Child safety.................0..0. Important information............... Child safety seats............002.000. Securing child safety seats............ LATCH system (lower anchorages and tethers for'children) 6 seve 6 aesaie 6 tar Additional information...............

Maintenance and Care........... 305 Checking and Filling............. 305
FUGlisves: 2 2 wom < 2 somes vf wea & 5 aueoe a 2 oe 305 Reftieling cross e eccsnes e wanes xe awison ee ere 306 Catalytic converter...............0005 308 On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)...... 308 Engine compartment..............00% 309 Engine oil........ 2... eee eee eee 312 Cooling SYStEM . < = sees sc tees de eee swe 315 Brake Pluidiic. «+ aes so vworvae ou cote oo awe 317 Electrical system.............0..000. 317 Bateenysa « 5 nasis so SRSA 5 Am GK Base zc 318 Windshield washer system............ 320 Service interval display............... 320
Whe6US « ses cs eeee os eee es eee 2 a 322 Wheelsiand Tires ¢ sccusia ss ccmaue eo anemone © 0 322 Tire pressure monitoring system....... 339
Care and cleaning................ 342 General information................. 342 Gar Washes: « wacu s seems ss ewes Ree et 342 Cleaning and care information......... 343 Taking your vehicle out of service....... 347
Dovlt Yourself wis ss goss ss ces so wes 348 Emergencyassistance........... 348
General information..............4.- 348 Equipment ecco s « yer 2 & nwo 9 ¢ ew see 348 Tite mmOB ili ty: Kit. scsi o ¢ seers © « eomeone = 6 ot 349 Changing atire................ eee 351 Space-saving spare tire............... 355 Collapsible spare tire...............0. 355
Fuses and bulbs. ........0... 20065 35/7 PUSOS score 2 x meme 2 x ae 2 wan ss EEE Boe 357. Bulbs... 2. eee ee eee ee 361
Emergencysituations............ 362 Gemetial' s scisass 1 0 snes x m cnauene « 9 rena © exettons 362 Starting by pushing or towing.........- 362 Starting with jumper cables........... 362 Using the jump start cable............ 363 Towing with atowtruck..............- 364 Raising the vehicle................0-. 365

8W0012721BG

Customer information........... 367 Accessories and technical EMaINOGSS:: § eeeu Eee 5s NEO se OED eo me 367
Watra ty': « meses x 3 swosiaw © 3 omens ¥ sracemaow #2 367 Audi Literature Shop..............00- 367 Driving in other countries............. 367 Maintenance, repairs, and technical modifications...............00-- 00 367 Accessories and parts................ 369 Reporting Safety Defects.............. 369 Declaration of compliance for telecommunications equipment and electronic systems ...............000. 370
Technical data.................... 372 Identification data................... 372 Wehicle datainc « «oes = « meses © msesens wean 372
THOS: 2 ewes ¢ seems 2 8 Rew se eee a ree 374

Table of contents

About this Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual applies to all versions of this model. It contains important information, tips, suggestions, and warnings for using your vehicle.
Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times. This is especially important if you loan your vehicle to othersor sell it.
This owner's manual describes the equipment range specified for this model at the time of printing. Individual equipment options described mayonly be available at a later date or may only be offered in certain countries.
Some sections in this manual do not apply toall vehicles. When this is the case, the beginning of the section indicates the validity, for example "Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system". Optional or vehicle-specific equipment is also identified with an asterisk "*".
The illustrations in this manual are a guide. Some ofthe details in your vehicle maydiffer from the illustration.
All directions, such as "Left", "right", "front" and
"rear", are based on the vehicle's direction of travel.
* Optional or vehicle-specific equipment b> The section continues on the next page.
=> A\ Cross reference to a "WARNING"within a section. If a page number is indicated, the WARNING is located outside of the section.
Z\ WARNING
Text with this symbol contains information about safety and how to reduce the risk of serious personal injury or death.
G) Note
Text with this symbol contains information about reducing the risk of damage to your vehicle.
@ For the sake of the environment
Text with this symbol contains information on protecting the environment.

G) Tips
Text with this symbol contains additional useful information.

SATZZZTOOM8

Quick access
Cockpit overview
Fig. 2 Cockpit: right section
8

Quick access

COOHO®H O

OOOOOOO

side assist displays, warning about exiting the vehicle ..............
Door handle Central locking switch ........... Memory buttons ...............
Vent Thumbwheel for vent Lever for: --Turn signals and high beams .... -- High beam assistant .......... -- Active lane assist ............. -- Traffic jam assist ............. Multifunction steering wheel with:
-- Horn be
-- Driver's airbag ............05. -- Driver information system con-
trols .. 0... eee eee eee -- Audio/video, telephone, naviga-
tion, and voice recognition con-
Hols! 2 a mosses vn cmon 5 5 eon 6 owas --[&/steering wheel heating button . -- Shift paddles ................
Instrument cluster .............
Resetting the trip odometer ......
Windshield washer system lever . . Emergency flashers ............. Kit@é airbag! ss = esis s ¢ ceros ee Sees Adjustable steering column ......
Lever for:
-- Cruise control system ......... -- Adaptive cruise control ........
Instrument illumination .........
Data link connector for On Board Diagnostic System (OBD II) ...... Hoodirelease® « « cssisws x x asowine x # awewees Button for switching the head-up display on/off, adjusting the height . LightiSWIteh eves se sees x e oeenw cee
Buttons for:
--All-weather lights ............ -- Rear fog lights ............... Switch for luggage compartment lid oo. eee
Power exterior mirror adjustment .

121
32 60
48 48 117 109
265
15,18
17,18 17 88 13 15 53 49
277 77
95 102
51
309 310
27 47
47 47
35 5

@® @

OO@O®

OOO OOOOO®

Power windows ................

Child safety lock ...............

Infotainment system display .....

146

Lockable glove compartment .....

Drives for CD, DVD, SIM cards ....

221

Front passenger's airbag ........

265

Valet Parking function ..........

Climate control system ..........

Depending on equipment, buttons for:

--driveselect ...............04.

126

-- Start/Stop system ............

-- Electronic Stabilization Control

(30) ee ee

139

SUPATKIN AIG: ss ssw s vsuaes ee weuecs «

129

--Hill descent assist ............

140

-- Infotainment system display ....

146

CUPL WOLGENS xs s x wane 5 mens 5 toe

Infotainment system on/off button . 145

Center armrest with storage compartment. Depending on vehicle

equipment,it may have:

-- Audi music interface ..........

226

--Audi phone box ...............

174

Starting the engine when there is a

malfunction ..............0008e

Electromechanical parking brake ..

Depending on equipment:

-- Selector lever (automatic trans-

MISSION)! « 2 snow ss meee oe meme ag

-- Gearshift lever (manual transmission)

@ Infotainment unit ..............

145

@ [START ENGINE STOP] button ....

@) Audi music interface ............

226

G@) Tips
Some the equipment listed here is only installed in certain modelsor is available as an op-
tion.

®® O8 O®@

8W0012721BG
®®

Quick access
Indicator lights overview
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster blink or turn on. They indicate functions or malfunctions.
Messages may appear with some indicator lights. A warning signal will sound at the same time. The indicator lights and messages maybe covered by other displays. To show them again, select the second tab for messages with the multifunction steering wheel > page 15 or => page 18.
Some indicator lights in the display can display in several colors.
MMeTeelem lis
If the wa or indicator light turns on, check the message in the instrumentcluster.
OTA]
Some indicator lights turn on briefly as a function check when you switch the ignition on. These systems are marked with a V in the following tables. If one of these indicator lights does not turn on, there is a malfunction in that system.
Your vehicle has either a monochrome display or a multicolored display, depending on vehicle equipment. Some indicator lights appear white ona monochrome display. The Bo W central indicator light turns on at the same time toindicate the priority of these indicator lights.
The following indicator lights may be available, depending on the vehicle equipment:
Red indicator lights Central indicator light => page 10, Audi pre sense => page 112 Brake system ¥ => page 21 Brake system ¥ => page 21

Electromechanical parking brake => page 22
Electromechanical parking brake => page 22
Cooling system => page 22
Engine oil pressure > page 312
Engine oil level (MIN)
=> page 312
Electrical system > page 317
Safety belt => page 23
Electromechanical steering => page 142
Steering lock => page 23
Engine start system => page 23
Transmission (automatic transmis-
sion) => page 90, Clutch (manual transmission) => page 23
Hood => page 24
Adaptive cruise control / => page 105
Traffic jam assist => page 109
Drive system => page 24
Yellow indicator lights Central indicator light => page 10
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) => page 24
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) ¥ =>page 24

8W0012721BG

Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) => page 139
Brake system =>page 21
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Y => page 24
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ¥ => page 24
Safety systems ¥ => page 23
Brake pads => page 21
Electromechanical parking brake => page 22
Tire pressure => page 340
Tire pressure => page 340
Drive system => page 24
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
v => page 308
Engine speed limitation => page 24
Engine oil level (MIN)
=> page 312
Engine oil level (MAX)
=> page 312
Engine oil sensor => page 312
Engine warm-up request => page 313
Electrical system => page 317
Tank system => page 24
Washer fluid level => page 25
Windshield wipers =>page 25

Quick access

Keys => page 78
Driver's door => page 25
Battery in vehicle key => page 30
Bulb failure indicator => page 25
Headlight range control system =>page 25
Adaptive light =>page 25
Light/rain sensor =>page 25
Active lane assist >page 118
Audi side assist > page 126
Audi pre sense =>page 117
Parking aid => page 137
Transmission (automatic transmis-
sion)
=> page 90, Clutch (manual transmission) > page 23
Steering lock => page 23
Engine start system => page 23
Electromechanical steering => page 142
Suspension control => page 26
All wheel drive/sport differential => page 26
Emergencycall function
=>page 197

Other indicator lights

Turn signals

> page 26

Quick access
Cruise control system =>page 95 Cruise control system =>page 95
Adaptive cruise control =>page 105
Adaptive cruise control => page 105
Adaptive cruise control => page 105
Adaptive cruise control => page 105
Adaptive cruise control => page 106, >page 101
Adaptive cruise control => page 101
Traffic jam assist => page 109
Active lane assist >page 118
Predictive efficiency assist => page 100
Predictive efficiency assist => page 100 Predictive efficiency assist => page 100
Predictive efficiency assist => page 100
Predictive efficiency assist => page 100
Predictive efficiency assist => page 100
Hill descent assist => page 140
Start/Stop system => page 80
Start/Stop system => page 80
Keys => page 79
Automatic transmission => page 90
12

Dynamic steering => page 142
Adaptive cruise control => page 106, Traffic jam assist > page 111
Traffic jam assist => page 111
Audi pre sense =>page 117
Electromechanical parking brake
=> page 22
Electromechanical parking brake => page 22
Hill descent assist => page 140
Child safety lock => page 40
Speed warning system =>page 95
Speed warning system => page 95
Active lane assist >page 118
Audi side assist => page 126
Camera-based traffic sign recognition => page 98
High beams => page 48
High beam assistant => page 48
High beam assistant => page 48

sew-0114]

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster overview
The instrument cluster is the central information centerfor the driver.
Beolel
12/5/2015

B8W-0115.

ERT
aPILYploy

ufFer

Fig. 4 Instrumentcluster overview (Audi virtual cockpit)

a) Engine coolant temperature gauge . ) Tachometer ........ cece eee eee -- With OFF status indicator ...... -- With READYstatus indicator ...
BE) Tab area: = nce werp « = gum g 2 oe
(4) Central area with
~ Driver information system ......
~ Indicator lights ............-S) Statusline (displayed on one or two
lines)
(6) Speedometer/convenience display Me FUCLUEVEL, scram ¢ s seme 4 x ates so eee

14 14 78
78,80 15
15,18
10
15

8) Speedometer ) Left additional display

There may be additional indicator lights in the tachometer @), the speedometer ©), the status line © and, depending on the instrument cluster,
aboveor below the central area (4).

The following pages will primarily showillustra-

tions of the multi-color analog instrumentclus-

ter*. The display and/orposition of the element

shown mayvary in monochrome instrumentclus-

ters or in the Audi virtual cockpit*.

8W0012721BG

Instrument cluster

Certain instrument cluster content can also be displayed in the head-up display* > page 27.
ZA WARNING
Do not assume the roads are free of ice based on the outside temperature display. Be aware that there may be ice on roads even when the outside temperature is around 41 °F (+5 °C) and thatice can increase the risk of accidents.
@) Tips
-- Depending on vehicle equipment, the instrument illumination (needles and gauges) may turn on when the lights are off and the ignition is switched on. The illumination for the gauges reduces automatically and eventually turns off as brightness outside increases. This function reminds the driver to turn the low beams on at the appropriate time.
-- You can select the units used for tempera-
ture, speed, and other measurementsin the
Infotainment system > page 240. -- If your vehicle is stationaryor if you are driv-
ing at very low speeds, the temperature displayed maybe slightly higher than the actual temperature outside due to the heat radiating from the engine.
-- At temperatures below 41 °F (+5 °C), a
snowflake symbol appearsin front of the temperature display > A\.
Coolant temperature indicator
The coolant temperature display @ > page 13, fig. 3 or > page 13,fig. 4 only functions when the ignition is switched on. To reducethe risk of engine damage, please observe the following notes about the temperature ranges.
Cold range
If only the LEDs at the bottom of the gauge turn on, the engine has not reached operating temperature yet. Avoid high engine speeds, full acceleration, and heavy engine loads.

Normal range
The engine has reached its operating temperature once the LEDs up to the center of the gauge turn on. If the g indicator light in the instrument cluster display turns on, the coolant temperature is too high > page 22.
@) Note
-- Auxiliary headlights and other accessories in front ofthe air intake impair the cooling effect of the coolant. This increasesthe risk of the engine overheating during high outside temperatures and heavy engine load.
-- The front spoiler also helps to distribute cooling air correctly while driving. If the spoiler is damaged, the cooling effect will be impaired and the risk of the engine overheating will increase. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Tachometer
The tachometerdisplays the engine speedin revolutions per minute (RPM).
The beginning of the red zone in the tachometer indicates the maximum permissible engine speed for all gears once the engine has been broken in and when it is warmed up to operating temperature. Before reaching this zone, you should shift into the next highest gear, select the "D/S" selector lever position, or remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
@) Note
The needle in the tachometer 2) > page 13, fig. 3 or > page 13,fig. 4 may only be in the red area of the gauge for a short time or there is a risk of engine damage. The location where the red zone begins varies depending on the engine.
@) For the sake of the environment
Upshifting early helps you to save fuel and reduces operating noise.

Fuel level
The display > page13,fig. 3 or page 13, fig. 4 only functions when the ignition is switched on. When the display has reached the reserve
mark, a red LED turns on and the Al indicator light turns on > page 24.
For the tank capacity in your vehicle, refer to the Technical Data > page 373.
(@) Note
Never drive until the tank is completely empty. The irregular supply of fuel that results from that can cause engine misfires. Uncombusted fuel will then enter the exhaust system. This can cause overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.
Odometer

Instrument cluster
@ Tips
The units of measurementcan beset in the Infotainment system > page 240.
Multifunction steering
wheel plus
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel plus
Fig. 6 Driver information system display

Fig. 5 Instrumentcluster: odometer and reset button
Trip odometer and odometer
The trip odometer showsthe distance driven since it was last reset. It can be used to measure short distances.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the |] reset button.
The odometer showsthe total distance that the vehicle has been driven.
Malfunction indicator
If there is a malfunction in the instrument cluster, DEF will appear in the trip odometer display. Have the malfunction corrected as soon as possible.

Fig. 7 Left side of multifunction steering wheel

Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.

The driver information system contains multiple tabs @ fig. 6 that display various information
©.
The following tabs maybe available, depending on vehicle equipment:

First tab

Vehicle functions > page 19

Second
tab?)

Messages

Third tab Radio > page 157

Media > page 157

8W0012721BG

Instrument cluster

Fourth tab Fifth tab

Telephone* > page 158
Navigation* > page 159 Map* > page 160

a) This tab is only visible when thereis at least one indicator light or message displayed.
@® Button [<>

-- Switching tabs: press the [<>] button repeatedly until the desired tab is shown (for example, Radio).

@ [VIEW] button

Switching views or reducing the display => page 17.

Return to functions at higher levels.

© Control buttons[3] and
Open/close the selection menu or options menu => page 16.
@ Left thumbwheel
-- Selecting a function in a menu/list: turn the left thumbwheel to the desired function (for example, selecting a frequency).
-- Confirming a selection: press the left thumbwheel () > fig. 7.
-- Zooming in/out on the map: when a map is displayed, turn the left thumbwheel to zoom in and out on the map.

Control buttons
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel plus

cued ETa ees anaso) Peasealas

Fig. 8 Selection menu and options menu view
Left control button
-- Opening and closing the selection menu: press the respective left control button on the steering wheel > fig. 8 . You can select and confirm a function in the selection menu using the left thumbwheel (for example, selecting a frequency band).
Right control button
-- Opening/closing the options menu: press the respective right control button on the steering

wheel > fig. 8 . You can change any context-dependent functions and settings using the left thumbwheel (for example, additional station
information).
(i) Tips
The availability of a selection menu or options menu depends on the function that is selected.

ng views
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel plus
Fig. 9 -Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit-Default view: classic/sport*
Fig. 10 -Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit-Enhanced view
Change view
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
> Press the [VIEW] button @) > page15,fig. 7 to switch from the default view > fig. 9 to the enhanced view fig. 10. To return to the default
view, press the [VIEW] button again.
Setting the default view
Applies to: vehicles with sport view
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can choose between the classic and the sport view.

Instrument cluster

> Open the first vehicle functions tab using the
<>] button on the multifunction steering
wheel. > Select on the multifunction steering wheel: left
control button > Layout > Sport layout or Classic layout.
Reducing the display
Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster
> Press the [VIEW] button to switch from the classic to the reduced display. To return to the classic view, press the [VIEW] button again.
Adjusting the additional display
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the additional displays that can be selected mayvary.
> Open the first vehicle functions tab using the <>] button on the multifunction steering wheel.
> Select on the multifunction steering wheel: right control button > Additional display.
» Select the desired additional display.
G@) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with sport view
Alwaysset the desired default view before driving, because the display functions will not be available for several seconds.

Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel plus

Fig. 11 Rightside of the multifunction steering wheel
@Button [¢
-- Accepting a call: press the [@] button when there is an incoming call.

8W0012721BG

Instrument cluster

-- Ending call: press the |¢] button during a phone call to end the call.
-- Openingthecall list: if no phone call is in progress and there are no incoming calls, press the [-] button.
@ Button [2»
-- Switching the voice recognition system on: briefly press the [2+] button. Say the desired command after the Beep.
-- Switching the voice recognition system off: press and hold the |] button. Or: say the command Cancel.
For more information about the voice recognition system, see > page 164, Voice recognition system or > page 241.
@ Right thumbwheel
You can adjust the volume of an audio source or a system message (for example, from the voice recognition system) when the sound is playing.
-- Increasing or decreasing the volume: turn the right thumbwheel up or down.
-- Mutingor pausing: turn the right thumbwheel down. Or: press the right thumbwheel.
--Unmutingor resuming: turn the right thumbwheel up. Or: press the right thumbwheel.
@ kil / Button [>>!
-- Selecting the previous/next track or station: press the Kid] or [DDI button.
-- Fast forwarding/rewinding audio files: press and hold the Kl] or [bo button until the desired location in the file is reached.
®k Button / steering wheel heating @
-- Steering wheel heating*: you can find additional information in > page 74.
-- Programmable steering wheel button - opening a function: press the [| button on the multifunction steering wheel.
-- Programmable steering wheel button - requesting a function: press and hold the [+] but-
ton.
-- Programmable steering wheel button - changing a function: press and hold the [*] button. Select and confirm an entry. Or

-- Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings > Steering wheel button assignment.
© Button[
-- Repeating the last navigation prompt: press
the [s] button when route guidance is active. -- Changing the voice guidance volume: when
route guidanceis active, turn the right thumbwheel upward or downward during a navigation
prompt.
Multifunction steering wheel
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel
With the multifunction steering wheel, you can operate the driver information system as well as the MMIfunctions and you can also adjust the volume.
44,COE
N
Fig. 13 Rightside of the multifunction steering wheel
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. >

@ Operating the driver information system
The driver information system contains multiple tabs @ > page 15,fig. 6 that display various information @) > page 15,fig. 6.
The following tabs maybe available, depending on vehicle equipment:

First tab Second
tab?)
Third tab
Fourth tab

On-board computer > page 19 Messages
Radio > page 157 Media > page 157 Telephone > page 158

a) This tab is onlyvisible when thereis at least one indicator light or message displayed.
-- Switching tabs: press the [MODE] button > fig. 12 on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the desired tab is displayed.
-- Selecting a function in the menu/list: turn the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel to the desired function.
-- Confirming a selection: press the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel to confirm your selection.
-- Scrolling within the lists: turn the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel quickly to scroll within the lists.
@ Button [»
-- Switching the voice recognition system on: briefly press the [2] button > fig. 13. Say the desired command after the Beep.
-- Switching the voice recognition system off: press and hold the |] button. Or: say the command Cancel.
For more information about the voice recognition system, see > page 164, Voice recognition system or = page 241.
@® Right thumbwheel
The volume of an audio source or a system message (such as traffic announcements)can be directly adjusted during the audio output.
-- Increasing or decreasing the volume: turn the right thumbwheel > fig. 13 up or down.

Instrument cluster
-- Muting or pausing: turn the right thumbwheel down. Or: press the right thumbwheel.
--Unmuting or resuming: turn the right thumbwheel upward. Or: press the right thumbwheel.
Vehicle functions
LO Tati The trip computer is displayed in the first tab of the driver information system. Additional vehicle functions can be accessed depending on the vehicle equipment. > Press the left control button. -- On-board computer > page 19 -- Lap times > page 99 -- Statistics > page 99 -- Layout > page 17
Mit) meeyuay Lele
Fig. 14 Instrumentcluster: fuel consumption display
Resetting values to zero Requirement: the Fuel consumption, Short-term memory, or Long-term memory display must be selected. > To reset the values in the respective memory to
zero, press and hold the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel for one second. Or
> On the multifunction steering wheel, select:
the right control button > Reset values*. In the trip computer, you can call up the following displays one after the other by turning the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel:

8W0012721BG

Instrument cluster

-- Time and date > page 240 -- Digital speedometer* -- Average consumption -- Remaining range* -- Short-term memory overview -- Long-term memoryoverview -- Energy consumers* = page 20 -- Driver assistance* > page 102 -- Traffic sign recognition* > page 97
The short-term memorycollects driving information from the time the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If you continue driving within two hoursafter switching the ignition off, the new values are included when calculating the current trip information.
Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term memoryis not erased automatically. You can select the time period for evaluating trip information yourself.
Fuel consumption
The current fuel consumption can be shown using a bar graph & fig. 14. The average consumption stored in the short-term memoryis also displayed. If the bars are green or the gray tone on the bars changes (depending on the equipment), your vehicle is saving fuel by the following function:
-- Recuperation: electrical energy can be stored in the vehicle battery when the vehicle is coasting or driving downhill. The bar will move toward
EVE.
G) Tips
The date, time of day, and time and date format can be setin the Infotainment system => page 240.

Energy consumers
Applies to: vehicles with energy consumers

aN}

Energy consumers

tae

Air conditioning

Auxiliary heating

Rear window heating

Fig. 15 Instrumentcluster: energy consumers
In the Energy consumersview, the other equipment that is currently affecting fuel consumption is listed in the first tab (on-board computer). The display showsup to three energy consumers > fig. 15. The equipment using the most power is listed first. If more than three items using power are switched on, the equipment that is currently using the most power is displayed.
A gauge (@) also showsthe current total consumption of all other consumers.
Engine oil temperature display and boost atelte-h els
Applies to: vehicles with engine oil temperature display/boost indicator
Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster
The engine oil temperature and boostindicator are only shown in the lap timer display => page 99.
Engine oil temperature indicator
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
The engine oil temperature is only shownin the enhanced view or in the sport view > page 17.

When engine oil temperatures are low,the display --- °F (--- °C) appears in the instrument clus-
ter.
The engine has reached its operating temperature when the engine oil temperature is between 176 °F (80 °C) and 248 °F (120 °C) under normal driving conditions. The engine oil temperature >

Instrument cluster

maybe higher if there is heavy engine load and high temperatures outside. This is not a cause for concern as long as the | => page 312 or = => page 312 indicator lights do not turn on.
Boostindicator
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
The boostindicator is only displayed in the sport view > page 17.
The current engine load (meaning the current boost pressure)is indicated by a bar.
Messages
BRAKE/@)/`C:/®Brake system
If this indicator light turns on, there is a malfunction in the brake system.
HiT) Brakes: stop vehicle and check brake fluid level
Stop the vehicle and check the brakefluid level. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
GG it @ Brakes: malfunction! Stop vehicle safely
If the indicator light turns on and this message appears, there is a malfunction in the brake brake
system.
1f BES / GJ and Bialso turn on, there is a malfunction in the ABS, ESC, and braking distribution.
Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance > A\.
EG / @ Parking brake: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle. See owner's manual
-- If the indicator light and the message appear when the vehicle is stationary or after switching the ignition on, check if you can release the parking brake. If you cannotrelease the parking
brake, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. If you can release the
parking brake and the message still appears, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Au-

di Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
-- If the indicator light and message appear while driving, the hill start assist or emergency braking function may be malfunctioning. It may not be possible to set the parking brake or release it once it has been set. Do not park your vehicle on hills. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
fie i fe Brake pads: wear limit reached. You can continue driving. Please contact Service
The brake pads are worn. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon as possible to have the malfunction corrected.
© Brakes overheating. Please shift to D
@ Brakes overheating. Please select a gear and follow gear recommendation
There was a heavy load on the brakes. Engage a suitable gear (manual transmission) or place the selector lever in the "D/S" position (automatic transmission) to use the engine braking effect and reduce the load on the brakes.
Brake booster: limited functionality. You can continue driving. Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the brake booster. The brake booster is available, but its effectiveness is reduced. Braking behavior may be different from howit normally functions and the brake pedal mayvibrate. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Z\ WARNING
-- Read and follow the warnings in = page 309, Working in the engine compartment before opening the hood and checking the brakefluid level.
--If the brake system indicator light does not
turn off or it turns on while driving, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low, and this increasesthe risk of an accident. Stop the vehicle and do not continue driv-
ing. See an authorized Audi dealer or

8W0012721BG

Instrument cluster

authorized Audi Service Facility for assis-
tance.
-- If the brake system indicator light turns on together with the ABS and ESCindicator lights, the ABS/ESC regulating function may be malfunctioning. Functions that stabilize the vehicle are no longer available. This could cause the vehicle to swerve, which increases the risk that the vehicle will slide. Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
NOK (® Electromechanical parking
Tr
If the Zi 7, oa indicator light turns on, the parking brake was set.
If the [MM / [indicatorlight flashes, the brak-
ing force has not built up enough or it has decreased. Secure the vehicle also by shifting into 1st gear (manual transmission) or selecting the "P" selector lever position (automatic transmission). Make sure the indicator light is off before you start driving.
ww Parking brake: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the parking brake. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunc-
tion corrected. Do not park the vehicle on hills, becauseit could roll.
a / Parking brake: warning! Vehicle parked
too steep
There is not enough braking force to hold the vehicle in place. The brakes have overheated. The vehicle could roll away, even on a small incline.
& i Parking brake: applied
If this message appears, press the brake pedal first and then release the parking brake if necessary.
a / Parking brake: emergency braking
The emergency braking function was triggered.

G) Tips
For additional information on the parking brake, see > page 82.
er Ce
|| Turn off engine and check coolantlevel. See owner's manual
The coolant level is too low.
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the coolant level > page 315.
-- If the coolantlevel is too low, add coolant = page 316. Only continue driving once the in-
dicator light turns off.
/_E Coolant temperature: too high. Let engine run while vehicle is stationary
Let the engine run at idle for a few minutes to
cool off, until the indicator light turns off.
-- If the indicator light does not turn off, do not
continue driving the vehicle. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
ZA WARNING
-- Never open the hood if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. This increases the risk of burns. When you no longer see or hear steam or coolant escaping, you may open the engine compartment with caution.
-- The engine compartment in any vehicle can be a dangerous area. Stop the engine and allow it to cool before working in the engine compartment. Alwaysfollow the information found in > page 309, Working in the engine compartment.
C) Note
Do not continue driving if the g indicator light turns on as this increases the risk of engine damage.

BMFaSTT
The Ba indicator light monitors the safety sys-
tems.
If the ka indicator light turns on or blinks, there is a malfunction in a safety system.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
ZA WARNING
Havethe safety systems inspected immediately. Otherwise, there is a risk that the sys-
tems maynotactivate during a collision,
which increases the risk of serious injury or death.
ASafety belt
The zB indicator light stays on until the driver's and front passenger's safety belts are fastened.
Abovea certain speed, there will also be a warn-
ing tone.
@) Tips
For additional information on safetybelts, see > page 253.
@- Steering lock
BS Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
There is a malfunction in the electronic steering lock. You cannot turn the ignition on.
Do not tow your vehicle because it cannot be steered. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
BS Steering lock: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the electronic steering lock.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

Instrument cluster
ZA WARNING
Do not tow your vehicle if there is a malfunction in the electronic steering lock because this increases the risk of an accident.

-~© Engine start system
jo] Engine start system: malfunction! Please contact Service
Do not switch the ignition off because you may not be able to switch it on again.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
EB Engine start system: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the engine starting sys-
tem.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

0 Clutch
Applies to: vehicles with manual transmission

& Clutch: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle

There is an ongoing malfunction in the clutch. Stop the vehicle safely. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as-
sistance.

fa] Clutch: malfunction! Adapt driving style. Please contact Service

There is an ongoing malfunction in the clutch.
The engine torque that can betransferred is reduced. You may continue driving. Avoid using the clutch in any waythat will place a heavy load on
it. For example, do not let the clutch rub when starting on hills or when maneuvering the vehi-
cle. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

& Clutch: malfunction! You can continue driv-

ing

8W0012721BG

Instrument cluster

There is a malfunction in the clutch. The engine torque that can be transferred is reduced. You may continue driving. Avoid using the clutch in the future in any way that will place a heavy load on it. For example, do notlet the clutch rub when starting on hills or when maneuvering the vehicle. The indicator light turns off once the clutch is fully operable again.
If the | indicator light turns on, the hood lock is not latched correctly.
Stop immediately and close the hood => page 310.
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)
If the B indicator light blinks while driving, the ESC or ASR (Anti-Slip Regulation) is actively regulating.
If the B indicator light turns on, the system has switched the ESC off. In this case, you can switch the ignition off and then on to switch the ESC on again. The indicator light turns off when the system is fully functional.
If the B indicator light turns on, ESC was switched off using the [2] button > page 139.
Stabilization control (ESC/ABS): malfunction! See owner's manual
If the B indicator lamp and the ES / ass indicator lamp turn on and this message appears, the ABS or electronic differential lock is malfunctioning. This also causes the ESC to malfunction.
The brakes still function with their normal power,
but ABS is not active.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
@ Tips
For additional information on ESC and ABS, see > page 138.

B Drive system: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle
There is a malfunction in the drive system. The brake booster and the power steering may stop working. Stop the vehicle immediately or as soon as possible and do not continue driving. Have the problem corrected by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
B Drive system: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the drive system. Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction corrected.
ngine speedlimitation
If the Bi indicator light turns on, the engine will be automatically limited to the RPM displayed in the instrumentcluster. This protects the engine from overheating.
The engine speed limitation deactivates once the engine is no longer in the critical temperature range and you havereleased the accelerator pedal once.
If the engine speed limitation was activated by an engine control malfunction, the Bg indicator light also turns on. Make sure the engine speed does not go above the speed displayed, for example when downshifting. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
f Tank system
ly Please refuel
If the indicator light turns on for the first time and the message appears, there are about 2.1 gallons (8 liters) of fuel left in the tank.
ly Please refuel immediately
If the indicator light turns on and this message appears, the fuel tank is almost empty. Refuel the vehicle immediately.

Instrument cluster

iy Tank system: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the fuel tank system. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
@) Tips
For more information on fueling, see => page 306.
® Washer fluid level
If the gE indicator light turns on, the washer fluid is almost out. Fill the washer fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlight washer system* when the ignition is switched off => page 320.
©! Windshield wipers
If the > indicator light turns on, then there is a windshield wiper malfunction. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
<3 Driver's door
3} Driver's door: malfunction! Shift to P before leaving vehicle. See owner's manual
There is a malfunction in the driver's door. Select the "P" selector lever position (automatic transmission) to secure the vehicle.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Bulb failure indicator
If the Ea indicator light turns on, a bulb has failed. The message indicates the location of the bulb. Replace the bulb immediately.
Vehicle lights: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the headlights or the light switch. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or

authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Z\ WARNING
-- Light bulbs are under pressure and can explode when bulbs are replaced, which increases the risk ofinjury.
-- With HID headlights (xenon headlights), the high-voltage component mustbe handled
correctly. Otherwise, thereis a risk of fatal injury.
2© Dynamic headlight range control
By Headlight range control: malfunction! See owner's manual
There is a malfunction in the headlight range control system, which may cause glare for other drivers.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
ZO Audi adaptivelight
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptivelight
By Audi adaptive light: malfunction! See owner's manual
Adaptive light is not working. The headlightsstill function.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Coma Aceals
aS Automatic headlights: malfunction! See owner's manual
a Automatic wipers: malfunction! See owner's manual
The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning.
The low beams remain switched on at all times for safety reasons when the light switch is in the AUTOposition. However, you can continue to turn the lights on and off using the light switch. >

8W0012721BG

Instrument cluster
You can still control all functions that are independentof the rain sensor through the windshield wiper lever.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
{ Suspension control
Applies to: vehicles with suspension control
8 Suspension: malfunction! You may continue driving
There is a malfunction. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.

ere a ser cy
If the a or By indicator light blinks, a turn signal is turned on. If both indicator lights are blinking, the emergencyflashers are on.
If an indicator light blinks twice as fast as usual,
a turn signal bulb has failed. Carefully drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

bee NatMeleelame tale)
Applies to: vehicles with all wheel drive/sportdifferential
3 All-wheel drive: malfunction! You may continue driving. Please contact Service
iT-3| Sport differential: malfunction! Please contact Service
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
EH] All-wheel drive overheating. Please adapt driving style. See owner's manual
3} Sportdifferential: temperature too high. Please adaptdriving style
The transmission temperature has increased significantly due to the sporty driving manner. Drive in a less sporty manner until the temperature returns to the normal range and the indicator light switches of.
ZXWARNING
Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility if the all wheel drive/ sportdifferential is faulty or malfunctioning. The repair must be performed bytrained personnel using the correct oil in order to ensure safety.

Head-up display Description
Applies to: vehicles with head-up display
2o0asg3%Se
Fig. 16 Instrumentpanel: knob for the head-up display
The head-up display projects certain warnings or selected information from the assist systems* or navigation system* on the windshield. The display appearswithin the driver's field of vision. Switching on and off > To switch the head-up display on, press the 67
knob. > To switch the head-up displayoff, press the S7
knob.
Adjusting the height The height of the display can be adjusted to the individual driver. > Make sure you are seated correctly > page 248. > Turn the knob S? to adjust the display.
Settings in the Infotainment system > Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] but-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Head-up display.
Display content In the Infotainment system, you can specify which information should be displayed: For example, this can include navigation information", adaptive cruise control* or camera-based traffic sign recognition*. The display of certain information and some of the red indicator lights cannot be hidden in the Infotainment system.

Head-up display
Brightness
You can adjust the display brightness in the Infotainment system. The display brightness decreases automatically as the amount oflight decreases. The background brightness is adjusted with the instrumentillumination > page 51.
Picture rotation
You can rotate the picture in the Infotainment system clockwise or counterclockwise.
CG) Note
To prevent scratches on the glass covering the head-up display, do not place any objects in the projection opening.
@) Tips
-- Sunglasseswith polarization filters and unfavorable lighting conditions can impair visibility of the display.
-- An optimum display depends on the seat position and the height adjustment of the head-up display.
--A special windshield is needed for the headup display function.
-- For information on cleaning, see > table In-
terior cleaning on page 344.

8W0012721BG

Opening and closing
Opening and closing Central locking
You can lock and unlock the vehicle centrally. You have the following options:
-- Vehicle key > page 31 -- Sensorsin the door handles* > page 31 -- Lock cylinder on the driver's door > page 33 -- Interior central locking switch > page 32
Vehicle key
The term "vehicle key" refers to the remote control key or convenience key*. The convenience key* is a remote control key with special functions > page 31 and > page 78.
Turn signals
The turn signals flash twice when you unlock the vehicle and flash once when you lock the vehicle. If they do notflash, then one of the doors, the luggage compartment lid or the hood is not closed completely.
Automatic locking (Auto Lock)
The Auto Lock function locks all doors and the luggage compartment lid once the speed has exceeded approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
The vehicle can be unlocked if the opening function in the central locking system switch is used or one of the door handlesis pulled.
In the event of a crash with airbag deployment, the doors will also automatically unlock to allow access to the vehicle.
Selective door unlocking
The doors and luggage compartmentlid will lock when theyclose. You can set in the Infotainment system whether only the driver's door or the entire vehicle should be unlocked when unlocking > page 33.
Unintentionally locking yourself out
Only lock your vehicle when all of the doors and the luggage compartment lid are closed and the

vehicle key is not in the vehicle. This reduces the risk of locking yourself out accidentally.
The following features help to reduce the risk of locking your vehicle key in the vehicle:
-- If the driver's door is open, the vehicle cannot
be locked by pressing the @ button on the vehicle key or by touching the locking sensor* ona door. -- Applies to: sedan: If the convenience key* that was used last is detected inside the luggage compartment, the luggage compartment lid will automatically unlock and open again after closing it. -- If the last convenience key* that was used is de-
tected inside the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be
locked from the outside for a brief time.
ZA WARNING
-- If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition off and take the vehicle key with you. This applies particularly when children remain in the vehicle. Otherwise, children could start the engine or operateelectrical equipment (such as power windows), which increases the risk of an accident.
--No one, especially children, should stay in the vehicle when it is locked from the out-
side, because the windowscan no longer be
opened from the inside > page 34. Locked doors makeit moredifficult for emergency
workersto enter the vehicle, which puts lives at risk.
@) Note
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
-- Applies to: sedan: If the convenience key that was last used is detected inside the passenger compartment, then will not be possible to lock the vehicle from the outside. The turn signals will flash several times to indicate this. If you do not open the vehicle within a short time to remove the vehicle key, then the vehicle will lock automatically. This prevents the vehicle from being left unlocked for long periods of time. The key will then be locked inside the vehicle.

238

Opening and closing

-- Applies to: allroad: If the convenience key that was last used is detected inside the ve-
hicle, then it will not be possible to lock the
vehicle from the outside. The turn signals will flash several times to indicate this. If you do not open the vehicle within a short time to removethe vehicle key, then the vehicle will lock automatically. This prevents the vehicle from being left unlocked for long periods of time. The key will then be locked inside the vehicle.
@) Tips
-- Do notleave valuables unattended in the vehicle. A locked vehicle is not a safe!
--The LED in the driver's door rail blinks when you lock the vehicle. If the LED lights up for approximately 30 seconds after locking, there is a malfunction in the central locking system. Have the problem corrected by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Fig. 17 Your vehicle key set
@ Vehicle key
The vehicle key is a remote control key or convenience key*. The convenience key* is a remote control key with special functions > page 31 and = page 78. You can unlock or lock your vehicle with the vehicle key. A mechanical key is integrated in the vehicle key > page 30.
@ Keytag with vehicle code
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
Open the key tag and scratch to reveal the vehicle code. You can unlock the Audi connect vehicle

BFV-0278

control services* for your vehicle with this vehicle code. For additional information, see = page 190. If a key fob is lost, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Vehicle key replacement
If a key is lost, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have this vehicle key deactivated. It is important to bring all keys with you. If a key is lost, you should report it to your insurance company.
Number of keys
You can check the number of keys programmed to your vehicle in the Infotainment system. To do
this, select the [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Service & checks > Vehicle in-
formation. This way, you can makesure that you have all the keys when purchasing a used vehicle.
Electronic immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized use of the vehicle.
In some cases, it may notbe possible to start the vehicle if there is a vehicle key from a different vehicle manufacturer on the key chain.
Data in the vehicle key
When driving, service and maintenance-relevant
data is continuously stored in your vehicle key. Your Audi service advisor can read out this data and tell you about the work your vehicle needs. This applies also to vehicles with a convenience key**.
Personal conveniencesettings
If two people use one vehicle, it is recommended that each person alwaysuses their own vehicle key. When the ignition is turned off or when the vehicle is locked, personal convenience settings for the following systems are stored and assigned to the vehicle key:
-- Climate control system -- Steering wheel heating* -- Central locking system -- Interior lighting*

8W0012721BG

Opening and closing
-- Exterior lighting -- Rain sensor -- Memory function* -- Parking aid* -- Adaptive cruise control* -- Active lane assist* -- Side assist* -- Traffic jam assist* -- Distance warning* -- Audi pre sense* -- Speed warning* The stored settings are automatically recalled when you unlock the vehicle, open the doors or turn on the ignition.
® Note Protect the key against high temperatures and direct sunlight.
G) Tips
-- The vehicle key function can be temporarily disrupted by interference from transmitters near the vehicle working in the same frequency range (such as a mobile device or radio equipment). Always check if your vehicle is locked.
-- For an explanation on conformity with the FCC regulations in the United States and the Industry Canada regulations, see => page 370.
Removing the mechanical key
Fig. 18 Vehicle key: removing the mechanical key
> Press the release buttons (@ © fig. 18 and remove the mechanical key from the vehicle key.
Using the mechanical key, you can:
30

BFV-0279

-- Lock/unlock the glove compartment. -- Locking and unlocking the lockable* rear bench
seat > page 66. -- Manually lock or unlock the vehicle > page 33. -- Mechanically lock the doors > page 33. -- Switch the child safety locks on in the rear
doors > page 40,fig. 35. LED and batteryin the vehicle key
Fig. 19 Vehicle key: removing the battery holder
Fig. 20 Vehicle key(rear side): removing the battery holder
LED in the vehicle key The LED (@) indicates the vehicle key function.
> If you press a button briefly, the LED blinks once.
> If you press and hold a button (convenience opening/closing), the LED blinks several times.
> If the LED does notblink, the vehicle key battery is drained. Replace the battery in the vehicle key.
Replacing the vehicle key battery
> Press the release buttons () > fig. 19 and remove the mechanical key.
> Press the release buttons (3) > fig. 20 while
pulling the battery holder out of the vehicle key in the direction of the arrow.

BFV-0277

BFV-0280

Opening and closing

> Insert the new battery with the "+" facing down.
> Slide the battery holder carefully into the vehicle key.
> Insert the mechanical key.
@) For thesake of the environment
Discharged batteries must be disposed of using methods that will not harm the environment. Do not dispose of them in household trash.
@ Tips Replacement batteries for the vehicle key must meet the same specifications as the original battery.
Unlocking and locking by remote control
Fig. 21 Vehicle key: button programming
> To unlock the vehicle, press the ( button > fig. 21.
> To lock the vehicle, press the & button one
time > /\.
> To unlock the luggage compartment lid, press the < button briefly.
> To open the luggage compartment lid, press and hold the < button for at least one second.
> To trigger the alarm, press the red [PANIC] button. The vehicle horn and emergencyflashers will activate.
> To switch off the alarm, press the red [PANIC button again.
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open anyof the doors, the hood, or the luggage compart-
ment lid within 45 seconds, the vehicle will auto-
matically lock again. This feature prevents the ve-

BFV-0240

hicle from being accidentally left unlocked for a long period of time. The settings in the Infotainment system determine if the entire vehicle or only the driver's door is unlocked when unlocking the vehicle => page 33.
ZAWARNING
No one, especially children, should stay in the vehicle when it is locked from the outside, because the windowscan no longer be opened from the inside > page 34. Locked doors make it more difficult for emergency workers
to enter the vehicle, which putslives atrisk.
@ Tips
-- Only use the vehicle key when you can see the vehicle.
-- Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission: The vehicle can only be locked when the selector lever is in "P".
-- Do not use the remote control when you are inside the vehicle. Otherwise, you could unintentionally lock the vehicle. If you then try to open door,the anti-theft alarm will trigger. If this happens, press the unlock
button &.
-- Only use the panic function in an emergency.
Unlocking and locking with the oT aN
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
The doors and luggage compartment lid can be unlocked andlocked without using the vehicle key.
Fig. 22 Door handle: locking the vehicle

Baw-0148

8W0012721BG

Opening and closing

Unlocking the vehicle
> Grip the door handle. The door unlocks automatically.
> Pull on the door handle to open the door.
Locking the vehicle
> Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission: Select the "P" position, otherwise the vehicle will not lock.
> To lock the vehicle, close the door and touch
the sensor in the door handle once > fig. 22. Do not hold the door handle while doing this.
You can unlock/lock the vehicle at every door. The vehicle key cannot be more than approximately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the door handle. The function should not be impaired if the vehicle key is in your jacket pocket or in your briefcase, for example.
If you hold the door handle while locking, this can impair the locking function.
The door cannot be opened for a brief period directly after locking it. This way you have the opportunity to check if the doors locked correctly.
The settings in the Infotainment system determine if the entire vehicle or only one of the doors is unlocked when unlocking the vehicle => page 33.
ZA WARNING
Read and following all WARNINGS => A\ in Description on page 28.
@) Tips
If your vehicle is left standing for a long period of time, note the following: -- The energy management system gradually
turns off unnecessary convenience functions to prevent the vehicle battery from draining and to maintain the vehicle's ability to start for as long as possible. You then may no longer be able to unlock your vehicle with the sensors.

G) Tips Unlocking with the convenience key (keyless access) can be deactivated in the Infotainment system > page 33.
Central locking switch
=aaS2%s

Fig. 23 Driver's door: central locking switch

> To lock the vehicle, press the @ button > /\.
> To unlock the vehicle, press the @ button.

When locking the vehicle with the central locking switch, the following applies:

-- The doors and the luggage compartment lid cannotbe opened from the outside for security reasons, such as to prevent unauthorized opening while stopped at a light.
--The LED in the central locking switch turns on when all doorsare closed and locked.
-- You can open the doorsindividually from the inside by pulling the door handle.
-- In the event of a crash with airbag deployment, the doors unlock automatically to allow access to the vehicle.

ZA WARNING

-- The central locking switch also works when

the ignition is switched off and automatical-

ly locks the entire vehicle when the & button

is pressed.

--The central locking switch is inoperative

when the vehicle is locked from the outside.

-- Locked doors makeit more difficult for

emergency workers to enter the vehicle,

which putslives at risk. Do not leave anyone

behind in the vehicle, especially children.

Opening and closing

-- Read and following all WARNINGS > A in Description on page 28.
@Tips
Your vehicle locks automatically when it reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) (Auto Lock) = page 28. You can unlock the vehicle again using the @ button in the central locking switch.
Setting the central locking system
You can adjust the central locking system to your preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle
equipment.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings > Central locking.
Door unlocking - you can decide if All doors or only the Driver's door should unlock. The luggage compartmentlid also unlocks when All is selected. If you select Driver's door* in a vehicle with a conveniencekey, only the driver's door will unlock when you grasp the driver's door handle. If you grasp another door handle, the entire vehicle will be unlocked.
If you select Driver's door, all the doors and luggage compartment lid will unlock if you press the f button on the vehicle key twice.
Long press to open windows- you can selectif all windowsand the roof should open using the vehicle key > page 41, Convenience opening and closing. If you press and hold the & button
on the vehicle key, all of the windowsand the roofwill close.
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Open with convenience key - you can deactivate the function for unlocking via the sensor. The function for locking via the sensor will still be enabled > page 31.
Disablerear lid handle - if you select On, the luggage compartment lid handleis locked. In this case, the luggage compartment lid can be

opened with the <3 button on the vehicle key or with the unlock button in the driver's door. In vehicles with a convenience key*, you can still open the luggage compartmentlid using the handle if an authorized convenience key is near the proximity sensor*.
Fold mirrors- if you select On, the exterior rearview mirrorswill fold in automatically when you
press the & button on the vehicle key or touch the sensor*in the handle.
Tone whenlocking")- if you select On, a tone will
sound when you lock the vehicle.
Mechanically unlocking and locking the Cele
If the central locking fails, you must unlock or lock the doors separately.

SSS saw-0149

BFV-0242

Fig. 25 Door: mechanically locking

Unlocking and locking the driver's door with the mechanical key

> Remove the mechanical key > page 30.

> To unlock the driver's door, turn the key to the

unlock position @) > fig. 24.

8W0012721BG

)_ This function is not available in all countries.
33

Opening and closing

> To lock the driver's door, select the "P" position
(automatic transmission) and turn the key once
to the closing position ®=> /\.
Locking the front passenger's door or rear doors with the mechanical key
The mechanical lock is located on the edge of the front passenger's door and the rear doors. It is only visible when the door is open.
> Removethe mechanical key > page 30. >» Removethe cap from the opening fig. 25. > Insert the keyin the inside slot and turnit all
the wayto the right (right door) or left (left door).
Z\ WARNING
Read and following all WARNINGS > A\ in Description on page 28.
ae a]
Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft alarm system
If the anti-theft alarm system detects a vehicle break-in, audio and visual warning signals are triggered. The anti-theft alarm system is switched on or off when locking or unlocking your vehicle. If the alarm is triggered, it will shut off automatically after a certain amount of time.
Switching the alarm off manually
> To switch the alarm off, press the @ button on the vehicle key or switch the ignition on.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the antitheft alarm system mayhave the following fea-
tures:
Break-in security feature
The alarm will sound if there is a break-in at the doors, hood, and/or luggage compartmentlid.
Interior/towing protection monitor*
The alarm will be triggered if there are movements detected in the vehicle interior (for example, by animals) or if there is a change in the vehicle angle (for example, when the vehicle is being towed).

You can prevent the alarm from being triggered by deactivating the interior/towing protection monitor.
Deactivating the interior/towing protection monitor
There are the following options for deactivating the interior/towing protection monitor:
> Press the @ button on the vehicle key a second time within two seconds. Or
> Appliesto: vehicles with conveniencekey: Touch the sensor on the door handle a second time within two seconds. Or
> Turn the mechanical key in the door lock to the close position a second time within 2 seconds.
If you lock the vehicle, then the interior/towing protection monitor will stay off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked.
Z\ WARNING
No one, especially children, should stay in the
vehicle when it is locked from the outside, be-
cause the windowscan no longer be opened from the inside. Locked doors makeit more difficult for emergency workersto enter the
vehicle, which putslives at risk.
G) Tips
The interior/towing protection monitoring* only functions correctly when the windows and the roof* are closed.

Luggage compartment lid
Opening and closing the luggage compartment lid
=aeSS2zot
Fig. 26 Driver's door: opening the luggage compartment
lid
Opening the luggage compartmentlid > When the ignition is switched off, press and
hold the < button on the vehicle key for at least one second. Or > Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission: Engage the "P" selector lever position and pull the <* button in the driver's door. Or > Applies to: vehicles with manual transmission: Set the parking brake and pull the <* button in the driver's door. Or > Applies to: vehicles without convenience key: Unlock the vehicle using the @/ <¥ button on the vehicle key and press the handle in the luggage compartment lid. Or > Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press the handle in the luggage compartment lid. The vehicle key cannot be more than approximately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage
compartment.
Closing the luggage compartmentlid > Applies to: vehicles without automatic luggage
compartment lid: Use the inside grip to pull the luggage compartment lid down and allowit to drop gently to close it > A\. Or > Applies to: vehicles with automatic luggage compartment lid: Note > page 36.

Opening and closing
ZA WARNING
-- After closing the luggage compartment lid,
makesure that it is latched. Otherwise, the
luggage compartment lid could open suddenly when driving, which increases the risk of an accident. -- Never drive with the luggage compartment lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases can enter the vehicle interior and create the risk of asphyxiation. -- Never leave your vehicle unattended when the luggage compartmentlid is open. A child could climb into the vehicle through the luggage compartment. If the luggage
compartment lid was then closed, the child would be trapped in the vehicle and unable
to escape. To reduce the risk of injury, do not allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Always keep the luggage compartment lid and the doors closed when the vehicleis not in use. -- Always makesure no one is in the luggage compartment lid's range of motion when it is closing, especially near the hinges. Fingers or hands could be pinched.
@) Tips
-- When the vehicleis locked, the luggage compartment lid can be unlocked separately by pressing the <<s button on the vehicle key. The luggage compartmentlid locks automatically when it is closed again.
--The settings in the Infotainment system determine if the luggage compartment lid can be opened using the handle > page 33.
-- Incase of an emergencyor a faulty handle, the luggage compartmentlid can be opened manually from the inside > page 38.

8W0012721BG

Opening and closing

Automatic luggage compartment lid
Applies to: vehicles with automatic luggage compartmentlid
The luggage compartment lid can be opened and closed electrically.
Fig. 27 Driver's door: opening the luggage compartment lid
Fig. 28 Luggage compartmentlid: @ closing button*, lock button (vehicles with convenience key*)
Opening the luggage compartmentlid > Press and hold the < button on the vehicle key
for at least one second. Or > Press the handle in the luggage compartment
lid. The vehicle key cannot be more than approximately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the lug-
gage compartment. Or
> Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission: Engage the "P" selector lever position and pull the <* button in the driver's door.
> Applies to: vehicles with manual transmission: Set the parking brake and pull the <* button in the driver's door.
Closing the luggage compartmentlid > When the ignition is switched on, pull the <2
switch in the driver's door until the luggage compartment lid is closed > A\. Or

> Press the < button in the luggage compartmentlid > fig. 28. The luggage compartment lid will automatically lower and close > A\. Or
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press the <3 button on the vehicle key until the luggage compartment lid closes > /\. Make sure there is enough distance between you and the luggage compartment lid. There should be a maximum 9 feet (3 m)of distance. Or
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press the & button in the luggage compartmentlid => fig. 28. The vehicle key must not be more than approximately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage compartment and it must not be inside the vehicle. The luggage compartment lid will automatically lower and close. The vehi-
cle locks > A\. Or
> Lightly pull the luggage compartment lid using the inner grip. The luggage compartment lid will automatically lower and close > A\. Or
> Press the handle in the luggage compartment lid. The luggage compartment lid will automat-
ically lower and close > A\.
Storing the luggage compartmentlid opening position
> Bring the luggage compartmentlid into the desired open position. The position must be at a certain height or higher to store.
> Press and hold the < button in the luggage compartment lid for at least four seconds to store the new open position. A visual and audio signal will follow.
> To set a higher open position, wait at least five seconds and then carefully press the luggage compartment lid upward.
> Press and hold the <3 button again for at least four seconds to store the desired opening position.
The opening or closing process will stop immediatelyif:
-- You pull or release the < switch in the driver's
door, or
-- Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: You press or release the <3 button on the vehicle key, or

Opening and closing

-- Appliesto: vehicles with convenience key: Press the < button or the f button in the luggage
compartment lid, or
-- You push the handle in the luggage compart-
mentlid, or
-- If something blocks the luggage compartment lid or makes it difficult for the lid to move.
If you press the handle or one of the < or & but-
tons (vehicles with convenience key*) now, the
luggage compartmentlid will either open or close, depending on its angle.
Z\ WARNING
-- After closing the luggage compartment lid,
makesure that it is latched. Otherwise, the
luggage compartmentlid could open suddenly when driving, which increases the risk of an accident. -- Pay careful attention when closing the luggage compartmentlid. Otherwise, you could cause serious injury to yourself or others despite the pinch protection. --To reducethe risk of injuries by pinching, always makesure that no one is in the operating area of the luggage compartment lid, including the hinge areas and the upper and lower edge of the luggage compartment lid. -- Never drive with the luggage compartment lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases can enter the vehicle interior and create the risk of asphyxiation. -- If there is a luggage rack (such as a bicycle rack) on the luggage compartment lid, the luggage compartmentlid may not open completely under certain circumstances or it could closebyitself if open due to the extra weight. Therefore, the open luggage compartment lid must be given additional support or the cargo mustfirst be removed from the luggage rack.
G) Tips
-- The settings in the Infotainment system determine if the luggage compartment lid can be opened using the handle > page 33.
-- There are audible signals when closing the luggage compartment lid with the vehicle

key (vehicles with convenience key*) or with the <¥ button in the driver's door. -- When the vehicleis locked, the luggage compartment lid can be unlocked separately by pressing the <<s button on the vehicle key. The luggage compartmentlid locks automatically when it is closed again. -- Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: The luggage compartmentlid can be closed with the vehicle key from a distance up to approximately 9 ft (3 m). -- The luggage compartmentlid can be operated manually if the vehicle batteryis low. It is necessary to use more force when doing this. Movethe lid slowly to reduce the amount of force needed. -- When the trailer socket is being used (for example,for a bicycle rack), the luggage compartment lid can be opened and closed using the handle or the foot motion activation (vehicles with convenience key*). -- Incase of an emergencyor a faulty handle, the luggage compartmentlid can be opened manually from the inside > page 38.
Opening and closing the luggage compartment lid with foot motion (kicking movement)
Applies to: vehicles with sensor-controlled luggage compartment lid

Fig. 29 Rear of the vehicle: foot movement

Applies to: sedan

You can open the luggage compartment lid with

foot motion activation.

8W0012721BG
B4G-0608

Opening and closing

Applies to: allroad
You can open and close the luggage compart-
mentlid with foot motion activation).
Requirements: you mustbe carrying your convenience key* with you. You must be standing at the center behind the luggage compartment lid. The ignition must be switched off. Make sure you havefirm footing.
-- Moveyour foot back and forth under the bumper one time > fig. 29. Do not touch the bumper. The luggage compartmentlid will open or close once the system detects the movement.
The luggage compartment lid will only open or close if you perform the movementas described. This prevents the luggage compartmentlid from opening or closing due to similar movements, such as when you walk between the rear of the vehicle and your garage door.
The closing of the luggage compartment lid is indicated by a warning signal and can be canceled by making the described movementagain.
The foot movement does not lock the vehicle.
General information
In some situations, the function may be limited
or temporarily unavailable. This may happen if:
-- The luggage compartmentlid was closed or opened immediately before
-- You park close to a hedge and the branches moveback and forth under the vehicle for a long period of time
-- You clean your vehicle, for example with a pressure washer or in a car wash
-- There is heavy rain --The bumper is verydirty, for example after driv-
ing on salt-covered roads -- Thereis interference to the vehicle key's radio
signal, such as from mobile devices or remote controls

AN WARNING
-- Pay careful attention when closing the luggage compartmentlid. Otherwise, you could cause serious injury to yourself or others despite the pinch protection.
--To reducethe risk of injuries by pinching, always makesure that no one is in the operating area of the luggage compartment lid, including the hinge areas and the upper and lower edge of the luggage compartment lid.
-- Never drive with the luggage compartment lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases can enter the vehicle interior and create the risk of asphyxiation.
-- Applies to: allroad: if there is a luggage rack (such as a bicycle rack) on the luggage compartmentlid, the luggage compartment lid may not open completely under certain circumstances, or it could close byitself if open due to the extra weight. Therefore, the open luggage compartmentlid must be given additional support or the cargo mustfirst be removed from the luggage rack.
MI ae) ot La)
Applies to: vehicles with trunk escape latch
In case of an emergency, the rear lid can be openedfrom the inside using the trunk escape latch.

B8W-0158

Fig. 30 Luggage compartment: Trunk escapelatch

> Push the latch in the direction of the arrow un-

til the lock releases.

D_ The closing function applies to vehicles that also have automatic luggage compartment lid operation.
38

The trunk escape latch inside the rear lid is made of fluorescent material to glow in the dark.
The trunk escapelatch is to be used only in an
emergency.
The emergencyrelease lever should never be used as a handlefor closing the luggage compartment lid.
Mechanically unlocking the luggage compartment lid
Applies to: sedan

Opening and closing
> Press the lever with the mechanical key in the direction of the arrow to release the luggage compartment lid.
Fixed rear seat backrest > Carefully pull the left side of the rear bench
seat out of its mount until you can reach the release cable > fig. 32. >» Removethe Velcro® tape @). > Pull on the loop @ until the luggage compartmentlid releases. > Tape the release cable back in place and press the bench seat back intoits retainer.
After opening the luggage compartment lid using the emergencyreleasein vehicles with a fixed rear seat backrest, make sure the bracket under the rear bench seat locks securelyinto the mounting eyelet again.

Fig. 31 Inner luggage compartmentlid: access to the emergency release

Mechanically unlocking the luggage compartment lid
Applies to: allroad

8W0012721BG RAZ-0263

Fig. 32 Rear bench seat: emergency release cable
The rear lid can be opened from the luggage compartmentor from the rear bench seat using the emergencyrelease.
Folding rear seat backrest
> Remove the mechanical key > page 30. > Using the emergencykey,pry off the cover in
the luggage compartment lid trim panel > fig. 31.

Fig. 33 Inner luggage compartmentlid: access to the
emergency release
> Remove the mechanical key > page 30. > Pry out the cover using the mechanical key
> fig. 33. > Press the lever with the mechanical key in the
direction of the arrow to release the luggage
compartmentlid.

Opening and closing
Child safety lock
The child safety lock prevents the rear doors from being openedfrom the inside and the rear powerwindowsfrom being operated.
Fig. 35
-Applies to: vehicles with manual child safety locks:-Rear door: manual child safety lock
Vehicles with button #
Applies to: vehicles with power child safety locks
> To activate and deactivate the child safety lock (door handle and power windowswitch) for the a rear door, press the left or right # button in the driver's door (@) that corresponds to that rear door > fig. 34. The indicator light in the button turns on/blinks.
> Make sure the child safety lock is working by checking the function on the rear power window switch and door handle.
Vehicles with button
Applies to: vehicles with manual child safety lock
> To activate or deactivate the child safety lock for the power window switch in the rear doors, press the button in the driver's door (2) > fig. 34. The indicator light in the button turns on/blinks.

B8W-0085

B8U-0321

> To activate or deactivate the manual child safety lock for the rear door handle, open the respective rear door and turn the key switch with the mechanical keyin the direction of the arrow or opposite the direction of the arrow > fig. 35. This will disable the function of the rear door handle.
> Makesure the child safety lock is working by checking the function on the rear power window switch and door handle.
It is not possible to operate the rear climate control system* when the child safety lock is switched on. The SET REAR function allows you to apply all settings to the rear using the climate control system controls in the cockpit > page 73.
Message in the instrumentcluster display
Childproof catch: malfunction! Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the child safety lock.
Press the #/ buttonagain.
If the message stays on, drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
ZA WARNING
-- If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition off and take the vehicle key with you. This applies particularly when children remain in the vehicle. Otherwise children could start the engine or operateelectrical equipment
(such as power windows), which increases
the risk of an accident. --A malfunction in the child safety lock could
allow the rear doors to be opened from the inside, which increases the risk of an accident.

Power windows
The driver can control all power windows.

B8U-0328

Opening and closing
dowscan no longer be opened in an emergency.
@Tips
You can still open and close the windowsfor approximately 10 minutes after turning the ignition off. The power windowsdo not switch off until the driver's door or front passenger's door has been opened.

Fig. 36 Driver's door: power windowcontrols
All power window switches are equipped with a two-stage function:
Opening and closing the windows
> To open or close the window completely, press the switch down or pull the switch up briefly to the second level. The operation will stop if the switch is pressed or pulled again.
> To select a position in between opened and closed, press or pull the switch to the first level until the desired windowposition is reached.
Power window switches
@ Left front door @ Rightfront door @® Left rear door @ Right rear door
AN WARNING
-- If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition off and take the vehicle key with you. This applies particularly when children remain in the vehicle. Otherwise children could start the engine or operateelectrical equipment (such as power windows), which increases the risk of an accident. The power windows continue to function until the driver's door or front passenger's door has been opened.
-- Pay careful attention when closing the windows. Pinching could causeserious injuries.
-- When locking the vehicle from outside, the vehicle must be unoccupied since the win-

Convenience opening and closing
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
All of the windowsand the roof* can be opened/ closed at the same time.
Convenience opening feature
> Press and hold the &@ button on the vehicle key until all of the windowsreach the desired position and the roof*is tilted open.
Convenienceclosing feature
> Press the @ button on the vehicle keyuntil all
windowsand the roof* are closed oA, or > Touch the sensor* on the door handle until all
of the windowsand the roof* are closed. Do not place your hand in the door handle when doing this.
When all of the windowsand the roof* are
closed, the turn signals will flash once.
Setting convenience opening in the Infotainment system
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings > Central locking > Long press to open windows.
ZA\WARNING
-- Never close the windowsor the roof* care-
lessly or in an uncontrolled manner, because
this increases the risk of injury. -- For security reasons, the windowsand the
roof* can only be opened and closed with the vehicle key at a maximum distance of approximately 6.5 feet (2 m) away from the vehicle. Always pay attention when using the f&@ button to close the windows and the >

8W0012721BG

Opening and closing
roof* so that no one is pinched. The closing process will stop immediately when the & button is released.
@ Tips
Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass roof: The power sunshade also opens or closes when opening or closing the roof.
Correcting power window malfunctions You can reactivate the one-touch up/downfunction if it malfunctions. > Pull the power windowswitch up until the win-
dow is completely raised. > Release the switch and pull it up again for at
least one second.
Sliding/tilting sunroof
Operation
Applies to: vehicles with sliding/tilting sunroof
Fig. 37 Section of front headliner: sliding/tilting sunroof button
@ Tilting and closing the roof
> To tilt the sunroof completely open, press the <> button up briefly to the second level.
> To close the sunroof completely, pull the <> button down briefly to the second level > A\.
> To set a partially open position, press or pull the <> button to the first level until the roof reaches the desired position. Opening and closing the roof
> To open the sunroof completely, push the <> button back briefly to the second level.

> To close the sunroof completely, push the <> button forward briefly to the second level
afr.
> To select a partially open position, push the <> button forward or back to the first level until the desired position is reached.
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually in any position. The sunshade opens automatically when the roofis opened.
ZA WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury, always pay attention when closing the sliding/tilting sunroof. Always switch the ignition off when leaving the vehicle and always take the vehicle key with you.
@) Note
Alwaysclose your sliding/tilting sunroof when leaving your vehicle. Rain can cause damage to the interior equipment of your vehicle, particularly the electronic equipment.
@ Tips
-- For information about convenience opening and closing, see > page 41.
-- You can still operate the sliding/tilting sunroof for about 10 minutes after the ignition is switched off. The switch is deactivated once the driver's or front passenger's door is opened.
-- The sunroofwill only open down to -20 °C (-4 °F).
Sliding/tilting sunroof emergency closing
Applies to: vehicles with sliding/tilting sunroof
If an object is detected when closing, the roof will open again automatically. In this case, you can then close it with the power emergencyclosing function.
> Within five seconds after the sunroof opens automatically, pull the applicable button until the roof is closed.

Panoramic glass roof
Opening and closing the panoramic glass roof and sunshade
Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass roof
The front segment cantilt and slide open.
Fig. 38 Section ofthe front headliner: panoramic glass roof button
@) Tilting and closing the roof > To tilt the sunroof completely open, press the
<> button up briefly to the second level. > To close the sunroof completely, pull the <>
button down briefly to the second level > /A\. > To set a partially open position, press or pull
the <> button to the first level until the roof reaches the desired position.
Opening and closing the roof > To open the sunroof completely, push the <>
button back briefly to the second level. > To close the sunroof completely, push the <>
button forward briefly to the second level
of.
> To select a partially open position, push the <> button forward or back to the first level until the desired position is reached.
© Opening and closing the sunshade > To open the sunshade completely,slide the
switch back briefly to the second Level. > To close the sunshade completely,slide the
switch forwardbriefly to the second level. > To select a partially open position, slide the -
switch to the first level until the sunshade reaches the desired position.

B8W-0111

Opening and closing
ZX WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury, always pay attention when closing the panoramic glass roof. Always switch the ignition off when leaving the vehicle and always take the vehicle key with you.
@) Note
Alwaysclose the panoramic glass roof when leaving your vehicle. Rain can cause damage to the interior equipmentof your vehicle, particularly the electronic equipment.
©Tips
-- For information about convenience opening and closing, see > page 41.
-- You can still operate the panoramic glass roof for about 10 minutes after the ignition is switched off. The switch is deactivated once the driver's or front passenger's door is opened.
-- The panoramic glass roofwill only open at temperatures downto -4°F (-20°).
Pelee Cem alle uamails)
Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass roof
If an object is detected when closing, the roof will open again automatically. In this case, you can then close it with the power emergencyclosing function.
> Within five seconds after the sunroof opens automatically, pull the applicable button until the roofis closed.
Valet parking
Applies to: vehicles with valet parking function
The valet parking function can protect the luggage compartment from unauthorized access.
The [VALET] button for valet parking is in the glove compartment.

8W0012721BG

| B4G-0535

Opening and closing

You can switch the valet parking function on, for example when someone else is parking your vehi-
cle ). The vehicle can be driven, locked, and un-
locked using the vehicle key, but access to the luggage compartmentis blocked.
> Remove the mechanical key > page 30. > Press the [VALET] button in the glove compart-
ment. The LED in the button turns on if the function is switched on. > Lock the glove compartment with the mechanical key. > Applies to: vehicles with lockable pass-through and lockable rear seat backrests: To secure the luggage compartment from the vehicleinterior, lock the pass-through and the rear seat backrests using the mechanical key > page 69 or => page 66. > Give your vehicle key to the service personnel who are parking your vehicle and keep the mechanical key.
The following buttons are deactivated when the valet parking function is switched on:
-- <* button in the driver's door -- < button on the vehicle key -- Handle in the luggage compartmentlid
If the valet parking function is switched on, a message will appear every time the ignition is switched on.
G) Tips
Please note that the luggage compartment can still be accessed from the vehicle interior in vehicles with fixed rear seat backrests or ones that cannot be locked, even when the valet parking function is switched on.

Garage door opener
pyro df da (ela)
Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener
isi==.
Fig. 39 Garage door opener: examplesofusage for differ-
ent systems
With the garage door opener, you can activate systems such as the garage doors, security systems or house lights from inside your vehicle. Three buttons are integrated in the headliner that can be programmed to up to three remote controls.
To be able to operate systems using the garage door opener, the buttons in the headliner must first be programmed.
Z\ WARNING
When operating or programming the garage door opener, make sure that no people or objects are in the area immediately surrounding the equipment. People can beinjured or property can be damaged if struck when closing.
® Tips
-- For security reasons, we recommend that
you clear the programmed buttons before selling the vehicle.
-- For additional information about HomeLink, visit www.homelink.com.
-- For an explanation on conformity with the FCC regulations in the United States and the Industry Canada regulations, see > page 370.

D_ This function is not available in all countries.
44

Opening and closing

Operating
Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener
Requirements: the button in the headliner must be programmed = page 45 and the vehicle must be within range of the system, such as the garage door. > Press the button to open the garage door. The
LED @) ° page 45,fig. 40 blinksor turns on. > Press the button again to open the garage door.
G)Tips
When opening or closing the garage door, do not press and hold the button longer ten seconds or the garage door opener will switch to programming mode.
Programming buttons
Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener
Fig. 40 Headliner: controls
You can program bothfixed code and rolling code systems using this procedure. Programming/reprogramming buttons Requirement: the vehicle must be in range of the system, such as the garage door, that you would like to program. > Switch the ignition on. > Press and hold the button in the headliner that
you would like to program for at least two seconds. Or > Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings > Garage door opener > Program garage door opener > Program button I/Program

button II/Program button III (reprogram). The yellow LED blinks. > Follow the instructions in the Infotainment system.
Synchronizing a button!)
Requirement: the button mustalready be programmed and mustbe synchronized with the system that you wouldlike to program.
> Switch the ignition on. > Press the button in the headliner that you
wouldlike to synchronize. > Follow the instructions in the Infotainment sys-
tem.
Deleting button programming
The programmed buttons cannotbe deleted individually. They must be deleted all at once. Reprogram the buttons if necessary.
> Switch the ignition on. > Select in the Infotainment system: MENU but-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings > Garage door opener > Delete button programming> Yes, delete now.
Displaying the version/status/country code
> Select in the Infotainment system: MENU button > Vehicle > left control button >Vehicle settings > Garage door opener > Version information.

@ Tips

-- The garage door opener may need to be

synchronized with the system motor after

the programming. Follow the manufactur-

er's instructions for doing this.

-- The programming process can take up to 30

seconds. The hand transmitter may need to

be operated again during the process.

-- Makesure the batteries in the hand trans-

mitter are charged before starting the programming process.

--Insome cases, the system mustbe pro-

grammed using an alternative mode. Select

in the Infotainment system: [MENU] >

8W0012721BG

) Only appliesto rolling code systems
45

Opening and closing Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle set-
tings > Garage door opener > Program ga-
rage dooropener > right control button > UR-Mode/D-Mode.
46

Lights and Vision Exterior lighting
Switching the lights on and off
=3iSgoge
Fig. 41 Instrumentpanel: light switch with button
Light switch ©:
Turn the light switch to the corresponding position when the ignition is switched on. 2and the selected position turn on (except position 0). O - The daytime running lights automatically turn on. In vehicles for certain markets, you can switch the automatic daytime running lights on and off in the Infotainment* system. AUTO - The headlights automatically adapt to the surrounding brightness. 300 - Parking lights 2D - Low beam headlights Button When you turn the light switch to the AUTO or low beam headlight position ZO, you can activate the following functions: So - All-weather lights. The headlights automatically adjust so that therewill be less glare, for example when the road surface is wet. Automatic headlight range control system Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic headlight range control system that reduces glare for oncoming traffic if the vehicle load changes. The headlight range adjusts automatically.

Lights and Vision
Audi adaptivelight
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive light
Adaptive light provides better visibility when it is dark by adapting the lights to the road conditions based on speed, such as on expressways, rural roads, at intersections, and in curves. The adaptive light only functions when the light switch is in the AUTO position.
ZX WARNING
Automatic headlights" are only intended to assist the driver. They do notrelieve the driver of responsibility to check the headlights and to turn them on manually based on the current light and visibility conditions. For example, fog cannot be detected bythe light sensors. So always switch on the low beams under these weather conditions and when driv-
ing in the dark ZO.
G@) Tips
-- If the vehicle battery has been discharging for a while, the parking light may switch off automatically. Avoid using the parking lights for several hours.
-- Follow the regulations applicable to the country where you are operating the vehicle when stopping the vehicle and when using the lighting systems.
-- The light sensor for the automatic headlights* is in the rearview mirror mount. Do not place anystickers in this area on the windshield.
--A warning tone will sound if you open the door when the exterior lights are switched on.
-- Only the front headlights turn on when the daytime running lights are switched on*. In vehicles in certain markets,the tail lights will also turn on.
--Incool or damp weather,the inside of the
headlights, turn signals, and tail lights can fog over due to the temperature difference between the inside and outside. Theywill clear shortly after switching them on. This does notaffect the servicelife of the lighting.

8W0012721BG

Lights and Vision
Turn signal and high beam lever The lever operates the turn signals, the high beamsand the headlight flasher.
Fig. 42 Turn signal and high beam lever
Turn signals @ >
The turn signals activate when you movethe lever into a turn signal position when the ignition is switched on.
@- Right turn signal @- Left turn signal
The turn signal will blink three times if you just tap the lever. High beams and headlight flasher EI Movethe lever to the corresponding position: @- High beams on (vehicles with high beam assistant*) > page 48 @- High beams off or headlight flasher The =o indicator light in the instrument cluster will turn on.
Z\ WARNING
High beams can cause glarefor other drivers, which increasesthe risk of an accident. For this reason, only use the high beams or the headlight flasher when theywill not create glare for other drivers.

High beam assistant
Applies to: vehicles with high beam assistant
The high beam assistant automatically turns the high beamsonor off depending on the surrounding conditions.
A camera on the rearview mirror mount can detect light sources from other road users. The high beams switch on or off automatically depending on the position ofvehicles driving ahead and oncoming vehicles, the vehicle speed, and other environmental and traffic conditions.
Activating high beam assistant
Requirement: the light switch must be set to the AUTO position and the high beam assistant must be switched on in the Infotainment system => page 49.
> To activate the high beam assistant, tap the
lever forward @) > page 48,fig. 42. The fain-
dicator light appears in the instrument cluster display and the high beams are switched on/off automatically. If the high beams were completely or partially switched on, the Ea indicator light will turn on.
Switching the high beams on or off manually
If the high beams did not switch on or off automatically as expected, you may switch them on or off manually instead:
> To switch the high beams on manually, tap the lever forward @) > page 48,fig. 42. The =0| indicator light turns on.
> To switch the high beams off manually, pull the lever back @) > page 48,fig. 42. The high beam assistant is deactivated.
Operating the headlight flasher
> To operate the headlight flasher when the high beam assistant is activated and high beams are switched off, pull the lever back @) > page 48, fig. 42. The high beam assistant remains active.
Messagesin the instrumentcluster display
By Audi adaptive light: malfunction! See owner's manual

Headlight assistant: malfunction! See owner's manual
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected. You can still switch the high beams on or off manually.
Headlight assistant: currently unavailable. Camera view restricted due to surroundings. See owner's manual
The camera viewis blocked, for example by a sticker or debris.
The sensor is located between the interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Do not place any stickers in this area on the windshield.
ZA WARNING
High beam assistant is only intended to assist the driver. The driver is still responsible for controlling the headlights and may need to switch them on and off manually depending on light and visibility conditions. It may be necessary to operate them manually in situations such as:
-- In adverse weather conditions such as fog,
heavy rain, blowing snowor spraying water. -- On roads where oncoming traffic may be
partially obscured, such as expressways. -- When thereare road users that do not have
sufficient lighting, such as bicyclers or vehicles with dirty tail lamps. -- In tight curves and on steep hills. --In poorly lit areas. -- With strong reflectors, such as signs. -- If the area of the windshield near the sensor is fogged over,dirty, icy or covered with a sticker.
Adjusting the exterior lighting
The functions are adjusted in the Infotainment
system.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings > Exterior lighting.

Lights and Vision
Automatic headlights You can adjust the following settings in the Automatic headlights menu: Activation time - you can adjust if the headlights switch on Early, Medium or Late according to the sensitivity of the light sensor. Headlight assistant* - you can switch the high beam assistant* on and off. Entry/exit lighting When it is dark, the Entry/exit lighting illuminates the area around the vehicle when unlocking the vehicle and after switching off the ignition and opening the driver's door. The Entry/exit lighting only works when it is dark and the light switch is in the AUTOposition. Daytime running lights USA models: the daytime running lights can be
switched on/off. Select On or Off. Canada models: this function cannot be switched off. They activate automatically each time the ignition is switched on.
Emergencyflashers
Fig. 43 Center console: emergency flasher button
The emergencyflashers makes other drivers awareof your vehicle in dangerous situations. » Press the A button to switch the emergency
flashers on or off. You can indicate a lane change or a turn when the emergencyflashers are switched on by using the turn signal lever. The emergencyflashers stop temporarily.

8W0012721BG

Lights and Vision
The emergencyflashers also work when the ignition is turnedoff.
) Tips
You should switch the emergencyflashers on if: -- you are the lastcar in a traffic jam so that
all other vehicles approaching from behind can see your vehicle -- your vehicle has broken down or you are having an emergency -- your vehicle is being towed or if you are towing another vehicle
Interior lighting
Front interior lighting
Fig. 44 Headliner: frontinterior lighting
Press the corresponding button > fig. 44: 4 - Door contact switch on/off. The interior lighting is controlled automatically. ax - Interior lighting on/off To turn a reading light on or off, touch the surface (@) briefly. To activate the manual dimming function, touch the surface (@) when the lightis switched off and keep touching it until the desired brightness is reached.

B8W-0112

Rear interior lighting
823=
Fig. 45 Headliner: rear reading lights
> To turn a reading light on or off, press the button.
> To activate the manual dimming function*, touch the surface when the light is switched off "Wand keep touching it until the desired brightness is reached.
Interior lighting
Appliesto: vehicles with interior lighting
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings > Interior lighting.
The interior lighting turns on when you switch the headlights on while the ignition is on.
Version 1 To adjust the brightnessof individual zones, select Front brightness*, Door brightness or Footwell brightness. Turn the control knob tothe left or to the right. Press the control knob to confirm the brightness.
Version 2 Select and confirm one of the displayed profiles by pressing the control knob. Individual: you can customize the brightness and color of individual zones. Press the right control button. Press the control knob again to confirm the settings. Audi drive select: the interior and contour lighting color changes depending on the driving mode selected in drive select* > page 126.

@ Tips The setting is automatically stored and assigned to the remotecontrol key that is being used.
Tide uate art ela
The brightnessof the illumination for the instruments, display and head-up display* can be adjusted.

Lights and Vision
Vision
Adjusting exterior mirrors
°zg>eoatO

Fig. 46 Instrumentillumination
> Press the knob to release it. > Turn the knob toward "-" or "+" to reduceor in-
crease the brightness. > Press the knob again to returnit to its original
Position.
@)Tips
Depending on vehicle equipment,the instrumentillumination (needles and gauges) may turn on when the lights are off and the ignition is switched on. The illumination for the gauges reduces automatically and eventually turns off as brightness outside increases. This
function reminds the driver to turn the low beams on at the appropriate time.

Fig. 47 Driver's door: knob for the exterior mirrors

Turn the knob to the desired position: 0 - All adjustment functions are deactivated.

Q/ ®- Adjusts the left/right exterior mirror. Movethe knob in the desired direction.

GA - Heats* the mirror glass depending on the
outside temperature.
SA - Folds the exterior mirrors*. To fold the mirrors out, turn the knob to one ofthe other positions. In the Infotainment system, you can select if the mirrors fold in automatically when you lock the vehicle > page 33.

Front passenger's exterior mirror tilt function*
To help you see the curb when backing into a parking space, the surface of the mirror tilts slightly. For this to happen, the knob mustbe in the position for the front passenger's exterior
mirror.

You can adjust the tilted mirror surface by turning the knob in the desired direction. When you
move out of reverse and into another gear, the
new mirror position is stored and assigned to the key you are using.

The mirror goes back into its original position once you drive forward faster than 9 mph (15 km/h)or turn the ignition off.

ZXWARNING

Curved mirror surfaces (for example convex)

enlarge the field of vision. However, they

8W0012721BG

Lights and Vision
makeobjects in the mirror appear smaller and farther away. You may estimate incorrectly when you use these mirrors to gauge your distance from the vehicles behind you when changing lanes, which increases the risk of an accident.
@) Note
-- Applies to: vehicles with power folding exterior mirrors: If the mirror housing was moved byoutside forces (such as an impact when maneuvering), you must use the power folding function to fold the mirror all the wayout. The mirrors will make a loud noise when theylatch into place. The mirror housing must not be moved back into place by hand because this could impair the function of the mirror mechanism.
-- Applies to: vehicles without power folding exterior mirrors: If the mirror housing was moved byoutside forces (such as an impact when maneuvering), you must moveit back in place by hand.
-- If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash, you mustfold the exterior mirrors in
to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors. Never fold power folding exterior mirrors* by hand. Only fold them in and out using the power controls.
G) Tips
-- If the power adjusting function malfunc-
tions, the glass in both mirrors can be ad-
justed by pressing on the edge ofit by hand. -- The exterior mirror settings are stored with
the memoryfunction* > page 60.
Dimming the mirrors
Your vehicle is equipped with a manual or automatic* dimming rearview mirror.
Manual dimming rearview mirror
> Pull the lever on the bottom of the mirror back.

Automatic dimming rearview mirror*
> The interior and exterior mirrors dim automatically when light shines on them, for example from headlights on a vehicle behind you.
Z\ WARNING
If the glass on an automatic dimming mirror breaks, electrolyte can leak out. This liquid
can irritate the skin, eyes and respiratory system. If there is contact with the fluid, flush immediately with plenty of water. Consult a physician if necessary. -- Repeated or long-term exposureto electro-
lyte fluid can lead toirritation of the airways, especially in people with asthma or other respiratory conditions. Take deep breaths immediately after leaving the vehi-
cle or, if this is not possible, open all of the doors and windowsas wide as possible.
-- If electrolyte fluid enters the eyes, flush them thoroughly with a large amount of clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical attention.
-- If electrolyte fluid comesinto contact with
the skin, flush the affected area with clean water for at least 15 minutes and then clean
with soap and water and seek medical attention. Clean affected clothing and shoes thoroughly before wearing again. -- If the fluid was swallowed and the person is
conscious, flush the mouthwith water for at
least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomiting unlessthis is recommended by medical professionals. Seek medical attention immediately.
() Note
If the glass on an automatic dimming mirror breaks, electrolyte can leak out. This liquid damages plastic surfaces and paint. Clean this liquid as quickly as possible, for example with a wet sponge.
G) Tips
--If the light reaching the rearview mirror is obstructed, the automatic dimming mirror
will not function correctly,

-- The automatic dimming mirrors do not dim when the interior lighting is turned on or
the reverse gear is selected.

Lights and Vision
Windshield wipers
Switching the wipers on
:
a

8W0012721BG
B4M-0166|

\ Fig. 48 Sun visor
Sun visor The sun visorsfor the driver and front passenger can be released from their mounts and turned to-
ward the doors fig. 48 @.
They can also be moved back and forth length-
wise in this position.
Vanity mirror The mirror lighting* switches on when the cover over the vanity mirror @) opens.
Appliesto: vehicles with sunshade
<=
Fig. 49 Rear door: sunshade
Rear door sunshade
> Pull the sunshade out and attach it to the retainer on the upEpPer door frame fifgig. 49.

2
s=
a

Fi- g. 51 allroad: rear wi; ndow wi;peroperati:on

Movethe windshield wiper lever to the corresponding position:
@- Windshield wipersoff
@- Rain sensor mode. The windshield wipers switch on oncethe vehicle speed exceeds approximately 2 mph (4 km/h) and it is raining. The higher the sensitivity of the rain sensor thatis set
(switch @) to the right), the earlier the windshield wipers react to moisture on the windshield. You can deactivate the rain sensor mode in the Infotainment system, which switches the intermittent mode on. To do this, select: [MENU button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Rain sensor. In intermittent mode, you can adjust the interval time using the switch
®

@- Slow wiping

@- Fast wiping

@- Single wipe. If you hold the lever in this posi-

tion longer, the wipers switch from slow wiping

to fast wiping.

Lights and Vision
©)- Clean the windshield. The wipers wipe one time after several seconds of driving to remove water droplets. You can switch this function off
by moving the lever to position ©) within 10 sec-
onds of the afterwipe. The afterwipe function is reactivated the next time you switch the ignition on.
Clean the headlights*. The headlight washer system* operates only when the low beam headlights are on. If you movethe lever into position ©,the headlightswill be cleaned at fixed intervals.
Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper: © wiping the rear window. The number of wipes depends on the windshield wiper movement.
The rear wiper automatically switches on when the reverse gear is selected and the front windshield wipers are on and running.
Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper: @ cleaning the rear window. The number of wipes depends on howlong the lever is held in position
@. This may also clean the rearview camera, de-
pending on the vehicle equipment.
ZA\ WARNING
-- The rain sensor is only intended to assist the driver. The driver maystill be responsible for manually switching the wipers on based on visibility conditions.
-- The windshield must not be treated with water-repelling windshield coating agents. Unfavorable conditions, such as wetness, darknessor low sun, can result in increased glare, which increases the risk of an accident. Wiper blade chatter is also possible.
-- Properly functioning windshield wiper blades are required for a clear view and safe driving > page 55, Replacing wiper blades.
() Note
-- If there is frost, make sure the windshield wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield. Switching on the windshield wipers when the blades are frozen to the windshield can damage the wiper blades.

-- The windshield wiper system must be switched off (lever in position 0) before using a car wash. This prevents the wipers from switching on unintentionally and causing damage to the windshield wiper system.
G) Tips
-- The windshield wipers switch off when the ignition is switched off. You can activate the windshield wipersafter the ignition is switched on again by moving the windshield wiper lever to anyposition.
-- Worn or dirty windshield wiper blades result in streaking. This can affect the rain sensor function. Check your windshield wiper blades regularly.
-- The washer fluid nozzles for the windshield washer system are heated when the ignition is on if the outside temperatureis low.
-- When stopping temporarily, such as at a traffic light, the speed of the windshield wipers automatically reduces by one level.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Clean the wiper blades when you see wiper streaks. Use a soft cloth and a glass cleaner.
Windshield wiper
> Place the windshield wiper arms in the service position > page 55.
> Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield.
Rear window wiper
Applies to: allroad
> Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window.
ZA, WARNING
Dirty windshield wiper blades can impair vision, which increasesthe risk of an accident.

Lights and Vision

Replacing wiper blades

B8R-0379

ZA WARNING
For safety reasons, the windshield wiper blades should be replaced once or twice each year.

@)--8
Fig. 52 Removing windshield wiper blades
Windshield wiper service position/blade replacement position
> Switch off the ignition and hold the windshield wiper lever in position @) > page 53,fig. 50 until the windshield wiper moves into the service position.
> To bring the windshield wipers back to the normal position, switch the ignition on and hold the windshield wiper lever in position @) until the windshield wipers go back to the normal position, or drive faster than 8 mph (12 km/h).
You can also turn the service position on or off in the Infotainment system: > Switch the windshield wipers off (position @
=> page 53, fig. 50). > Select: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control
button > Service & checks > Wiper change position.
Removing the wiper blade
> Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield.
> Press the locking knob @ fig. 52 on the wiper blade. Hold the wiper blade firmly.
> Removethe wiper blade in the direction of the arrow.
Installing the wiper blade
> Insert the new wiper blade into the mount on
the wiper arm (2) until it clicks into place.
> Place the wiper arm back on the windshield. > Exit the service position.

@) Note
-- Only fold the windshield wipers away when they are in the service position. Otherwise, you risk damaging the paint on the hood or the windshield wiper motor.
-- You should not moveyour vehicle or operate the windshield wiper lever when the wiper arms are folded away from the windshield. The windshield wipers would move back into their original position and could damage the hood and windshield.
G) Tips
-- You can also usethe service position, for example, if you want to protect the windshield from icing by using a cover.
-- You cannotactivate the service position when the hoodis open.
Replacing rear wiper blade
Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper

Fig. 53 Rear window wiper:installing the wiper blade

Removing the wiper blade

> Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window. > Remove the wiper blade from its holder.

Installing the wiper blade

> Press the wiper blade mount into the retainer.

> Fold the window wiper arm back onto the rear

window.

8W0012721BG
B4G-0314

Lights and Vision
For safety reasons, the windshield wiper blades should be replaced once or twice each year.
Digital compass

> To turn the compasson or off, press the button @ until the compass in the mirror appearsor disappears.
The digital compass only works when the ignition is turned on. The directions are indicated with abbreviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W (west), NW (northwest).

To prevent inaccurate compassreadings, do
not bring any remotecontrols, electrical devices or metallic objects near the mirror.

Fig. 54 Rearview mirror: digital compass is switched on
Applies to: vehicles with digital compass
The magnetic zone mustbe adjusted correctly for the compassto read accurately.

B42-0405

> Press and hold the button @) > page 56,fig. 54 until the number of the selected magnetic zone appearsin the rearview mirror.
> Press the button (@) repeatedly to select the correct magnetic zone. The selection mode turns off after a few seconds.
Calibrating the compass
Appliesto: vehicles with digital compass
If the display is incorrect or inaccurate, the compass mustbe recalibrated.
> Press and hold the button @) until a C appears in the rearview mirror.
> Drive in a circle at about 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direction is displayed in the interior rearview mirror.
ZA WARNING
To reduce the risk to yourself and other drivers, calibrate the compassin an area where there is no traffic.

Lights and Vision

8W0012721BG

Seats
Seats General information
ZA WARNING
See > page 247, Driving safety for important information, tips, suggestions and warnings that you should read and follow for your own safety and the safety of your passengers.
Front seats
Power seat adjustment

BFY-0014

& Ee

©- Switching the massage function* on/off > fig. 57. Select the type of massage with the multifunction button* > page 58.
@ - Lumbar support* or multifunction button* = page 58. To adjust the lumbar support, press the button in the applicable location.
ZA WARNING
-- The power front seats can also be adjusted when the ignition is switched off. To reduce the risk of injury, children should never be left unattendedin the vehicle for this reason.
--To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary.
-- Exercise caution when adjusting the seat height. Unsupervised or careless seat adjustment could cause parts of the body to get pinched, which increases the risk of injury.
-- The front seat backrests must notbe reclined too far back when driving, because this impairs the effectiveness of the safety belts and airbag system, which increases the risk of injury.
ttt lam eleiacela)
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction button
You can adjust various seat settings with the multifunction steering wheel.

BaW-0165)

Fig. 57 Front seat: adjusting the seat (version B)
@- Moving the seat forward/back: press the button forward/back.
@- Moving the seat up/down: press the button up/down. To adjust the front seat cushion, press the front button up/down. To adjust the rear seat cushion, press the rear button up/down.
- Adjusting the backrest angle: press the button forward/back.
©- Lengthening/shortening the upper thigh support* fig. 56. Lift the grip handle. A spring moves the support forward.

Fig. 58 Infotainment system: seatsettings
Operating
> If you turn the multifunction button @ => page 58, fig. 57 to the left or to the right, the possible seat settings (A) are shown in the Infotainment system > fig. 58.

8W0012721BG Baw-0022

> To select a seat setting, turn the multifunction
button @) in the corresponding direction until the desired seat setting is outlined in red. > The arrows(B) represent the possible adjustments. For example, to lower the lumbar support, press the multifunction button @ down. The corresponding arrow © lightsup.
The following seat settings @ are possible:
Massage function* - select the massage type Wave,Stretch, Knead or Off. You can adjust the intensity of each massage from 1 to 3. You can switch the selected massage on/off using the
button © fig. 58.
Lumbar support- you can adjust the lumbar support up/down and to be stronger/weaker.
Side bolsters* - you can increase/decrease the side support in the seat using the side bolsters on the seat backrest.
@® Tips
-- The massage function switches off automatically after approximately 10 minutes.
-- The air in the side bolsters* is released as soon as the driver's door opens. This makes is possible to enter and exit the vehicle more comfortably. As soon as you start driving the vehicle, the side bolstersfill.
(eTah eae4
Applies to: vehicles with a comfort front center armrest
There is a storage compartment under the arm-
rest.

Seats
> To adjust the angle, raise the armrest from the starting position notch by notch.
> To bring the armrest back into the starting po-
sition, raise it out of the top notch and foldit back down. The armrestcan slide forward and back.
Head restraints
Front head restraints
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints
Fig. 60 Frontseat: adjusting the head restraint*
Adjust the head restraints so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head. If that is not possible, try to adjust as close to this position as possible. Adjusting the head restraints
> To move a head restraint* upward or forward, hold it at the sides with both hands and slide it
upward or forward until you feel it click into place. > To move the head restraint* downwardor backward, press the side button and slide the head restraint downward or backward. Release the button and slide the head restraint farther until it locks into place.
Z\WARNING
Alwaysread and follow the applicable warnings > page 250, Proper adjustment of head restraints.

Fig. 59 Comfort center armrest between the driver's seat and front passenger's seat

Seats Tae Mery
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints
Fig. 62 Rear seat: removing the headrestraint

B8W-0157

B8W-0187

Installing the head restraints
> Slide the posts on the head restraint down into the guides until the postsclick into place.
> Press the button -arrow- > fig. 61 and slide the head restraint all the way down. You should not be able to removethe head restraint from the backrest without pressing the button.
ZXWARNING
-- Alwaysread and follow the applicable warnings > page 250, Proper adjustment of head restraints.
-- Only remove the head restraints from the rear seats when it is necessary for installing a child safety seat > page 285, Child safety. Install the head restraint again immediately once the child safety seat is removed. Driving with the head restraints removed or not in the upright position increases the risk of serious injury.
Memory function

If passengersare sitting in the outer rear seats, adjust the head restraints so that the upper edge of the head restraint is as level as possible with the upper part of their head. If that is not possible, try to adjust as close to this position as possible. If your vehicle has a middle seat, adjust that head restraint all the way up > A\.
Moving the head restraints
> To movethe head restraint upward, hold it at the sides with both hands and slide it upward until it clicks into place > fig. 61.
> To move the head restraint down, press the button -arrow- > fig. 61 and slide the head restraint downward.
Removing the head restraints
> Move the head restraint upward as far as it can go.
> Press the release point > fig. 62 using the mechanical key > page 29, Key set and press the button -arrow- > fig. 61. Pull the head restraint out of the backrest at the same time > A\.

Applies to: vehicles with memory function
With the memoryfunction, you can save and recall seat profiles using the memory buttons in the door trim panel and with the vehicle key.
The driver's seat profile is stored again and assigned to the vehicle key each time the vehicleis locked. When you open the door,the seat profile is automatically recalled. If two people use one vehicle, it is recommended that each person alwaysuses "his or her own"vehicle key.
Depending on the equipment,it may be possible to store the following settings:
-- Driver's seat: seat, exterior mirror*
NaC <a]
Applies to: vehicles with memory function
The driver's seat profile can be assigned to the vehicle key when the vehicleis locked.
> Select in the Infotainment system: MENU button > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle >

8W0012721BG

settings > Seats > Driver's seat > Store settings on remotecontrol key.
@ Tips If you do not wish to havethe seatprofile for another driver assigned to the vehicle key, switch the memoryfunction off in the Infotainment system.
Memory buttons
Applies to: vehicles with memory function
Fig. 63 Driver's door: memoryfunction buttons
Storing a seatprofile
> Press the|SET] button. The LED in the button will turn on.
> Press memory button [1] or [2]. A signal tone will sound when it is successfully stored.
Recalling a seat profile
> If the driver's door is open and the ignition is switched off, press the memory button.
> If the driver's door is closed or the ignition is switched on, press and hold the memory button until the seat adjustment is complete.
ZA\ WARNING
-- For safety reasons, the seat setting can only
be recalled when the vehicle is stationary to reducethe risk of an accident. --Inan emergency, seat adjustment operation can be stoppedby pressing the [SET] button or the buttons @) or > page 58,fig. 57.

B8W-0025

Seats 61

Stowing and using
Stowing and using Ashtray
Applies to: vehicles with ashtray =ae8Se@s
Fig. 64 Front center console: ashtray
Opening and closing > To open/close the ashtray, fold the cover up/
down. Emptying > To emptythe ashtray, pull it upward and out.
ZA\ WARNING
Never use the ashtray to hold paper, because this increases the risk of a fire.
Cigarette lighter
Applies to: vehicles with a cigarette lighter
=E©&s2ga
Fig. 65 Front center console: cigarette lighter
> Press the cigarette lighter in. > Removethe cigarette lighter when it pops out. The cigarette lighter may be used as a power source for the tire mobility kit/compact spare tire* compressor only when absolutely necessary.

AN WARNING
The cigarette lighter only works when the ignition is switched on. Incorrect usage can lead to serious injuries or burns. To reduce the risk
of injuries, never leave children unattended in
the vehicle with the vehicle key.
Power sources
When the ignition is switched on, you may be able to use the electric power sources for external devices, depending on the vehicle equipment.
12 volt sockets
You can connectelectrical accessories to the 12 volt sockets. The power usage must not exceed 120 watts.
The 12 volt sockets are labeled with the & or 12V symbol. They are located in the front center console*, in the rear* and on the side trim panel in the luggage compartment".
USB ports
Applies to: vehicles with USB input
You can charge mobile devices using the USB ports. The USB ports are labeled with the «<> or (4 symbol or CHARGE ONLY.
ZA WARNING
--To reducethe risk of fatal injury, store all connected devices securely when driving so that they do not move around inside the vehicle when braking or in the eventof an accident.
-- Incorrect usage can lead to serious injuries or burns. To reduce the risk of injuries, never leave children unattendedin the vehicle with the vehicle key.
@) Note
-- Read the operating manuals for the connected devices.
-- Disconnect the connectors from the power sources carefully to reduce the risk of damaging them.

8W0012721BG

--To reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle electrical system, never attempt to charge the vehicle battery by connecting accessories that provide power to the power sources.
-- Do not connect any device whose network class (voltage) does not match the network class designed for the socket.
Storage
(ety mired tel-Te 5 =8eg
Fig. 66 Rear center armrest: cup holders*
Your vehicle has cup holdersin the front center console and in the center rear seat".
Cup holdersin the rear center armrest* > Fold the center armrest downward. > To open the cup holders, pull the top cover on
the cup holders forward fig. 66. >» Set your beverage in the holder. > To close the cup holder, fold the cover back un-
tilit clicks into place.
/\ WARNING
-- Do not put any hot beverages in the cup holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot beverages could spill, which increases the risk of injury.
-- Do not use any breakable beverage containers (for example, made out ofglassor porcelain). You could be injured by them in the event of an accident.
@) Note
Beverage containersin the cup holders should alwayshave a lid. Otherwise, the liquid inside

Stowing and using
could spill and cause damage tovehicle equipment.
Cooled glove compartment
Applies to: vehicles with cooled glove compartment
Fig. 67 Glove compartment: switching cooling mode on/off
> Turn the knob (@) counter-clockwise to switch the cooling on.
> Turn the knob (@) clockwise to switch the cooling off. The symbols on the knob must appear as they doin > fig. 67.
The glove compartment cooling mode only functions when the vehicle A/C system is switched on. If the heating is switched on, switching the glove compartment cooling mode off is recommended.
Additional storage compartments You will find a variety of storage compartments
and holdersat various locations in the vehicle. -- Glove compartment: the glove compartment
can be locked* using the mechanical key = page 29, Key set -- Inthe door trim panels -- Storage compartment under the front center
armrest -- Storage compartment*in the rear center arm-
rest
-- Storage compartment* under the light switch -- Garment hooks above the rear doors* -- Nets* on the backrests of the front seats -- Nets* on the left/right luggage compartment
trim panel -- Tie-downs* on the left/right luggage compart-
ment trim panel -- Bag hooks*in the luggage compartment
63

Stowing and using
ZA\ WARNING
--To reducethe risk of injury, make sure the coversfor all storage compartmentsarealwaysclosed while driving.
-- Only use the storage compartmentsin the door trim panels to store small objects that will not stick out of the compartment and impair the function of the side airbags.
-- Due to strength reasons,only secure objects up to 11 lbs (5 kg) with the tie-downs*. Heavier objects are not adequately secured. There is risk of personal injury.
-- Make sure your view toward the rear is not blocked, for example by hanging clothing or objects in the vehicle.
-- Only lightweight clothing should be hung from the garmenthooks in the vehicle. The pockets of the clothing must not contain any heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged objects. Such objects endanger vehicle occupants and increase the risk of injury during sudden driving or braking maneuversor in an accident, especially if the airbags deploy.
-- Do not use coat hangers to hang garments
becausethis could reduce the effectiveness of the side curtain airbags*.
Luggage compartment
ere eerie)
All luggage and other objects must be properly stowed and secured in the luggage compart-
ment.
Loose items in the luggage compartment can shift suddenly, changing vehicle handling characteristics. Loose items can also increase the risk of serious personal injury in a sudden vehicle maneuver or ina collision.
> Distribute the load evenly in the luggage com-
partment.
> Always place and properly secure heavy items in the luggage compartment as low and as far forward as possible.
> Secure luggage using the tie-downs provided > page 68.

> Make sure that the rear seatback is securely latched in place.
Z\ WARNING
Improperly stored luggage or other items can fly through the vehicle causing serious personal injury in the event of hard braking or an accident. To help reduce the risk of serious personal injury: -- Alwaysput objects, for example, luggage or
other heavy items in the luggage compart-
ment.
-- Alwayssecure objects in the luggage compartmentusing the tie-down eyelets and suitable straps.
Z\ WARNING
Heavyloads will influence the way your vehicle handles. To help reduce the risk of a Loss of control leading to serious personal injury: -- Always keep in mind when transporting
heavy objects, that a change in the center of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling:
-- Alwaysdistribute the load as evenly as possible.
-- Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment as possible.
-- Never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating or the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating specified on the safety compliance sticker on the driver's side B-pillar respectively on the front end of the driver's door. Exceeding permissible weight standards can cause the vehicle to slide and handledifferently.
-- Please observe information on safe driving => page 247.
A WARNING
To help prevent poisonous exhaust gas from being drawn into the vehicle, always keep the rear lid closed while driving. -- Never transport objects larger than those
fitting completely into the luggage area because the rear lid cannotbe fully closed.

8W0012721BG
B4L-1256

-- If you absolutely mustdrive with the rear lid open, observe the following notes to reduce the risk of poisoning:
-- Close all windows,
-- Close the sunroof*, -- Open all air outlets in the instrument pan-
el,
-- Switch off the air recirculation,
-- Set the fresh air fan to the highest speed.
ZX WARNING
Always makesure that the doors,all windows,
the sunroof* and the rear lid are securely closed and locked to reduce the risk of injury when the vehicle is not being used. -- After closing the rear lid, always make sure
that it is properly closed and locked. -- Never leave your vehicle unattended espe-
cially with the rear lid left open. A child could crawlinto the vehicle through the luggage compartmentand close the rear lid becoming trapped and unableto get out. Being trapped in a vehicle can lead to serious personal injury. -- Never let children play in or around the vehicle. -- Never let passengersride in the luggage compartment. Vehicle occupants must alwaysbe properly restrained in one of the vehicle's seating positions.
Q Note
If you are transporting large items with the
backrest folded down", you should remove
the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* and its holder* to avoid damage.
@ Tips
--Air circulation helps to reduce window fogging. Stale air escapes to the outside through ventsin the trim panel. Be sure to keep these slots free and open.
-- The tire pressure must correspond to the load. The tire pressure label lists the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures for the vehicle at its maximum capacity weight and the tires that were on your vehicle at the

Stowing and using time it was manufactured. For recommended tire pressures for normal load conditions, please see chapter > page 334. Luggage compartment cover
Applies to: vehicles with luggage compartmentcover
2sS==
ao
Fig. 69 Luggage compartment: removing and installing the luggage compartmentcover
Attaching > Pull the cover out and attach it in the mounting
eyelets in the side trim panel fig. 68. Removing > Pull the lever in the direction of the arrow
=> fig. 69 and remove the cover upward. Installing > Place the left and right sides of the cover into
the mountson the side trim panel. > Push the cover downward until it clicks into
place.
Z\WARNING
The luggage compartment cover is not a sur-
face for storing objects. Objects placed on the cover increasethe risk ofinjuryto all vehicle >
65

Stowing and using

occupants during sudden driving or braking maneuversor in the event of an accident.
©) Note
Let the luggage compartmentcover roll up slowly to reducethe risk of damage. Increasing the size of the vehicle interior
Appliesto: vehicles with folding backrests
The rear seat backrests can be folded forwardeither separately* or together.
oagO "0a
Fig. 71 Center backrest: folding the center backrest forward
Folding the outer rear backrests forward and backward
> Pull the release lever (@) in the direction of the arrow and fold the backrest forward. Let the backrest latch into the lowestposition.
> Fold the backrest back up again until it locks into place and the red marking is no longer
visible > /\.
Folding the center rear backrest forward and backward
> Pull on the upper release lever (@) and fold the
backrest forward (2).

B8W-0118,

> Fold the backrest backward until it locks into place.
When secured, the backrest can be locked © us-
ing the mechanical key > page 30. This prevents access into the luggage compartment from the vehicle interior. You can only enlarge the luggage compartment if the backrest is not locked.
Z\ WARNING
-- Be careful when releasing the backrest and folding it forward. To reducethe risk of being pinched, pay attention and check when folding backrests forward.
-- The backrest mustbe securely latched to ensure the safety belt is protecting the rear seat positions.
-- The backrest mustbe securely latched so objects cannotslide forward out of the luggage compartment during sudden braking.
@) Note
--To reduce the risk of damaging the front seats, make sure there is enough space between the front seat and the rear seat equipment when folding the center backrest forward.
-- If you movethe front seat back when the rear seat backrest is folded forward, you could damage the head restraints on the
rear seat.
--To reduce the risk of damage, move the rear head restraints down before folding the rear backrests forward > page 60.
-- When folding the backrest forward, make sure the outer safety belts are in the belt guide recess so that they do not get pinched in the backrest lock and damaged. Other objects should be removed from the rear bench seatto protect the backrest from damage.

Stowing and using

Increasing the size of the luggage
compartment
Appliesto: vehicles with release lever in the luggage compart-
ment
The rear seat backrests can be folded forwardeither separately* or together.
2Sag=©a

Partition net (upright backrest position)
Applies to: vehicles with partition net
The partition net prevents objects from sliding from the luggage compartment into the passen-
ger compartment.

B8W-0121

Fig. 72 Luggage compartment:releaselever (example)
Folding the backrest forward
> Pull the release lever > fig. 72 in the direction of the arrow to fold the backrest forward.
Folding the backrest back into the upright
position
> Fold the backrest back up again until it latches or the red marking > page66,fig. 70 is no longer visible > A\ in Increasing the size of the vehicle interior on page 66.
Z\ WARNING
-- Be careful when releasing the backrest and folding it forward. To reducethe risk of being pinched, pay attention and check when folding backrests forward.
-- When releasing the rear seat backrest, make sure there are no people or animals within its range of motion. The backrestwill fold forward automatically after it is released.
® Note
-- To reduce the risk of damage, movethe rear
head restraints downbefore folding the rear backrests forward > page 60. --To reduce the risk of damage to the front seats, make sure there is enough space between the front seat and the rear seat equipment when operating the release lever.

Fig. 73 Behind the backrest: hanging the partition net

B8W-0122

Fig. 74 Behind the backrest: removing thepartition net

Attaching
> Pull the net upward. Attach the crossbrace to the mounting eyelets above the backrest -arrows- > fig. 73.

Removing
> Fold the backrests forward > page 66. > Press the left and right buttons on the partition
net and lift the net upward to removeit > fig. 74.

Installing

> Fold the backrests forward > page 66.

> Slide the left and right sides of the partition net

into the mount.

> Press the partition net down diagonally at the

left and right until it locks into place and the

red markings on the buttons are no longer visi-

ble.

8W0012721BG

Stowing and using

Let the partition net roll up slowly to prevent damage.
Tatami ede deem cel e(teR celaleed)
Applies to: vehicles with partition net
The partition net prevents objects from sliding from the luggage compartment into the passen-
ger compartment.

-- You must removethe partition net before folding the backrest back into the upright position.
-- Let the partition net roll up slowly to prevent damage.
Tie-downs and luggage compartment net

BEWw-0123

Fig. 77 Luggage compartment:location of the tie-downs (example)
zx3=38

Fig. 76 Folded backrest: hangingthe partition net
Installing > Fold the backrests forward > page 66. > Place the partition net on the recesses in the re-
taining rails @ and slide it all the way to the
left Q).
Attaching > Pull the net out and upward and attach it to the
mounting eyelets above the front seats
-arrows- > fig. 76.
Removing > Slide the partition net to the right and lift it out
of the retaining rails.

Fig. 78 Luggage compartment: tightened luggage compartmentnet (example)
Tie-downs There are tie-downs (@) in the luggage compartment to secure pieces of luggage and objects.
» Use the tie-downs to secure the cargo.
-- Loose objects can be thrown around the vehicle interior during sudden driving or brak-
ing maneuvers, which increasesthe risk of
an accident. Always stow objects securelyin the luggage compartment and secure them at the tie-downs. Usestraps suitable for heavy objects.

8W0012721BG BEW-0128

Stowing and using

-- If pieces of luggage or objects are secured to the tie-downs with unsuitable or damagedstraps,this can increase the risk of injury during braking maneuversor accidents.
-- Never secure a child safety seat to the tiedowns.
Pass-through
Applies to: vehicles with pass-through
4 =o5ze5a

Reversible cargo floor
Applies to: vehicles with reversible cargo floor
You can transport dirty and damp objects in the reversible cargo areafloor.
Ss
gS
£Saas

Fig. 79 Backrest: pass-through release
> To release the pass-through, turn the lock on the backrest.
> Fold the pass-through cover down.
ZX WARNING
Makesure thatall objects that you are transporting in the pass-through are secure. They could slide during sudden braking maneuvers and cause injuries.
@ Tips
You can lock or unlock the pass-through through the luggage compartment.This prevents any access to the luggage compartment from the vehicle interior.

Fig. 81 Luggage compartment: cargo area floor reversed
Reversing the cargo area floor > Lift up the cargo area floor using the handle
-arrow- > fig. 80. > Flip the floor over and installit.

Stowing and using
Roof rack
Fig. 83 -Applies to: allroad-Roofrail: mounting points
If luggage or cargo is to be carried on the roof, you mustobservethe following: -- Only approved roof racks may be used on your
vehicle. These roofracks are the basis for a complete roof rack system. Additional attachmentsor carrier systems are needed to transport luggage and sports equipment. Roof racks and attachments from the Audi Genuine Accessories program are recommended. -- When installing the roof rack, make sure that it is mounted only at the designated points on the roof > fig. 82 or > fig. 83. -- Note the permitted axle load, permitted total weight, and permitted roof load of your vehicle => page 373. The roof load is the total of the
weight of the roof rack, the attachments and
the cargo you are carrying. However, you must also note the permitted load of the carrier system being used.
ZXWARNING
-- Follow the installation instructions provided with the roof rack system. If you do not se-

B8W-0037

cure the roof rack system and objects on the roof correctly, they could come loose from the vehicle and cause an accident. -- The risk of an accident increases when using a roof rack system, because it changes the driving characteristics by shifting the center of gravity and/or the increasing the surface area exposed to wind. You may need to adapt your driving style and speed to the current conditions.
@) Note
Makesure that the open luggage compartment lid and the tilting/sliding sunroof* or panoramic glass roof* do not come into contact with objects on the roof.
() For the sake of the environment
Fuel consumption will increase becauseof the increased wind resistance. Removethe roof rack when you are no longer using it.

Warm and cold Climate control system
The climate control system warms, cools and removes humidity from the air in the vehicle interior. It is most effective when the windowsand
sunroof* are closed. If there is a build-up of heat inside the vehicle, ventilation can help to speed up the cooling process.
In all heating mode functions except for defrost, the blower only switches to a higher speed once the engine coolant has reached a sufficient tem-
perature.
Pollutant filter The pollutant filter removes pollutants such as dust and pollen from the air.
Key recognition The climate control settings are automatically stored and assigned to the vehicle key that is in use.

Warm and cold
@) For the sake of the environment
If you would like to reduce fuel consumption, switch the air conditioning off. This will also reduce emissions.
@) Tips
--To preventinterference with the heating and cooling output and to prevent the windowsfrom fogging over, the air intake in front of the windshield mustbefree ofice,
snow,or leaves.
-- Condensation from the cooling system can drip and form a puddle of water under the vehicle. This is normal and does not mean there is a leak.
-- The energy management system may tem-
porarily switch off certain functions, such as the seat heating* or rear window defogger. These systems are available again as soon as the energy supply has been restored.

8W0012721BG

Warm and cold
3-zone deluxe automatic climate control

B8W-0137

Fig. 84 3-zone deluxe automatic climate control: cockpit controls

B8W-0138

Fig. 85 3-zone deluxe automatic climate control system: rear controls

Press the knobs, buttons or rocker switches to turn the functions on or off. When the function is switched on, the LED in the respective button or
knob turns on > fig. 84.
The rocker switches are sensitive to touch. Some rocker switches can be assigned with multiple functions. The various functions can be activated by pressing on the switch multiple times. On right-hand drive vehicles*, the functions of the
rocker switches (3) and G) are reversed.
The driver and front passenger settings can be adjusted separately. You can adjust the settings for the rear of the vehicle using the controls in the rear fig. 85.

OFF climate control system
The OFF button switches the climate control system on or off. It also switches on when you press another button or a knob. Airflow from outside is blocked when the climate control system is switched off.
A/C / A/C MAX* / A/C eco* Cooling mode
You can switch the respective cooling mode on and off with the rocker switch @).
The cooling mode only functions with the blower turned on. The air is cooled and dehumidified in cooling mode. Otherwise the windows can fog >

Warm and cold

up. Cooling mode switches off automatically when the outside temperature is below zero.
If you activate A/C ON, the cooling mode is automatically regulated. The cooling mode is switched off with A/C OFF.
If you activate A/C MAX*, the cooling mode will operate with maximum output. To reduce unnecessary fuel consumption, only usethis function briefly.
If you activate A/C eco*, the climate control system will operate in energy-saving mode. This will save fuel.
<> Recirculation mode
In recirculation mode, the air inside the vehicleis circulated and filtered. This prevents the unfiltered air outside the vehicle from entering the vehicle interior. Switching recirculation mode on when driving through a tunnel or when sitting in traffic is recommended > A.
You can switch the recirculation mode on or off using the <> button. You can also switch the recirculation mode off by pressing the knob (@) or the §& button.
AUTO automatic mode
Automatic mode maintains a constant temperature inside the vehicle. Air temperature, airflow and air distribution are controlled automatically. You can switch automatic mode on or off by
pressing the knob (4).
Temperature
You can adjust the temperature between 60°F (+16°C) and 84°F (+28°C) by turning the knob ©.If outside of this range, LO or HI will appear in the climate control system display. In both settings, the climate control runs constantly at the maximum cooling or heating level. The temperature is not regulated.
The temperature can be adjusted in the rear using the rear controls > fig. 85.
%=z Blower
You can adjust the volume of air generated by the blower to your preference using the rocker switch

@. The blower should always run at a low setting to prevent the windowsfrom fogging and to en-
sure a continuous exchange ofair inside the vehicle. To have the blower regulated automatically,
press one ofthe knobs (4).

Air distribution
You can usethe rocker switches (2) to adjust the vents where the air will flow out of. Press the rocker switches (2) repeatedly until the desired air distribution setting is displayed in the climate control system controls. To have the air distribution regulated automatically, press one of the
knobs (@).

=i OPEN/CLOSE the wide vent You can open and close the wide vent in the cock-
pit using the rocker switch 6).

SYNC Synchronization
Use the rocker switch () to select the function.
When synchronization is switched on, the settings for the driver's side are applied to the front
passenger's side and the rear (except for seat heating/ventilation*). When the settings on the front passenger's side or in the rear are changed, the synchronization is automatically switched off and 3-zone appears in the display.

SET REAR function
Use the rocker switch () to select the function. When the function is switched on, you can adjust all settings for the rear using the climate control system controls in the cockpit. The rear climate control system controls cannot be operated at the same time. This function switches off automatically after a certain period of time or after leaving the menu.

a Seat heating*

Pressing the a button switches the seat heating

on at the highest setting (level 3). The LEDs indi-

cate the temperature level. To reduce the tem-

perature, press the button again. To switch the

seat heating off, press the button repeatedly un-

til the LED turns off.

8W0012721BG

Warm and cold
#5 Seat ventilation* Pressing the #J button switchesthe seat ventilation on at the highest level (3). The LEDs indicate the temperaturelevel. To reduce the ventilation level, press the button again. To switch the seat ventilation off, press the button repeatedly until
the LED turns off.
& Defrosting
The windshield and side windowsare defrosted or cleared of condensation as quickly as possible. The maximum amount ofair flows mainly from the vents below the windshield. Recirculation mode switches off. The temperature should be set at +72°F (+22°C) or higher. The temperature is controlled automatically.
You can switch the defroster on or off using the & button. You can switch the function off by
pressing a knob (@).
Applies to: vehicles with windshield defogger: The windshield defogger switches on automatically when outside temperatures are low.If you would like to switch the windshield defogger on manually, press the §& button. The LED in the button blinks.
GP) REAR Rear window defogger
You can switch the rear window defogger on by pressing the & button. It only operates when the engine is running. It switches off automatically after 10 to 20 minutes, depending on the outside
temperature.
To prevent the rear window defogger from switching off automatically, press and hold the
GP) REAR button for more than three seconds.
This is stored until the ignition is switched off.
Vents
You can open or close the center and rear vents in the cockpit and the ventsin the rear center console using the ridged thumbwheels. The levers adjust the direction of the airflow from the vents. The wide vent is opened and closed using the
rocker switch G).
74

Residual heat
You can activate the residual heat function when the ignition is switched off by pressing the knob
©. The residual heat from the coolant is used to
heat the vehicle interior. The residual heat function switches off automatically after about 15 minutes.
ZA WARNING
-- You should not use the recirculation mode for an extended period of time, because no fresh air is drawn in and the windowscan fog when cooling mode is switchedoff. This increases the risk of an accident.
-- Individuals with reduced sensitivity to pain or temperature could develop burns when using the seat heating* function. To reduce the risk of injury, these individuals should not use seat heating*.
@) Note To reduce the risk of damage to the seat heating* elements, do not kneel on the seats or place heavy pressure on one area ofthe seat.
The climate control system basic settings are accessed in the Infotainment system.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Air conditioning
Auto recirculation
When switched on, automatic recirculation con-
trols the recirculation mode automatically.If the
windowsfog up, press the MAX button.
Automatic auxiliary heater*
The auxiliary heater helps to warm the vehicle interior more quickly.
Steering wheel heating
Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating
> Press the @ © page17,fig. 11 button on the
multifunction steering wheel to switch the steering wheel heating on and off. The message >

Steering wheel heating: on/Steering wheel heating: off appearsin the instrument cluster display.
The steering wheel heating settings are stored automatically and assigned to the vehicle key that is in use.

Warm and cold

8W0012721BG

Driving

Driving
General information
A new vehicle must be broken in within the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km) so that all moving parts work smoothly together, which helps to increase the service life of the engine.
Do notdrive higher than two-thirds of the maximum permitted engine RPM during the first 600 miles (1,000 km) and do notusefull acceleration. The engine can be increased RPM gradually during the next 300 miles (500 km).
Reducing the risk of vehicle damage
The ground clearance is too low on some models
to drive on rough terrain. Therefore, avoid off-
road trips.
@) Note
When driving on poor roads, over curbs, and
on steep ramps, make sure that components
that hang below the vehicle, such as the spoiler and exhaust system, are not struck because they could be damaged. This especially applies to vehicles with low ground clearance and vehicles that are heavily loaded.
Driving through water on roads
Note the following to reducethe risk of vehicle damage when driving through water, for example on flooded roads:
-- The water must not be any higher than the bottom ofthe vehicle body.
-- Do not drive faster than walking speed.
ZA\ WARNING
After driving through water or mud, the effectiveness of the brakes may be reduced due to moisture on the brake rotors and brake pads. A few careful brake applications should dry off the brakes and restore the full braking effect.

@) Note
-- Vehicle components such as the engine, transmission, suspension, or electrical system, can be severely damaged bydriving through water.
-- Always switch the Start/Stop system" off when driving through water > page 80.
G) Tips
-- Determine the depth before driving through
water.
-- Do not stop the vehicle, drive in reverse, or switch the engine off when driving through
water.
-- Keep in mind that oncoming vehicles may create waves that raise the water level and makeit too deep for your vehicle to drive through safely.
-- Avoid driving through salt water, because this can cause corrosion.
aire a MN eLNacelaera (ole ry driving
The amount of fuel consumption, the environ-
mental impact, and the wear to the engine,
brakes, and tires depends mostly on your driving style. Note the following information for efficient and environmentally-conscious driving:
-- Do not let the engine run while the vehicle parked.
-- Use the Start/Stop system > page 80. -- Turn off electrical equipment that is not need-
ed, for example seat heating*. -- Anticipate upcoming traffic situations while
driving to avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. -- Utilize the engine braking effect. -- Avoid driving short distances or at high speeds when possible. -- Avoid adding extra weight to the vehicle if possible, for example by not leaving roof racks or bike racks installed when they are not needed. -- Have maintenance performed regularly on the vehicle. -- Do not drive with winter tires during the summer,

-- Make surethe tire pressure is correct > page 332.
G) Tips
The amount of noise produced bythe vehicle can increase significantly when driving with a sporty style. Show respect to others around you and the environment with the way you operate your vehicle, especially at night.
Steering
Adjusting the steering wheel position The steering wheel position is adjustable up and down andforward and back.
Fig. 86 Steering column: lever for adjusting the steering wheel position
> Pull the lever in the direction of the arrow
>A.
> Bring the steering wheel into the desired position.
> Push the lever against the steering column untilit is secure.
A WARNING
Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjustment and an incorrect seating position can causeserious injuries. -- Only adjust the steering column when the
vehicle is stationary so that you do notlose control of the vehicle. -- Adjust the driver's seat or steering wheel so that there is at least a 10 in (25 cm) distance between your chest and the steering
wheel. If you do not maintain this distance,
the airbag system will not be able to provide its full protection.

B4G-0567

Driving
-- If your physical characteristics prevent you from sitting at least 10 in (25 cm) or more away from the steering wheel, see if an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility can provide adapters that will help.
-- If your faceis level with the steering wheel, the airbag does not provide as much protection during a collision. Always make sure that the steering wheel is level with your chest.
-- Alwayshold the steering wheel with your hands in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to reduce the risk ofinjury if the airbag deploys.
-- Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o'clock position or with both hands on the rim or the center of the steering wheel. Holding the steering wheel incorrectly significantly increases the risk of injury to the
hands, arms and head if the driver airbag
deploys.
Shifting into gear
Applies to: vehicles with manual transmission
In vehicles with a manual transmission, you shift into gears manually. The gearshift lever is labeled with the positions of the individual gears. Please note that the reverse gear can only be engaged when the gearshift lever is pushed downward.
©) Note
-- Alwayspressthe clutch pedal all the way down when shifting.
-- Release the clutch pedal completely after shifting. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal.
-- Alwaysselect the gear that corresponds to the current vehicle speed and engine RPM.
-- Do not hold the vehicle on inclines when the clutch is "grinding".
-- Bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting into reverse gear.

8W0012721BG

Driving

Starting and stopping the engine
Starting the engine
The [START ENGINE STOP] button switches the
ignition on and starts the engine.

B8W-0140

If the engine does not start immediately, the starting procedure stops automatically after a short time. If this is the case, repeat the starting procedure after approximately 30 seconds.
Start/Stop system*
See the information in > page 80, Start/Stop
system.
ZA\ WARNING
To reduce the risk of asphyxiation, never allow the engine to run in confined spaces.

Requirement: the key mustbe in the vehicle.
Starting the engine
Applies to: vehicles with manual transmission
> Press the clutch pedal all the way down and movethe shift lever to the neutral position.
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
» Press the brake pedal.
> Press the |START ENGINE STOP] button
> fig. 87. The engine will start.
Switching the ignition on or off
If you would like to switch the ignition on without starting the engine, follow these steps:
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button without pressing the clutch pedal (for manual transmissions) or the brake pedal (for automatic transmissions). Vehicles without the Start/Stop system*: the needle in the tachometer moves into the READYposition.
> To switch the ignition off, press the button again. The needle in the tachometer movesinto the OFF position.
Equipmentthat uses a lot of electricity is switched off temporarily when you start the engine.

@) Note Avoid high engine speed, full throttle, and heavy engine load if the engine has not reached operating temperature yet. You could damage the engine.
@) For the sake of the environment
Do not let the engine run while parked to warm up. Begin driving immediately.This reduces unnecessary emissions.
G) Tips
-- Some noise after starting the engine is normal and is no causefor concern.
-- If you leave the vehicle with the ignition
switched on, the ignition will switch off after a certain amountof time. Make sure that
electrical equipment such as the exterior lights are switchedoff.
Slade aes in
> Bring the vehicle to a full stop. > Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button
=> page 78, fig. 87.
Steering lock!)
The steering locks when you turn the engine off using the [START ENGINE STOP] button and open the driver's door. The locked steering helps preventvehicle theft.

D_ This function is not available in all countries.
78

Emergencyoff function*
If it is absolutely necessary, the engine can also be turned off while driving at speeds starting at 4 mph (7 km/h). To stop the engine, press the START ENGINE STOP] button twice in a row or press and holdit one time.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Never turn off the engine before the vehicle has come to a complete stop. Switching it off before the vehicle has stopped may impair the function of the brake booster and power steering. You would then need to use more force to steer and brake the vehicle. The fact that you cannot steer and brake as usual mayincrease the risk of accidents and serious injuries.
-- If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition off and take the vehicle key with you. If you
do not do this, the engine could be started
and electrical equipment such as the power windowscouldbe activated. This can lead to serious injuries. -- For safety reasons, always park the vehicle with the selector lever in the "P" position (automatic transmission) or with 1st gear engaged (manual transmission). Otherwise the vehicle could roll away unintentionally.
@) Note
If the engine has been under heavyload for an extended period of time, heat builds up in the engine compartmentafter the engine is switched off and thereis a risk of damaging the engine. For this reason, let the engine run at idle for approximately two minutes before shutting it off.
G) Tips
For up to 10 minutes after stopping the engine, the radiator fan may turn on again automatically or it may continue to run, even if the ignition is switched off.

Driving
B Remote control key: key not detected. Is the keystill in the vehicle?
This indicator light turns on and this message appears if the vehicle key is removed from the vehicle when the engine is running. If the vehicle key is no longer in the vehicle, you cannot switch the ignition on or start the engine once you stop it. You also cannotlock the vehicle from the outside.
B Remotecontrol key and smartphone notdetected. Are your key and smartphone still in the vehicle?
This indicator light turns on and this message appearsif the vehicle key and smartphone areremoved from the vehicle while the engine is running. If the vehicle key and smartphone are no longer in the vehicle, you cannot switch the igni-
tion on or restart the engine once you stop the
engine. You also cannotlock the vehicle from the outside.
Remote control key: hold back of key against the designated area. See owner's manual
If the indicator light turns on and this message appears, there is a malfunction > page 79.
Hold back of key on the designatedarea, or place your smartphone in the charging cradle
If the indicator light turns on and this message appears, there is a malfunction > page 79.
Starting the engine when thereis a TEU iisio)

Fig. 88 Center console/vehicle key: starting the engine if

there is a malfunction

8W0012721BG

Driving

It may notbe possible to start the engine under certain circumstances, for example, if the battery
in the vehicle keyis drained, if interferenceis af-
fecting the key,or if there is a system malfunction.
> Hold the vehicle key vertically in the location in-
dicated ?) © fig. 88.
Applies to: vehicles with manual transmission
> Press the clutch pedal.
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
> Press the brake pedal.
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button. The engine will start.
> Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Start/Stop system
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
The Start/Stop system can help increase fuel economy and reduce CO2 emissions.
In Start/Stop mode, the engine shuts off automatically when stopped, for exampleat traffic light. The ignition and important assist systems such as power steering and the brake booster will remain available during the Stop phase. The engine will restart automatically when needed.
The Start/Stop system is automatically activated once the ignition is switched on.
Basic requirements
-- The driver's door and hood mustbe closed. -- Applies to: automatic transmission: The selec-
tor lever must be engaged in the "P", "N", or
"D" position. -- Applies to: manual transmission: The gearshift
lever mustbe in the neutral position. --The steering wheel must not be turned far in ei-
ther direction.

-- The vehicle must have driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h) since the last time it stopped.
--A trailer must not be hitched to the vehicle.
(!) Note
Always switch the Start/Stop system off when driving through water > page 81.
G) Tips
-- Depending on the driving situation, the engine may already stop when coasting before the vehicle has come to a complete stop )).
-- Applies to: automatic transmission: If you select the "D" selector lever position after
shifting into reverse, the vehicle must be driven faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)in order
for the Start/Stop system to become active again. This makes it possible to maneuver without stopping the engine.
Stopping/starting the engine
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
Applies to: vehicles with manual transmission
> When the vehicleis stationary, shift to neutral and release the clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. The @ indicator light appears in the information line at the bottom of the instrument cluster display. The needle in the tachometer also moves into the READYposition.
> The engine will restart if you press the clutch pedal. The indicator light turns off.
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
> Press and hold the brake pedal until the vehicle has stopped. The o indicator light appearsin the instrument cluster once the engine stops automatically.
> The engine starts again when you remove your
foot from the brake pedal. The indicator light turns off.
Gi) Tips
-- Press the brake pedal during a Stop phase to keep the vehicle from rolling.

D_Incertain countries.
80

Driving

-- The ignition will turn off if you press the START ENGINE STOP] button during a Stop phase.
-- Applies to: automatic transmission: You can control if the engine will stop or not by reducing or increasing the amount of force you use to press the brake pedal. For example, if you only lightly press on the brake pedal in stop-and-go traffic or when turning, the engine will not switch off when the vehicle is stationary. If you press the brake pedal harder, the engine will switch off.
Starting and stopping the engine automatrel,
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
The system checksif certain conditions are met before and during the Stop phase, and determines if the engine stops and howlong it re-
mains stopped. For example, if power usage is
high, the engine will not be stopped. Along with other conditions, the following factors influence the automatic engine start or stop:
-- Environmental conditions (slopes, inclines, elevation, temperature)
-- Battery (charge status, temperature, power usage)
-- Engine temperature -- Assist systems -- Driving behavior
Depending on the engine, the @y indicator light may appear if the engine is not stopped.
Sete Mim Lele iace100
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
If you leave the vehicle during a Stop phase, the engine can be restarted within approximately 30 seconds if the doors are closed, the driver's safety belt is fastened, and the brake pedal is pressed.
If you leave the vehicle longer than 30 seconds, the ignition will switch off automatically to prevent the vehicle battery from draining. If this is the case, the message Start/stop system: ignition will be switched off in 30s will appear in the instrumentcluster and, if the low beam head-

lights are switched on, the parking lights will switch on instead. The parking lights will switch off after approximately 30 minutes or when you lock the vehicle.
The ignition also switches off when you lock the vehicle from the outside during a Stop phase.
If the Start/Stop system has not turned off the engine or if you have switched the Start/Stop system off manually, the engine will continue to run and the ignition will not switch off automatically.
ZA WARNING
To reduce the risk of asphyxiation, never allow the engine to run in confined spaces.
G) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
If you leave the vehicle with the "D/S"or "R" selector lever position engaged, the parking brake is automatically set.
Manually switching the Start/Stop system off and on
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
The (A)oFbutton is located above the selector lever in the center console.
> Press (A)oF to switch on or off. The LED in the
button turns on when the function is switched off.
@ Tips If you switch the system off during a Stop phase, the engine will start again automatically.
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
Start/stop system: deactivated. Please start engine manually
This message appears when specific conditions are not met during a Stop phase. The Start/Stop system will not be able to restart the engine. The engine mustbe started with the
START ENGINE STOP] button.

8W0012721BG

Driving
Start/stop system: malfunction! Function unavailable. Please contact Service There is a malfunction in the Start/Stop system.
Drive the vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Service Facility as soon as possible to have the malfunction corrected.
Electromechanical parking brake
éR|g
S=3Ey
Fig. 89 Center console: parking brake
Your vehicle is equipped with an electromechani-
cal parking brake @) > fig. 89. The parking brake
is designed to prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally and replaces the hand brake.
Setting/manually releasing the parking brake > Pull the switch to set the parking brake. The
LED in the switch turns on. The Zin / © indicator light also turns on. > To release the parking brake manually, press the brake or accelerator pedal while the ignition is switched on, and press the ©) switch at the same time. The LED in the button and the indicator light will turn off.
Releasing the parking brake automatically Requirement: the doors must be closed and the driver's safety belt must be fastened. > To start driving and release the parking brake
automatically, press the accelerator pedal as usual. In addition to releasing the parking brake automatically, other convenience and safety functions are available when you start driving > page 83, Starting to drive.

Preventing the automatic parking brake release
The vehicle could begin rolling unintentionally when the parking brakeis released if the vehicle is ona hill or towing a trailer.
> To prevent the parking brake from releasing automatically, pull and hold the switch and press the accelerator pedal. The parking brake remains set and preventsthe vehicle from rolling backward.
> You can release the switch again once you are sure that you are giving enough driving force to the wheels by pressing the accelerator pedal.
Emergencybraking function
You can use the emergencybraking function in an emergencysituation, or if the standard brakes are malfunctioning or the pedal is obstructed.
> Pull and hold the switch. >» As soon as you release the ©) switch or acceler-
ate, the braking stops.
Pulling and holding the switch while driving the vehicle activates the emergency braking function. The hydraulic brake system will brakeall four wheels. The braking effectis similar to heavy
braking > A\.
To reducethe risk of activating the emergency braking by mistake, a warning tone (buzzer) sounds when the switch is pulled. Emergency braking stops as soon as the switch is released or the accelerator pedal is pressed.
Parking
> Press the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. > Pull the © switch to set the parking brake. > Applies to: automatic transmission: Select the
"P" selector lever position. > Turn the engine off > A\. > Applies to: manual transmission: Engage 1st
gear. > Turn the steering wheel when parking on in-
clines so that the wheelswill roll into the curb if the vehicle starts moving.

ZA\ WARNING
-- Never accelerate or release the clutch pedal carelessly when a gear or a selector lever position (automatic transmission) is engaged while the vehicle is stationary and the en-
gine is running. Pressing the accelerator
pedal will cause the vehicle to move, and
this could result in an accident.
Emergency braking should only be used in an emergency, when the when the standard brake pedal is malfunctioning or obstructed. During emergency braking, your vehicle will brake similar to heavy braking. ESC and the associated components (ABS, ASR, EDL) cannot overcome the lawsof physics. A full brake application while driving through curves or in poor road or weather conditions can cause the vehicle to slide or the rear of
the vehicle to swerve, which increases the
risk of an accident.
If the power supply fails, you cannot set the parking brake onceit is released. If this is the case, stop the vehicle on level ground and secureit by engaging 1st gear (manual transmission)or selecting the "P" selector lever position (automatic transmission). See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Alwaysset the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, even if for a short period of time. If the parking brakeis not set, the vehicle could roll away, increasing the risk of an accident.
If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition off and take the vehicle key with you. This applies particularly when children remain in the vehicle. Otherwise, children could start the engine, release the parking brake, or operate electrical equipment such as power
windows,which increasesthe risk of an acci-
dent.
No one, especially children, should remain in the vehicle when it is locked. Locked doors makeit moredifficult for emergency work-
ers to enter the vehicle, which puts lives at
risk.

Driving
C@) Note
Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running, because this increases the risk of an accident.
@) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
When stopping at a traffic signal or stopping in city traffic, you can set the parking brake manually. The vehicle does not have to be held with the brake pedal. The parking brake eliminates the tendency to creep when a selector lever position is engaged. As soon as you press the accelerator pedal, the parking brake releases automatically and the vehicle starts to move > page 83.
(i) Tips
-- Occasional noises when the parking brakeis set and released are normal and are not a cause for concern.
-- The parking brake goes through a self-test cycle at regular intervals when the vehicleis stopped. Any noises associated with this are normal.
-- If there is a power failure, the parking brake will notsetif it is released, and it will not release if it is set > A\. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Starting to drive
Various convenience and safety functions may be available when the vehicle begins driving, depending on vehicle equipment.
Starting on hills with the parking brake set
Requirement: the doors must be closed and the driver's safety belt must be fastened.
> To start driving comfortably when on hill, set the parking brake and begin driving as usual. The braking force of the parking brake does not release automatically until the wheels build up enough driving force.

8W0012721BG

Driving

Starting on hills with hill hold assist
Hill hold assist makes it easier to start on hills.
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed and the engine must be running.
> To activatehill hold assist, press and hold the brake pedal for several seconds. The vehicle
mustbe facing uphill.
After releasing the brake pedal, the braking power is maintained briefly > A\ to prevent the vehicle from rolling back when starting. This allows you to begin driving moreeasily.
ZA WARNING
-- If you do not begin driving immediately or the engine stalls after releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle may begin toroll backward. Press the brake pedal or set the parking brake immediately.
-- The intelligent technology ofhill hold assist cannot overcome the limitations imposed by natural physical laws. The increased comfort offered by hill hold assist should not cause you to take safety risks.
-- Hill hold assist cannot hold the vehicle in place on all hills (for example, if the ground is slippery or icy).
--To reducethe risk of an accident, always makesurethe vehicle is situated safely while stationary.
Driving offroad
General information
Applies to: allroad
The Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) functions are enhanced for driving offroad. Offroad mode can be activated when driving in situations whereslippage or a differential lock function is necessary > page 139. The hill descent assist is also available, which automatically brakes the vehicle to maintain a constant speed > page 140. In addition, your Audi provides continuous all wheel drive.
However, your Audi is not an offroad vehicle.
Onlydrive in terrain that is suitable for the vehi-

cle and your driving ability. Never take any unnecessary risks!
After driving offroad
-- After driving offroad, remove branches and oth-
er debris from the radiator grille, underbody, and wheels. Look especially for foreign objects (such as stones) that may be stuck in the tire tread. -- Clean the vehicle body and underbody and inspect the vehicle for possible damage. -- Clean the windows, headlights, tail lights and the license plateif they are dirty. -- Perform a braketest (especially after driving through water).
Z\ WARNING
-- Be especially aware and attentive when driving under difficult conditions. Vehicle damage and injuries may occur when driving at excessively high speeds or with incorrect driving maneuvers.
-- Always adjust your speed and driving style
to the roads, terrain, traffic and weather conditions. Drive especially slowly if there is
low visibility when offroad. -- Please note that the wheels can spin more
and the vehicle can swerve when in offroad mode, especially when the road is slippery or has loose surface material. -- Driving stability is reduced when in offroad mode.
@) For the sake of the environment
Avoid harming the environment and show consideration for nature.
G) Tips
Only drive whereit is permitted and always stay on the provided roads and paths.

Driving

Driver messages
Applies to: allroad
Thereis only one right wayto drive in difficult conditions: slowly and with caution!
Observethe following when driving on unpaved roads:
> Only drivein terrain that is suitable for the vehicle and your driving ability. Never take any unnecessaryrisks!
> Drive slowly and carefully. > Pay attention to the ground clearance of your
vehicle. > Activate the offroad mode as needed
> page 139. >» Use the hill descent assist when driving down
steep hills > page 140.
Difficult terrain
When driving in unfamiliar areas and offroad, drive slowly and keep on the watch for unexpect-
ed obstacles (such as potholes, rocks, tree stumps, etc.).
To prevent the vehicle from bottoming out and to reduce the risk of underbody damage, you should drive across uneven ground on only one side of the vehicle so that only two of your wheels cross the uneven area, instead of driving across the center of the uneven area with all four wheels.
Drive quickly through sandy or marshyoff-road sections and do notstop,if at all possible.
Driving through water
Also read the information found in > page 76.
Automatic transmission
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
The automatic transmission is controlled electronically. The transmission shifts up or down automatically depending on which drive program is selected.
When a moderatedriving style is used, the transmission selects the most economical driving mode. The transmission upshifts at a lower RPM

and downshifts at a higher RPM to improve fuel efficiency.
The transmission switches to a sporty mode after a kick-down or when the driver uses a sporty driving style characterized by quick accelerator pedal movements, heavy acceleration, frequent changes in speed, and traveling at the maximum speed.
If desired, the driver can also select the gears
manually (tiptronic mode) > page 88.
S tronic transmission
The S tronic is a dual-clutch transmission. Power is transferred using two clutches that work independently from one another. They replace the torque converter used in conventional automatic transmissions and allow the vehicle to accelerate without a noticeable interruption in traction.
tiptronic transmission
In the tiptronic transmission, power is transfer-
red by a torque converter.
Selecting a selector lever position
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
©xS==oag

Fig. 90 Center console: selector lever

The current selector lever position is shown next
to the selector lever > fig. 90. The current selector lever position is also shown in the instrument cluster display.

> You may need to release the selector lever lock

depending on which selector lever position is

selected and which one you wouldlike to select.

> To do this, press the release button @ on the

selector lever > fig. 90.

8W0012721BG

Driving

> To engage the nearest selector lever position, movethe selector lever forward or back until you feel the first pressure point. The selector lever will return toits original position.
> To shift beyond the nearest selector lever position, move the selector lever past the pressure point into the desired position. The selector lever will return to its original position.
For example, you can skip over the "N"position if you wouldlike to go directly from "D" into "R".
Selector lever lock
The selector lever lock reduces the risk of selecting a position unintentionally, which can cause the vehicle to roll. When engaging some selector lever positions, you mustpress the release button on the selector lever and/or press the brake pedal > fig. 90.
You mustpress the brake pedal to engage a selector lever position when the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary.
You do not haveto press the brake pedal if you shift from "D" to "R" within one second. This allowsyou to "rock" the vehicle to free it when it is stuck.
P - Park
This selector lever position prevents the vehicle from rolling. Only shift into park when the vehicle is stationary > A\. To select the "P" selector lever position, press the "P" button (2) on the selector lever > fig. 90. P appears nextto the selector lever.
Applies to: vehicles with S tronic transmission: The parking lock can only be released when the ignition is switched on and the brake pedal is pressed. To release the parking lock, press the brake pedal, press the release button @ on the selector lever, and select the desired position > fig. 90. The engine mustalso be started in order to engage the "D" or "R" selector lever position.
Applies to: vehicles with tiptronic transmission: The parking lock can only be released when the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed. To release the parking lock, press the brake ped-

al, press the release button ® on the selector
lever, and select the desired position > fig. 90.
"P" engages automatically if you switch the en-
gine off while the selector lever is in"D", "E","S", "R", or manual mode.
If you switch the engine off when the "N"selector
lever position is selected, the transmission re-
mains in "N" for approximately 30 minutes and then "P" is engaged. The vehicle is not secured from rolling in the "N"selector lever position, so you need toset the parking brake ®) > page 82.
You mustuse the parking lock emergency release before towing the vehicle > page 91.
R - Reverse
The reverse gear is engaged in this position. Only select reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running at idle speed > A. To engage the "R" selector lever position, press the brake pedal, press the release button @ on the
selector lever, and select the "R" position
> fig. 90.
A tone will sound when the reverse gear is engaged.
N - Neutral (idle)
The transmission is in idle in this position. To en-
gage the "N"selector lever position, press the release button @ on the selector lever and shift into the "N"position > fig. 90.
If you switch the engine off when the "N"selector lever position is selected, the transmission remains in "N" for approximately 30 minutes and then "P" is engaged.
You cannotselect the "N" position when the ignition is switched off. When driving through an automatic car wash, first select the "N" position and then turn the engine off.
For safety reasons, the vehicle cannot be locked when the transmission is in the "N" position.
D/S - Driving forward
When the transmission is in the "D/S" position, it
can be operated either in the normal "D" mode or in the "S" sport mode. Movethe selector lever >

Driving

back to engage the "S" sport mode. You can only select the "S" selector lever position when the "D" or "E" position is selected. To select the "D" or "E" position again when "S" is engaged, movethe selector lever back > A\. To shift from "N" to "D" when traveling at speeds below 1 mph (2 km/h), press the brake pedal and shift into the "D"position > A.
In the normal mode "D", the transmission automatically selects the correct gear. It depends on engine load, vehicle speed and driving style.
Select the sport mode "S"for sporty driving. The vehicle makes full use of the engine's power. Shifting may become noticeable when accelerating.
The "S"selector lever position engages automatically when you select the dynamic mode in drive select*.
ZA WARNING
Read and follow all WARNINGS.
-- Before starting to drive, check if the desired selector lever position is displayed next to the selector lever.
-- The vehicle can roll even if the ignition is switched off.
-- Power is still transmitted to the wheels when the engine is running atidle. To prevent the vehicle from "creeping", you must keep your foot on the brakein all selector lever positions (except "P" and "N") when the engine is running.
-- Before opening the hood, select the "P" selector lever position and set the parking brake. This reducesthe risk of an accident. Alwaysread and follow the applicable warnings > page 309, Working in the engine
compartment.
@® Tips
If you accidentally select "N" while driving, take your foot off the accelerator pedal and wait for the engine to slow down toidle before selecting "D" or "S".

Driving tips
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
Starting the engine
> The "P" or "N" position must be selected.
Starting from a stop
> Press and hold the brake pedal. >» Start the engine > page 78. > Press the locking button @ on the selector lev-
er and select the "D", "E","S" or "R" position
=>page 85. > Wait a momentuntil the transmission shifts.
You will notice a slight movement when the gear engages. > Release the brake pedal and press the accelera-
tor pedal > A\.
Various convenience functions are available for starting on hills > page 83.
Stopping temporarily
> Press the brake pedal to stop the vehicle, for exampleat a traffic light. Do not press the accelerator pedal when doing this.
> To prevent the vehicle from rolling when you start driving, set the parking brake when stop-
ping on steep hills > /\.
>» The parking brake will release automatically and your vehicle will begin to move when the doorsare closed, the driver's safety belt is fas-
tened, and you accelerate as usual.
Stopping or parking
If the selector lever is not in the "P" position when you open the driver's door, the vehicle could roll.
> Press and hold the brake pedal > A\. > Set the parking brake. > To select the "P" selector lever position, press
the "P" button (2) on the selector lever => page 85, fig. 90.
Under certain conditions, such as driving in the mountains, it may be helpful to switch to manual mode temporarily to adapt to the driving conditions manually > page 88.
On hills, set the parking brakefirst and then shift into the "P" position > page 82. This prevents too >

8W0012721BG

B8w-0249

B4M-0063

Driving
much stress from being placed on the locking mechanism.
Z\ WARNING
-- The vehicle can roll even when the engine is switched off.
-- Unintended vehicle movementcan lead to serious injuries.
-- To reducethe risk of an accident, do not
press the accelerator pedal when changing the selector lever position while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. -- To reducethe risk of an accident, never select the "R" or "P" positions while driving. -- Do not inadvertently press the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stationary. Pressing the pedal increasesrisk of accident because the vehicle will move, even if parking brakeis set.

Shifting manually (tiptronic mode)
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
The tiptronic mode allows the driverto shift the gears manually.
Fig. 91 Center console: shifting manually with the selector lever

Hill descent control
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
The hill descent control system assists the driver whendriving downhills.
Hill descent control activates when the transmission is in the "D" or "S" position and you press the brake pedal. The transmission automatically selects a gear thatis suitable for the hill. Hill descent control tries to maintain the speed that was selected at the time of braking, within physical and technical limitations. If maystill be necessary to adjust the speed with the brake pedal.
Hill descent control switchesoff once the hill levels out or if you press the accelerator pedal.
When operating the cruise control system* => page 95, hill descent control is also activated when the speedis set.
Z\WARNING
Hill descent control may not be able to maintain a constant speed under all conditions. Always be ready to apply the brakes.

Fig. 92 Steering wheel: shift paddles*
Shifting with the selector lever
You can shift into tiptronic mode while the vehicle is stationary or while driving.
> To shift into tiptronic mode, push the selector lever from the "D/S"position to the right. As soon as the transmission switches over, the "M" transmission setting will appear in the instrument cluster display.
> To shift up a gear, tap the selector lever forward @) > fig. 91.
> To shift downa gear,tap the selector lever
backward (©).
> To switch tiptronic mode off, push the selector lever back into the "D/S"position.
Shifting with the shift paddles
Applies to: vehicles with shift paddles
You can operate the shift paddles in the "D/S"or "M" selector lever positions.

838

Driving

> To shift up a gear, tap the shift paddle @) > fig. 92.
> To shift down a gear, tap the ©) shift paddle.
> To shift into the lowest gear, hold the © shift
paddle. > If you do not press a shift button within a short
time while in the "D/S"position, the transmission will return to automatic mode. To keep shifting using the shift paddles, move the selector lever to the right out of the "D/S"position. > When you want to shift out of tiptronic mode,
press and hold the G) shift paddle for a longer period of time or move the selector lever back and release it.
The transmission automatically shifts up or down beforecritical engine speed is reached.
The transmission only allows manual shifting when the engine speed is within the permitted range.
G) Tips
-- If you shift to the next lowest gear, the transmission will only shift if the engine will not be over-rewved.
-- With kick-down, the transmission shifts to a
lower gear, depending on vehicle speed and engine speed. -- tiptronic does not work if the transmission is running in emergency mode.
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
Kick-down enables maximum acceleration.
When you pressthe accelerator pedal down beyond the resistance point, the automatic transmission downshifts into a lower gear and the engine utilizes its full power,if the vehicle speed and engine RPM permit. It shifts up into the next higher gear once the maximum permitted engine RPM is reached.
Z\ WARNING
Please note that the wheels could spin on slick or slippery roads when kick-down is active.

Launch control program
Applies to: vehicles with S tronic transmission
The launch control program provides the best possible acceleration when starting from a stop.
Requirement: the engine must be at operating temperature and the steering wheel must not be turned.
> Deactivate the Start/Stop system* > page 81. The LED in the || button turns on.
> Applies to: sedan: when the engine is running, press the |& OFF] button briefly > page 139. The indicator light turns on and the message Stabilization control (ESC): sport. Warning! Restricted stability appears in the instrument cluster display.
> Applies to: allroad: when the engine is running, press the 2 OFF] button briefly > page 139. The Ej indicator light turns on and the message Stabilization control (ESC): offroad. Warning! Reducedstability appears in the instrumentcluster display.
> Pull the selector lever back out of the "D/S" position briefly to select the "S" position or select the Dynamic driving mode in drive select*> page 127.
> Press the brake pedal firmly with your left foot and holdit all the way down for at least one second.
> At the same time, press the gas pedal all the way down with your right foot until the engine reaches and stays at a high RPM level.
> Removeyour foot from the brake pedal within
five seconds > A\.

A WARNING

-- Always adaptyour driving to the traffic flow.

-- Only use the Launch control program when

road and traffic conditions allow it and other

drivers will not be endangered or bothered

by your driving and the vehicle's accelera-

tion.

-- Please note that the drive wheels can spin

and the vehicle can break away when sport

mode/offroad mode is switched on, espe-

cially when the road is slippery.

8W0012721BG

Driving

-- Once the vehicle has started moving, press the |& OFF] button briefly to turn the sport mode/offroad mode off.
@ Tips
-- After accelerating using the Launch Control, the temperature of some vehicle components mayincrease greatly. If that happens, the function will not be available for a few minutes to reducethe risk of damage. After
a cool-down period, Launch Control will be
available again. -- When accelerating using the launch control
program, all vehicle parts are subject to heavy loads. This can lead to increased wear.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
fs} Transmission: too hot. Please stop vehicle
Do not continue driving. Select the "P" selector lever position and contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
fs} Transmission: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle
Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe location and secureit so it does not roll. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
fs} Selector lever: malfunction! You can continue driving. Please contact Service
There is a system malfunction in the transmission. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
fs} P button: malfunction! Auto P when engine off. Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the "P" button on the selector lever. The transmission automatically engages "P" when you switch off the engine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

fl Selector lever: malfunction! Gear change only possible using both paddlelevers. Please contact Service
There is a system malfunction in the transmission. You can continue driving with restricted function. The selector lever is not working. Gears can only be selected by tapping both shift paddles at the same time when the vehicleis stationary > page 88,fig. 92. Pay attention to the selected transmission position in the instrument cluster display. The parking lock engages automatically when you turn off the engine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
i Transmission: please press brake pedal and select gear again
Press the brake pedal and select the desired selector lever position again. You can then continue driving.
fl Transmission: too hot. Please adapt driving style
The transmission temperature has increased significantly. Drive very cautiously or take a break from driving until the temperature returns to the normal range and the indicator light turns off.
fl Transmission: malfunction! You can continue driving. See owner's manual
There is a system malfunction in the transmission. You may continue driving. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility soon to have the malfunction corrected.
i Transmission: malfunction! You can continue driving in D until engineis off
There is a system malfunction in the transmission. The transmission is switching to emergency mode. If you turn the engine off, you will not be able to select any other selector lever positions after starting the engine again. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

B8W-0047

Driving

[@] Transmission: malfunction! You can continue driving with limited function. Please contact Service
There is a system malfunction in the transmission. The transmission is switching to emergency mode. This mode only shifts into certain gears or may no longer shift at all. The engine maystall. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
[Gj Transmission: malfunction! You can continue driving with limited function. No reverse gear
There is a system malfunction in the transmission. The transmission is switching to emergency mode. This mode onlyshifts into certain gears or may no longer shift at all. The engine maystall. You cannot engage the reverse gear. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
fl Danger ofrolling away! P not possible. Please apply parking brake
-- The parking lock was released using the emergency release > page 91. Or
-- The parking lock can no longer be engaged. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Moveselector lever to automatic position
There is a malfunction in the tiptronic mode. End tiptronic mode by pushing the selector lever to the left into the "D/S" position.

Parking lock emergency release
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
xS3=&a s
Fig. 94 Frontcup holder: parking lock emergency release
The emergencyrelease is located in the front cup holder under a cover. Read and follow the important instructions about towing > page 364.
Releasing the parking lock using the emergencyrelease
> To prevent your vehicle from rolling away, set the parking brake = page 82.
> Removethe rubber mat. > Pry the cover off the opening using the screw-
driver from the vehicle tool kit > fig. 93. > Insert the socket wrench from the vehicle tool
kit into the opening > fig. 94. > Turn the socket wrench clockwise @) until it
stops and pressit downward () until it locksinto place. > Leave the socket wrench inserted. Resetting the parking lock > Press the brake pedal and start the engine. > Keep the brake pedal pressed and engage the following selector lever positions one after the
other: "N","D" and back to "N". > Turn the engine off again.

8W0012721BG

Driving
> Grasp the socket wrench with both hands and carefully pull it upward to remove.
> Reinsert the cover and rubber mat. If the parking lock is released with the emergency release, the fs} indicator light turns on in the instrumentcluster and "N"is engaged. The message Danger ofrolling away! P not possible. Please apply parking brake also appears.
Z\WARNING
-- The parking lock must be released using the emergency release before towing the vehicle.
-- The parking lock mayonly be released using the emergencyrelease if the parking brake is set. If it is not working, secure the vehicle from rolling using the brake pedal or other suitable means, such as blocking a front and a rear wheel. An unsecured vehicle mayroll away, which increases the risk of an accident.
-- Only activate the emergencyrelease while ona level surface or a slight slope.
--To reducethe risk of an accident, you must not drive when the emergencyrelease is activated.
@) Note Due to the risk of damage, carefully remove the socket wrench when you resetthe parking lock.
92

Trailer towing
Driving with a trailer
General information
Your vehicle is primarily intended for transporting people and luggage. However,if you drive
with a trailer, follow the technical requirements,
the operation and driving tips, and the legal regulations.
Driving with a trailer affects the vehicle's fuel consumption, performance and wear. It also requires higher concentration from the driver.
Z\ WARNING
Do not transport any peoplein a trailer due to the risk offatal injury.
Technical requirements
Certain requirements must be met when towing a trailer.
Trailer hitch
Only use a trailer hitch with a removableball hitch mount and ball hitch. The trailer hitch must be permitted for the vehicle, the trailer and the permitted total weight of the trailer being pulled. Above all, it must be securely and safely attached to the vehicle trailer.
Never mount a trailer hitch on the bumper. The trailer hitch must be mounted in a way that does not impair the function of the bumper. Do not make any changes to the exhaust system and the brake system.
Check regularlyif the trailer hitch is securely mounted. Alwaysfollow the instructions given by the trailer hitch manufacturer.
Trailer brakes
If the trailer has its own brake system, then follow the manufacturer specifications. However, the brake system on the trailer must never be connected to the vehicle brake system.

Trailer towing
Engine cooling system
Driving with a trailer means a higher load on the engine and the cooling system. The cooling system must be designed for additional load and contain enough coolant >@.
() Note
Longer inclines cannot be driven without a suitable cooling system, especially if the outside temperatures are high. Otherwise,this increases the risk of engine damage.

Operating instructions
Several things must be noted when towing a trailer.

Towing capacity
Your vehicle can only be operated with class 1 or class 2 trailers.

Load distribution
Poor cargo load and distribution can negatively impact vehicle handling. Load the trailer based on the following criteria as much as possible:
-- Store objects in the vehicle luggage compartment,if possible. The vehicle should always carry the heaviest possible load and the trailer should have the lightest possible load.
-- Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heavy objects are as close to the axle as possible.
-- Secure objects so that they do notslide. -- Utilize the maximum permitted tongue weight
if possible.

Tires

Set the tire pressure on your vehicle for a "full
load"; see the tire pressure sticker > page 332. If necessary, also adjust the tire pressure on the trailer according to the manufacturer's specifications.

The trailer and the vehicle should be equipped

with winter tires when driving in winter tempera-

tures.

8W0012721BG

Trailer towing
Outside mirrors
If you cannotsee the traffic behind the trailer with the standard exterior mirrors, then you must attach additional exterior mirrors. Adjust them so you have a sufficient visibility behind you.
Exterior lighting
Follow the legal regulations regarding the lighting equipment on your trailer. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.
Before you start driving, check all lighting equipment on the trailer whileit is hitched to the vehicle.
The headlight range control automatically adjusts the light range of the headlights.
Safety chains
Makesure the safety chains are correctly applied when pulling a trailer. The chains should hang enough so that the trailer can drive around
curves. However, they must not touch the ground.
©) Note
Attachmentsretrofitted on the vehicle may cause damage, especially on the trailer hitch ball head. In cases of damage, havethe function checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
G) Tips
-- Block the wheels with chocks when parking on inclinesif the trailer is loaded.
-- Having the vehicle inspected between the inspection intervals is recommended if you tow trailer frequently.
-- Avoid driving with a trailer during the vehicle break-in period.

Driving with a trailer
Driving with a trailer requires extra caution.
Speed
Adhereto the legal speed limits. Follow the legal regulations specific to the country.
As the speed increases,the driving stability of the trailer decreases. Therefore you should not exceed the maximum legal speed limit when
there are unfavorable road, weather, and/or wind
conditions. This especially applies when driving downhill.
Hill
When you start driving uphill or downhill, trailers may tilt or sway sooner than when driving ona level surface. If small swaying movements have already occurred, you can stabilize the trailer by firmly braking immediately. Never try to "straighten out" the trailer by accelerating.
Downshift before driving on hills to utilize the engine braking effect > A\.
Brakes
When using a trailer with overrun brakes, first brake gently then quickly. This reduces the risk of jerking while braking if the trailer wheels lock up.
Engine coolant temperature
Pay attention specifically to the coolant temperature display when there are high outside temperatures, and when driving on long inclines = page 14. Shift to a higher gear in a timely man-
ner.
ZA\ WARNING
Constant braking causes the brakes to overheat and can substantially reduce braking performance, increase braking distance, or cause completefailure of the brake system.

Assist systems
Speed warning system
Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system
The speed warning system helps you to stay below a specified maximum speed that canbeset, changed or deleted in the Infotainment system.
The speed warning system warns you if you are exceeding the maximum speed that you haveset. A warning tone will sound as soon as your speed exceeds the stored value slightly. The ee indicator light and a message appear in the instrument cluster display at the same time. The ol
indicator light and the message turn off if the speed falls back below the stored maximum speed.
Setting a threshold is recommended if you would like to be reminded when you reach a certain maximum speed. Situations where you may want to do so include driving in a country with a general speed limit or if there is a specified maximum speed for winter tires.
Setting the warning threshold
Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Speed warning > Manual.
G) Tips
Regardless of the speed warning system, you should always monitor your speed using the speedometer and makesureyou are following the legal speed limit.
Cruise control system

Assist systems
ZA WARNING
-- Alwayspay attention to the traffic around your vehicle when the cruise control system is in operation. As the driver, you are always responsible for controlling your vehicle speed and the distance between your vehicle and other vehicles.
-- For safety reasons, cruise control should not
be used in the city, in stop-and-go traffic, on
winding roads, and when road conditions are
poor (such as ice, fog, gravel, heavy rain, and conditions that could lead to hydroplaning), because this increases the risk of an accident. -- Switch the cruise control off temporarily when driving in turning lanes, highwayexits, or in construction zones.
--To reduce the risk of an accident, you should
only resume the stored speedif it is suitable for the current traffic conditions.
() Note
Before driving downhill a long distance ona steep hill, decrease your speed and select a lower gear. This makes use of the engine braking effect and reduces the load placed on the brakes.
@) Tips
The brake lights turn on when the brakesare applied automatically.
Switching the system on
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system

8W0012721BG
BFV-0220

Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
The cruise control system assists the driver in maintaining a constant speed above approximately 15 mph (20 km/h). The system maintains the desired speed by braking and accelerating.

Fig. 95 Lever: switching on the cruise control system
Requirement: switch the ignition on.

Assist systems

> To switch the system on, pull the lever toward you to position ().
The Gg or 88] indicator light and the corresponding message will appear in the instrument cluster.
ZX WARNING
If the brakes are malfunctioning (for example, overheating) while the cruise control system is switched on, it may shut off automatically.
Preselecting or activating a cruise control Cy tst-t)
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
When the vehicle is stationary, you can preselect the cruise control speed or activate the speed while driving.
Requirement: the system must be switched on.
> To preselect a cruise control speed when the ve-
hicle is stationary, tap the lever toward @)/G)
=> page 95,fig. 95. > To activate the cruise control speed, pull the
lever toward position @ while driving, or > To set the current driving speed as the cruise
control speed, press the button (@) on the lever.
The active cruise control speed is indicated with the CRUISE] or kl indicator light in the instrument cluster.
An additional indicator appears in the head-up display".

Overriding or deactivating the cruise control speed
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
You can override or deactivate the cruise control system. When you deactivate the system, your cruise control speed will be stored and you can resume that speed.
Requirement: the system must be switched on and activated.
Overriding
> To temporarily override the cruise control speed, press the accelerator pedal.
> Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system will adjust back to the stored cruise control speed.
If you override the cruise control system for a long period of time, the cruise control system will be deactivated. The system indicator light will turn off and the cruise control speed will be stored.
Deactivating
> To deactivate the cruise control speed, press the lever toward(2) (not locked into place) => page 95, fig. 95.
> Press the brake pedal.
Z\ WARNING
Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal could override the cruise control. This will prevent braking interventions by the system.

Changing the cruise control speed
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed in small increments, tap the lever up to the first level toward @/@) > page 95,fig. 95.
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed in larger increments, tap the lever up to the
secondlevel toward @)/G).
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed continuously, tap and hold the lever at the first
or secondlevel toward (#)/C).

Seema
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
When you switch the system off completely, the cruise control speed will be deleted.
Requirement: the system must be switched on.
> To switch the system off, press the lever toward @ (locked into place) > page 95,fig. 95, or
> Switch the ignition off.

Assist systems

Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
ICRUISE| / Speed control system: currently unavailable. See owner's manual If the indicator light turns on and this message appears, the cruise control system has been deactivated. There is a temporary malfunction, for example the brakes are overheating. Switch the cruise control system on again later.
Camera-based traffic sign recognition
Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition
Fig. 96 Instrumentcluster: traffic sign recognition
Fig. 97 Windshield: camera windowfor traffic sign recognition
Traffic sign recognition assists you when driving by displaying detected speed limits or signs prohibiting passing in the instrument cluster display > fig. 96. Within the limits of the system, the legal speed limits in school zones are detected and displayed. General information Traffic sign recognition can detect standard speed limit signs that are within the camera's vis-

ual field. With assistance from navigation data,
detected speed limits are evaluated and shown in the display. The traffic sign for the current detected speed limit will blink in the displayif you exceed the warning threshold set in the Infotainment system > page 98.
The traffic sign recognition is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:
-- When visibility is poor, such as in snow,rain,
fog or heavy spray -- When thereis glare, for example from oncom-
ing traffic or the sun -- At high speeds -- If the camera's visual field > fig. 97 is covered,
for example by dirt or stickers. For information on cleaning, see > page 342. -- If the traffic signs are completely or partially covered, for exampleby trees, snow,dirt or other vehicles -- if speed traffic signs do not conform to the standards -- If traffic signs are damaged or bent -- If traffic signs are displayed on sign holders with electronic signs -- if the traffic signs or the configuration of the road have changed (navigation data is no longer up-to-date)
ZA WARNING
Pay attention to traffic and the area around your vehicle when traffic sign recognition is turned on. The traffic signs installed on the road always take precedence over the display. The driver is always responsible for assessing the traffic situation. -- Under some circumstances, traffic sign rec-
ognition may not detect traffic signs correctly or detect them atall. As a result, the system maynot display the correct speed limit or any speed limit. -- Traffic sign recognition does not adapt your vehicle's speed to match the speedlimit! -- The display in the instrument cluster is based on the units of measurementused for speed in the country where the vehicleis being operated. As a result, the display 50 in

8W0012721BG
B4M-0090

Assist systems

the instrument cluster can mean either km/h or mph, depending on the country.
Operating
Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition ©aa|=a=.q
Fig. 98 Instrumentcluster: additional display
Accessing traffic sign recognition
> Select: the first tab > Traffic signs. Setting a speed warning You can set a warning threshold down to 10 mph (15 km/h). The traffic sign for the current detected speed limit will blink in the display if you exceed the set threshold. > Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] but-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Speed warning> Traffic sign based warning. Additional display If a view other than the traffic sign recognition is selected in the instrument cluster display, the speed limit will be shownin another display => fig. 98. The current applicable speed limit will
be shown there, if possible within the limits of
the system.
G) Tips
-- An additional indicator appears in the headup display*.
-- Your speed warning settings are stored automatically and assigned to the vehicle key in use.

Messages
Applies to: vehicles with camera-basedtraffic sign recognition
Traffic sign recognition: currently unavailable. Camera view limited due to surroundings
Function currently unavailable. Camera view restricted due to surroundings
This message appearsif the camera's visual field is covered > page 97, fig. 97. The system will switch itself off.
Traffic sign recognition: currently limited. See owner's manual
This message appearsif there is a malfunction in the navigation system, for example. The speed limit display is limited, which increases the risk of an incorrect display.
Traffic sign-based speed warning: currently unavailable. See owner's manual
There will be no warning when the set threshold is exceeded.
No traffic sign information available
There is no valid navigation data and no speed limits were detected. Or there is a recommended speed but there is not a speed limit (for example driving on and off the expressway).
Malfunction! See owner's manual
The system maynot function correctly so it has been switched off. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Function notavailable in this country
The vehicle is in a country where the function is not available.

Assist systems

Lap timer
Introduction
Appliesto: vehicles with lap timer
You can measure and analyze lap times with the lap timer in the display.
Opening the lap timer
> Open the first Vehicle tab (trip computer) using the [<>] button on the multifunction steering wheel.
> Select on the multifunction steering wheel: left control button > Lap times.
Operating the lap timer
> On the multifunction steering wheel, turn the
left thumbwheel (7) > page 15 until the desired menu item is displayed in the instrument clus-
ter. > Press the left thumbwheel to confirm the selec-
tion.
ZA WARNING
Your focus should always be on driving your vehicle safely. As the driver, you have complete responsibility for safety in traffic. Only use the functions such as the lap timer in such a way that you always maintain complete control over your vehiclein all traffic situations.
@) Tips
You can retrieve information from the trip computer while the lap timer stopwatch is running.
ey meatal Ll)
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
Requirement: the lap timer must be open => page 99.
Timing laps
> To start timing manually, select Start lap 1 in the menu.
> To start timing automatically as soon as you begin to drive, select Drive off to start lap 1 or Start by driving off in the menu.

> To measurethe lap time, select New lap in the menu. This starts timing the next lap at the same time.
After completing a lap, the difference between the last lap and the previous bestlap time will be indicated with a a"i~"n or ay"+n".
Pausing timing and displaying a split time
> To insert a pause iy select Pause in the menu. > To resume timing, select Resume in the menu. > To display a split time, select Split time in the
menu. The split time appearsfor approximately 10 seconds in the instrument cluster. The timing of the current lap continues.
Resetting timing
>» Using the multifunction steering wheel, select Reset times in the menu.
@ Tips --A maximum of 99 lap times can be measured. --If timing is paused, you can continue it later even if you switch the ignition off. -- Saved lap times cannotbe individually deleted from the total results. -- The saved lap timer values will remain after switching the ignition off.

Lap statistics
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer

Displaying lap statistics
You can display the number oflaps driven, the
fastest lap "+", the slowest lap un "--", and the aver-
age time "®"in the instrument cluster.
> On the multifunction steering wheel, select the left control button > Lap statistics or Statistics.
> Turn the thumbwheel down or up to display the individual lap times.
> To return to the lap timing that was begun, press the left thumbwheel.

Resetting lap statistics

> On the multifunction steering wheel, select:

the right control button > Resetstatistics.

8W0012721BG

Assist systems

@ Tips
The lap statistics list the lap times for the last 30 laps. The fastest and slowestlap time out of up to 99 measured lapsare also displayed.
Predictive efficiency assist
The predictive efficiency assist helps the driver to drive with anticipation and therefore helps to save fuel. The system accessespredictive trip data (including speed limits, hills, and the angle of curves) from the navigation system*. Information from the camera-based traffic sign recognition* is also applied to recognizetraffic signs => page 97.
The messages displayed depend on the navigation data* being up-to-date and the correct identification by the traffic sign recognition".
When adaptive cruise control* is switched off, the predictive efficiency assist only provides notifications without controlled interventions. See => page 100, Predictive messages(efficiency assist).
When adaptivecruise control" is switched on, the system responds to upcoming situations auto-
matically. See > page 101, Predictive control (efficiency assist).
Predictive messages (efficiency assist)
Applies to: vehicles with predictiveefficiency assist
Indicator in the instrumentcluster display
Predictive messages appear in the instrument cluster display to show the driver the appropriate time to coast when a situation ahead requires you to drive at a lower speed.
The messages are only shown if the cruise control system* or adaptive cruise control* is switched off.
An additional indicator appears in the head-up display".

Symbol
~»

Meaning
Removeyour foot from the accelerator pedal to slow down, because there is a situation ahead that requires a lower speed.

If you see Driver assistancein the instrument cluster display, the following symbolswill indicate which situation the system is currently reacting to.

Symbol MPH km/h

Meaning Speed limit Speed limit

Jik TE

Intersection

a~cOa

Traffic circle

If there are multiple situations, then a sequence of these situations will appear in the display.

ZA\ WARNING
Pay attention totraffic and the area around your vehicle when the efficiency assist is switched on. The driver is always responsible for assessing the traffic situation.

(i) Tips

-- The wording of the message mayvary depending on the driving mode setin drive select* > page 126 and the current selector lever position (automatic transmission*). No messages are displayed when in the "S" selector lever position or in Dynamic mode.
-- When a routeis planned using the navigation system*, then system displays messages based on an assumed route. Without route guidance, the system displays messages based on an assumed route.
-- There will not be a message for every situa-
tion ahead, for exampleif there is not
enough distance remaining to react to the situation.
-- No messagesare displayed when at speeds under 20 mph (30 km/h).

100

8W0012721BG
Jil
T E

Assist systems

Predictive control (efficiency assist)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control and predictive efficiency assist
Fig. 99 Instrumentcluster: predictive control
Description The predictive control ) uses the map information from the navigation system in order to react proactively when driving. Information from the camera-based traffic sign recognition* is also applied to recognize traffic signs > page 97. When coming up to areas with speedlimits or changes in the course of the road (such as curves,intersections or traffic circles), the system brakes automatically and then accelerates back up to the set speed. Overriding control The driver can override the predictive control at any time by pressing the accelerator or brake pedal. If the system changes the vehicle speed to adaptto speed limits, you can change the speed using the lever > page 106,fig. 106. Always switch off the predictive control in the following situations: -- When increased attention is needed from the
driver -- In poor weather conditions such as snow or
heavy rain -- When driving on roads in poor condition Indicator in the instrumentcluster display When switching on the adaptive cruise control for the first time, a message will appear in the status line to indicateif predictive control is available.

The BE symbol appears when the system is regulating the speed to match a speedlimit. If this is the case, the system is regulating a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). The speed is then taken over by the adaptive cruise control. The speed in the speedometer LED ring adjusts to the speed to be maintained > page 105, fig. 105. The faaEN => fig. 99 symbol appears when there is an adap-
tation to the route ahead.

If you are in the Driver assistancedisplay in the instrument cluster, then the following symbols will indicate which occurrence the system is cur-
rently responding to:

Symbol
MPH km/h
i

Meaning
Speed limit Speed limit
Curve

Intersection

N©W

Traffic circle

Z\ WARNING

-- Read the warnings on > A in Generalinformation on page 103 and on > A in Description on page 97.
-- Pay attention to traffic and the area around your vehicle when predictive control is switched on. The driver is always responsible for assessing the traffic situation.
--The system does not consider "right of way" rules and does not respond totraffic lights, so lack of driver attention in these situations can increase the risk of an accident.
-- The system only considerstraffic signs that give a speedlimit.
-- The permitted speed can be exceeded if the adaptation to a speed limit is incorrect. The driver is responsible for adhering to the permitted speed.
--The speed when driving through curves may be different from what you as a driver would

D_ This is not available in some countries.

101

Assist systems
do. Brake the vehicle yourself when needed to reduce the risk of an accident.
Gi) Tips
--If a speed limit is detected, the stored speed is also adjusted in the speedometer LED line when the adaptivecruise control is not active.
-- The adaptation by the system depends on the driving mode setin drive select*.
-- Switching off predictive control, for example when driving in Low traffic zones, does not cause the adaptive cruise control to switch off.
-- After switching on the ignition, the system initially adjusts to a speed of 80 mph (130 km/h) when driving onto highways without a speed limit. Then the system adjusts to the last speed stored by the driver.
-- There is no adaptation to speed limits when driving through highwayinterchanges and when driving on or off the expressway.
-- There is no predictive control at speed limits under 20 mph (30 km/h).
-- If a speed limit is only detected by the camera and the actual speed is significantly higher, then the speedlimit will blink in the display until you have reached the required speed > page 98.
-- Incorrect values from the camera-based traffic sign recognition* or outdated navigation system map data can lead to incorrect or implausible control.
-- When route guidanceis switched on, the
system adaptsto the route provided by the navigation system. Driving without route guidanceor leaving a route can result in implausible control. -- The system switches off when outside of a road system thatis recorded in the navigation system map data.

Settings in the Infotainment system
Applies to: vehicles with predictive efficiency assist
Predictive messages*
> In the Infotainment system, select: [MENU button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Efficiency assist.
Predictive messages are shown when this function is switched on.
Predictive control*
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Audi adaptive cruise control > Predictive control.
Set speed limit - when this function is switched on, the system adjusts to the speed limits. This can also be done with at tolerance, if desired. In this scenario, you mayfall below or exceed the set speed in favor of increased efficiency.
Adaptation to route ahead - when this function is switched on, the system adapts to the route ahead, such as reducing the speed when driving around curves.
@ Tips
No predictive messages are shown in vehicles without a navigation system.
Audi adaptive cruise control
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control

B4m-0091

Fig. 100 Detection range

102

Assist systems

The adaptive cruise control system is a combination of speed and distance regulation. It assists the driver by both regulating the speed and maintaining a distance to the vehicle driving ahead, within the limits of the system. If the system detects a vehicle driving ahead, the adaptive cruise control can brake and accelerate your vehicle. This increases driving comfort during long trips on highways and in stop-and-go traffic (automatic transmission*).
What can adaptivecruise control do?
The adaptive cruise control system uses video,ra-
dar, ultrasound and navigation data. Vehicles
driving ahead can be recognized up to 650 ft (200 m) away.
Predictive functions offer the driver additional comfort and contribute to the reduction in fuel consumption and CO2 emissions > page 101.
On open roads with no traffic, it functions like a cruise control system. The stored speed is maintained. When approaching a vehicle driving ahead, the adaptive cruise control system automatically brakes to match that vehicle's speed and then maintains the set distance. As soon as the system does not detect a vehicle driving ahead, adaptive cruise control accelerates up to the stored speed.
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
In stop-and-go traffic, adaptive cruise control can brake until the vehicle is stationary and then can also start driving again automatically under certain conditions > page 107.
In traffic jams or stop-and-go traffic, traffic jam assist can assist the driver > page 109.
Which functions can be controlled?
When you switch adaptive cruise control on, you can set the current speed as the "control speed" = page 105, Switching on and off.
When driving, you can stop cruise control => page 108 or change the speed > page 106 at
any time.

You can also set the distance to the vehicle driving ahead and set the driving mode of the adaptive cruise control > page 106.
General information
Appliesto: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control

B8W-0098|

Fig. 101 Front of the vehicle: sensors and video camera

The areas with the radar and ultrasonic sensors and the video camera > fig. 101 must notbe covered by stickers, deposits or any other objects, because this can interfere with the adaptive cruise control function. For information on cleaning, see > page 342. The same applies for any modifications made in the front area.

In some driving situations, the adaptive cruise control function is restricted:

-- Vehicles can only be detected when they are within the sensor detection zones > page 102, fig. 100.
-- The system has a limited ability to detect vehicles that are a short distance ahead, off to the side of your vehicle or moving into your lane.
-- Objects that aredifficult to detect such as motorcycles, vehicles with high ground clearance or an overhanging load are detected late or not detected atall.
-- When driving through curves > page 104.
-- When the vehicle is stationary > page 104.

Z\WARNING

Alwayspay attention tothe traffic around you

when adaptivecruise control is switched on.

As the driver, you arestill responsible for your

ownspeed and the distance to other vehicles.

The adaptive cruise control is used to assist

you. The driver must always take action to

8W0012721BG

103

Assist systems
avoid a collision. The driver is always responsible for braking at the correct time. -- For safety reasons, do not use adaptive
cruise control when the road surfaceis in poor condition and/or in bad weather conditions (such as ice, fog, gravel, heavy rain and hydroplaning). Using the system under these conditions increasesthe risk of an accident. -- Switch adaptive cruise control off temporarily when driving in turning lanes, on expressway exits (except if predictive control is switched on) or in construction zones. This prevents the vehicle from accelerating to the stored speed when in thesesituations. -- The adaptivecruise control system will not brakebyitself if you put your foot on the accelerator pedal. Doing so can override the speed and distance regulation. -- When approaching stationary obstacles such as stopped traffic, adaptive cruise control will respond with limited function. -- Adaptive cruise control does not respond to people, animals, or crossing or oncoming objects. -- The function of the radar sensors can be affected by reflective objects such as guard
rails, the entrance to a tunnel, heavy rain or
ice
1) Note
The sensors can be displaced by impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel housing and underbody. This can impair the adaptive cruise control. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check their function.
G)Tips For an explanation on conformity with the FCC regulations in the United States and the Industry Canada regulations, see > page 370.
104

In curves
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Fig. 102 Example: driving into a curve
When driving into a curve > fig. 102 and out of a curve, the adaptive cruise control may react to a vehicle in the neighboring lane and apply the brakes. You can preventthat by pressing the accelerator pedal briefly. Stationary vehicles
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Fig. 103 Example: vehicle changing lanes and stationary vehicle
Within the limits of the system, adaptive cruise control can react to stationary vehicles => fig. 103, as long as you are driving slower than 30 mph (50 km/h) and the system classifies the possible passing maneuver as low. For example, if a vehicle that was already detected (@ turns or changes lanes, the adaptive cruise control reacts
to the stationary vehicle ahead ofit @).
Vehicles with manual transmission
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control and manual transmission
The adaptive cruise control is available from 1st gear through 6th gear in the normal speed range. >

B8V-0630

When the adaptive cruise control is turned on,
you mustpress the clutch to shift gears (as usual). When shifting normally or when pressing the
clutch, the adaptive cruise control remains turned on.
After you have engaged the gear, you do not need to press the gas pedal. The adaptive cruise control accelerates automatically if necessary.
If you press down on the clutch for too long or shift/couple improperly, the adaptive cruise control may turn off automatically.
Switching on and off
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control

RAH-8655

B4M-0231

Assist systems
Switching adaptive cruise control on
> Pull the lever toward you into position @ > fig. 104.
Storing the speed and activating regulation
> To store the current speed, press the [SET] button > fig. 104. The stored speed is shown in the
speedometer in the LED line @) and appears briefly in the status line ©) > fig. 105.
» Automatic transmission: to activate control when stationary, the brake pedal must also be pressed.
Switching adaptive cruise control off
> Push the lever away from you into position © until it clicks into place. The message ACC: off appears.
Indicator lights
B - Adaptive cruise control must be switched on. No vehicles are detected ahead. The stored speed is maintained.
BA - Avehicle driving ahead was detected. The adaptive cruise control system regulates the speed and distanceto the vehicle driving ahead and accelerates/brakes automatically.
Applies to: automatic transmissions
& - Adaptive cruise control must be switched on. A vehicle was detected ahead. Your vehicle is stationary and will not start driving automatically.

Fig. 105 Instrumentcluster: adaptive cruise control
You can set any speed between 20 mph and 95 mph (30 km/h and 150 km/h).
Indicator lights and messages in the instrument cluster display inform you about the current situation and setting.
An additional indicator appears in the head-up display*.

Applies to: automatic transmissions
EB - Adaptive cruise control must be switched on. No vehicles were detected ahead. Your vehicle is stationary and will not start driving automatically.
A - The automatic braking is not enough to maintain a sufficient distance to a vehicle driving ahead. You mustintervene > page 109,Driver in-
tervention request.
© Instrument cluster display
If the Driver assistance display is not shown in the instrumentcluster display, youcanopenit >

8W0012721BG

105

B4M-0232

Assist systems
using the multifunction steering wheel buttons =>page 15.
Based on the graphic display, you can determine if the system is maintaining a distance to the vehicle driving ahead and what that distance is.
No vehicle - no vehicle was detected driving ahead.
Silver vehicle - a vehicle was detected driving ahead.
Red vehicle - request for driver intervention
=> page 109.
The five distance bars on the gauge (© represent the set distance (see > page 106for information on how to change the distance). If you fall below the selected distance, the distance bars become red from the bottom upward.
ZA WARNING
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission: If you press the [SET] button when driving at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the vehicle will accelerate automatically up to 20 mph (30 km/h), which is the minimum speed that can be set.
@) Tips
-- If you switch the ignition or the adaptive cruise control system off, the set speed is erased for safety reasons.
-- The Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) and the Anti-Slip-Regulation (ASR) are automatically switched on when the adaptive cruise control is switched on.

Changing the speed
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Fig. 106 Operating lever: changing the speed
> To increase or decrease the speed in smaller in-
crements, tap the lever toward @) or ©)
=> fig. 106 to the first level. > To increase or decrease the speed in larger in-
crements, briefly tap the lever toward @) or ©)
to the second level. > To increase or decrease the speed continuously,
hold the lever toward @)/G) to thefirst or sec-
ond level until the marking @) reaches the desired speed > page 105,fig. 105. Preselecting a speed
You can also preselect the speed when adaptive cruise control is not active by moving the lever in
the desired direction @)/©).Activate the previ-
ously selected speed by pulling the lever into po-
sition @) > page 108, fig. 109. Sadi Mm eels
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control

B4M-0234

106

Fig. 107 Operating lever: setting the distance
> Tap the rocker switch to display the distance that is currently set.

Assist systems

> To increase or decrease the distance in incre-
ments, tap the switch again toward @) or ©).
The distance between the twovehicles will change in the instrumentcluster display.
When approaching a vehicle driving ahead, the adaptive cruise control system brakes to match that vehicle's speed and then adjusts to the set
distance. If the vehicle driving ahead accelerates, then the adaptive cruise control will also acceler-
ate up to the speed that you haveset.
The higher the speed, the greater the distance => A\. The Distance 3 setting is recommended. That is equal to the general recommendation of "half the speed shown on the speedometer".
The distances provided are specified values. Depending on the driving situation and how the vehicle ahead is driving, the actual distance may be moreor less than these target distances.
If you change the time gaps, the value you have just set appearsbriefly in the instrument cluster display, for example Bifor Distance 3. This only occursif the Driver assistance display is not currently shown in the display > page 105,fig. 105.
Distance 1: this setting corresponds to a distance of 92 ft (28 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100 km/h), or a time distance of 1 second.
Distance 2: this setting corresponds to a distance
of 118 ft (36 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100
km/h), or a time distance of 1.3 seconds.
Distance 3: this setting corresponds to a distance of 164 ft (SO m) when traveling at 62 mph (100
km/h), or a time distance of 1.8 seconds.
Distance 4: this setting corresponds to a distance of 219 ft (67 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100 km/h), or a time distance of 2.4 seconds.
Distance 5: this setting corresponds to a distance of 328 ft (100 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100 km/h), or a time distance of 3.6 seconds.

ZA WARNING
When setting the distance, the driver is responsible for adhering to any applicable legal regulations.
@ Tips Depending on the selected driving program and distance, driving behavior when accelerating will vary from dynamic to comfortable => page 108.
Driving in stop-and-go traffic
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control and automatic transmission
Fig. 108 Instrumentcluster: safe start monitor
The adaptive cruise control system also assists you in stop-and-go traffic. If a vehicle driving ahead stops, your vehicle will brake and stay at a stop within the limits of the system. Starting to drive with adaptive cruise
control!)
As long as the message ACC: automatic go is displayed, your vehicle will begin driving when the vehicle driving ahead starts to move > A\. If you are stopped for several seconds, your vehicle will no longer drive autonomouslyfor safety reasons, and the message will turnoff. > To reactivate ACC: automatic go temporarily,
pull the lever to position @) > page 108, fig. 109. > To resume manual control of the vehicle, tap the accelerator pedal.

8W0012721BG

D_ This is not available in some countries.

107

Assist systems
Safe start monitor
If an obstacle is detected when you start driving, you will be alerted to the danger by the BA indicator light and the image in the instrument cluster display > fig. 108 > A\. An audio signal will also sound. Your vehicle will drive more slowly when starting. This mayalso occur in some situations when there is no apparent obstacle.
-- Press the brake pedal to slow your vehicle down.
Z\ WARNING
If the message ACC: automatic go" appears, your vehicle will start driving even if there is an obstacle between your vehicle and the vehicle driving ahead. This increases the risk of an accident.
G@) Tips
-- For safety reasons,your vehicle will only start to drive automatically if: --The driver's safety belt is fastened -- All doors and the hood are closed -- Your vehicle is not stopped for a long period of time
Interrupting cruise control
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control

B4M-0233

Overriding cruise control
> To accelerate manually, pull the lever toward you into position @) and hold it there or press the accelerator pedal. The message ACC: override appears.
> To resume cruise control, release the lever or
take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Canceling cruise control while driving
> Move the lever into position @). The message ACC: standbyappears. Or
> Press the brake pedal. > To resume the stored speed, movethe lever to-
wardyou into position @).
Canceling cruise control when stopped
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
> Push the lever away from you into position @). The message ACC: standbyappears.
> To resume cruise control, press the brake pedal and pull the lever toward you into position @).
Z\ WARNING
-- It is dangerous to activate cruise control and resume the stored speed when the current road, traffic or weather conditions do not permit this. This increases the risk of an accident.
-- Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal could override the cruise control. Braking interventions and corrective actions by the
system may not occur.

Fig. 109 Selector lever
Requirement: adaptive cruise control must be switched on.

Setting Audi adaptive cruise control
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Audi adaptive cruise control.
Storing the last distance?)
The last distance that was set will be stored after the ignition is switched off. If the distance is not >

D_ This is not available in some countries.
2) This is not available in some countries and on some equipmentversions.
108

Assist systems

B8V-0692

stored, Distance 3 is automatically set every time the ignition is switched on.
Driving program
Applies to: vehicles without Audi drive select
Depending on the selected driving program and distance, driving behavior when accelerating will vary from dynamic to comfortable.
Selecting the driving mode
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
Depending on the selected Audi drive select mode and the distancethatis set, the driving behavior will vary from dynamic to comfortable when accelerating > page 127.
@) Tips
Your settings are automatically stored and assigned to the vehicle key being used.

Applies to: vehicles with traffic jam assist
Traffic jam assist supports the driver when driving in traffic jams or in heavytraffic.
Fig. 111 Turn signal lever: traffic jam assist button

oao RAH-8657

river intervention request
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control

Fig. 110 Instrumentcluster: request for driver intervention
The request for driver intervention instructs you to take over if the adaptive cruise control braking function is not able to maintain a sufficient distanceto the vehicle driving ahead > fig. 110.

Fig. 112 Instrumentcluster: traffic jam assist

In a speed range under 40 mph (65 km/h), traffic
jam assist can help to keep the vehicle within a lane calculated by the system. Within the limits
of the system, the system controls the steering automatically when adaptive cruise control is
switched on. Sincetraffic jam assist is only an assist system, the driver must always keep his or her hands on the steering wheel and be ready to
steer. The driver can override the control at any time byactively steering.

The system is designed for driving on expressways and highways.

Switching traffic jam assist on and off

> Press the button to switch the system on and

off > fig. 111.

> To turn the system off completely, select in the

Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle

> left control button > Driver assistance > Traf-

fic jam assist.

8W0012721BG

109

Assist systems

If traffic jam assist was deactivated through the Infotainment system, you can continue operating the active lane assist using the > fig. 111 button => page 118. The traffic jam assist functions are no longer available.
Requirementsfor using traffic jam assist:
-- Traffic jam assist must be switched on in the Infotainment system.
-- Adaptive cruise control must be switched on and active > page 105.
Always switch off traffic jam assist in the following situations:
-- When increased attention is needed from the driver
-- In poor weather conditions such as snow or heavy rain
-- When driving on roads in poor condition -- In construction zones --Incity driving
Traffic jam assist availability:
If you are in the Driver assistance display in the instrumentcluster, the indicator light and the message Traffic jam assist available appearsif traffic congestion is detected. You can open the Driver assistance display using the multifunction steering wheel buttons > page 15. To activate traffic jam assist, you must press the > fig. 111 button and switch on the adaptive cruise control => page 105.
Indicator lights
B and BA - traffic jam assist is switched on. Vehicles driving ahead were detected. Your vehicle adapts while driving > fig. 112.
B - Traffic jam assist switches off if the driver does not take over steering after multiple driver intervention requests. The system brakes the vehicle until it is stationary.
ZA\ WARNING
Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can be readyto steer at any time. The driver is always responsible for staying ina lane and for assessing traffic situations. Read and follow the warnings on > A\ in Generalin-

formation on page 103. Never use traffic jam assist in the following situations or you will increase the risk of an accident: -- Driving offroad or on unpaved roads. Traffic
jam assist is only designed for use on paved roads. -- In city driving or in construction zones -- On curving stretches of road. -- In narrow lanes -- In unclear traffic situations such as at intersections or toll stations
@ Tips You are not necessarily guided to the center of your lane.
PME Na Teme lec ile)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
This function measures the time between the vehicle driving ahead and showsthis in the instrument cluster display.
Fig. 113 Instrumentcluster: distance indicator/warning
Description At speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 km/h), this function measures the distance to the vehicle ahead as time. > Switch the adaptive cruise control display on in
the instrument cluster display > page 15. The B indicator light turns on if you fall below the set distance.
Setting the warning threshold You can set, change or delete the warning threshold in the Infotainment system.

110

Assist systems

> In the Infotainment system, select: [MENU
button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Distance warning.
Z\ WARNING
-- Read and follow the warnings on > A in General information on page 103.
-- The driver is always responsible for adhering to the regulations applicable in the country wherethe vehicle is being operated.
@ Tips
You may fall below he warning threshold briefly when passing or when quickly approaching a slow vehicle. There is no warning in this scenario. A warning is given onlyif you fall below the warning threshold for an extended period of time.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
ACC with traffic jam assist: unavailable. See owner's manual
The system cannot guarantee thatit will detect vehicles correctly and it has switched off. The radar sensors haveshifted or are faulty. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
ACC with traffic jam assist: currently unavailable. See owner's manual
This message appearsif the adaptive cruise control cannot be activated, for example if the hood is open.
ACCw.traffic jam assist: currently unavailable. Sensor vision restricted due to surroundings. See owner's manual
This message appearsif the radar sensor view is obstructed, for example by leaves, snow, heavy spray or dirt. Clean the sensors > page 103, fig. 101.
ACC with traffic jam assist: currently unavailable. Grade too steep

The road exceeds the maximum possible grade for safe operation. The systems cannotbe switched on.
ACC with traffic jam assist: only available in D,SorM
Select the "D/S" or "M" selector lever position.
ACC: available from 1st gear up
Manual transmission: adaptive cruise control worksin 1st gear and higher.
ACC: clutch pedal pressed
Manual transmission: pressing the clutch pedal longer interrupts the control.
ACC: note engine speed
Manual transmission: this message appearsif the driver has not shifted up or down in time when the adaptive cruise control is braking or accelerating, causing the vehicle to exceed or to not reach the permitted engine speed. The adaptive cruise control switches off automatically and cannot be switched back on.
ACC with traffic jam assist: currently unavailable. Parking brake applied
The systems switch off if you set the parking brake. The systems are available again after you release the parking brake.
ACC with traffic jam assist: currently unavailable. Stabilization control (ESC) input
This message appearsif the Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) is taking action to stabilize the vehicle. The systems switch off in this scenario.
ACC with traffic jam assist: manual control!
This message appearsif the vehicle rolls back when starting on slight incline, even though the systems are active. Press the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling or starting to move.
ACC with traffic jam assist: currently unavailable. Downhill assist activated
You cannotactivate the system when hill hold assist is active.
ACC with traffic jam assist: manual control! >

8W0012721BG

111

Assist systems

This message appearsif the driver does not take over steering after multiple driver intervention requests and the system switches off. The vehicle brakes until it is stationary.
Traffic jam assist: unavailable. See owner's manual
The system can no longer ensure that the vehicle will stay in the lane and switchesoff. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility if the malfunction is continuous.
Traffic jam assist: Please take over steering!
This message appearsas soon as the system stops detecting steering activity when the system limits are reached. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can be ready to steer at any time.
Traffic jam assist: currently unavailable. Please fasten seat belt
The system switches off when the driver's safety belt is unfastened.
ACC: efficiency assist not available in this
country
The adaptation to speed limits and routes ahead is not available in this country.
ACC: predictive control currently unavailable. See owner's manual
The adaptation to speed limits and routes ahead switches off at speed limits under 20 mph (30 km/h).
The message can also appear if the adaptation to speed limits and routes ahead has a temporary failure. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility if the malfunction is continuous.
Distance warning: malfunction! Please contact Service
The system cannot guarantee thatit will detect vehicles correctly and it has switched off. The radar sensors haveshifted or are faulty. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
112

Distance warning: currently unavailable. Sensor view restricted due to surroundings. See owner's manual
This message appearsif the radar sensor view is obstructed, for example by leaves, snow, heavy spray or dirt. Clean the sensors > page 103,
fig. 101.
Distance warning: currently unavailable. See owner's manual
This message appearsif the system has a temporary failure. If this occurs multiple times, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
ACC: Please fasten seat belt
The system is not completely available if the driver's seat belt is unfastened.
Stationary object ahead
This message appearsif you would like to switch the system on and thereis a stationary object directly in front of your vehicle.
Door open
The system is not available when the door is open.

Audi pre sense

Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense

Within the limits of the system, the pre sense functions can initiate measures in particularly dangerous situations to protect the vehicle passengers and other road users.

-- Due tothe interlinking of various vehicle sys-

tems, critical driving situations can be detected

by pre sense basic and measures for preventa-

tive occupant protection are can be initiated.

--The pre sensefront system uses the data from

the adaptive cruise control* radar sensors and

the camera to calculate the probability of a col-

lision. Within the limits of the system, an im-

pending collision with vehicles can be detected

in both urban and rural speed ranges. In this

case, the system warns the driver visually,

Assist systems

acoustically and with a jerk on the brakes if nec-
essary. If needed, it can initiate a partial or full
deceleration to reduce the collision speed or to avoid the collision under certain circumstances. In conjunction with pre sense basic/rear, the front safety belts are also reversibly tensioned when needed. The pre sense front is also active when adaptivecruise control" is switched off. -- Pre senserear contains pre sense basic functions. It uses the data from the side assist* radar sensors and calculates within the limits of the system the probability of a rear end collision with the vehicle behind you. Pre sense rear is also active when side assist* is switched off. -- Within the limits of the system, pre sensecity uses the camera data and can detect an impending collision with vehicles and pedestrians.
In this case, the system warns the driver visually, acoustically and with a jerk on the brakes if
necessary. If needed, it can initiate a full decel-
eration to reduce the collision speed or to avoid the collision under certain circumstances. In conjunction with pre sense basic/rear, the front safety belts are also reversibly tensioned when needed.
Z\ WARNING
Read the general information in > A\ in General information on page 103, > A\ in General information on page 122.

vent an undesired intervention from the pre
sense system.
Audi pre sensebasic
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense basic
The pre sense basic functions are activated at a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or higher.
The following functions can be triggered under certain conditions within the limits of the sys-
tem:
--Tensioning of the safety belts (for example, during heavy braking): the front safety belts have reversible belt tensioners. If a collision does notoccur, the safety belts will loosen slightly and be ready to trigger again.
-- Closing the windowsand sunroof*
-- Activation of the emergencyflashers)
The message Audi pre sense fy => page 113, fig. 114 will warn you about the danger.
Audi drive select*: the trigger times are adjusted depending on the mode selected.
Cem Ricelalg
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense front

@ Tips
-- Certain pre sense functions switch off when driving in reverse.
-- The pre sense functions may not be available if there is a malfunction in the ESC system or the airbag control module.
-- Note that the reversible belt tensioner on the front passenger's side deactivates when the front passenger's airbag is deactivated.
-- Switch the pre sense off when you are not using public streets or when loading the vehicle onto a vehiclecarrier, train, ship, or other type of transportation. This can pre-

Audi pre sense

Fig. 114 Instrumentcluster: approach warning

Description

Within the limits of the system, pre sense front

can warn you of impending collisions and initiate

the corresponding braking maneuversor the sup-

porting measures when avoiding a collision.

8W0012721BG

D_ This is not available in some countries.

113

Assist systems

If detected in time, the system can rank the dan-
gerous situation as critical if a vehicle driving ahead brakes suddenly,if your own vehicle is approaching a significantly slower vehicle at high speed or when thereis an oncoming vehicle during a turning maneuver.
If detection is not possible, then pre sense front does not react.
Warnings
The system recognizes various dangerous situations. The early warning occursif:
--Avehicle driving ahead brakes suddenly -- Your own vehicle approaches a significantly
slower vehicle or stationary vehicle in the direction oftravel
When this warning occurs, it may only be possible to avoid a collision by swerving or braking strongly. The message Audi pre sense A => fig. 114 and a warning tone will warn you about the danger.
If you do not react enough or not at all to a dangerous situation that was detected by the system, pre sense front provides assistance by applying the brakes.
If a collision is imminent, the system will first provide an acute warning by braking sharply. You will also warned byan indicator in the instrument cluster display > fig. 114. If you do not react to the acute warning, pre sense front can brake with increasing force within the limits of the sys-
tem )). This reduces the vehicle speed in the
event of a collision. At low vehicle speeds, pre sense frontcan initiate a complete deceleration shortly before a collision with a vehicle driving ahead ). If pre sense front determines that you are not braking strongly enough when a collision is imminent, it can increase the braking force.
The following functions trigger in conjunction with pre sense basic/rear at corresponding vehicle speeds:
-- Reversible tensioning of the front safety belts -- Closing the windows and sunroof*

-- Inflating the side bolsters* on the seat backrest
Audi drive select*: depending on the mode select-
ed, the reversible belt tensioner, the closing of
the windowsand sunroof*, and the inflating of the side bolsters* on the seat backrest may not be active.
Evasive steering support
Evasive steering support helps you to steer the vehicle around an obstacle in critical situation. If you avoid an obstacle after the acute warning, then the evasive steering support assists you by applying slight steering adjustment to correct your steering wheel angle as long as you are actively steering. Evasive steering supportis available at speeds between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 90 mph (150 km/h).
Turn assist
When starting to drive and up to speeds of maximum 6 mph (10 km/h), the turn assist uses a braking intervention to reduce the risk of your vehicle colliding with an oncoming vehicle when turning left or right (available in certain countries). The braking intervention causesyour vehicle to stay in its lane.
Z\ WARNING
-- Pre sensefront cannot overcome the laws of physics. It is a system designed to assist and it cannot prevent a collision in every circumstance. The driver must alwaysintervene. The driver is always responsible for braking at the correct time. Do notlet the increased safety provided temptyou into taking risks. This could increase your risk of a collision.
-- The system can deployincorrectly due to system-specific limits.
-- Please note that the sensors and the camera do not always detectall objects or lane markings. This increases the risk of an accident.

D_ This is not available in some countries.
114

Assist systems

-- Pre sense front does not react to people, an-
imals or objects that are crossing the vehicle's path or that are difficult to detect > A\ in General information on page 103. -- Reflective objects such as guardrails or the entrance to a tunnel, heavy rain and ice can affect the function of the radar sensors and the system's ability to detect a collision risk.
@ Note
The sensors can be displaced by impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel housing and underbody. Pre sense front can be impaired by this. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check their function.
@ Tips
-- You can cancel the braking with increasing force that is initiated by the system by braking yourself, by accelerating noticeably or by swerving.
-- Keep in mind that pre sense front can brake unexpectedly. Always secure any cargo or objects that you are transporting to reduce the risk of damage or injury.
-- Specific pre sense front functions switch off when the ESCis restricted or switched off = page 139 or the hill hold assist* is switched on > page 140.
Audi pre sense rear
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
If the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead is detected, the following functions can be triggered:
-- Reversible tensioning of the front safety belts at the corresponding speeds
-- Closing the windows and sunroof* -- Inflating the side bolsters* on the seat backrest -- Activating the emergencyflashers with in-
creased frequency )
The message Audi pre sense AN} > page 113, fig. 114 will warn you about the danger.

Audi drive select*: the function is not active depending on the mode selected.
Z\ WARNING
--To reduce the risk of an accident, please
note that the side assist* radar sensors do not always detect every object.
-- Pre sense rear does not react to people, ani-
mals or objects that are crossing the vehicle's path or thatare difficult to detect. -- Reflective objects such as guardrails, heavy rain and ice can impair the function of the radar sensors and the ability to detect a col-
lision risk.
@) Note
The radar sensors can be displaced by impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel housing and underbody. Pre sense rear can be impaired by this. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check their function.
G) Tips
The pre sense rear functions may also switch off if there is a malfunction in the side assist*
system.

Audi pre sensecity
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sensecity

Description
Within the limits of the system, pre sense city can warn you of impending collisions with vehicles and pedestrians and initiate the applicable braking maneuver if needed. Pre sense city is active at speeds of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and higher.

A pedestrian warning can occur at speeds up to

50 mph (85 km/h), and vehicle warnings can oc-

cur at speeds up to 155 mph (250 km/h). A pre

sense city braking maneuver is possible at speeds

up to 50 mph (85 km/h).

8W0012721BG

D_ This is not available in some countries.

115

Assist systems
Warnings
The system recognizes various dangerous situations. The early warning occursif:
--Avebhicle driving ahead brakes suddenly -- Your own vehicle approaches a vehicle in front
of you that is traveling at a significantly slower speed or that is stationary -- pedestrian is standing in the lane or is moving into the lane
When this warning occurs, it may only be possible to avoid a collision by swerving or braking strongly. The message Audi pre sense A => page 113, fig. 114 and a warning tone will warn you about the danger.
The brakes mayalso be applied as an acute warning when thereis an impending collision. If you
do not react to the acute warning, pre sense city can braketo the point of complete deceleration
within the limits of the system. This reduces the vehicle speed in the eventof a collision. The message Audi pre sense A also appears.
The following functions are triggered in conjunction with pre sense basic/rear:
-- Reversible tensioning of the front safety belts -- Closing the windowsand sunroof* -- Inflating the side bolsters* on the seat backrest
Audi drive select*: the function is not active depending on the mode selected.
ZA WARNING
-- Pre sense city cannot overcome the laws of physics. It is a system designed to assist and it cannot prevent a collision in every circumstance. The driver must always intervene. The driver is always responsible for braking at the correct time. Do notlet the increased safety provided temptyou into taking risks. This could increase your risk of a collision.
-- The system can deployincorrectly due to system-specific limits.
--To reducethe risk of an accident, please note that the camera does not always detect every object.
-- Pre sense city does not react to animals, crossing or oncoming vehicles, objects such

as bars, railings or railcars, and objects that are difficult to detect > A\ in Generalinformation on page 103.
Z\ WARNING
Pre sense city maybe restricted or unavailable in the following typesofsituations: -- In heavy fog, rain, spray, or snow
-- When thereare visual obstructions, such as
glare, reflections or variations in light -- When itis dark -- If the camera windowor the windshieldis
dirty, iced over, damaged or covered -- When driving on snow,ice or loose ground --Incurves -- If the ESC was restricted or switched off -- When the driver's seat belt is unfastened -- For several seconds after the ignition is
switched on
@) Note
Impacts or damage to the camera mount on the windshield can displace the sensor. Pre
sense city can be impaired by this. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check their function.
G) Tips
-- You can cancel the system braking intervention if you accelerate considerably or swerve away.
-- Keep in mind that pre sense city can brake unexpectedly. Always secure any cargo or objects that you are transporting to reduce the risk of damage or injury.
-- Specific pre sense city functions switch off when the ESC is limited or switched off => page 139 or the hill descentassist* is switched on > page 140.
-- When thereis a malfunction in the camera,
the pre sensecity functions also switch off.

116

Assist systems

Settings in the Infotainment system
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver
assistance > Audi pre sense.
Turn Audi pre sense on/off - the pre sense functions can be turned on and off.
If the system is switched off, it switches on again automatically once the ignition is switched on again.
Prewarning - the early warning can be switched off or the pre sense city/front warning point can be set (Early/Medium/Late).
Set the warning time for the early warning to Early at first. If this causes undesired early warnings to appear, then set the warning time to Medium. The Late warning time should only be set in special circumstances.
@ Tips
Your settings are automatically stored and assigned to the vehicle key being used.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
Bh audi pre sense: malfunction! Please contact Service
This message appears when the pre sense function is affected. For example, this could be caused by a faulty sensor. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Audi pre sense: currently limited. Sensor view limited due to surroundings. See owner's manual
This message appearsif the radar sensor and
camera view is obstructed, for example byleaves,
snow,heavy sprayor dirt. If necessary, clean the sensors and the area around the camera => page 103, fig. 101 or > page 122, fig. 122.
Audi pre sense: currently limited
This message appearsif the ESC is restricted or
switched off, for example.

Audi pre sense: currently limited. See owner's manual
This message appears when there is a temporary failure in a subsystem, such as the ESC. If this message appearsrepeatedly, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction corrected.
Audi pre sense: emergencybraking system off
This message appearsif the pre sense functions are switched off through the Infotainment system or if the system is not ready.
Audi active lane assist
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
Active lane assist (lane departure warning) detects lane marker lines within the limits of the system using a camerain the windshield. If you are approaching a detected lane marker line and it appears likely that you will leave the lane, the system will warn you with corrective steering. You can override this steering at any time. If you pass over a line, the steering wheel will vibrate lightly. In order for this warning vibration to occur, it must first be switched on in the Infotainment system. Active lane assist is ready for operation when the lane marker line is detected on at least one side ofthe vehicle.
The system is designed for driving on expressways and highways and therefore only activates at speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
Applies to: vehicles with side assist: if you activate a turn signal when active lane assist is ready and it classifies a lane change as critical because of vehicles traveling alongside you or approaching you, there will be noticeable corrective steering shortly before you leave the lane. This will attempt to keep your vehicle in the lane.
Applies to: vehicles without side assist: When the system is ready,it will not warn you if you activate a turn signal before crossing the lane marker >

8W0012721BG

117

B8V-0692

B4M-0090

Assist systems

line. In this case, it assumes that you are changing lanes intentionally.
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise control: There is no corrective steering or warnings if the system detects a distinct passing maneuver. If the conditions are met,traffic jam assist switches on at speeds under approximately 40 mph (65 km/h) > page 109.
ZA WARNING
-- The system warns the driver that the vehicle is leaving the lane using corrective steering. The driver is always responsible for keeping the vehicle within the lane.
-- The system can help you keep the vehicle in
the lane, but it does not drive by itself. Al-
ways keep your hands on the steering wheel.
-- Corrective steering may notoccur in certain situations, such as during heavy braking.
-- There may be cases where the camera does not recognize all lane marker lines. Corrective steering can only take place on the side of the vehicle where lane marker lines are detected.
-- Other road structures or objects could possibly be identified unintentionally as lane
marker lines. As a result, corrective steering
may be unexpected or may not occur. -- The cameraview can be restricted, for exam-
ple by vehicles driving ahead or by rain, snow,heavy sprayor light shining into the camera. This can result in active lane assist not detecting the lane marker lines or detecting them incorrectly.
--Incertain situations wherevisibility is low,
the vehicle may switch from an "early" to "late" steering correction. -- Under certain conditions such as ruts in the road, an inclined roadway or crosswinds, the corrective steering alone may not be enough to keep the vehicle in the middle of the lane.
-- For safety reasons,active lane assist must not be used when there are poor road and/or weather conditions such as slippery roads, fog, gravel, heavy rain, snow and the potential for hydroplaning. Using active lane as-

sist under these conditions mayincrease the risk of a crash. Sica meal
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
Fig. 115 Turn signal lever: button for active lane assist
Fig. 116 Windshield: camera windowfor active lane assist
> Press the button to switch the system on and off > fig. 115. The indicator light in the instrument cluster turns on or off.

118

8W0012721BG
B8W-0099

Analoginstru- Audi virtual ment cluster cockpit/head-
up display*

Green line(s)
(left/right) 2

|Greenline(s)
(left/right) 1X

Red line

(left/right)

Yellow line(s) (left/right)
7%

Yellow line(s) (left/right)
71%

Meaning on the corresponding side
Active lane assist is activated and ready to provide warnings.
Active lane assist will warn you before the vehicle leaves a lane. The steering wheel will also vibrate lightly.
Active lane assist is activated, but is not ready to provide warnings.

If the system is switched on but is not ready to provide warnings, one of the following could be the cause:

-- There is no lane marker line
-- The relevant lane marker lines are not detected (for example, markings in a construction zone or because they are obstructed by snow,dirt, water or lighting)
-- The vehicle speed is below the activation speed of approximately 40 mph (65 km/h)
-- The lane is too narrow or too wide
-- The curve is too narrow -- The driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel

@ Tips
-- Make sure the camera window fig. 116 is not covered bystickers or other objects. For information on cleaning, see > page 342.
-- If the system is ready for operation, it will remain readyeach time it is switched on )).

Assist systems

Display in the instrument cluster
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist

Pee

r2S|gy ==a

Fig. 117 Instrument cluster (multi-color display): active lane assist is switched on and readyto provide warnings

Fig. 118 Instrument cluster (monochrome display): active lane assist is switched on
You can open up the Driver assistancedisplay for the active lane assist using the multifunction steering wheel buttons > page 15.
An additional indicator appears in the head-up display".
Multi-Color Display See > fig. 117

D In certain countries

119

Assist systems

Driver assistance
display in the instrumentcluster Green line(s) (left or right)
Red line (left or right)
Gray line(s) (left or right)

Meaning on thecorresponding side
Activelane assist is activated and ready to pro-
vide warnings.
Active lane assist will warn you before the vehicle leaves a lane. The steering wheel will also vibrate lightly. Active lane assist is activated, but is not ready to provide warnings.

Monochrome display See > fig. 118

Driver assistance display in the instrumentcluster Light gray line(s)
(left or right)
Blinking line(s)
(left or right)
Dark gray line(s) (left or right)

Meaning on thecorresponding side
Active lane assist is activated and ready to provide warnings.
Active lane assist will warn you before the vehicle leaves a lane. The steering wheel will also vibrate lightly.
Active lane assist is acti-
vated, but is not ready to
provide warnings.

Messagesin the instrumentcluster display
If the active lane assist switches off automatically, the indicator light in the display turns off and one of the following messages appears:
xq Audi active lane assist: malfunction! See owner's manual
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Audi active lane assist: currently unavailable. Camera view restricted due to surroundings. See owner's manual

This message appearsif the camerais unable to detect the lines. This could happen if:
-- The camerafield of view > page 118, fig. 116 is dirty or covered in ice. Clean this area on the windshield > page 342.
-- The camerafield of view is fogged over. Wait until the fog has cleared before switching the active lane assist on again.
-- The system has been unable to detect the lanes for an extended period of time due to road conditions. Switch active lane assist back on when the lines are morevisible.
Audi active lane assist: currently unavailable. See owner's manual
There is a temporary malfunction that may prevent the active lane assist from switching on. Try switching the active lane assist on again later.
Audi active lane assist: Please take over steering!
This message appearsif you are not steering by yourself. Active lane assist is activated, but is not ready to provide warnings.
Z\ WARNING
Note that messages maybe delayed or not displayed on vehicles with accessories mount-
ed on the steering wheel, such as a steering wheel spinner knob. Always keep your hands
on the steering wheel.
Adjusting the steering time and vibration warning
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
You can adjust individual active lane assist settings in the Infotainment system.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Audi active laneassist.
Steering time
Early: in this setting, the corrective steering happens continuously to help keep the vehicle in the center of the lane.

120

Late: in this setting, the system provides corrective steering just before a wheel goes over a detected lane marker line.
Vibration warning You can switch the additional vibration warning in the steering wheel on or off.
ZA WARNING
With the vibration warning switched off, there will also be no visual warning in the instrumentcluster display when crossing a lane marker line.
@) Tips Certain settings are automatically stored and assigned to the vehicle key being used).
Audi side assist
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist

B8W-0100

B4M-0099}

Assist systems
Within the limits of the system, it warns you about vehicles that are coming closer or that are traveling with you within sensor range @) > fig. 119. If a lane change is classified as critical, the display @) in the exterior mirror turns on
fig. 120.
The display in the left exterior mirror provides assistance when making a lane change tothe left, while the display in the right exterior mirror provides assistance when making a lane change to the right.
Information stage
As long as you do notactivate the turn signal, side assist informs you about vehicles that are detected and classified as critical. The display in
the mirror turns on, but is dim.
The display remains dim in the information stage so that your view towardthe front is not disturbed.
Warning stage
If the display in a mirror blinks brightly when you activate a turn signal, side assist is warning you about detected vehicles that it has classified as critical. If this happens, check traffic by glancing in the exterior mirrors and over your shoulder => A\ in General information on page 122.
Applies to: vehicles with active lane assist: the display in the mirror can also blink if you have not activated a turn signal: if you are approaching a detected lane marker line and it appears you will be leaving the lane, side assist will warn you about detected vehicles that it has classified as critical.
@ Tips
You can adjust the brightness on of the display on the rearview mirror > page 123.

8W0012721BG

Fig. 120 Display on the exterior mirror
Side assist (lane change assist) helps you monitor your blind spot and traffic behind your vehicle.
D In certain countries

121

Assist systems

General information
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
Fig. 122 Rear of the vehicle: position of the sensors
Side assist functions at speeds above approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). @ Vehicles that are approaching In certain cases, a vehicle will be classified as critical for a lane change even if it is still somewhat far away. The faster a vehicle approaches, the sooner the display in the outside mirror will
turn on.
Vehicles traveling with you
Vehicles traveling with you are indicated in the exterior mirror if they are classified as critical for a lane change. All vehicles detected by side assist

B8W-0101

B4M-0101

are indicated by the time they enter your "blind spot", at the latest.

© Vehicles you are passing
If you slowly pass a vehicle that side assist has detected (the difference in speed between the vehicle and your vehicle is less than approximately
9 mph (15 km/h)), the display in the exterior mir-
ror turns on as soon as the vehicle enters your blind spot.

The display will not turn on if you quickly pass a vehicle that side assist has detected (the differ-
ence in speed is greater than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)).

Functional limitations
The radar sensors are designed to detect the left and right adjacent lanes when the road lanes are the normal width. In some situations, the display in the exterior mirror may turn on even though thereis no vehicle located in the area that is critical for a lane change. For example:

-- If the lanes are narrow or if you are driving on the edge of your lane. If this is the case, the system may have detected a vehicle in another lane that is not adjacent to your current lane.
-- If you are driving through a curve. Side assist mayreact to a vehicle thatis in the same lane or one lane over from the adjacentlane.
-- If side assist reacts to other objects (such as roadside structures like guardrails).
-- In poor weather conditions. The side assist functions are limited.

Do not cover the radar sensors > fig. 122 with
stickers, deposits, bicycle wheels or other objects, becausethis will impair the function. For
information on cleaning, see > page 342.

ZA\WARNING

-- Alwayspayattention to traffic and to the

area around your vehicle. Side assist cannot

replace a driver's attention. The driver alone

is always responsible for lane changes and

similar driving maneuvers.

--Insome situations, the system may not

function or its function may be limited. For

example:

122

Assist systems

--If vehicles are approaching or being left behind very quickly. The display may not
turn on in time.
-- In poor weather conditions such as heavy
rain, snow or heavy mist. -- On very wide lanes,in tight curves,or if
thereis a rise in the road surface. Vehicles in the adjacent lane may not be detected because they are outside of the sensor range.
C) Note
The sensorscan be displaced by impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel housing and underbody. This can impair the system. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check their function.
@ Tips
-- If the window glass in the driver's door or front passenger's door has been tinted, the display in the exterior mirror may be incor-
rect:
-- For an explanation on conformity with the FCC regulations in the United States and the Industry Canada regulations, see => page 370.
Siete mie Rela
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
The system can be switchedon/off in the Infotainment system.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Audi side assist. Off switches the system off.
If the system is activated, the displays in the exterior mirrors will turn on briefly when the ignition is switched on.
@ Tips
When you switch side assist on or off, the exit warning system activates or deactivates => page 124.

Setting the display brightness
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
The display brightness can be adjustedin the Infotainment system.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Audi side assist.
The display brightness adjusts automatically to the brightness of the surroundings, both in the information and in the warning stage. In very dark or very bright surroundings, the automatic adjustment will set the display to the minimum or maximum level. In such cases, you may notice no change when adjusting the brightness, or the change mayonly be noticeable once the surroundings change.
Adjust the brightness to a level where the display in the information stage will not disrupt your view ahead. If you change the brightness,the display in the exterior mirror will briefly show the brightness level in the information stage. The brightness of the warning stage is linked to the brightness in the information stage and is adjusted along with the information stage.
(i) Tips
--The side assist functions are not active during the adjustment process.
-- The exit warning indicators turn on during the adjustmentprocess.
-- Your settings are automatically stored and assigned to the vehicle key being used.

8W0012721BG

123

Assist systems

fExitwarning
Applies to: vehicles with exit warning system
Fiogs. 124 DoSocire: veingee stri When the vehicle is stationary, the exit warning system warns the passengersof a possible collision when opening the door. Within the limits of the system, the system monitors the areas behind and next to the vehicle using the radar sensors > page 122, fig. 122. Moving objects that are approaching from behind, such as cars, are detected © fig. 123.
When you open the door, the warning strip on the affected door blinks > fig. 124 if another road user is detected and the situation is classified as critical. The display in the exterior mirror on the affected side flashes at the same time. If the door is already open and another road user is detected and the situation is classified as critical, then the corresponding displays turn on.
WARNING -- Alwayspay attention to traffic and to the
area around your vehicle. The exit warning system doesnotreplace the attention of the vehicle occupants. The vehicle occupants are always responsible for opening the doors and exiting the vehicle.

B8W-0102

-- The exit warning system can beavailable for
up to approximately three minutes after un-
locking the vehicle and opening the door as well as after switching off the ignition. Then the displaysflash briefly and the system switches off.
-- The exit warning system does not respond
to people and cannot warn you aboutevery type of approaching objects, such as cyclists. Always monitor the traffic as well as the vehicle's surroundings with direct eye contact.

ZA WARNING

The exit warning system is subject to limita-

tions and cannot warn you before every im-

pending collision:

-- If the vehicle is too wide for the parking

space and covered bythe neighboring vehi-

cles.

-- Approaching objects or people such as cy-

clists or skateboarders may not be detected

under certain circumstances.
The system does not react to

stati: onary

ob-

jects.

-- The view of the radar sensors may be im-

paired by leaves, snow,heavy sprayor dirt.

Clean the area in front of the sensors

= page 122, fig. 122.

CG) N eto
Also read the information in >@ in General infformation on papagge 123. G@) Tips = -- The exit warning system is switched on and
off through the side assist > page 123. The exit warning indicators turn on during the
adjustment process.
-- The display brightness for the exit warning system cannot be adjusted.

124

Assist systems

merit ia
Applies to: vehicles with rear cross-traffic assist
Fig. 126 Infotainment system: rear cross-traffic assist dis-
play
Activating rear cross-traffic assist
The rear cross-traffic assist is activated automatically if you turn on the parking aid > page 129 or shift into reverse gear. The rear cross-traffic assist can warn of a potential collision with approaching cross-traffic when driving in reverse at speeds up to approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). Within its limits, the system monitors the areas behind and nextto the vehicle using the radar sensors when leaving a parking space > page 122, fig. 122. Moving objects that are approaching, such as cars, are detected > fig. 125. If the system detectscritical cross traffic when backing out of a parking space, it will react as follows: -- Visual indicator: an indicator appears in the In-
fotainment system display with a red arrow symbol. The arrow points in the direction from which the object is approaching > fig. 126. -- Audible warning signal: a continuous tone may sound as an additional indicator when driving in
reverse.

RAH-8918

-- Automatic brake activation: a brief activation of the brakes may also warn you of a potential collision with an approaching object.
The audible warning signal and the automatic brake activation occur only when driving in re-
verse.
ZAWARNING
--The rear cross-traffic assist is an assist system and cannotprevent a collision byitself. The driver must always intervene. The driver is always responsible for braking at the correct time.
-- Please note that the rear cross-traffic assist may activate the brakes unexpectedly. Secure any cargo that you are transporting to reducethe risk of damage or injury.
-- Automatic braking cannotbe triggered again within 20 seconds after an automatic brake activation.
--If there is an acoustic warning signal from the rear cross-traffic assist, then the parking system may not warn you of detected obstacles under certain circumstances.
-- The view of the radar sensors may be impaired by leaves, snow, heavy sprayor dirt. Clean the area in front of the sensors > page 122,fig. 122.
Z\WARNING
--The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide alerts about people and cannot warn you about every type of approaching objects, such as cyclists. Always monitor the traffic as well as the vehicle's surroundings with di-
rect eye contact.
-- The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide alerts if your vehicle is parallel or diagonally parkedor if your vehicle is pulled too far into the parking space so that it is hidden by adjacent vehicles.

@) Note

Also read the information in © in General

information on page 123.

8W0012721BG

125

Assist systems

@ Tips
-- You can cancel the automatic brake activation with increasing braking force if you apply the brakes yourself or accelerate considerably.
--In some situations, rear cross-traffic assist may warn you even if there is no crosstraffic in a critical area, for example when backing into a parking space or maneuvering.
-- The rear cross-traffic assist also switches off when you switch off the ESC.
-- For an explanation on conformity with the FCC regulations in the United States and the Industry Canada regulations, see => page 370.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
A message appearsin the instrumentcluster display if the side assist switches off automatically.
8 Audi side assist: malfunction! Please contact Service
8 Audi side assist and exit warning: malfunction! Please contact Service
The system cannot guarantee thatit will detect vehicles correctly and it has switched off. The sensors have been moved or are faulty. Have the system checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility soon.
Audi side assist: currently unavailable. Sensor vision restricted due to surroundings. See owner's manual
Audi side assist and exit warning: currently unavailable. Sensor vision restricted due to surroundings
The radar sensor vision is impaired. The area in front of the sensors must not be covered by bike racks, stickers, leaves, snow or any other objects. Clean the area covering the sensors, if necessary => page 122,fig. 122.
Audi side assist: currently unavailable. See owner's manual

Audi side assist and exit warning: currently unavailable. See owner's manual
Side assist cannot be switched on at this time because thereis a malfunction (for example, the battery charge level may be too low).
Rear parking aid: obstacle detection restricted
The rear cross-traffic assist is not available. Either the ESC is switched off, or the radar sensors maybe covered by a bike rack, stickers, leaves, snowor other objects. Switch the ESC on, or clean the area in front ofthe sensorsif necessary => page 122, fig. 122. If this message continues to be displayed, drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Audi drive select
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
Drive select makes it possible to experience different types ofvehicle characteristics in one vehi-
cle. The driver can select Offroad*, Comfort, Auto and Dynamic modes in the Infotainment sys-
tem to switch between a sporty and a comforta-
ble driving mode, for example. In the Individual
mode, the settings can be adjusted to your personal preferences. This makesit possible to combine settings such as a sporty engine setting with light steering.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
The following systems, among other things, are influenced by drive select:
Engine and automatic transmission*
Depending on the mode, the engine and automatic transmission* respond morequickly or ina more balanced manner to accelerator pedal movements. In the sporty Dynamic mode, the transmission shifts at higher speed ranges.

126

8W0012721BG
B8W-0171

Suspension control*
The suspension control* uses sensors to record information regarding steering movements, braking and acceleration operations by the driver, road surface, driving speed, and load. This makes it possible to adapt damping to the driving situation nearly in real time. With drive select, you can adjust the suspension control to sporty (Dynamic), comfortable (Comfort) or balanced (Auto).
Steering
The power steering adapts. Indirect steering that moveseasily as in Comfort mode is especially suited to long drives on highways. The Dynamic mode provides sporty, direct steering.
The following applies to vehicles with dynamic steering*: the steering ratio changes based on vehicle speed in order to maintain optimum steering effort for the driver at all times. This sets the steering to be less sensitive at higher speeds in order to provide improved vehicle control. At reduced speeds, steering is more direct in order to keep the steering effort as minimal as possible when the driver is maneuvering the vehicle. At low and average speeds, dynamic steering* additionally provides more responsive steering performance.
Sport differential*
As a componentof the all wheel drive system (quattro) > page 143, the sport differential distributes the driving power to the rear axle depending on the situation. The distribution of power varies depending on the selected mode from moderate (Comfort) to sporty (Dynamic). The goal is a high level of agility and ability to accelerate on curves. The vehicle is very responsive to steering.
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)*
The behavior when accelerating can be adjusted from comfortable to sporty, depending on the drive select mode. Adaptive cruise control also responds to the driving behavior of the vehicle ahead in a more conservative or sporty manner.

Assist systems
Engine sound*
The engine sound adapts to the current mode and can be subtle to sporty.
@ Tips
The "S" selector lever position automatically engages when the Dynamic mode is selected.
Selecting the driving mode
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
Fig. 127 Center console: controls for drive select
> Press the left or right arrow key > fig. 127 until the desired mode appearsin the instrument cluster/Infotainment system display. Or
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > Audi drive select.
> Select and confirm the desired setting. You can change the driving mode when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. If traffic permits, after changing modes, briefly remove your foot from the accelerator pedal so that the recently selected mode is also activated for the engine. Offroad" - activates offroad functions to support driving on rough terrain. The engine, transmission and steering adjust and the Start/Stop system* switchesoff. Comfort - provides a comfort-oriented vehicle setup and is suited for long drives on highways. Auto- provides an overall comfortable yet dynamic driving feel and is suited for everyday use. Dynamic - gives the driver a sporty driving feel and is suited to a sporty driving style. Individual - > page 128.

127

Assist systems

Adjusting the Individual mode
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
You can adjustthe vehicle settings to your personalpreferences.

> Select in the Infotainment system: MENU but-
ton > Vehicle > Audi drive select> Individual > right control button.

The equipmentin your vehicle will determine
which settings you can adjust. The following table gives an overview of the characteristics.

After you have closed the settings, you will automatically drive in the Individual mode.

Engine/transmission Steering Dynamic steering* Suspension control* Sport differential* Engine sound* ACC*

balanced comfortable comfortable/indirect comfortable Off subtle comfortable

balanced balanced balanced/direct balanced balanced subtle/sporty® balanced

2) Subtle in the selector lever position "D" and sporty in "S".

sporty sporty sporty/direct sporty sporty sporty sporty

Your settings are automatically saved in Individual mode.

128

Parking aid
General information
Applies to: vehicles with a rear parking system/parking system plus/rearview camera/peripheral cameras
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, various parking aids will help you when parking and maneuvering.
The rear parking system is an audible parking aid that warns you of obstacles behind the vehicle => page 130.
The parking system plus assists you while parking by audibly and visually warning you of objects detected in front of and behind the vehicle => page 130.
The rearview camera showsthe area behind the vehicle in the Infotainment system display. The lines in the rearview camera image help you to park or maneuver > page 132.
The peripheral cameras give various views to help you when parking or maneuvering = page 133. The parking system plus functions are also available > page 130.
ZA WARNING
-- Alwayslook for traffic and check the area around your vehicle by looking at it directly as well. The parking system cannot replace the driver's attention. The driver is always responsible when entering or exiting a parking space and during similar maneuvers.
-- Please note that some surfaces, such as clothing, are not detected by the system.
-- Sensors and cameras haveblind spotsin which people and objects cannot be detected. Be especially cautious of small children and animals.
-- Always keep your eyes on the vehicle's surroundings, using the rearview mirror as well.
-- The sensors can be displaced by impacts or damage to the radiator grille, bumper, wheel housing and the underbody. The parking system maybe impaired as a result. Have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility check their function.

Parking aid
C@) Note
-- Some objects are not detected or displayed by the system under certain circumstances:
-- objects such as barrier chains, trailer draw
bars, vertical poles or fences -- objects above the sensors such as wall ex-
tensions -- objects with certain surfaces or structures
such as chain link fences or powder snow -- If you continue driving closer to a low ob-
ject, it may disappear from the sensor range. Note that you will no Longer be warned aboutthis obstacle. -- Maintain enough distance from the curb to reduce the risk of damage to the rims.
@) Tips
-- The system mayprovide a warning even though thereare no obstacles in the cover-
age area in some situations, such as:
-- certain road surfaces or when thereis tall grass
-- external ultrasonic sources such as from cleaning vehicles
-- in heavy rain, snow,or thick vehicle ex-
haust -- We recommend thatyou practice parking in
a traffic-free location or parking lot to become familiar with the system. Practice parking in good light and weather conditions. -- You can change the volume ofthe signals and the display > page 136. -- What appearsin the infotainmentdisplay is somewhat time-delayed. -- The sensors mustbe kept clean and free of snowand icefor the parking aid to operate. -- Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper: The rearview camerawill be cleaned with the rear window > page53.

8W0012721BG

129

Parking aid
Rear parking system

Parking system plus

Applies to: vehicles with rear parking system
The rear parking system is an audible parking aid.

Description
There is a sensor in the rear bumper cover.If these detect an obstacle, audible signals warn you.
Makesure the sensorsare not covered by stickers, deposits or any other obstructions as it may impair the function of the system. For information on cleaning, see > page 342.
The range at which the sensors begin to measure is approximately:

Rear

Side Center

3 ft (0.90 m) 5.2 ft (1.60 m)

The closer you get to the obstacle, the shorter the interval between the audible signals. A continuous tone sounds when the obstacleis less than approximately 1 foot (0.30 meters) away. Do not continue backing up > A\ in Generalinformation on page 129, >@ in General information
on page 129!

Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically when reverse gear is engaged while the engine is running. A brief tone will sound.

@ Tips
If the distance to an obstacle remains constant, the volume of the distance warning gradually lowers after a few seconds until it is muted (this does not apply to the continuous tone). If the obstacle comescloser than it was before the sound was muted, the tone will sound again. If the obstacle becomesfarther awaythan it was before the sound was muted, no tone will sound. Pay attention to the vehicle's surroundings when you start to drive.

130

Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus

RAZ-0260

ee
Fig. 129 Infotainment system: visual distance display

The parking system plus uses audio and visual
warnings to help you avoid obstacles when park-
ing.

Sensorsare located in the front and rear bump-
ers. If these detect an obstacle, audible and visu-
al signals warn you.

Makesure the sensorsare not covered by stick-
ers, deposits or any other obstructions as it may impair the function of the system. For information on cleaning, see > page 342.

The display field begins approximatelyat:

4 ft (1.20 m)

3 ft (0.90 m)

5.2 ft (1.60 m)

3 ft (0.90 m)

Audio signals

The closer you get to the obstacle, the shorter

the interval between the audible signals. A con-

tinuous tone sounds when the obstacleis less

than approximately 1 foot (0.30 meters) away.

Do not continue driving forward or in reverse

Parking aid

=> A\ in General information on page 129, >@ in General information on page 129!
Visual warnings
The visual warnings in the Infotainment system display help you to detect the critical vehicle area and to estimate the distance to an obstacle > fig. 129.
Red segments showidentified obstacles that are in your vehicle's path. The red lines mark the expected direction of travel according to the steering angle. A white segment indicates an identified obstacle that is outside of the vehicle's path. As your vehicle comes closer to the obstacle, the segments movecloser to the vehicle. The collision area has been reached when the nextto last segment is displayed. Obstacles in the collision area, including those outside of the vehicle's path, are shown in red. Do not continue driving forward or in reverse > A\ in General information on page 129, >@ in General information on page 129!
@ Tips
If the distance to an obstacle remains constant, the volume ofthe distance warning gradually lowers after a few seconds until it is muted (this does not apply to the continuous tone). If the obstacle comescloser than it was
before the sound was muted, the tone will sound again. If the obstacle becomesfarther awaythan it was before the sound was muted, no tone will sound. Pay attention to the vehicle's surroundings when you start to
drive.

Sy icealiaremli ie Rela
Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus
zsS=aEs|
Fig. 130 Center console: parking aid button
Switching on andoff Requirement: the vehicle speed must be under approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
> Press the PTM button in the center console. A short confirmation tone sounds and the LED in the button turns on.
Switching on automatically The system switches on automatically when reverse gear is engaged while the engine is running. A brief tone will sound. If Activate automatically is switched on in the Infotainment system and if the vehicle approachesan obstacle at speeds under approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the parking aid will switch on automatically. Audible signals will sound once the obstacle is within the sensor de-
tection area.
Switching off automatically The distance indicator for the parking system
plus switches off automatically when driving forward faster than 6 mph (10 km/h).

(@) Tips
If you press the Pv button to switch the parking aid off, it can only be reactivated automatically when one of the following conditions is
met:
-- The vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h) -- The ignition is switched off and back on
again -- The parking brake is set and then released >

8W0012721BG

131

Parking aid -- Automatic transmission: the "P" selector lever position is engaged and released again
Rearview camera
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera
Fig. 131 Diagram: linesto aid in parking
The rearview camera helps you to park or maneuver using the orientation lines. General information
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera
Fig. 132 Area covered @ and area not covered (2) by the rearview camera.
Fig. 133 Luggage compartmentlid: location oftherearview camera

B8W-0107

B8W-0106

B8V-0629

The rearview camerais located above the rear license plate bracket. Make sure that the lens for the rearview camera > fig. 133 is not covered by deposits or any other obstructions becausethis can impair the function of the rearview camera. For information on cleaning, see > page 342.
The rearview camera coverage area includes (@) > fig. 132. Only this area is shownin the Infotainment display. Objects that are in area Q), which is not covered, are not displayed.
ZA WARNING
-- Alwaysread and follow the applicable warnings > A\ in General information on page 129.
-- If the position and the installation angle of the rearview camera was changed, for example after a collision, do not continue to use the system for safety reasons. Haveit checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Only use the rearview camerato assist you if it shows a good, clear picture. For example, the image maybe affected by the sun shining into the lens,dirt on the lens, or if there is a malfunction.
-- Use the rearview camera only if the luggage compartment lid is completely closed. Make sure any objects you may have mounted on the luggage compartmentlid do not block the rearview camera.
-- The camera lens enlarges and distorts the field of vision. The object appears both altered and inaccurate on the screen.
--Incertain situations, people or objects in the display appear closer or farther away:
-- For objects that do not touch the ground, such as the bumper of a parked vehicle, a trailer hitch or the rear of a truck. Do not use the orientation lines in this case.
-- If driven from level surface onto an incline, or a downwardslope.
-- If driven toward protruding objects.
-- If the vehicle is carrying too much load in the rear.

132

Parking aid

@) Note
-- Alwaysread and follow the applicable warnings >@ in General information on page 129.
-- The orange-colored orientation lines in the Infotainment display show the vehicle path based on the steering wheel angle. The front of the vehicle swings out more than the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty of distance so that an exterior mirror or a corner of the vehicle does not collide with any obstacles.
Sic Rie mela
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera
Switching on and off
Requirement: the vehicle speed must be under approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
> Press the Pbutton in the center console => page 131, fig. 130. A short confirmation tone sounds and the LED in the button turns on.
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically when reverse gear is engaged while the engine is running. A brief tone will sound.
Switching off automatically
The system switches off automatically when driving forward faster than 6 mph (10 km/h).
Perpendicular parking
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera
This view may be used when parking in a garage
or ina parking space.

Fig. 135 Infotainmentsystem: aligning the vehicle
> Turn the Infotainment system on and shift into reverse gear.
> The orange orientation lines @) showthe vehicle's direction of travel. Turn the steering wheel until the orange orientation lines align with the parking space > fig. 134. Use the markings @) to help you estimate the distance to an obstacle. Each marking represents approximately 3 ft (1 m). The blue area represents an extension of the vehicle's outline by approximately 16 ft (5 meters) to the rear.
> While driving in reverse gear, adjust the steering wheel angleto fit the parking space using the orange orientation lines for assistance > /\ in General information on page 132, >@) in General information on page 133. Area @) represents the rear bumper. At the very latest, stop the vehicle when the red orientation line
@ bordersan object.
Peripheral cameras
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
With this equipment, the parking system plus* = page 130 is supplemented with various peripheral cameras. The four cameras give you the following views: area around the vehicle, front cor-
ner view and rear corner view, view in front of the
vehicle and behind the vehicle.

8W0012721BG

Fig. 134 Infotainment system: aiming at a parking space

133

Parking aid

General information
Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
Fig. 136 Location of peripheral cameras
The four peripheral cameras are located in the radiator grille, in the luggage compartment lid and on both exterior mirrors > fig. 136. Make sure that the lenses are not covered by deposits or any other obstructions as this may impair the system. For information on cleaning, see > page 342.
Black corners are shownin the vehicle silhouette when in Surroundings mode. Objects in these areas are outside of the camera's field of view and are not detected.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Alwaysread and follow the applicable warnings > A\ in General information on page 129.
-- If the position or the installation angle of a camera was changed, for exampleafter a collision, do not continue to use the system for safety reasons. Have it checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Keep in mind that the image in the displayis incorrect if the exterior mirror housing has been movedout ofplace.
-- Only use the images provided by the camera on the rear of the vehicle when the luggage compartment lid is completely closed. Make sure any objects you may have mounted on the luggage compartmentlid do not block the rearview camera.
-- The area around the vehicle is shown using the camera images. The vehicle image is shown bythe system. Objects and obstacles above the camera are not displayed.

B8W-0108

-- Cameralenses enlarge and distort the field of vision. The objects appear both altered and inaccurate on the screen.
@) Note
-- Alwaysread and follow the applicable warnings >@ in General information on page 129.
-- The Infotainment display showsthe direction in which the rear of the vehicleis traveling based on the steering wheel angle. The front of the vehicle swings out more than the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty of distance so that an exterior mirror or a corner of the vehicle does notcollide with any obstacles.
@ Tips If the 2/&9/< symbol appearsin the display and the respective display area is grayed
out, then the power exterior mirrors were
folded in or the driver's door/front passenger's door/luggage compartment lid was opened.
Switching on and off
Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
Pcaa Fig. 137 Infotainment system: select the mode
Switching on and off Requirement: the vehicle speed must be under approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
> Press the P" button in the center console
=> page 131, fig. 130. Ashort confirmation
tone sounds and the LED in the button turns on.

134

Switching on automatically The system switches on automatically when reverse gear is engaged while the engine is running. A brief tone will sound.
Switching off automatically The system switches off automatically when driv-
ing forward faster than 6 mph (10 km/h).
Selecting the mode
> Turn the control knob to the symbol for the desired mode through ©) © fig. 137 and press the control knob.
You mayselect from the following modes:
Corner view (front) > page 135
Front > page 135
Top view > page 135
Rear > page 136
E) - Corner view (rear) > page 135

Parking aid
> To show the side view toward the front, select
the symbol @) © fig. 138 with the control knob and press the control knob.
> To show the side view toward the rear, select
the symbol ) > fig. 139 with the control knob and press the control knob.
Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
eect Fig. 140 Infotainment system: front mode
For example, this view assists you in using the full maneuvering range in front of the vehicle. The area in front of the vehicle is displayed. The vehicle surroundings are shown in the right area of the display. You can switch between the optical display and camera image > page 136. > Select the symbol (8) with the control knob. The
orange orientation lines mark the expected path of the vehicle. Stop the vehicle when the red orientation line* borders an object > A\ in General information on page 134.

prec ata Fig. 138 Infotainment system: Corner view (front)

Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
Scar a

8W0012721BG

Were r tener
Fig. 139 Infotainment system: Corner view (rear)
This view can assist you for example, when you are exiting from an area with poor visibility. The area at the front and rear sides of the vehiclesis displayed.

Perea Fig. 141 Infotainment system: Surroundings mode
This view is ideal for maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is shown using the camera images. The vehicle image is shown by the system. >
135

Parking aid
> Select the symbol © with the control knob and press the control knob.
Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
Peat Fig. 142 Infotainment system: rear mode
For example, this view assists you in using the full maneuvering range behind the vehicle. The area behind the vehicle is displayed. The vehicle surroundings are shown in the right area of the display. You can switch between the optical display and camera image > page 136. > Select the symbol @) with the control knob.
Perpendicular parking
Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
This view may be used when parking in a garage or ina parking space.

dd. Look!Safe to move?

Fig. 144 Infotainmentsystem: aligning the vehicle

> Turn the Infotainment system on and shift into reverse gear.
> The orange orientation lines @ show the vehicle's direction of travel. Turn the steering wheel until the orange orientation lines align with the parking space > fig. 143. Use the markings @) to help you estimate the distance to an obstacle. Each marking represents approximately 3 ft
(1 m). The blue area represents an extension of the vehicle's outline by approximately 16 ft (5 meters) to the rear. > While driving in reverse gear, adjust the steering wheel angle to fit the parking space using the orange orientation lines for assistance > A\ in General information on page 134, >@) in General information on page 134. Area @) represents the rear bumper. You should stop reversing at the latest when the red orientation line @ borders an object > A in General information on page 132.
Adjusting the parking aid
Applies to: vehicles with a rear parking system/parking system plus/rearview camera/peripheral cameras
The functions are adjusted in the Infotainment system.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver assistance > Parking aid. Or
> When the parking aid is active, select in the Infotainment system: right control button*.
End system* - stop the parking aid
Activate automatically* - switch automatic activation on/off
Front volume*- volume for the front area
Rear volume- volume for the rear area
Entertainmentfader - the volume of the audio/ video source is lowered when the parking system is turned on.
View* - switch between an optical display (Graphic) and camera image (Camera) on the side of the display.
Automatic front/rear camera changing" - the view behind the vehicle (Rear mode)is displayed >

136

Parking aid

automatically when you shift into reverse gear. The view in front of the vehicle (Front mode)is displayed automatically when you shift into the forward gears. When first activating in a forward gear with the Pbutton, the front side viewis displayed (Corner view (front) mode).
If you do not set the V, the view behind the vehicle (Rear mode) is always displayed and it does not switch to the Front mode when a forward gear is selected.
@ Tips
-- Several menus can be accessed with the right control button only when the parking aid is active.
-- Certain settings are automatically stored and assigned to the vehicle key being used.
-- The newlevel is demonstrated briefly* when the volume is adjusted.
Error messages
Applies to: vehicles with a rear parking system/parking system plus/rearview camera/peripheral cameras
wm Rear parking aid: malfunction! Obstacles cannot be detected
wm Front parking aid: malfunction! Obstacles cannotbe detected
wm Parking aid: malfunction! Obstacles cannot be detected
When one of these messages appears, thereis a system malfunction. The LED in the P4 button also blinks when switching it on. The relevant message only appears again when you manually activate the parking aid with the button.
Rear parking aid: obstacle detection restricted
The rear cross-traffic assist* > page 125, Rear cross-traffic assist is not available. Either the ESC
is switched off, or the radar sensors may be cov-
ered by a bike rack, stickers, leaves, snow or other
objects. Switch the ESC on, or clean the area in
front of the sensorsif necessary > page 122, fig. 122. If this message continues to be displayed, drive immediately to an authorized Audi

dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Parking system plus*
If a sensor or speaker is faulty, the P4 symbol will appear in front of/behind the vehicle in the Infotainment system display. If a rear sensor is
faulty, only obstacles thatare in areas (@) and
are shown > page 130,fig. 128. If a front sensor is faulty, only obstacles that are in areas © and
© are shown.
Peripheral cameras*
There is a system malfunction if the #« symbol appears and the corresponding area of the display is shown in black. The camera is not working in this area.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

8W0012721BG

137

Intelligent Technology

Intelligent Technology
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) supports driver safety. It reduces the risk of slipping and improves driving stability. ESC detectscritical sit-
uations, such as if the vehicle is oversteering or
understeering, or if the wheels are spinning. The brakes are applied or the engine torque is reduced in order to stabilize the vehicle. When the ESC engages, the B indicator light flashesin the instrument cluster.
The following systems are integrated in the ESC:
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when braking. The vehicle can still be steered even during hard braking. Apply steady pressure to the brake pedal. Do not pump the pedal. A pulsing in the brake pedal indicates that the system is acting to stabilize the vehicle.
Brake assist system
The brake assist system can decrease braking distance. It increases braking power when the driver presses the brake pedal quickly in emergency situations. You must press and hold the brake pedal until the dangerous situation is over. In vehicles
with adaptive cruise control*, the brake assist system is more sensitive if the distance detected
to the vehicle driving ahead is too small.
Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR)
ASR reduces engine power when the drive wheels begin spinning and adaptsthe force to the road conditions. This makes it easier to start, accelerate and drive up hills.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
The EDL applies the brakes to wheels that are slipping and transfers the drive power to the other wheels. This function is not available at higher speeds.

In extreme cases, EDL automatically switches off
to keep the brake on the braked wheel from overheating. The vehicle is still functioning correctly. EDL will switch on again automatically when conditions have returned to normal.
Power steering
The ESC can also supportvehicle stability through steering.
Selective wheel torque control
Selective wheel torque control is used when driving on curves. Braking is targeted toward the wheelson the inside of the curve as needed. This allows moreprecise driving in curves.
Automatic post-collision braking system
The "automatic post-collision braking system" can help to reducethe risk of sliding and of additional collisions after an accident. If the airbag control module detects a collision, the vehicle is braked by the ESC.
The vehicle does not brake automatically if one of the following occurs:
-- The driver presses the accelerator pedal -- The ESC, the brake system, or the vehicle elec-
trical system is not functioning
ZA WARNING
-- The ESC and its integrated systems cannot overcome the limits imposed by natural physical laws. This is especially important on slippery or wet roads. If the systems begin acting to stabilize your vehicle, you should immediately alter your speed to match the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the increased safety provided tempt you into taking risks. This could increase your risk of a collision.
-- Please notethe risk of a collision increases when driving fast, especially through curves and on slippery or wet roads, and when driving too close to objects ahead. The ESC and
its integrated systems cannot always pre-
ventcollisions - thereis still a risk of accidents!

138

Intelligent Technology

-- Press the accelerator pedal carefully when accelerating on smooth, slippery surfaces such as ice and snow.The drive wheels can spin even when thesecontrol systems are installed and this can affect driving stability and increase the risk of a collision.
@) Tips
-- The ABS and ASR onlyfunction correctly when all four wheels have a similar wear

condition. Different tire sizes can lead toa reduction in engine power.
-- You mayhear noises when the systems described are working.

Switching on/off ESC turns on automatically when you start the engine.

2 The following situations are exceptions whereit

g=&az

may be useful to switch on sport mode (sedan) or offroad mode (allroad) to allow the wheels to

spin:

Fig. 145 Center console with button Ror
The ESC is designed to function in levels. Depend-
ing on the level that is selected, the stabilization
function of the ESC will be limited or switched off. The amount ofstabilization control will differ depending on the level.

-- Rocking the vehicle to free it when it is stuck -- Driving in deep snow or on loose ground -- Driving with snow chains -- Applies to: allroad: driving on rough terrain
when much ofthe car's weight is lifted off the wheels (axle articulation) -- Applies to: allroad: driving downhill while braking on loose ground
For your safety, switch the sport mode/offroad mode off in advance.

ESC levels

Applies to: sedan
Sport mode on

Behavior

The ESC and ASR stabiliza-
tion functions are limited oA.

ESC/ASR off

Sport modeoff or ESC/ASR on

The stabilization function is The full stabilization func-

not available > A\. ESC and_|tion of the ESC and ASR is

ASR are switched off.

available again.

Operating
Indicator lights Messages

Press the [2 OFF] button briefly.

Press and hold the |& OFF button longer than 3 sec-
onds.

Press the [2 OFF] button again.

Biturns on.

Banc Rd turn on.

Baiturns off or EJ and aa tu rn off.

Stabilization control (ESC): Stabilization control (ESC): Stabilization control

sport. Warning! Restricted off. Warning! Restricted

(ESC): on

stability

8W0012721BG

139

Intelligent Technology

Applies to: allroad
Offroad mode on

ESC/ASR off

Behavior
Operating
Indicator lights Messages

The ESC and ASR stabiliza-
tion functions are limited DSA.

|The stabilization function is
not available > A\. ESC and__| ASR are switched off.

Press the |#°*] button briefly. Press and hold the || button longer than three sec-
onds.

Egiturns on.

Eland Sa turn on.

Stabilization control (ESC): Stabilization control (ESC):

offroad. Warning! Reduced off. Warning! Restricted

stability

Offroad modeoff or ESC/ASR on The full stabilization function of the ESC and ASR is available again. Press the |#°"| button again.
Eaiturns off or [gj and Ea turn off. Stabilization control (ESC): on

A WARNING
You should only switch sport mode/offroad mode on or switch ESC/ASR off if your driving abilities and road conditions permit. -- The stabilization function is limited when
sport mode/offroad mode is switched on. The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle could swerve, especially on slick or slippery road surfaces. -- There is no vehicle stabilization when ESC/ASR are switchedoff.
Hill descent assist
Applies to: allroad
Hill descent assist makesit possible to drive down a hill at a constant speed.
a
Q
g=&az

Hill descent assist brakes all four wheels automatically in order to limit speed when driving either forward or reverse on hills with a grade from approximately 6 to 60%. The wheels will not lock up because the ABS remains activated. In vehicles with a manual transmission, the hill hold assist adjusts to the specified speed so that the engine is not braked belowits idle speed.
When hill descent assist is on, the speed your vehicle was traveling when it entered the hill is maintained. It is only possible to switch on the assist when driving slower than 37 mph (60 km/h). The assist begins shortly after you start
driving and continues up to approximately
19 mph (30 km/h). In vehicles with a manual transmission, regulation below approximately 6 mph (9 km/h)is only possibleif the clutch pedal is pressed or if the gearshift is in the neutral position. If the clutch pedal is released when a gear is engaged below approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), the regulated speed will increase. The driver can increase or decrease the vehicle speed within these limits by pressing the accelerator or brake pedal.

Fig. 146 Center console: hill descent assist button
> To switch hill descent assist on, press the L@ button. The LED in the button will turn on.
>» Press the button again to switch it off. The LED in the button turns off.

However, there must be enough traction. Hill de-
scent assist cannot function as expected, if for
example the hill is icy or if the surface is loose SA.
Active regulation of a speed up to approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) is signaled in the instrument cluster by an indicator light ZB The indicator light turns on in the ready mode.

140

Intelligent Technology

The system does not work at speeds between approximately 19 and 37 mph (30 and 60 km/h). The system is then in ready-mode. This is indicated by the LED in the button turning on. The system automatically switched off when you drive faster than 37 mph (60 km/h). The LED will also turn off in this scenario.
Hill descent assist is automatically activated under the following conditions:
-- the LED in the button turns on -- the vehicle speed is lower than 19 mph (30
km/h) --the hill angle is at least approximately 6%
ZA WARNING
-- Be ready to apply the brakesat all times when using the hill hold assist.
-- Always adjust the speed tothe visibility,
weather, road, and traffic conditions. The
system cannotreplacethe driver's attention. -- The system cannot maintain a constant vehicle speed in all situations, for example when on smooth or slippery ground. This can increasethe risk of an accident.
Brakes
New brake pads
New brake pads do not achievetheir full braking effect during the first 250 mi (400 km). They mustbe "broken in"first. However, you can compensatefor the slightly reduced braking force by pressing firmly on the brake pedal. Avoid heavy braking during the break-in period.
Brake pad wear depends largely on the way the vehicle is driven and on operating conditions. Brake pad wear increases when driving frequently in the city or short distances or when using a very sportydriving style.
Operating noise
Noises may occur when braking depending on the speed, braking force, and outside conditions such as temperature and humidity.

Wetconditions or road salt
In certain situations, for example after driving through water, in heavy rain, or after washing your car, the braking effect may be reduced due to moisture or ice on the brake rotors and brake pads. The brakes must be "dried"first with a few careful brake applications.
When driving at higher speeds while the windshield wipers are switched on, the brake pads are briefly pressed against the brake rotors. This action, which is not felt by the driver, happens at regular intervals and ensures a better reaction time for the brakes in wet weather.
The braking effect can also be reduced if you are driving on salted roads and you do not apply the brakes for long periods of time. The layer of salt on the brake rotors and pads must be worn off first when the brakesare applied.
Corrosion
Leaving the vehicle parked for long periods of
time, low mileage on the vehicle, and avoiding
heavy braking can contribute to corrosion on the brake rotors and to dirty brake pads.
If you usually avoid heavy braking or if thereis corrosion present, occasional heavy braking at high speeds is recommended to clean the brake rotors and pads > A\.
Brake system malfunction
If you notice that the brake pedal suddenly goes downfarther toward the floor when you press it, then a brakecircuit in the dual-circuit brake system may have malfunctioned. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the problem corrected. On the waythere, drive with reduced speed and keep in mind that you will need a longer distance to stop and you will need to press the brake pedal harder.
Low brakefluid level
When the brakefluid level is low, malfunctions in the brake system mayoccur. The brakefluid level is electronically monitored.

8W0012721BG

141

Intelligent Technology
Brake booster
The brake booster amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal.
ZA WARNING
-- Only apply the brakes for the purpose of cleaning the brake system when road and traffic conditions permit. You must not endanger other road usersand increase the risk of an accident.
-- Due to the risk of injury, only have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility work on the brake system. Incorrect repairs could impair the function.
-- Never let the vehicle roll while the engine is stopped because this increases the risk of an accident.
@) Note
-- Never let the brakes "rub" by pressing the pedal lightly when braking is not actually necessary. This causes the brakes to overheat and increases braking distance and causes wear.
-- Before driving downhill a long distance ona steep hill, decrease your speed and select a lower gear. This makes use of the engine braking effect and reducesthe load placed on the brakes. If you need to brake additionally, brake in intervals and not continuously.
@ Tips
-- If the brake booster is not working, you mustpress the brake pedal with much more force than normal.
-- If you retrofit your vehicle with a front spoiler, wheel coversor similar items, make sure that the air flow to the front wheelsis not obstructed. Otherwise the brake system can overheat.

Electromechanical
steering, Dynamic steering
The electromechanical steering supports the driver's steering movements.
Power steering adapts electronically based on the vehicle speed.
Indicator lights and messages
a Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
If this indicator light turns on and stays on and this message appears, the power steering may have failed.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
a Steering: malfunction! You can continue driving
If the indicator light turns on and this message appears, the steering wheel may be moredifficult to move or moresensitive than usual. The steering wheel mayalso be turned to the side when driving straight.
Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction corrected.
Dynamic steering: correcting steering wheel position
If the indicator light turns on and this message appears, the dynamic steering" is reinitializing. The steering wheel will be easy to moveafter starting the engine. Reinitialization might be necessary if the steering wheel was moved while the engine was switched off. The display turns off if the initialization was successful.
(i) Tips
--Ifthe a orl indicator light only stays on for a short time, you may continue driving.
-- The dynamic steering stability systems => page 138 are not available in the event of a system malfunction.

142

Intelligent Technology

-- For additional information on dynamic steering, see > page 126.
All wheel drive (quattro)
Applies to: vehicles with all wheel drive
The all-wheel drive system distributes the driving power variably to the front and rear axle to improve the driving characteristics. It works together with selective wheel torque control, which can activate when driving through curves => page 138.
Applies to: vehicles with quattro ultra: If the driving situation does not require all wheel drive, then the rear section of the drivetrain will decouple to save fuel. The system constantly determines and anticipatesif all wheel drive is needed. This allowsthe rear drivetrain to recouple shortly beforeit is needed.
The all wheel drive concept is designed for high engine power. Your vehicle is exceptionally powerful and has excellent driving characteristics both under normal driving conditions and on snowand ice. Always read and follow safety precautions > A\.
ZA WARNING
-- Even in vehicles with all wheel drive, you should adapt your driving style to the current road and traffic conditions to reduce the risk of an accident.
-- The braking ability of your vehicle is limited to the traction of the wheels. In this way,it is not different from a two wheel drive vehicle. Do notdrive too fast because this increasesthe risk of an accident.
-- Note that on wetstreets, the front wheels can "hydroplane'"if driving at speeds that are too high. Unlike front wheel drive vehicles, the engine RPM does notincrease suddenly when the vehicle begins hydroplaning. Adapt your speed to the road conditions to reduce the risk of an accident.

Sport differential
Applies to: vehicles with sport differential
The sportdifferential distributes the drive power to the rear axle based on the situation. The goal is a high level of agility and ability to accelerate on curves. The vehicle is very responsive to steering. The settings depend on the selected Audi drive select* mode.

Energy management
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent energy managementsystem for distributing electricity. This significantly improves the starting ability and increases the vehicle batterylife.

@) Tips
-- If you drive short distances frequently, the vehicle battery may not charge enough
while driving. As a result, convenience func-
tions for electrical equipment may be temporarily unavailable. -- The vehicle battery will gradually drain if the vehicle is not driven for long periods of time, or if electrical equipment is used when the engine is not running. To ensure
that the vehicle can still be started, the
electrical equipmentwill be limited or switched off.

Notice about data
recorded by the Event Data Recorder and
vehicle control modules

Event Data Recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-

corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-

tions, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-

ing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR

is designed to record data related to vehicle dy-

namics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this

vehicle is designed to record such data as:

8W0012721BG

143

Intelligent Technology

-- How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
-- Whether or notthe driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
-- Howfar (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
-- How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Some state lawsrestrict the retrieval or downloading of data stored by EDRs installed in a vehicle for the express purpose of retrieving data after an accident or crash event without the owner's consent.
Audi will not access the EDR and/or similar data or give it to others-
-- unless the vehicle owner (or lessee if the vehicle has been leased) agrees; or
-- upon the official request by the police; or -- upon the order of a court of law or a govern-
ment agency; or
-- for the defense of a lawsuit through the judicial discovery process.
-- Audi mayalso use the data for research about vehicle operation and safety performance or provide the datato a third party for research purposes without identifying the specific vehicle or information about the identity of its owner or lessee and only after the recorded vehicle data has been accessed.

Vehicle control modules
Your vehicle is also equipped with a number of electronic control modules for various vehicle systems, such as engine management, emission control, airbags, and safetybelts.
Theseelectronic control modules record data during normal vehicle operation that may be needed by trained technicians for diagnostic and repair purposes. The recording capability of these modules is limited to data (no sound is recorded). Only a small amountof data is actually recorded over a very limited period of time, or stored when a system fault is detected by a control module. Some of the data stored mayrelate to vehicle speed, direction, or braking, as well as restraint system use and performance in the event of a crash. Stored data can also only be read and downloaded with special equipment thatis directly connected to the vehicle.
G) Tips
Your vehicle may be equipped with Audi connect. Your use of certain Audi connect features requires wireless services that are provided by a third party wireless telecommunications provider. For details regarding how information obtained through Audi connectis collected, processed, transmitted, used, and shared, please see your contract with the wireless telecommunications provider.

144

Multi Media Interface

RAH-8845|

Multi Media Interface
Traffic safety information
Audi recommends performing certain Infotainment system functions, such as entering a destination, only when the vehicle is stationary.Always be preparedto stop operating the Infotainment system in the interest of your safety and the safety of other road users.
Z\ WARNING
Only use the Infotainment system when traffic conditions permit and always in a way that allows you to maintain complete control over your vehicle.
G@) Tips
Certain functions are not available while driving.
Introduction
The Multi Media Interface, or MMIfor short, combinesvarious systems for communication, navigation* and entertainment in your Audi. You can operate the MMI using the MMI control panel, the multifunction steering wheel or the voice recognition system*.

Fig. 148 -Applies to: vehicles with manual transmission:MMI control panel - separate shortcut keys on the center console

MMI control panel overview

@ Control knob , if needed with joy-

StiCKTURCKION® cies eae as wares we x 147,150

@ MMI touch control pad* .........

148

@® Left control button .............

147

@® Right control button ............

147

@ [BACK] button ............0....

147

Shortcut keys .............0000.

152

@ Tips
The shortcut keys © fig. 148 for the MMI
control panel (manual transmission) are on the center console.

MMI On/Off knob with joystick function

8W0012721BG
[RAH-8534)
tome
| [RAH-8536)

-Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission:- MMI control panel- integrated shortcut keys

ea e | 7
Fig. 149 MMI On/Off knob with joystick function

145

Multi Media Interface

Switching the MMI on/off: the MMI can be switched on/off manually. -- Switching on manually: press the On/Off knob
@ briefly > fig. 149. Or: press the [MENU] but-
ton © > page 145,fig. 147 or > page 145, fig. 148, or one of the buttons to open the me-
nus directly ©).
-- Switching off manually: press and hold the
On/Off knob @) > fig. 149 until the MMI
switches off. If the MMI has been switched off manually, it does not switch on again automatically the next time the ignition is switched on.
Additional functions:
-- Adjusting the volume: turn the On/Off knob @
> fig. 149.
-- Muting: press the On/Off knob @) © fig. 149 briefly.
-- Selecting the previous/next function (for example,a radio station/track): press the On/Off knob @) ° fig. 149 briefly toward the left KK or right DDI.
-- Fast forwarding/rewinding (for example songs): press and hold the On/Off knob @) => fig. 149 toward the left Kd or right PPI.
ZA\ WARNING
Adjust the volume of the audio system so that signals from outside the vehicle, such as police and fire sirens, can be heardeasily at all
times.
@ Tips
The MMI switches off automatically if the engine is not running and the vehicle batteryis low.
Infotainment system display
Switching on/off
> Press the [ol button to switch the Infotainment
system on and off.
When the MMI is switched on and the displayis switched off, you can operatecertain functions

using the On/Off knob with the MMI joystick function > page 145.
Gi) Tips
There maybe delays when switching on the display. Information on display images The display version depends on vehicle equip-
ment.
Fig. 150 Display version A
Fig. 151 Display version B
Additional content (such as album cover and map material) is shown on display version B, if applicable @) © fig. 151. Because the other content shown on the displays is nearly identical between the twoversions, this manual will primarily describe display version A.

146

IRAH-8539 RAH-8542

MMI operation

Multi Media Interface
Opening the main menu
> Press the [MENU] button ©) > page 145,
fig. 147 or > page 145,fig. 148. The MMI menus (such as Radio)are displayed fig. 153. Then you can select and confirm a function using the control knob.
Opening a menu directly
> Press the applicable button to directly open the menu (S) > page 145,fig. 147 or > page 145, fig. 148 in the direction of the desired menu (such as [RADIO]). Then you can select and confirm a function using the control knob.

Fig. 152 Operating the control knob
Selecting and confirming a function in a menu/List
> Selecting a function: turn the control knob @ > fig. 152 to the desired function (such as selecting a frequency).
> Confirming a selection: press the control knob
D) > fig. 152.
Returning to functions at higher levels
> Press the [BACK] button@%) > page 145, fig. 147 or > page 145,fig. 148.
Fig. 153 Diagram: main menu

Fig. 154 Control buttons on the MMI control panel
Selection menu: through the selection menu,
you can open additional functions within a menu item (such as Radio).
Requirement: the selection menu symbol must be displayed in the Infotainment system display
> fig. 154.
Opening andclosing the selection menu: press the left control button > fig. 154. Then you can select and confirm a function using the control knob.
147

8W0012721BG

RAH-8776

Multi Media Interface
Options menu: using the options menu, you can select and confirm context-dependent functions as well as settings within a menu item (such as
Radio).
Requirement: the options menu symbol [+] must be displayed in the Infotainment system display > fig. 154.
Opening and closing the options menu: press the right control button > fig. 154. Then you can select and confirm a function using the control knob.
leur elie elmer
This guide showsyou at a glance the pathsfor opening a desired menu andits settings and functions.
Example of a path
> Select: [RADIO] button > left control button > FM.
Following the path
> Press the [RADIO] button. > Press the left control button. > Turn the control knob to the FM menu item to
select it. > Press the control knob to confirm the selected
FM menu item.
> The selected and confirmed function is executed. In this example, the FM frequency band is set.

MMI touch
MMI touch control pad
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
You can enter data using handwriting recognition on the MMI touch control pad.

Angeles, CA

wntown, Los Angeles, CA

"on

Fig. 155 Example: entering a navigation destination using the MMI touch
The MMI touch control pad is on the surface with the control knob > fig. 155.
Entering numbers,letters, and symbols
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
The MMItouch allows you to enter data on the MMItouch control pad using handwriting recognition.

148

Fig. 156 Display when MMI touchis active

Multi Media Interface

Requirement: it must be possible to enter text or numbersand the symbol @) 9 fig. 156 must appear in the Infotainment system display.
-- Initial entry: write an individual upper case or lower case letter or number/symbol on the MMI touch control pad using your finger. A symbol thatis recognized clearly by the system is displayed in the Infotainment system display @ © page 148,fig. 155, confirmed with an audible signal if necessary, and transferred to the input field.
-- Entering spaces: move your finger across the MMI touch control pad from left to right.
-- Deleting characters: move your finger across the MMI touch control pad from right to left.
-- Selecting the input suggestion: press the control knob.
-- Switching directly to the resultslist: turn the control knob to the right.
-- Opening thespeller: select the right control button > Open speller. Text or numbers are entered using the speller > page 152.
-- MMI touch volume: press the right control button. See > page 245.

Requirement: a map mustbe displayed => page 207.
-- Showing/hiding thecrosshairs: press the con-
trol knob to showthe crosshairs @) © fig. 157.
To hide the crosshairs again, press the [BACK
button @) > page 145,fig. 147 or > page 145,
fig. 148.
-- Moving the crosshairs on a map: move the crosshairs shownin the desired direction using your finger on the MMI touch control pad
> fig. 157.
Moving the map
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch

Ue mater
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch

Fig. 157 Moving thecrosshairs

Fig. 158 Moving the map

Requirement: a map mustbe displayed => page 207.

-- Showing/hiding the crosshairs: press the con-

trol knob to show the crosshairs @) © fig. 158.

To hide the crosshairs again, press the [BACK

button @) > page 145,fig. 147 or > page 145,

fig. 148.

149

8W0012721BG

Multi Media Interface
-- Moving the standard map/satellite map):
movethe crosshairs shown in the desired direction using two fingers on the MMI touch control pad > fig. 158. -- Moving the map quickly: when the crosshairs are visible, pull two fingers across the MMI touch control pad quickly in the desired direction. The map will come to a stop after several seconds.
Zooming in/out on the map
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
Fig. 159 Zooming in and out on the map
Requirement: a map must be displayed => page 207. -- Zooming in/out on the map: press the control
knob to show the crosshairs. Touch the MMI touch control pad with two fingers and pull your fingers apart or together > fig. 159. Press the [BACK] button () to hide the crosshairs => page 145,fig. 147.
Adjusting the sound focus
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
Requirement: the Balance/fader function must be selected > page 244. -- Moving the crosshairs for sound focus: move
your finger in the desired direction on the MMI touch control pad. -- Storing the crosshairs location: press the control knob twice. Or: press the [BACK] button @ => page 145,fig. 147.

RAH-8750|
RAH-8515,

Using the DVD main menu
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
Requirement: a DVD mustbe playing => page 229. The DVD main menu is shown.
-- Selecting a menu item: move your finger up/ down or left/right on the MMI touch control pad.
-- Confirming a selection: press the control knob.
Gi) Tips The volume of the voice guidance prompts for the MMI touch* can be adjusted separately => page 245.
Control knob with joystick function
Operation
Applies to: vehicles with joystick function
2

&
Fig. 160 Operating concept for the control knob with joy-
stick function
You can push the control knob up or down (@)
= fig. 160 or to the right or left @).
Opening the entertainmentsliding menu
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
Opening the entertainment sliding menu: push the control knob down to open the entertainment sliding menu @) > page 155,fig. 164. Then you can select and confirm a function.
Closing the entertainment sliding menu: push the control knob up to close the entertainment >

2) AUDIAGprovidesaccessto services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on the third party provider.
150

Multi Media Interface

sliding menu. Or: Press the [BACK] button (7) => page 145,fig. 147 or > page 145,fig. 148.
Additional functions
Applies to: vehicles with joystick function
Displaying the input field/switching to speller input
Push the control knob up > page 150,fig. 160 to reach the beginning ofa list in the central area or the input field. If the input field is already open, switch directly to the speller in the input field by pushing the control knob up again > page 152, Letter/number speller.
On the map
Requirement: a map must be displayed => page 207.
-- Displaying the input field: push the control knob up.
-- Displaying route guidance: when route guidance is active, you can also display the route guidance by pushing the control knob up => page 202,fig. 185.
-- Zooming in/out on the map (zoom): turn the control knob to the right/left to zoom in/out on the map.
Applies to: vehicles without MMI touch with joystick function
-- Showing/hiding the crosshairs: press the control knob. The crosshairs are shown on the map. Press the [BACK] button to hide the crosshairs.
-- Moving the crosshairs: when the crosshairs are visible, turn the control knob in the direction the crosshairs should move. Press the control knob and holdit until the crosshairs are in the desired point on the map.
-- Additional options on the map: see => page 209
Adjusting the sound focus
Applies to: vehicles without MMI touch with joystick function
Requirement: the balance/fader function must be selected > page 244.
-- Moving the sound focus using the crosshairs: the crosshairs can be moved horizontally. Turn the control knob tothe left or to the right. Press the control knob to move the crosshairs

vertically. Turn the control knob to the left or to the right. Press the control knob again to save the setting.
Using the DVD main menu
Requirement: a DVD mustbe playing => page 229. The DVD main menu is shown.
-- Selecting a menu item: move the control knob with joystick function up or down or tothe left or right.
-- Confirming a selection: press the control knob.
Coy oXTal em answers (red ColayQel LiCl Malem aida) the control knob
Applies to: vehicles with joystick function

Fig. 161 Openingthe selection/options menu with the control knob

Requirement: the selection menu symbol 3 must be displayed in the Infotainment system display => fig. 161.

Opening andclosing the selection menu: push the control knob to the left > fig. 161 to open
the selection menu. Then you can select and confirm a function using the control knob.

Press the [BACK] button @ > page 145,fig. 147

or > page 145,fig. 148 to return to the function

one level up.

8W0012721BG

151

Multi Media Interface
Requirement: the options menu symbol [+] must be displayed in the Infotainment system display > fig. 161.
Opening and closing the options menu: push the control knob to the right > fig. 161 to open the options menu. Then you can select and confirm a function using the control knob.
Press the BACK button @) 9 page 145,fig. 147
or > page 145,fig. 148 to return to the function one level up.
Shortcut keys
Frequently used radio stations can be stored on the shortcut keys.
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
The shortcut keys are located on the MMI control panel @) 9 page 145,fig. 147.

Storing radio stations: turn the control knob to the desired radio station in a list (for example, a radio station in the FM station list). Press and hold the desired shortcut key for several seconds. The active radio station will be stored on the shortcut key.
Accessing a radio station: press the shortcut key.
Displaying a radio station: swipe your finger over the shortcut keys.
Deleting a stored radio station: reset the Shortcut keys to the factory default setting => page 241.
(i) Tips
It is not possible to enter numbersusing the shortcut keys. Use the number speller = page 152 or MMI touch* > page 148 to enter numbers.

Applies to: vehicles with manual transmission
The shortcut keys are located on the center console > page 145,fig. 148.

Letter/number speller
(SEES, en . orn ry cm

----e =

Crear

PCa EL

ttle 1e

as)

RAH-8666

Fig. 162 Diagram: letter/numberspeller
You can enter letters, numbers and symbolsin the MMI using the letter/number speller. This option is available when the input field @ is active > fig. 162.
-- Opening and closing the letter/number speller: move the control knob up/down when the

input field is active. Or: select the right control button > Open speller/Closespeller.
-- Entering characters: turn the control knob with the character selection @0 > fig. 162 to the desired symbol. Press the control knob to confirm the character. Your input is displayed in the input field @). When you have entered all of the >

152

Multi Media Interface

characters, select and confirm the [LIST] button
@ ° fig. 162. Or: push the control knob down. -- Entering accented characters (such as 4,¢,fi,
6)*: turn the control knob with the character selection @9 > fig. 162 to a character. To open the selected accented characters, press and hold the control knob. Turn the control knob with the character selection > fig. 162 to an accented character. Press the control knob to insert the accented character. To close the accented characters without selecting a character, press and hold the control knob again. Or: select and confirm [a6t] Z) fig. 162. Select and confirm an accented character.
-- Deleting characters: select and confirm] @
=> fig. 162. To delete all characters in the input field, press and hold the control knob on &] until all characters in the input field are deleted. -- Entering special characters: select and con-
firm !&2]© © fig. 162 or [123]@). Select and
confirm the desired special character (for example, a hyphen or period) with the number speller.

-- Input assistance: in some cases such as in navigation*, there is a word suggestion* @) => fig. 162 based on available entries while you are entering data. You can select this suggestion by pushing the control knob upward.
-- Results list: in some cases, such as in the direc-
tory, the system switches automatically to the results list based on available entries @) > fig. 162. Select and confirm a suggestion from the list.
Requirement: the input field @) > fig. 162 must be active. -- Switching between speller and MMI touch*:
the handwriting recognition for the MMI touch control pad* is activated automatically. Simply start writing.
Overview of symbols in the speller
The symbolsin the letter/number speller are explained in the following table:

Symbol/Description LIST] orl Input field
Results list
t
G
1&2
aou
TSS/ABE

Description
Switches to the resultslist.
Displays the current input. Displays a list with suggestions based on the letters already entered.
Switches from lower case to upper case letters or from upper case to lower case letters. Opens additional speller options, for example Close speller and Clear inputfield.
Character sets and special characters
Displays accented characters (such as 4, ¢, fi, 6).
Switches from letter to number input or from number to letter in-
put.

-- Character selection

Adds a space in the input field. Highlights the selected character.

A
ea)

Inserts the suggested word* when you push the control knob up. Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.

8W0012721BG
® © |O| © © |E|O| © © © |O/|O

153

Multi Media Interface
@ Tips Accented characters are not available for every letter.
Free text search
Applies to: vehicles with free text search
Using the free text search, you can select the order that the search termsare enteredin the input field.
Na 55a
Leallleee lao) tele tle og len, Susan
(2
Fig. 163 Example: free text search on telephone
Free text search is available in the Vehicle*, Ra-
dio*, Media*, Telephone*, Navigation* and Audi
connect* menus.
Opening free text search >» Select: [MENU] button > desired menu item
(such as Telephone). > Keep turning the control knob tothe left until
the free text search input field @ © fig. 163 appears. Or: push the control knob up to open
the inputfield @.
The handwriting recognition for the MMI touch control pad* is automatically activated. Simply start writing.

Free text search for an entry
> Enter one or more search terms in anyorder into the input field. The individual search terms must be separated by spaces when entering.
An input suggestion to completethe entry* @) > fig. 163 is shown depending on the input. Additional entries that contain the entered search terms arelisted In the results list @) fig. 163.
If the desired term is still not displayed, enter additional letters until it is displayed.
It is often enough just to enter the first letters of the search term in order for it to display in the results list. For example, in the Telephone* menu,
write the initials of the contact being searched,
separated by a space.
Selecting the input suggestion to complete the entry
Requirement: an input suggestion to complete
the entry* @) > fig. 163 must be displayed.
> MMI touch input*: press the control knob. > Speller input: push the control knob up.
Selecting an entry from the resultslist
Requirement: at least one entry mustbe displayed in the resultslist @) > fig. 163.
> MMI touch input*: turn the control knob to the right. Select and confirm an entry from the list.
> Speller input: select and confirm [LIST] @ => page 152, fig. 162. Or: push the control knob down. Select and confirm an entry from the list.

154

Menus and Symbols

Teareee toda)
eee te las eR
aac

T baseeutey

Multi Media Interface

Q+ iz]

Fig. 164 Diagram: menus and symbols

3 Colas

Symbol/Description

Description

Selected text

Selected function

TMC

TMC/online traffic information reception > page 212

Entertainment sliding menu

Displays information about the media source that is currently selected or a situation (such as an incoming call). Depending on vehi-
cle equipment, operation might also be possible using the open entertainment sliding menu (such as selecting a radio station or ac-
cepting a call) > page 150.

Jukebox* importing process

Copy audio/video files to the Jukebox > page 222

Repeat track

The track currently playing is repeated. > page 233

= huffl

ASlhluffifllees on the playlist are played in random order > page 233,

Arrow

Access information by pressing the control knob when the selected

text is active

Telephone signal strength bars

Telephone signal strength

Exclamation point on the telephone

Indicates missed calls

Data connection signal strength bars*

Signal strength for the active data connection, or
PIN: enter the PIN (SIM) PUK: enter the PUK

Network coverage for the active data connection > page 192

2G: GSM network

2G/3G/LTE*

3G: UMTS network

LTE*: LTE network

Mute

The audio source is muted > page 245

Rearing

Outside the mobile network for the connected cell phone or the in-

serted SIM card

©©

8W0012721BG

155

Multi Media Interface

® ® |O|O| © © O © |®

Symbol/Description Importing process Options menu* Bluetooth* Scroll bars
I npuenfials
MMI touch* Knob
Check boxes
Selection list

Description
Import/update the contacts in the directory or the call lists
Select and confirm context-dependentfunctions as well as settings within a menu item
Bluetooth device connected > page 223 or > page 171
Indicates a long list. Movewithin lists by turning the control knob.
I=npfaorgmeat1i5o2notrhatthecaMnMIbteocuhcahn*ge>d puasgineg1t4h8e.letter/number speller
Possible to operate using the MMI touch control pad*
Setting for the selected function by turning the control knob
You can switch certain functions on or off by pressing the control knob.
Settings for the selected function that are accessed by pressing the control knob

156

Multifunction steering wheel

Multifunction steering wheel
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel
In the driver information system display, you can control numerous Infotainment functions using the multifunction steering wheel plus* > page 15 or the multifunction steering wheel* > page 18.
You can control additional Infotainment functions using the MMI control panel > page 145 in the Infotainment system display.
ZA WARNING
Direct your full attention to driving. As the driver, you have complete responsibility for safety in traffic. Only use the functions in such a way that you always maintain complete control over your vehiclein all traffic situations.
Radio
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel and radio
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel
> Press the [MODE] button on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the Radio/ Media tab is displayed.
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel plus
> Press the |< >| button on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the Radio/ Media tab is displayed.
> Press the left control button > page 16.
Depending on vehicle equipment,the following functions maybe available in the driver information system.
-- Selecting the frequency band: select and confirm a frequency band.
-- Selecting a station from the station list: select and confirm a radio station.
-- Selecting a station from the presets list: select and confirm Presets and then a radio station.
-- Opening a media source: select and confirm To media.

Additional settings -- Select: right control button > desired entry.
See > page 218.
G) Tips Pay attention to the Infotainment system display if necessary. Depending on the selected function, it may be necessary to use the MMI control panel.
Media
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel and media
Requirement: a media drive must contain audio/ video files > page 221.
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel
> Press the [MODE] button on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the Radio/ Media tab is displayed.

Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel plus
>» Press the [<>] button on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the Radio/ Media tab is displayed.
> Press the left control button > page 16.

Depending on vehicle equipment,the following functions may be available in the driver informa-
tion system.

-- Selecting a media source: select and confirma source such as the SD card.
-- Switching to the radio: select and confirm Switch to radio.
-- Playing an audio/videofile: select and confirm a file.
-- Pausing/resumingplayback: pressthe right
thumbwheel @) > page17,fig. 11. To resume
playback, press the right thumbwheel again.

-- Opening additional track information: select: right control button > Show "Now Playing" screen.

For additional information, see > page 232.

8W0012721BG

157

Multifunction steering wheel

@ Tips -- Alwaysfollow the information found in
=> page 220. -- Please note that within a media source in
the driver information system, only playlists that were selected through the MMI control panel can be played > page 230. -- Pay attention to the Infotainment system display if necessary. Depending on the selected function, it may be necessary to use the MMI control panel.
Telephone
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel and telephone
Pe Al
Call list
Pe
Weg
Fig. 165 Example: telephone functions in thedriver information system
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI > page 171.
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel
> Press the [MODE] button on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the Telephone tab is displayed.
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel plus
> Press the [<>] button repeatedly until the Telephone tab is displayed.
> Press the left control button > page 16.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following functions maybe available in the driver information system.
-- Accessing a contact: select and confirm Call list / Favorites / Directory. Select and confirm a
contact.

Directory contacts*: the driver information system only displays directory contacts that have a phone number stored. If several phone numbers
are stored with a contact,the list of stored num-
bersis displayed first when the entry is selected.
Recentcalls*: the recentcalls list contains all incoming, outgoing and missedcalls.
Caller information*: the name, phone numberor Unknown appearsin the driver information system display depending on whether the caller has been stored in the directory and if the phone number has been transmitted.
Functions during an incoming call
-- Accepting a call: press the left thumbwheel when thereis an incoming call.
-- Declining a call: select and confirm Decline when thereis an incoming call.
-- Ending a phone call: select and confirm End call.
Functions during a phone call:
-- Making an additional call*: select and confirm Hold call. Press the left control button > Directory or Call list > the desired entry.
-- Answering a call while in a call and while there is anothercall on hold*: select and confirm Answer. The activecall is replaced with the incoming call.
Additional functions include:
Mute®*: if you select and confirm this function, the other person on the phone cannothear you. You will still be able to hear the other person.
Holding/resuming a call*: you can place the existing call on hold and resume it again.
Swap call*: you can alternate between two phone calls at the same time. One ofthe calls will be on hold. Selecting End call will end the active phone call. A call that was placed on hold stays on hold and can be taken off hold with Resume held call.
Conferencecall*: a call on hold and up tofive active parties (depending on the cell phone service provider) can be added to a conferencecall. To make an additional call, put all participants in the current conference call on hold using Hold >

158

Multifunction steering wheel

conferenceTM. By pressing the left control button, you can makeadditional calls from the directory or the call list. Resume conference* takes all participants off hold.
@ Tips
-- The phone functions can only be controlled with the multifunction steering wheel if the phone equipment was installed at the fac-
tory.
-- The telephone functions depend on the cell phone and whether they are supported by your cell phone service provider or not.
-- The Call waiting* function mustbe activated in your cell phone and in the MMI in order to be alerted when thereis an incoming call during an activecall. The call options depend on the cell phone and service provider. You can obtain more information from your cell phone service provider.
Navigation
Co) Yee eC Ly1)
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel and
navigation system
Requirement: a destination must be entered = page 198 and the route guidance must be started.
> Press the [<>] button on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the Navigation tab is displayed.
> Press the left control button > page 16.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following functions maybe available in the driver informa-
tion system.
-- Displaying navigation during active route guidance: select and confirm Map* / Street view* or Arrow view".
-- Showing the map when route guidanceis not active*: select and confirm Map".
-- Accessing last destinations: select and confirm Last destinations > the desired destination.
-- Accessing favorites*: select and confirm Favorites > the desired destination.

-- Starting route guidance to the stored home address: select and confirm Cancel route guidanceif necessary and then Home address.
If you have not started any route guidance, a compass(analog instrument cluster) or the arrow view (monochrome instrument cluster) is displayed depending on the equipment. The map is displayed in the Audi virtual cockpit*. Canceling active route guidance -- Select: right control button > Cancel route
guidance Additional settings -- Select: right control button > desired entry. Depending on the function selected, the following additional settings may be possible: -- Map display > page 209. -- Map colors > page 209. -- Map orientation > page 209. -- Automatic zoom > page 210.
Navigation view with route guidance tad)
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and Audi virtual cockpit
Fig. 166 Standard map when route guidanceis active (Audi virtual cockpit)
Requirement: a destination must be entered => page 198, route guidance mustbe started and the navigation tab must be displayed. Depending on the vehicle equipment and the selected view > page 17, the following information will be displayed in the driver information sys-
tem:
@ Map content (such as pointsofinterest)
@ Current vehicle position

8W0012721BG

159

Multifunction steering wheel

@A bar graph appears when thereis an upcom-
ing turn. The fewer the bars that are shown, the
shorter the distance is until the turn. If thereis not an upcoming turn, the distance to the destination/stopover and the calculated arrival time is displayed in the right speedometer.
@ Name of the street where you are currently driving
Map view with route guidance started
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and map view
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you canalso have the active route guidancedisplay in the map view* in the driver information system.
eeele

Requirement: a destination must be entered => page 198, route guidance mustbe started and the navigation tab must be displayed.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following information may be shown in the driver information system.
@ Distance to the destination or stopover
@ Distance to the next maneuver
@ Display of the road that is currently being traveled or the road that you will turn onto during the next maneuver
@ Map content such as points of interestor traffic information
Zooming in/out on the map (Zoom): when a map is displayed, turn the left thumbwheel down/up to zoom in/out on the map.

Fig. 167 Diagram: map when route guidance has started (analog instrumentcluster)
Street view with route guidance started
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and street view
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the active route guidance will be displayed in the street view*in the driver information system.
uN

Fig. 168 Example: display of a turn in the street view (analog instrument cluster)
160

Multifunction steering wheel

Requirement: a destination must be entered => page 198, route guidance mustbe started and the navigation tab mustbe displayed.
Depending on vehicle equipment,the following information may be shown in the driver information system > fig. 168:
Distance to the destination or stopover Displaying an expressway, highway or main road as preparation for an upcoming change in direction
Lane recommendation
Calculated arrival time
Distance to the next maneuver
Display of the expressway, highway or main road onto which you will be turning Direction arrow for the upcoming maneuver A bar graph appears when a direction arrowis displayed. The fewer the bars that are shown, the shorter the distanceis until the turn.
© Current vehicle position
Additional information (on-board computer)

The following functions are also available when route guidance is active:
-- Adjusting the voice guidance volume: turn the right thumbwheel up or down while a voice guidance message is playing.
ZA\ WARNING
The route calculated by the navigation system is a recommendation for reaching your destination. Obeytraffic lights, stopping restric-
tions, one-waystreets, lane change restric-
tions, etc.
(i) Tips
-- Also see the chapter > page 8, Cockpit overview.
-- An exclamation point "!" in front of the street name indicates that the information about this street or this section of the route is not complete in the navigation data contained in the MMI. Obeytraffic laws in oneway streets and pedestrian zones.

TAUAmelhme ereeitanle)
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and arrow view
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the active route guidance will be displayed in the arrow view*in the driver information system.

om:

Fig. 169 Example: arrow view (monochromeinstrumentcluster)

Requirement: a destination must be entered = page 198, route guidance mustbe started and
the navigation tab must be displayed.

Depending on vehicle equipment,the following information may be shown in the driver information system > fig. 169:
@ Distance to the destination or stopover

161

8W0012721BG

Multifunction steering wheel
Distance to the next maneuver Direction arrow for the upcoming maneuver A bar graph appears when a direction arrowis displayed. The fewer the bars that are shown, the shorter the distanceis until the turn. Lane recommendation Additional information (on-board computer) Calculated arrival time Display of the street currently being driven on If a point is displayed before the street, it is indicating the street you will be on with the next maneuver. The following functions are also available when route guidance is active: -- Adjusting the voice guidance volume: turn the right thumbwheel up or down while a voice guidance message is playing.
ZX WARNING
The route calculated by the navigation system is a recommendation for reaching your destination. Obeytraffic lights, stopping restrictions, one-waystreets, lane change restric-
tions, etc.
@ Tips -- Also see the chapter > page 8, Cockpit over-
view. -- An exclamation point "!" in front of the
street name indicates that the information about this street or this section of the route is not complete in the navigation data contained in the MMI. Obeytraffic laws in oneway streets and pedestrian zones.
162

RAH-9091

OBARECOMMANDS
* Telephone
+ Audi connect
* Navigation * Directory
* Radio * Media + Sound * Help + Help Speech dialog system
* Help Telephone
* Help Audi connect
* Help Navigation * Help Map * Help Radio * Help Media
TELEPHONE:
+ Enter number + Delete number / correction
+ Directory * Call (XY)
* business / private / land line / mobile
NAVIGATION
+ Navigate to (XY) + Start / cancel route guidance
+ Directory + Last destinations
+ Navigation favorites + Drive home
- Enter address + Enter country / town / street / state + Exclude route / Exclude route for (XY) km /m

Voice recognition system

+ Favorites
* Call (XY)
* Enter number * Redial
* Read new text message + Navigate to (XY) + Enter address/destination + Online destinations * Cancel route guidance
* Map
+ Line (XY)
* Next page / previous page * Cancel * No, I meant(XY) * Correction

+ Call list

+ Redial

sie

+ Call mailbox

+ Telephone favorites

;
+ Block route for (XY) miles / Block the next section
* Routelist * Calculate alternative routes
* Online destinations * Special destination

+ Map * Day map / Night map * 2D driving position map / 2D north position map / 3D map / Destination map / Overview map

AUDI CONNECT
* Audi connect * Travel information / Parking information * Fuel prices * Weather

Flight information * City events * Online news * Twitter

RADIO
+ Radio presets °FM *FM/AM/ SIRIUS XM + Station (XY) / Frequency (XY) * Traffic announcementon / off

)
|
seedy

MEDIA

* Jukebox

s))

* CD/DVD

+ SDcard1/SDcard2

BRS

- Audi music interface / iPod / USB / Bluetooth /

Wi-Fi / Medium (XY)

* Media favorites / Artists / Albums / Genres /

Tracks / Playlists / Videos

* Folder up

* Random playbackon / off

8W0012721BG

Fig. 170 Command overview

163

Voice recognition system
Voice recognition system
Operating
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system
You can operate many Infotainment functions
conveniently by speaking.
Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be switched on > page 145. A system language supported by the voice recognition system must be set. There must be no phone calls in progress and the parking aid must not beactive.
> Switching on: press the [%] button @ => page 17, fig. 11 or > page18,fig. 13 briefly on the multifunction steering wheel and say the desired command after the Beep.
> Switching off: press and hold the |TM] button. Or: press the |5| button.
> Pausing: say the command Pause. To resume, press the |] button.
> Correcting: say the command Correction. Or: simply say a new command during an announcement > page 241.
Input assistance
The system guides you through the input with visual and audio feedback.
-- Visual input assistance: after switching on voice recognition, a display with a selection of possible commands appears. This command display can be switched on or off. Select: MENU] button > Settings > left control button > MMI settings > Speech dialog system.
-- Audio input assistance: to have the possible commands read, turn the voice recognition system on and say Help.
For the system to understand you:
Speak clearly and distinctly at a normal volume. Speak louder when driving faster.
Emphasize the words in the commands evenly and do notleave long pauses.
Close the doors, the windows, and the sunroof*
to reduce background noise. Make sure that passengers are not speaking when you are giving a voice command.

Do notdirect the vents toward the hands-free microphone, which is in the roof headliner near the front interior lights.
Only use the system from the driver's seat because the hands-free microphone is directed towardthat seat.
Additional settings
See > page 241, Speech dialog system.
ZA WARNING
-- Direct your full attention to driving. As the driver, you have complete responsibility for safetyin traffic. Only use the functions in such a way that you always maintain complete control over your vehiclein all traffic situations.
-- Do not use the voice recognition system in
emergencies because your voice may change in stressful situations. The system may take longer to dial the number or may not be ableto dial it at all. Dial the emergency
number manually.

Gi) Tips
-- The dialog pauses when thereis an incoming phone call and will continue if you ignorethe call. The dialog ends if you answer the call.
-- You can select an item in the list using either the voice recognition system or the control knob.

Command overview information
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system

The following overviews describe the commands that can be used to operate the MMI using the voice recognition system.

Alternative commands are separated using a "/", for example say: Telephone / (or) Navigation / (or) Radio.

Sequences of commands used to perform an ac-

tion are identified with a ">", for example say:

Enter address > (then) Enter country/state.

164

Voice recognition system

The majority shown are main commands. This system also recognizes synonyms in certain cas-

es. For a Business address, you can also say business, work,office or at the office.

Commands

Global commands
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system

You can always use the global commands,regardless of the menu selected.

Function

Say:

Opening a menu

Telephone/ Directory / Navigation / Radio / Media / Audi connect* / Car / Tone

Having the possible commands read aloud

Help / Help speech dialog system / Help Telephone / Help Navigation / Help Map / Help Radio / Help Media / Help Audi connect*

Telephone functions

Call (XY), for example, Call "John Smith" /
Enter number / Redial / Directory / Read out new text message / Read out new e-mail

Navigation functions*

Drive me to (XY) or Navigate to (XY), for example Navigate to
John Smith /
Enter address / Cancel route guidance / Map / Online destinations* / Online destination (XY)*

Accessing favorites

Favorites > follow the system prompts

Selecting an entry from list

Line (XY)

Scrolling through a list

Next page / Previous page

Correcting the command given

Correction

Switching the voice recognition sys- Cancel tem off

Telephone
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and telephone

Requirement: a cell phone must be connected to the MMI > page 172 and the Telephone menu must be open > table on page 165.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and the selected menu item, you can say the following commands:

Function

Say:

Call contact from directory

Call (XY), for example Call "John Smith"

Selecting a specific contact number | Call (XY) business/ private / landline / cell phone, for example, Call "John Smith" private

Selecting a phone number with an_ Call / Call work/ Call private / Call landline / Call cell phone

address card open

work

Calling a contact from your favorites list

Telephonefavorites > after being prompted, say the desired contact > Dial

Displaying the call list

Call list

8W0012721BG

165

Voice recognition system

Function
Calling the last number dialed Dialing a phone number
Correcting the phone number that was entered Showing contact information
Listening to messages
Entering the PIN (SIM)
Correcting the PIN entry Correcting data input Closing the full-screen command list

Say: Redial Enter number > when prompted, say the telephone numberin groupsofindividual numbers, for example. 888 555 1212 > Dial Correction / Delete number
Directory > say the desired contact when prompted, for example John Smith Call voicemail Enter PIN > when prompted, say the PINin individual numbers > Save Correction / Delete PIN No I meant(XY) Close

@) Tips
-- Contacts in the directory can selected using the full name ("first name last name" and "last name, first name") as well as with only the first or last name. This appliesto cell phones that transmit namesseparated into first and last names.

-- Please note that commands can only begiven for the primary phone* > page 172.
-- For more information on supported mobile
devices, visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.

Audi connect Infotainment
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and Audi connect Infotainment

Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect Infotainment must be met > page 186.

Function Accessing Audi connect Infotainment services Audi connect Infotainmentservices
Search areas for Audi connect Infotainment services Correcting data input

Say: Audi connect > follow the system prompts
Weather / Online news/ Fuel prices / Parking information / Travel information / Twitter / Traffic information Near destination / Nearby / In a new city
No I meant(XY)

@ Tips
Alwaysread the chapter > page 186, Audi
connect.

166

Voice recognition system

Messages (Audi connect Infotainment)
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and Audi connect Infotainment

Requirement: a cell phone with an active MAP
(Message Access Profile) must be connected to the MMI > page 178.

Function Text editing commands
Reading out a new message Reading a message Replying to the open text message Forwarding the open text message Correcting data input

Say: Read out / Add / Delete / Record everything again / Replace with (XY) / Add recipient / Send Read out new text message / Read out new e-mail Read out text message / Read out e-mail Reply Forward > Add recipient / Insert template / Send No I meant(XY)

G@) Tips
-- For more information on supported mobile devices, visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth

or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Alwaysread the chapter > page 186, Audi connect.

Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and navigation system

Requirement: the Navigation menu must be open > table on page 165.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and the selected menu item, you can say the following com-
mands to enter a destination:

Function

Say:

Opening the list of previous naviga- Last destinations tion destinations

Accessing favorites

Navigation favorites

Selecting the home address

Home address or Drive home

Entering an address with guidance Enter address > follow the system prompts from the system

Individual commands for entering a Enter country/state / Enter city / Enter ZIP code / Enter

destination

street / Enter house number

Making a correction while entering a Correction destination

Navigating to a contact

Drive me to (XY) or Navigate to contact, for example Drive me to "John Smith"

Navigating to a specific address for Navigate to contact (XY) business/ private,

a contact

for example "Navigate to John Smith private"

Navigating to favorites

Navigation favorites > Line (XY) / Line contents > Start route guidance when prompted

Starting route guidance with an ad- Navigate / Navigate to private address / Navigate to business

dress card open

address

167

8W0012721BG

Voice recognition system

Function
Entering a new destination/stopover when route guidance is active Starting route guidance after entering a destination Canceling current route guidance Calculating alternative routes Entering a point of interest by selecting a search area with guidance from the system Destination input categories
Search areas for entering points of interest Entering an online destination*
Correcting data input Closing the full-screen command list

Say: Enter address > enter the desired address when prompted > confirm the new destination/stopoverif prompted Start route guidance
Cancel route guidance Calculate alternative routes Point of interest > Change search area > category or subcategory when prompted,for example "restaurant"
Audi Service / Train station / Airport / Hotel / Hospital / Parking / Restarea / Restaurant / Gas station etc. Nearby / Along the route / Near destination / Near stopover / In a newcity / In a new state/country Online destination (XY), for example "Online destination "Lakeview Hotel"" No I meant(XY) Close

Requirement: you must be in the Navigation or Map menu. Depending on the vehicle equipment and the selected menu item, you can say the fol-

lowing commands for additional settings in navigation:

Function General map options Map type
Showing the routelist Showing the remaining distance/ time when route guidance is active Speed limit prompt Setting voice guidance for active route guidance Blocking a certain section on the
route

Say: Map / Day map / Night map / Automatically change map color 2D heading-up map / 2D north-up map / 3D map / Destination map / Overview map / Standard map*/ Satellite map*®) Route list
Destination information
Howfastcan drive here Voice guidance on / Voice guidanceoff / Voice guidance shortened / Voice guidance complete / Voice guidancetraffic Block route for (XY) meters/kilometers/yards/miles / Block next route / Avoid next section of route

) AUDI AGprovidesaccessto services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on the third party provider.

@ Tips
-- Destinations may have to be spelled when entered, depending on which region you are

in and which menu language you have selected. -- Alwaysread the chapter > page 186, Audi
connect.

168

Voice recognition system

Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system

Requirement: the Radio must already be open.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and the selected frequency band, you can say the following
commands:

Function

Say:

Selecting the frequency band

FM* / SiriusXM* / FM / AM

Selecting a station from the station Channel (XY) / Frequency (XY) list

Selecting a station from favorites/ Radio presets > Line (XY)
presets

Setting the frequency

Frequency (XY) / Frequency (XY) HD 1

Correcting data input

No I meant(XY)

Closing the full-screen command list

Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system

Requirement: you must be in the Media menu.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and the active media, you can say the following commands:

Function Selecting a source directly
Selecting audio/video*files inthe Jukebox* Selecting audio files on an iPod (source: Audi music interface*) Navigating within a folder structure/list Selecting shuffle Correcting data input Closing the full-screen command list
Q) Note

Say: Jukebox* / CD / DVD / SD card 1/ SD card 2 / Audi music interface* / iPhone* / USB* / Bluetooth® / Wi-Fi* / Medium (XY), for example "John's player" Media favorites / Artists / Albums / Genres/ Tracks/ Playlists / Videos Artists / Albums / Genres/ Tracks/ Playlists / Composers / Podcasts / Audio books Folder up / Line (XY)
Shuffle on / Shuffle off No I meant(XY) Close
External voice operation

Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in Wi-Fi settings on page 193.

ieacaeisk INNBICETSCagnHGn SyStern arilexter>
Requirement: The ignition and the MMI must be switched on. No phone call is in progress.

8W0012721BG

169

Voice recognition system
The parking aid as well as the Audi voice recognition system mustnotbe active. A mobile device must be connected to the MMI with the Handsfreeprofile > page 171. The mobile device being connected must have voice control that can be controlled externally. > Switching on: press and hold the || button on
the multifunction steering wheel* and say the desired command after the external speech dialog begins. > Continuing/resuming the dialog: the system remains ready to use for a short time after ending the dialog. You can start a new external dialog during this time. Press the [2] button if
needed, and say a new command. Or: select
and confirm Resume on the MMI control panel. > Switching off: press and hold the |TM] button.
Or: select and confirm Cancel on the MMI control panel.
G)Tips
-- There are no voice guidance" prompts when a dialog is active.
-- This function depends on the cell phone used. You can obtain moreinformation from your mobile device service provider or from your mobile device user guide.
-- AUDI AGsimply provides access to control your mobile device with voice operation and does not assume anyresponsibility for the content and commands within the external voice control.
170

Telephone

Telephone
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
To make phonecalls in your vehicle using the MMI, connectyourcell phone to the MMIvia Bluetooth.
Handsfree
After you have connected your mobile device to the MMI via Bluetooth, you can use the handsfree system and operate telephone functions through your MMI. You can makecalls using the antenna on your mobile device.
With the Audi phone box', calls are made using the exterior antenna on the vehicle. Using the external antenna helps when thereis a low signal and also provides better reception quality => page 174.
ZA WARNING
-- Medical experts warn that mobile devices can interfere with the function of pacemakers. Always maintain a minimum distance of about 8 inches (20 cm) between the cell phone antenna and the pacemaker.
-- Do not carry the mobile device in a pocket directly over the pacemaker when the phone is switched on.
-- Switch the mobile device off immediately if you suspectit may be interfering with the pacemaker.
-- Do not use the voice recognition system* => page 164 in emergencies because your voice may change in stressful situations. The system may take longer to dial the number or may notbe able todial it at all. Dial the emergency number manually.
-- Switch your mobile device off in areas where there is a risk of an explosion. These locations are not always clearly marked. This mayinclude gas stations, fuel and chemical storage facilities or transport vehicles,or locations where fuel vapors (such as propane or gasoline vapor in vehicles or buildings), chemicals or large quantities of dust particles (such as flour, sawdust or metal) may

be present in the air. This also applies to all other locations where you would normally turn your vehicle engine off. -- The demands oftraffic require your full attention. Always read the chapter => page 145,Traffic safety information.
@) Note Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in
Wi-Fi settings on page 193.
@) Tips -- The Bluetooth connection range is limited
to inside the vehicle. It can also be affected by local conditions and interference with other devices. --To learn which Bluetooth connections and which of the functions in your mobile device are supported, check with your mobile device service provider or the database for mobile devices at www.audiusa.com/ bluetooth.
Setup
Connecting a cell phone using Bluetooth
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Naonro) ated Does this PIN match the one on your
Bluetooth device? PIN: 967536
Fig. 171 Displaying the PIN for enteringin the cell phone
Requirement The vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth settings must be open on your mobile device during the connection setup. The Bluetooth function and visibility of the MMI = page 243 and mobile device must be switched on.

8W0012721BG

171

Telephone
The mobile device that will be connected must not be connected to any other Bluetooth device.
The MMI must not be connected to a mobile device.
Connecting a mobile device
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > Connect mobile device > Find new devices > Next. The available Bluetooth devices are shownin the Infotainment system display. Or select: [MENU button > Settings > left control button > MMI settings > Connection manager © page 241.
> Select and confirm the desired cell phone from the list of displayed Bluetooth devices.
> The MMI generates a PIN for the connection setup > fig. 171.
>» Select and confirm Yes. > Enter the PIN for connecting on your cell
phone. Or: when the PIN is displayed on your cell phone, confirm the PIN on your cell phone and in the MMI. The time allowed for entering the PIN is limited to approximately 30 seconds. > Pay attention to any additional system prompts displayed on your cell phone, for example if the system should connect automatically in the future. Depending on the cell phone, you may have to confirm downloading the directory separately.
After connecting successfully
After connecting successfully, information about the connected profiles will appear. You can also change the profiles later. Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > MMI settings > Connection manager > page 241.
In addition, the cell phone contacts are automat-
ically loaded in the MMI directory. This process can take several minutes, depending on the number of contacts.
You can also make your connected cell phone the default phone by selecting Set as default telephone in the Connection manager = page 243.
@) Note
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in Wi-Fi settings on page 193.

G) Tips
-- Making phone calls through the MMI is only
possible using the Handsfree Bluetooth profile. -- You can apply additional settings to connected mobile devices using the Connection manager > page 241.
-- You can also search for the MMI on your mobile device using the Bluetooth device search.
-- You only have to pair your device one time. Bluetooth devices that are already paired automatically connect to the MMI when the Bluetooth function is switched on, when they are within range, and when the ignition is switched on. The last connected mobile deviceis given first priority.
-- Authorizing the MMI connection on your mobile device will make it possible to connect automatically.
-- Pay attention to any system promptsdisplayed on your cell phone, for exampleif the system should connect automatically in the future. Depending on the cell phone, you may also need to download the directo-
ry and confirm access to your text messages
separately.
-- When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth
connection to the mobile device will automatically disconnect. Depending on your mobile device, phone calls in progress may be automatically redirected from the MMI to your mobile device so that you can continue the call on your phone. -- You can obtain more information from your mobile device service provider or from your mobile device user guide. For information on using the telephone, visit www.audiusa. com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. -- Applies to: vehicles without secondary phone: Several cell phonescan be paired to the MMI, but only one cell phone can be actively connected to the MMI.

172

-- Applies to: vehicles without secondary phone: If a Bluetooth device is already con-
nected to the MMI, it will be disconnected when another device connects to the MMI.
Operating two mobile devices through the ie
You can connect two cell phones to the MMI, for example your business cell phone as the primary phone and yourprivate cell phone as the secondary phone. You can be reachedin yourvehicle through both cell phones.
The first connected cell phone is displayed as the primary phone in the MMI. The second cell phone is connected as the secondary phone.
The directory from the connected primary phone will always be displayed. If you would like to use the directory from the secondary phone, you must switch the primary and secondary phone =>page 173.
Connecting a cell phone as the primary phone
Connect your cell phone to the MMI via Bluetooth. The first connected cell phone is displayed as the Primary phone in the MMI.
See > page 171, Connecting a cell phone using Bluetooth.
Connecting a cell phone as the secondary phone
Requirement: a cell phone must be connected to the MMI as the primary phone.
Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right control button > Connect secondary telephone.
See > page 171, Connecting a cell phone using Bluetooth.
Example: you have connected your businesscell phone to the MMI as the primary phone and your private cell phone as the secondary phone. To be able to call contacts from your private cell phone directory, you must switch the primary and secondary phone, since the directory from the primary phone is always displayed.

Telephone
Switching the primary and secondary phone
Requirement: a primary phone and a secondary phone must be connected.
Switch primary and second. phone: select: MENU] button > Telephone > right control button > Switch primary and second. phone.
@ Tips
-- Please note that only the directory from the primary phone is always displayed.
-- You can seeif a cell phone is connected as the primary phone or secondary phone in the Connection manager > page 241. Or: the device name of the connected primary phone is shown in the Telephone menu (such as myPhone).
-- If the primary phone does not connect automatically to the MMI when the ignition is
switched on, for example because it is out
of the vehicle range or the Bluetooth function is switched off, then a previously paired secondary phone is automatically connected as the primary phone. -- You can send and receive messages on your primary phone as well as on your secondary phone > page 175,fig. 173. You do not need to switch your primary phone and secondary phone for this. -- You can also make your connectedcell phone the default phone byselecting Set as default telephone in the Connection manager > page 243.

8W0012721BG

173

Telephone
Using the Audi phone box
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box
You can charge your mobile device battery using the Audi phone box. You can makecalls through the exterior antenna* on the vehicle. Using the external antenna* helps when thereis a low signal and also provides better reception quality.
Fig. 172 Storage compartment under the center armrest: diagram: Audi phone boxwith connections
Requirement: a cell phone must be connected through Bluetooth > page 171. The options below are available: -- Connecting to the external vehicle antenna*:
lay the cell phone on the center ofthe cell phone symbol in the Audi phone box with the display facing up > fig. 172. Make sure there are no objects between the Audi phone box and the mobile device. -- Charging a cell phone wirelessly: place a Qi-ca-
pable ») cell phone centered on the @ symbol in
the Audi phone box with the display facing up > fig. 172. The cell phone will charge. -- Charging a mobile device using the USB adapter: connect your mobile device to the Audi music interface using a USB adapter cable (@) > fig. 172. You can charge your mobile device using specific USB adapters > page 226,fig. 205.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Loose objects can be thrownaround the vehicle interior during sudden driving or brak-

RAH-8335|

ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of an accident. Store objects securely while driving. -- The mobile device may become hot during wireless charging. Pay attention to the temperature of your mobile device and be careful when removing it from the Audi phone box. -- An alternating magnetic field is used for wireless charging. Maintain a minimum distance of approximately 2.4 in (6 cm) to the Audi phone box charging plate. The thresholds for prolonged exposureatthis distance comply with ICNIRP1998. Therefore, interactions such as irritation of sensory organs, malfunctions of active implants (such as pacemakers, infusion pumps,or neurostimulators) or effects on passive implants (such as prosthetic limbs) is highly unlikely. If you have an implant, consult a medical specialist if you have any questions.
C) Note
Applicable to U.S.A.
Operation of the Audi phone boxis subject to the following requirementsof the Federal Communications Commission: -- This is a CONSUMER device. -- BEFORE USE, you MUSTREGISTER THIS DE-
VICE with your wireless provider and have your provider's consent. Most wireless providers consentto the use of signal boosters. Some providers may not consent to the use of this device on their network. If you are unsure, contact your service provider.
-- You MUSToperatethis device with approved antennas and cables as specified by the manufacturer. Antennas MUSTbeinstalled at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person.
-- You MUSTcease operating this device immediately if requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless service provider.
-- WARNING: E911 location information may not be provided or maybe inaccurate for calls served by using this device.

D_ The Qi standard makesit possible to charge your mobile device wirelessly.
174

@) Note
Applicable to Canada
In Canada, operation of a Zone Enhancer,
such as an Audi Phone Box,is subject to the
following requirementsof the Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada (ISED): -- This is a CONSUMER device.
-- BEFORE USE, you MUST meetall requirementsset out in CPC-2-1-05.
-- You MUSToperate this device with approved antennas and cables as specified by the manufacturer. Antennas MUST NOTbe installed within 20 cm of any person.
-- You MUSTcease operating this device immediately if requested by ISED or a licensed wireless service provider.
-- WARNING: £911 location information may not be provided or maybe inaccurate for calls served by using this device.
G) Tips
-- The Audi phone boxis not availablein all countries. For additional information, contact an authorized Audi dealership.
-- Placing the mobile device in a bag or protective sleeve inside the Audi phone box can interfere with the connection to the external antenna®*.
-- Metallic objects in the Audi phone box block the wireless charging of your mobile device and calls made using the exterior antenna'*.
-- The charging time and temperature will vary depending on the mobile device being used.
-- Your mobile device can only be charged in the Audi phone box when the ignition is switched on.
-- To reduce the risk of malfunctions, make
sure the mobile device is positioned correctly in the Audi phone box. -- The maximum charging output is 5 watts. -- Strong transmission quality cannot be guaranteed if more than one mobile deviceis in the box." -- Only one mobile device at a time can be charged wirelessly in the Audi phone box.

Telephone
-- Audi recommends using Audi Genuine Accessories. Audi has verified their reliability, safety, and suitability.
-- You can purchase a USB adapter from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility, or at specialty stores.
Using the telephone
Opening the telephone
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Call list
(2 ye Favorites ©-- PTicraxelay
Ee Pre lia)1g
Tai message (mobile device)
Fig. 173 Example: telephone functionsin selection menu
tae eal
LaueOa) | ieectursecre uee nen)
@---" mail (MyPhone)

Fig. 174 Example: additional telephone functions in selection menu

Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI > page 171.

> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button.

The following phone functions are available > fig. 173/> fig. 174:
@ Calllist.............0 cece ee
@® Favorites ......... 0. cee eee ee (3) DIFECUOTY wc x x cays x aes sy pene ss @ Select number .................
© Text message (MyPhone)*/Text message (secondary phone)* .....
© E-mail (myPhone)*/E-mail (secondary phone)* ..................

176
178 181 176
178
180 >

8W0012721BG

175

Telephone

The device name for your cell phone is displayed
in the Telephone menu, for example text mes-
sage (myPhone) fig. 174.
Dialing a phone number
Appliesto: vehicles with telephone
Call list >
Please enter a telephone number.
5X) O800AUDISERVI

Fig. 175 Number speller

4 Bates, Peter
®@ Blake, Mary
Green, Andrew Ps 170123789(

12:25 PI Tone OE ESE] 1M1O:4E5 TA)M
ne Tee] Lo OE ENE}

Fig. 176 Dialing a phone numberfrom the call list
» Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button.
Call list
Requirement: the call list must contain a phone number.
Turn the control knob to display the calllist.
Select and confirm the desired telephone number from the recentcallslist.
Call list symbols > fig. 176:
@ Missed calls @ Dialed numbers @ Received calls
Select: a contact from the list > right control but-
ton. -- Call: call the selected contact. -- Connect secondary telephone*/Switch primary
and second. phone": see > page 173. -- Edit phone no.beforecall: edit a phone num-
ber before dialing it. Select and confirm OK to

edit. Or: press the left control button to return without editing.
-- Send text message: write a text message to
the selected contact. -- Deletecall list: select and confirm if you would
like to Delete this entry or Deleteall entries. -- Store as favorite: store the selected contact as
a favorite. -- Showcontactdetails: see > page 182. -- Connection manager: see > page 241. -- Bluetooth settings: see > page 243. -- Online settings: see > page 243. -- Wi-Fi settings: see > page 193, Wi-Fi settings. -- Telephone settings: see > page 183.
Favorites
Requirement: a phone number or contact must be stored as a favorite > page 178.
Select and confirm a favorite in the favoriteslist.
Directory
Requirement: you must have at least one contact
stored in your cell phone.
Select and confirm a phone number from the directory > page 181.
Enter number
-- Entering a phone number as a sequence of numbers: enter the number using the number speller > fig. 175.
-- Entering the phone number as a sequence of letters: select and confirm |ABC| above the number speller. Enter a sequence of letters using the letter speller, for example AUDISERVICE.
-- Dialing a phone number: select and confirm #. Or: push the control knob down. Select and confirm OK.
-- Deleting individual characters: select and confirm &l.
-- Deleting all characters entered at once: turn the control knob with the character selection to land press and hold the control knob. Or: select the right control button > Clear input field.

176

Telephone

Accepting or ending a call
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
-- Accepting a call: select and confirm Answer. -- Declining a call: select and confirm Decline. -- Muting theactive call: select and confirm
Mute. -- Ending a phone call/cancel dialing: select and
confirm End call.
Caller information: the name, phone numberor Unknownappearsin the Infotainment system display depending on if the caller has been stored in the directory and if the phone number has been transmitted. A picture mayalso be displayed, depending on whether you have assigned a picture to a contactin your directory and if it was transferred to your MMI. You can find out if your mobile device supports this function from your mobile device network provider, your mobile
device owner's manual, or at www.audiusa.com/
bluetooth.
@) Tips
-- The radio or media playback is muted during a phone call.
-- Missed calls are displayed with a symbol in the status line of the Infotainment system display @) > page 155,fig. 164.
During a phone call
Appliesto: vehicles with telephone
Requirement: there must be a call in progress.
> End call: you can end a phone call.
> Send tone sequence: you can enter tone sequences (DTMF)directly using the number
speller and send to the other person on the call. > Other call options: press the right control button.
The following options maybe possible during a call depending on the mobile device being used and the type of connection:
-- Answering an additional call: if there is an incoming call while another call is active, you can select Answerto put the existing call on hold

and answer the incoming call. If you select De-
cline, the incoming call will be declined.
-- Accepting an incoming call when thereis an active call and a call on hold: select Replace. The active call is replaced with the incoming call.
-- Muting the incoming call: select and confirm Mute telephone.
-- Additional call: select: Find contact > Call list/ Directory/Favorites > an entry from the list.
Mute: if you select and confirm this function, the other person on the phone cannot hear you. You will still be able to hear the other person. To turn the microphone back on, select and confirm Un-
mute.
Hold call/Resume heldcall: you can place the existing call on hold and resume it again. To resume the call, select and confirm the call you would like to resume.
Transfer call to mobile device*: select and confirm Transfer call to mobile device to transfer the existing call from the MMI to your cell phone.
Switch to hands-free mode*: Requirement: you must have a phone call in progress on your cell phone. Select and confirm Switch to hands-free mode to transfer the call from your cell phone back to the MMI.
Swap call: alternate between two phone calls while one of the calls is on hold. Selecting End call will end the active phone call. A phone call on hold can be resumed using the right control button > Resume.
Connection manager: see > page 241.
Telephone settings: see > page 183.

@) Tips

--To be notified of an incoming call during a

phone call, the call waiting function in your

mobile device must be switched on when

using the Handsfreeprofile.

-- You can obtain more information from your

mobile device service provider or from your

mobile device user guide.

-- When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth

connection to the mobile device will auto-

matically disconnect. Depending on your

8W0012721BG

177

Telephone
mobile device, phone calls in progress may be automatically redirected from the MMI to your mobile device so that you can continue the call on your phone. -- The display of an incoming phone call in the Infotainment system display maystill be visible for a few seconds after a callis answered or ignored depending on the cell phone in use.
Making an emergencycall
Appliesto: vehicles with telephone
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button > Dial number > Enter emergency call number (for example, 911) > OK.
ZA WARNING
-- Because your phone workswith radio signals, a connection cannot be guaranteed under all circumstances. Do notrely on only your phone when it comesto essential communication (such as a medical emergency).
-- Alwaysfollow the instructions given by the emergency personnel during an emergency call and only end the call when they instruct you to do so.
G) Tips
Emergency numbersare not the same everywhere. Find out which emergency number is used in your current location.
Favorites
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Up to 50 contacts, in addition to the voicemail number, can bestored in any orderin the favorites list.
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button.
Storing an existing phone number as a favorite:
-- Select and confirm Call list/Directory. -- Select a contact or phone number from the list. -- Select: right control button > Store as favorite.

-- Enter a name for the favorite or select a sug-
gestion.
-- Select and confirm Save.
Renaming stored favorites
-- Select: Favorites > a favorite from the list. -- Select the right control button > Rename favor-
ite.
Moving stored favorites
-- Select: Favorites > a favorite from the list. -- Select the right control button > Movefavorite. -- Select and confirm the location of the selected
favorite.
Deleting a stored favorite
-- Select: Favorites > a favorite from the list. -- Select: right control button > Delete favorite >
Delete this entry or Deleteall entries.
Messages
Meet lst
Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message AccessProfile
(MAP)
Depending on the mobile device being used and the mobile network contract, you may be able to receive and send text messages using the MMI.
Requirement
A cell phone must be connected to the MMI via Bluetooth MAP (Message Access Profile) > page 171.
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button > text message (myPhone)/text message (secondary phone)*.
Write new text message
Select and confirm Write new text message.
-- Using a template: select and confirm the desired template from the list.
-- Writing your own text*: select and confirm Do not use template. Enter text using the MMI touch control pad* or the letter speller.
-- Enter one or morerecipients. -- Select and confirm Send.

178

Inbox
Displays all received text messages.
Sent
Displays all sent text messages.
Outbox
Displays all text messages to be sent.
Drafts
Displays all text messages that have not yet been sent and stored text messages.
Deleted
Displays all deleted text messages.
G) Tips -- Please note that you mayhaveto activate
the receiving and sending of text messages depending on the SIM card being used in your cell phone (for example, when using a multi-SIM). You can obtain more information from your mobile device service provid er or from your mobile device user guide. -- For more information on supported mobile devices, visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. -- You need a mobile device with Message Access Profile that also supports the sending function to be able to send text messages through the MMI.
Message options
Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message AccessProfile (MAP)
> Select: [TEL] button > left control button > text message (myPhone)/text message (secondary phone)* > Inbox/Sent/Outbox > right control button.
The following options maybe available depending on the selected menu.

Telephone
Storing a text message as a template Ten text message templates are stored in the MMI. You can save up to 10 additional templates of your own.
-- Create a text message.
-- Select and confirm Store as template.
Resume last text message The last edited text message can be resumed.
Reply* A reply can be sent for the selected message in the Inbox.
Forward The selected text message can be forwarded to a different recipient.
Send again* The selected text message can be resent.
Delete this text message* The selected text message can be deleted.
Read out!)
You can have the MMI read an open text message.
Text messaging settings* To display when a new text message is received, enable the Text message notifications. New text messages are indicated with an envelope Min the Infotainment system display status line.
Connection manager See > page 241.
Bluetooth settings*
See > page 243.
Online settings* See > page 243.
Wi-Fi settings See > page 193.

8W0012721BG

Notavailablein all languages.

179

Telephone
Telephone settings
See > page 183.
@) Tips Messagesthat are deleted in the MMI are also deleted in the mobile device automatically.
Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message AccessProfile (MAP)
Depending on the type of mobile device being used, you maybe able to receive and send emails through the MMI.
Requirement: a cell phone must be connected to the MMI via Bluetooth MAP (Message Access Profile) > page 171. You can find out if your mobile device supports this function by checking your mobile device owner's manual.
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button > e-mail (myPhone)/e-mail (secondary phone)*.
Write new e-mail Select and confirm Write new e-mail.
-- Using a template: select and confirm the desired template from the list.
-- Writing your own text*: select and confirm Do not use template. Enter text using the MMI touch control pad" or the letter speller.
-- Enter one or morerecipients. -- Select and confirm Send.
Inbox All received e-mails are displayed.
Sent All sent e-mails are displayed.
Outbox
All e-mails that will be sent are displayed.
Drafts All saved e-mails that have not been sent yet are displayed.

CG) Note
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in Wi-Fi settings on page 193.
@ Tips
-- For more information on supported mobile devices, visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
--To ensure that your sent e-mails are received, connect your cell phone to the Wi-Fi hotspot*in the vehicle so that the e-mail app on your cell phone continues to have Internet access. If you are still not receiving emails even though you havea successful
connection, then contact your e-mail service
provider or your cell phone service provider.
Message options
Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message AccessProfile
(MAP)
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button > e-mail (myPhone)/e-mail (secondary phone)* > Inbox/Sent/Outbox> right control button.
The following options maybe available depending on the selected menu.
Store as template
Ten e-mail templates are stored in the MMI. You can save up to 10 additional templates of your own.
-- Create an e-mail. -- Select and confirm Store as template.
Resume last edited e-mail
The last e-mail in progress can be resumed.
Reply*
A reply can be sentfor the selected e-mail in the Inbox.
Reply to all*
A reply can be sentfor the selected e-mail in the Inbox and it will be sentto all of the entered re-
cipients.

180

Telephone

Forward The selected e-mail can be forwarded to a differ-
ent recipient.
Delete this message*
The selected e-mail can be deleted.
Read out»)
You can have the MMI read an open e-mail.
E-mail settings* To display when a new e-mail is received, activate
the E-mail notifications. New e-mails are indicated with an envelope in the Infotainment system display status line.
Connection manager See > page 241.
Bluetooth settings*
See > page 243.
Online settings* See > page 243.
Wi-Fi settings See > page 193.
Telephone settings See > page 183.
@) Tips
-- Messages that are deleted in the MMI are also automatically deleted in the connected cell phone.
-- You cannot read any messageswhile driving.
Listening to voicemail
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button. Select and confirm Call list/Directory/Favorites > Voicemail.

-- Entering the voicemail number: enter the desired number. Select and confirm OK.
-- Dialing the voicemail number: select and confirm Voicemail.
@) Tips -- This service must be set up and activated in
advancebythe cell phone service provider. You can obtain more information from your cell phone service provider. -- The voicemail number depends on the cell phone service provider.
Directory
Opening the directory
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
After connecting the cell phone, the contactsin it are automatically imported into the MMI.
Pw
FY Laolecuirls > Smith, John
Peet)
La Le
Fig. 177 Directory
Requirement: you musthave at least one contact
stored in your cell phone.
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button > Directory.
-- Calling a contact: select and confirm a contact from the directory. The phone numbersfor the selected contact are displayed. To make the call, select and confirm a phone number.
-- Free text search for a contact: see > page 154.
Contacts are displayed in alphabetical order and can be sorted byfirst or last name > page 184, Sort order.
The directory can be opened through the Telephone menu as well as through the Navigation* menu.

8W0012721BG

Notavailablein all languages.

181

Telephone

@ Tips
-- Additional information on free text searches can be found under > page 154.
-- Check for a possible request to synchronize on your cell phone. Requests to synchronize the directory must be confirmed so that your cell phone contacts can be loadedinto the MMI.
-- The contact display in the MMI depends on the mobile device being used. For moreinformation on supported mobile devices,visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Please note that only the directory from the primary phone* is always displayed.
-- The contacts from the mobile device may notbe transferred in alphabetical order. If there are too manyentries, contacts with different first letters may be missing in the MMI.
--The contacts in the local MMI memory are alwaysvisible and can be accessed by other users.
Free text search for a contact
Appliesto: vehicles with telephone
> Select: MENU button > Telephone > left control button > Directory.
> To limit the search, enter the initials of the con-
tact being searched with each initial separated by a space in the input field. Enter additional letters if necessary. > Select and confirm a contact from the directory. The phone numbersfor the selected contact are displayed. > To makethe call, select and confirm a phone number.
G) Tips
-- You can scroll through long lists quickly by turning the control knob quickly. The scrolling speed depends on the number oflist entries.
-- Additional information on free text searches can be found under > page 154.

Showing contact details*
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
You can show contact details depending on the vehicle equipment.
aCe yea lian)
"8 0049841123456
@ 001701239873 Paes) {g john.smith@audi.com
Fig. 178 Diagram: showing contactdetails
> Select: [MENU button > Telephone > left control button.
> Select and confirm Directory > a contact from the directory.
> Select: right control button > Show contact details.
-- Calling: select and confirm the desired telephone number.
-- Navigating: to start navigation, select and confirm the desired address. Select and confirm Start route guidance.
Press the right control button to open additional options for the contact details.
Add destination
To start navigation, select and confirm the desired address. Select and confirm Start route guidance.
Store as favorite
See > page 178, Favorites.
Send text message* You can send a text message > page 178 to the selected contact.
Delete contact
The selected contact can be deleted.
Gi) Tips
-- Contacts edited in the MMI directory cannot be automatically updated in the connected >

182

Telephone

cell phone. Audi recommends editing cell phone contacts directly in the cell phone. -- Only the contacts in the local MMI memory can be edited or deleted.
Importing and exporting contacts
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Contacts in vCard format (.vcf) can be imported into the directory or exported.
Requirement: an SD card mustbe inserted in one of the SD card readers* > page 221 or a USB storage device must be connected to the Audi music interface* > page 226 or the requirementsfor Audi connect Infotainment services* must be met > page 186.
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left control button > Directory.
> Select: right control button > Contact settings.
-- Importing contacts from a storage device: select and confirm Import contacts > SD card 1/SD card 2 or USB device 1/USB device 2 > desired contacts > Start import.
-- Exporting contacts to a storage device: select and confirm Export contacts > SD card 1/SD card 2 or USB device 1/USB device 2 > desired
contacts > Start export.
-- Selecting all contacts at once to import/ export: select and confirm Import contacts/Export contacts > SD card 1/SD card 2 or USB device 1/USB device 2 > All > Start import/Start
export.
G) Tips
-- Alwaysread the chapter > page 186, Audi
connect.
-- For additional information on the myAudi account, visit www.audiusa.com/myaudi.
-- The imported contacts are stored in the local memoryof the directory.
--A maximum of 1,000 contacts can be imported. You can check the directory memory capacity at any time > page 184.

-- Never save important data on memory cards
or USB storage devices. Audi is not responsible for damaged or lost files and media. -- Contacts that were downloaded from a mobile device cannot be exported. -- There should be no other files or folders on the storage medium containing the contacts to be imported.
Additional settings
Telephone settings
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right control button > Telephone settings.
Call options*
Call forwarding: you can switch the forwarding of incoming calls to your voicemail or to another phone number on and off. You can check if the function is activated or deactivated with Check
status.
Call waiting: you are alerted to an incoming call during a phone call when the function is switched on [M. You can check if the function is activated or deactivated with Check status.
Send own telephone number: sending your phone number with an outgoing call can be activated and deactivated. With the Network-dependentsetting, the setting listed in the contract with the cell phone service provider is used. The settings only apply to the Telephone menu in the MMI. Please note that the settings on your mobile device will apply after disconnecting the Bluetooth connection. You can check if the function is activated or deactivated with Check sta-
tus.
Ringtone and volume settings")
Using the Mute telephone function, you can switch the ringtone playback through the MMI speaker on and off. You can play the ringtones using the Ringtone function. Select and confirm an entry from the list. For the Ringtone volume/ Message volume settings, see > page 245. The

8W0012721BG

+ Depends on the connected cell phone.

183

Telephone
Microphoneinputlevel can be adjusted during a phone call using the control knob.
iG) Tips
-- Several mobile devices can be paired with the MMI, but only two* mobile devices can be actively connected.
-- To delete all paired Bluetooth devices, the Bluetooth function can be reset to the factory default settings > page 241.
Additional options
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right control button.
Connection manager
See > page 241.
Bluetooth settings* See > page 243.
Online settings* See > page 243.
Wi-Fi settings* See > page 193, Wi-Fi settings.

Memorycapacity
Showsthe Memory capacity for the directory.
You can manage up to 17,000 contacts with the directory. You can load up to 4,000 contacts from your cell phone into each directory. You can also import up to 1,000 contacts from a storage device.
Sort order
You can sort the contacts in your directory alphabetically according to Last name or First name.
Import contacts/Export contacts
See > page 183.
Download directory
To update the contacts in the MMI, you can manually download your mobile device contacts. Depending on the mobile device, you may need to disconnect and reconnect the Bluetooth connection to update the contacts.
Hide contacts without phone number
When this function is switched on, grayed-out contacts that have no phone numbersstored for them will be hidden in the directory.

Directory settings
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone left control button > Directory > right control button > Contact settings.

Troubleshooting
Applies to: vehicles with telephone

Problem

Solution

Pairing the cell phone to the MMI failed.

Check if the requirements for connecting a mobile device are met =>page 171. Or: check if you accidentally declined the pairing setup PIN on
your cell phone. If necessary, repeat the pairing process >page 171.

After pairing, not all contacts or Avoid using special characters in names. no contacts have been loaded into Avoid using contact groups on your cell phone. the MMI.

184

Telephone

Certain telephonefunctions are grayed out or notavailable.
Some telephone functions may be switched off or not available, even though the mobile deviceis supported.

The telephone functions depend on the mobile device service provider and the mobile device you are using. You can obtain moreinformation from your cell phone service provider, in your cell phone user guide or in the database for mobile devices at www.audiusa. com/bluetooth.
On corporate phones, some Bluetooth settings may not be compatible or the cell phone Bluetooth function may be deactivated. You can obtain more information from your system administrator.

8W0012721BG

185

Audi connect

Audi connect
Introduction
Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following functions may be available:
-- Audi connect Infotainment -- Audi connectvehicle control
@) Tips
-- AUDI AGprovides access to services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on the third party provider.
-- You can also find more information on Audi connect online at www.audiusa.com.
Audi connect Infotainment
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
With Audi connect Infotainment services, online information is transmitted directly to the vehicle.
An Internet connection is required to use Audi connect Infotainment. Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following options maybe available:
ZA WARNING
To reduce the risk of an accident, only use Audi connect Infotainment services when road and traffic conditions permit. Always read and follow the notes in > page 145, Traffic safety information.
G) Tips
-- The data connection for Audi connect Infotainmentservices is pre-configured at the factory. You can change the data connection settings at any time if you need to change the configuration > page 192.
-- Use of the LTE* mobile network standardis not available in every country. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility or your cell phone service provider for additional information.

-- Audi connect Infotainment services are only available within the cell phone network coverage from your cell phone service provider.
-- Availability, scope, providers, screen display, and costs of services may vary depending on
the country, model, model year, end device
and rates.
Embedded SIM card
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and an embedded SIM card
The data connection for Audi connect Infotainment services is made through an embedded SIM card (eSIM card) that is installed in the vehicle. You can use the Audi connect Infotainment services immediately.
() Note
--The connection costs for Audi connect Infotainment services are included in the price of Audi connect Infotainment. Please note that charges may apply when using certain services. For example, this applies to Internet radio/podcastsor for services that use
the Wi-Fi hotspot, such as online media
sources. Depending on the country, data plans may need to be purchased for these services > page 194. For additional infor-
mation, see www.audiusa.com/myaudi.
--Incertain situations, the Wi-Fi hotspot data
connection may be established as a replacement for the SIM card on your Wi-Fi device. This feature depends on the configuration of your Wi-Fi device and operating system. This could result in fees depending on your cell phone service provider, especially if you are using this feature while abroad. A flat rate data plan is strongly recommended. For more information, contact your cell phone service provider or refer to the owner's manual for your Wi-Fi device.

186

Audi connect

Audi connect Infotainment services
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
Requirement: your vehicle must be connected to the Internet > page 186.
Some Audi connect Infotainment services must be configured through your personal myAudi ac-
count before using them for the first time.
> Register at www.audiusa.com/myaudi. > Add your vehicle to your myAudi account. > Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect> right
control button > Log in. > Log in to myAudi in the vehicle using your e-
mail address and password.
@) Tips
-- For some Audi connect Infotainment services, you mayalso have to enter your myAudi access information when accessing services in the MMI.
-- Some Audi connect Infotainment services mustbe activated at www.audiusa.com/ myaudi.
-- Regardless of the key user and additional users, you can only connect one myAudi accountto your vehicle.
-- To makelogging in easier in the vehicle, you will receive an 8-digit myAudi PIN as an alternative to your myAudi passwordafter you have created a myAudi account.
-- For detailed information on configuration,
visit www.audiusa.com/myaudi.
Nee emer Celta
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
> Select: the [MENU] button > Audi connect.
A list of all of the available Audi connect Infotainment services is shown on the Infotainment system display.
You can also filter the Audi connect Infotainment services by category:

> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > left control button > for example, Navigation for
the Audi connect Infotainment services in the Navigation menu.

ET tated
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment

> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > desired Audi connect Infotainment service > right control button.
Depending on the equipment and the Audi connect Infotainment service selected, the following basic functions maybe available:

Save as preview
You can also see a preview of the selected Audi connect Infotainment services on the Audi connect Infotainment home page.

Show on map
You can showselected contents on the map and use them for route guidance.

Read out!)
You can allow the MMI to read out the selected
contents.

Call
If a phone number was assigned to an entry, you can call the number, for exampleto reserve tickets.

Refresh
The contents for the selected Audi connect Infotainment service are refreshed.

Start route guidance

If a location was saved with an entry, you can use

it as the navigation destination. Route guidance

starts immediately.

8W0012721BG

Notavailablein all languages.

187

Audi connect
Change search area
The set search area can be changed at any time. Additional information on search areas can be found under > page 201.
Closing Audi connect Infotainment services
Regardless of the function selected, you can close an Audi connect Infotainment service at any time and return to the home screen.
SYA (a1
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following services maybe available:
Weather
Information on current weather conditions as well as weather forecasts for the selected search area.
> Select and confirm Weather.
News
> Select: Online news> desired newsfeed > a headline.
If you logged in to myAudi in your vehicle = page 187, personalized newsfeeds can be displayed.
Twitter
Requirement: you must have connected your ve-
hicle with myAudi > page 187. You must have connected your myAudi account with Twitter.
You can only connect one Twitter account with
your myAudi account. Notall settings can be adjusted in the MMI. Some can only be adjusted through the Twitter website.
> Select: Twitter > left control button > desired function (for example, Trends).
Travel (travel guide)
Requirement: the myAudi app mustbe installed and open on your mobile device. Your mobile device must be connected to the vehicle Wi-Fi hotspot > page 193.

> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > left control button > Information category > Travel.
After opening the travel guide, travel tips in your area will be displayed including current ratings as well as the corresponding category. > To switch categories (for example, bars near-
by), select: left control button > select a cate-
gory.
Traffic light information
See > page 189.
ZA\ WARNING
-- It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile devices and other similar devices when the
vehicle is stationary because,like all loose
objects, they could be thrown around the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause serious injuries. Store these types of devices securely while driving. -- Do not use any wireless devices on the front seats within range of the airbags whiledriving. Also read the warnings in the chapter => page 265, Front airbags.
() Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and be sure to note the connectivity costs section =>@© in Wi-Fi settings on page 193.

188

Traffic light information
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information
Fig. 180 Example: display of an estimated wait time
The traffic light information » gives you a speed
recommendation, at which to drive through the
next green traffic light @ ° fig. 179 or informs you of the wait time at the nextred light @). The traffic light information can be displayed in the
driver information system, in the status line of
the Audi virtual cockpit* or in the head-up display". General information The traffic light information is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations: -- Ifthe permitted speed limit is exceeded -- If driving below certain speed limit -- If the nexttraffic light is less than 100 feet (30
m) away --If the estimated wait time at a red light is less
than four seconds -- If thereis no traffic light data available -- If the data connection has been interrupted

Audi connect
-- If the camera-based traffic sign recognition* is malfunctioning
-- If there are warnings from the camera-based traffic sign recognition*
Switching traffic light information on and off
-- Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > Traffic light information.
ZA WARNING
-- When traffic light information is shown, al-
so always pay attention tothe traffic situation, the distance to other vehicles and the area around the vehicle. The driver is always responsible for assessing the traffic situation. -- Always adaptyour speed to the current weather,road and traffic conditions. The displayed information must never cause you to ignore legal traffic regulations and pose a safety risk. -- Regardless ofthe traffic light information, you should always monitor your speed using the speedometer and makesure you are adhering to the legal speed limit. -- The traffic light information does not adjust your vehicle's speed to the speed recommendation shownin the display.
@) Tips
-- Traffic light information is not yet available in all cities and is not nationwide.
-- Alwaysread the instructions in the chapter => page 186.
Additional options
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > right control button.
Depending on the equipment and the country, the following options maybe available in the overview of Audi connect Infotainmentservices. >

8W0012721BG

) Service in preparation at the timeof printing. Can add later or is only available in certain regions.

189

Audi connect

About Audi connect
Here you will find legal information regarding Audi connect Infotainment usage.
Log in
See > page 187.
Connection manager
See > page 241.
License subscription
The validity and expiration date of your licenses are displayed.
Refresh
The content of the selected Audi connect Infotainmentservice or the entire Audi connect Infotainmentlist is updated.
Data privacy
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
Location, vehicle, and personal data are transmit-
ted when using Audi connectservices.
Allowing sending of data -- Select and confirm Activate data connection.
The data module for the use of all Audi connect services will be active.
Restricting sending of data -- Select and confirm Activate privacy. The data
connection is limited or deactivated depending on the equipment. The majority of Audi connect services will not be available.
The following interfaces are not affected by this setting: Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE), Wi-Fi connection, Audi smartphone interface (ASI), Near Field Communication (NFC), charging communication (e-tron), Electronic Toll Collect (ETC), if equipped.
@) Note You are responsible for all precautions taken for data protection, anti-virus protection, and protection against loss of data on mobile de-

vices that are used to access the Internet through the Wi-Fi hotspot.
(i) Tips
-- If the transmission ofdatais limited, data will still be transmitted to verify subscrip-
tions.
-- If the transmission ofdatais limited, it will have the following effects on the exchange of data for Audi connect services and emergencycalls,if equipped: --The emergencycall function will remain available withoutrestrictions and will continue to transmit data. --If an online roadside assistancecall is ini-
tiated, no data will be transmitted, but a
call will be made. --If the Geofencing Alert, Speed Alert,
and/or Valet Alert services have been activated by the keyuser, then theywill remain available without restrictions and continue to transmit data.
Audi connect vehicle control services
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
With Audi connect vehicle control services )), you can utilize various services using the myAudi app or online at www.audiusa.com/myaudi.
(i) Tips
-- Accessing specific data or controlling functions remotely depends on the charge level of the vehicle battery. Therefore, these functions only have limited availability after switching off the ignition.
-- An eSIM card establishes the Internet connection for Audi connect vehicle control services. The costsfor this are includedin the price of Audi connect vehicle control services. The cell phone network, for example, must be available to use these services.

)) Depends on the country and equipment. These services are available for a limited time.
190

Audi connect

Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
For some Audi connect vehicle control services, the vehicle owner mustbe set up as the keyuser.
Set key user
Requirement: a key user must not be set yet. The ignition must be switched on.
> To set a key user for the vehicle, you will need a myAudi account. Register at www.audiusa. com/myaudi.
> Link your vehicle to the account at www. audiusa.com/myaudi and then verify your myAudi account immediately in order to use the Audi connectvehicle control services.
» You can also verify your myAudi account later. Log in at www.audiusa.com/myaudi with your access information and verify your myAudi account in user management using the verification processthat is given.
> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect if necessary, Display available functions > right control button > Audi connect user management> Keyuser > Set key user.
> Enter your myAudi user name and the 10-digit vehicle code = page 29. The key user is set. You have the rights to use the Audi connectvehicle control services > page 191 as well as the ability to manage other vehicle functions and any other users.
Resetting the primary user
If you removethe key user,all other users and their authorizations will be deleted. It will no longer be possible to use the Audi connect vehicle control services.
Requirement: a key user mustbe set. The ignition must be switched on.
Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect> right control button > Audi connect user management > Key user > Reset key user.
Using the myAudi app
> Install the myAudi app on your mobile device and log in with your access information.

@ Tips
-- If you sell your vehicle, reset the key user and restore all settings to the factory default settings > page 241.
-- It may also be necessary to enter your 4digit myAudi PIN when accessing some Audi connectvehicle control services.
-- Store the vehicle code in a secureplace. It may be necessaryto re-enter the vehicle code.
-- Pay attention to upper- and lower-case letters when entering the vehicle code.
-- If you do not have the 10-digit vehicle code, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Additional options
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
License subscription
The validity and expiration date of your subscriptions are displayed. When this function is activated, you will be notified before your subscription expires.
Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > Display available functions > right control button > License subscription.
Warning levels
Requirement: the primary user must have set one or more warning levels. Secondary users can only see if a warning level is active or not.
Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > right control button > Alerts.

Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control

Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following services may be available:

Remote locking and unlocking

Requirement: the vehicle must be parked and the ignition must be switched off.

This service allows you to unlock or lock your ve-

hicle.

8W0012721BG

191

Audi connect
Vehicle status report
This service transfers driver information system data to a server. Depending on the vehicle equip-
ment, certain data may be accessed, such as the
remaining range or mileage. The values maydiffer from the values displayed in the vehicle.
Car Finder
This service transmits the parking location to a server when the ignition is switched off. The vehicle location, your location, or the route to your vehicle can be displayed. The new parking location cannot be determined with this service if the vehicle is moved after shutting the vehicle off and without switching the ignition on and off again, for exampleif the vehicle is towed or stolen.
-- Deactivating and activating Car Finder: select: MENU] > Audi connect > Car finder.
Online Audi service request
Requirement: the service mustbe activated online at www.audiusa.com/myaudi and an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi service facility mustbe selected.
This service transmits service-relevant data to your selected authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi servicefacility. They will contact you before your next service appointment.
Stolen Vehicle Locator
This service assists you in locating your vehicle if it is stolen.
-- Contact the police. You receive a Case ID. -- Call the service hotline and give your Case ID.
The service hotline will forward the established data to the police. You receive the Audi Service hotline number when you purchase your vehicle.
Geofencing Alert
Requirement: a key user mustbe setin the vehicle > page 191.
This service allows you to set permitted and forbidden zones for your vehicle as well as set time limits for these zones. If your vehicle leaves a permitted zone or enters a forbidden zone, you

will be notified with a push notification and/or an e-mail.
Speed Alert
Requirement: a key user mustbe set in the vehicle > page 191.
You can set up to two speed limits for your vehicle using this service. If your vehicle exceeds a set speed limit, you will be notified with a push notification and/or e-mail.
Valet Alert
Requirement: a key user mustbe setin the vehicle > page 191.
If you give your vehicle to a parking service, you can set a zone and a speed limit using the myAudi app. If the vehicle leaves the zone or exceeds the speed limit, you will be notified with a push notification and/or e-mail.
ZA\ WARNING
Do not ignore messages and warning or indicator lights that turn on in the vehicle becauseof the information in the vehicle status report. This could lead to break downs in on the road, accidents and serious injuries.
G) Tips
For some services, you can select if you would like to be notified with a push notification and/or an e-mail.
Settings
Cell phone network
> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > right control button > Connection manager.
> Select: right control button > Online settings > Data connection settings.
Depending on the country, vehicle equipment, and connection type, the following functions may be available:
Data connection settings
Using the Data connection settings menu, you can set when the system should connect to the >

192

Audi connect

Internet. The Internet connection disconnects
automatically once the requested Audi connect Infotainment service no longer requires any data.
-- Connection setup: you can select when a data connection should be established.
-- Audi connect (MMI): when this function is switched on, a data connection is automatically established in order to use Audi connect Infotainment services.
-- Wi-Fi devices: when this function is switched on, you can allow or deny Internet connections.
@) Note
Always follow the information found in >@ in Wi-Fi settings on page 193.
G) Tips
For more information on roaming charges, contact your cell phone service provider.
Wi-Fi settings
Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot
You can use the MMI as a Wi-Fi hotspot to connect up to eight Wi-Fi devices to the Internet.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right control button > Wi-Fi settings.
Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following functions maybe available:
Wi-Fi
When this function is switched on, the MMI Wi-Fi
hotspotis active and visible to other devices (for example, laptops and cell phones). You can connect your Wi-Fi device to the MMI and use the Internet connection if necessary. If you switch off
the Wi-Fi in the MMI, the Wi-Fi hotspotwill be deactivated. Therefore, any other devices access-
ing the Wi-Fi hotspot will no longer be connected to the Wi-Fi.
Network key
The Wi-Fi connection between your vehicle and your Wi-Fi device is encrypted. To establish a connection, you must enter the following values

when setting up your wireless device. You can change them if necessary.
-- Access point (SSID): name of the Wi-Fi net-
work.
-- Password: a random passwordwas set at the factory in the MMI. The password can be changed. The encryption method requires a passwordto be at least eight characters long. Choose a secure password.
-- Visible to others: your Wi-Fi network visibility can be switched on or off.
Z\ WARNING
-- It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile devices and other similar devices when the vehicle is stationary because, like all loose objects, they could be thrown around the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause serious injuries. Store these types of devices securely while driving.
--To reducethe risk of an accident, use the Audi connect Infotainment services with a WiFi hotspotonly in the rear seat when the vehicle is in motion, or only when the vehicleis stationary.
-- Do not use any wireless devices on the front seats within range of the airbags while driv-
ing. Also read the warnings in the chapter = page 265, Front airbags.
-- Asthe driver, do not allow usage of the WiFi hotspotto distract you from driving, as this could increase the risk of an accident.

CG) Note

--Incertain situations, the Wi-Fi hotspot data

connection may be established as a replace-

mentfor the SIM card on your Wi-Fi device.

This feature depends on the configuration

of your Wi-Fi device and operating system.

This could result in fees depending on your

cell phone service provider, especially if you

are using this feature while abroad. A flat

rate data plan is strongly recommended. For

moreinformation, contact your cell phone

service provider or refer to the owner's man-

ual for your Wi-Fi device.

8W0012721BG

193

Audi connect
-- Applies to: embedded SIM card usage: The connection costs for Audi connect Infotainment services are included in the price of Audi connect Infotainment. Please note that charges may apply when using certain services. For example, this applies to Internet radio/podcastsor for services that use
the Wi-Fi hotspot, such as online media
sources. Depending on the country, data plans may need to be purchased for these services > page 194. For additional infor-
mation, see www.audiusa.com/myaudi.
-- You are responsiblefor all precautions taken for data protection, anti-virus protection, and protection against loss of data on mobile devices that are used to access the Internet through the Wi-Fi hotspot.
@ Tips
In vehicles without Audi connect Infotainment,the use of the Wi-Fi hotspotis only possible for the Wi-Fi audio player*. A data connection to the Internet cannot be established.
Data plans)
Applies to: vehicles with data plans
Requirement: you must have created a myAudi account at www.audiusa.com/myaudi. Your vehicle must be registered in your myAudi account.
You can purchase data plans at www.audiusa. com/myaudi.
Z\ WARNING
-- Asthe driver, do not allow usage of the WiFi hotspot to distract you from driving, as this could increase the risk of an accident.
-- It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile
devices, and other similar devices when the
vehicle is stationary because, like all loose objects, they could be thrown around the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause serious injuries. Store these types of devices securely while driving.

-- Do not use any wireless devices on the front seats within range of the airbags while driving. Also read the warnings in the chapter = page 265, Front airbags.

@) Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=>) in Wi-Fi settings on page 193.

G) Tips
-- Please note that any vehicle passenger can delete the SIM owner.
-- The associated vehicle is not automatically deleted from the customer portal for the cell phone service provider when you delete the SIM owner in the vehicle. If selling your vehicle, you should delete the vehicle from the customer portal for the cell phone service provider to avoid being charged for additional purchases.

Data Privacy
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment

AUDI AG collects, uses, stores and shares your
personal information, such as contact data, vehi-
cle data, usage data, driving data and precise geolocation, in order to provide you with the products and services you have purchased or request-
ed, and for a number of other purposes, for ex-
ample, to track quality issues, to performance and safety, to meet our internal compliance or legal requirements and to market to customers and potential customers. For a more complete
list of the data we collect, how weuse it and with
whom weshareit, please visit your Audi national/sales region website at www.audi.com.

The collection, use and sharing may vary depend-

ing on your model and model year, your subscrip-

tion status, or the service offering. For example,

collection, use and sharing may vary between Au-

di connectservices, if you have designated a key

user, or if you are driving a model equipped with

persistent data logging. Please review the

))_ Notavailable in every market.
194

Audi connect

complete Privacy Statement to understand our data handling practices with respect to a particular service.
You can find additional information about our data privacy practices in your MMI.
> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > right control button > About Audi connect.
Information about our privacy practices in conjunction with the mobile Audi connect applica-

tion can be found in the Application's Privacy Statement.
For additional information about the privacy practices relating to Audi connect, myAudi, or other websites, applications or online services as well as your obligations with respect to using
these services, and for additional information regarding Audi connect terms and conditions,
please visit your Audi national/sales region website at www.audi.com.

Troubleshooting
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment

Problem

Solution

Audi connect Infotainment serv- Some Audi connect Infotainment services must be activated or

ices: individual Audi connect Info- configured through your personal myAudi account before using

tainment services are grayed out or them for the first time. You can find detailed information online

not available.

at www.audiusa.com/myaudi.

Wi-Fi hotspot: it is not possible to connect through Wi-Fi.

Check if Wi-Fi is activated in the MMI > page 193. Delete all existing Wi-Fi connections on your mobile device and
restart it.

8W0012721BG

195

Emergencycall
Emergencycall
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with emergencycall function
Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the following functions may be available.
With the emergencycall, you can call for help in dangerous situations as quickly as possible. Use this function when emergencyhelp is needed => page 196.
With online roadside assistance, you can request assistance if there is a breakdown or a minor accident > page 197.
@ Tips
-- The services are provided through a SIM card installed in the vehicle. The cost of the call and data connections is included in the price of the services. Services are provided assuming that the cell phone network required for the installed SIM card is functioning and available for use. The available services set by Audi AG areonlyavailable within the cell phone network coverage area for the cell phone service provider selected by
Audi AG. -- You can find whatdata will be transferred at
www.audiusa.com. -- Theseservices cannot be deactivated using
the settings in the Infotainment system.
Emergencycall
Applies to: vehicles with emergencycall function
An emergencycall is a combination of data transmission and a phone call. The data transmission from your vehicle forwards important informa-
tion, such as the vehicle and position data, to the
emergencycall center.
G) Tips
The availability of the services offered depends on the country and may change in the future.

Making an emergencycall
Applies to: vehicles with emergencycall function
The emergencycall can be madetwodifferent ways.
Fig. 181 Front headliner: cover for the emergencycall but-
ton
Requirement: the LED @) mustbe green. Manual emergencycall Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
> Tap the cover (@) to open it.
> Press and hold the emergencycall button until the LED @) blinks green. The emergencycall will be made.
> If the emergencycall button is pressed by mistake, then press it again immediately and hold it until the LED stays green. The emergencycall will be canceled.
Automatic emergencycall The vehicle electrical system initiates an automatic emergencycall under certain circumstances, for exampleif an airbag deploys. The LED in the emergencycall button (2) blinks green. The emergencycall will be made. It cannot be canceled.
The LED indicates the status of the system as follows: -- Green - the emergencycall function is availa-
ble. -- Red - there is a malfunction in the emergency
call function. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. An emergency call cannot be made. -- Off - the emergencycall function is not available, perhaps because no network is available. >

196

RAZ-0443

Emergencycall

@) Tips If the emergencycall is canceled due to a poor connection, then the system automatically tries to connect again.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with emergencycall function
S&S Emergencycall function: malfunction! Restricted functionality. Please contact Service
If this indicator light turns on and this message appears, the emergencycall function is restricted. For example, you cannotcall the emergency
call center, but data maystill be transmitted un-
der certain circumstances. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
& Emergencycall function: malfunction! Function unavailable. Please contact Service
If this indicator light turns on and this message appears, you cannot make an emergencycall. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Online roadside assistance
Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance
An online roadside assistancecall )) is a combination of data transmission and a phone call. The data transmission from your vehicle forwards important information to the Audi service center, such as the vehicle and position data.

Calling online roadside assistance
Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance
+o
Fig. 182 Front headliner: online roadside assistance but-
ton
Calling online roadside assistance > Press the button (). The LED in the button
turns red. The online roadside assistance call will be made. > If you press the button @) by mistake, then press it again. Or > Select and confirm Cancel or End callin the Infotainment system. Audi incident assistance A minor accident may be detected by the vehicle electrical system. You have the option of selecting between Call online roadside assistance or Make emergencycall. > Select one of the options and confirm it by pressing the control knob.
@) Tips If the roadside assistance call is canceled due to a poor connection, then the call must be made again.

8W0012721BG

D_ The availability of the services offered depends on the country and maychange in the future.

197

Navigation

Navigation
Opening navigation
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
The navigation system directs you to yourdestination, aroundtraffic incidents, and on alternative routes,if desired.

Ua Colnal Lele] 15) Eeehile)
Cliath}

Fig. 183 Diagram: Enter destination menu

> Press the LNAV/MAP] button.

The Enter destination menu is displayed after
opening navigation. The following information can be displayed in the Infotainment system display:

@ Input field for free text search ....

198

@ Homeaddress .................

200

@® Last destinations ...............

199

@ Stored favorites ................

200

As soon as you select an entry from the list (depending on the vehicle equipment), the corre-
sponding destination displays as a map preview*
© fig. 183.

If you have connected a mobile device to the MMI, your directory contacts will also be listedif they have navigation data assigned to them.
The Favorites (4) > fig. 183 menu item as well as the directory contacts are only shown in the Enter destination menu if you have entered one or more characters using the input field.
Switching between destination entry and the map:
-- Press the [NAV/MAP| button repeatedly until the map is displayed. Or: select the left control button > Switch to map.

[RAH-8617]

ZA WARNING
-- The demands oftraffic require your full attention. Always read the chapter = page 145, Traffic safety information.
-- Obeyall traffic laws when driving. -- The route calculated by the navigation sys-
tem is a recommendation for reaching your destination. Obey traffic lights, stopping re-
strictions, one-waystreets, lane change restrictions, etc.
-- Adjust the volume of the audio system so that signals from outside the vehicle, such as police and fire sirens, can be heardeasily at all times.
C) Note
If the driving directions conflict with traffic
laws, obeythe traffic laws.
G) Tips
-- Snow and obstructions on the GPS antenna or interference caused bytrees and large buildings can impair satellite reception and affect the system's ability to determine the vehicle position. Several deactivated or malfunctioning satellites can also interrupt GPS reception and affect the system's ability to determine the vehicle position.
-- Because street names sometimes change,
the names stored in the MMI mayin rare cases differ from the actual street name.
Entering a destination
Free text search for destinations
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
With the free text search, you can enter the navigation destination dataall at once in any order using the MMI touch control pad* or the letter/ numberspeller (for example, 20 Main St., Los Angeles). Likewise, you can search for points of
interest, contacts, previous destinations or fa-
vorites to navigate to the desired address.
Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed > page 198, fig. 183.

198

Navigation

> Push the control knob up. The input field is dis-
played @) 9 page 198,fig. 183.
-- Enter one or more search terms into the input
field. -- If available, confirm the input suggestion* to
complete the entry or a word suggestion*. See = page 152, Letter/numberspeller. -- Turn the control knob to the right to change the results list. -- Select and confirm a destination from the resultslist.
The route displays as an overview in the map. Route guidance is already active.
Narrowing the search area
All countries/states are selected at the factory for the free text search.
-- Select: the right control button > Country/state selection in the input field @) > page 198, fig. 183.
-- Select the country or state (@) that should be searched for in the free text search in order to narrow the number of results and increase the search speed. The selected entry in the country/state selection is stored. Or: select All countries/states.
@ Tips
-- The MMI input suggestions depend on the last navigated destinations.
-- Up to 50 entries can be stored in the last destinations list.
-- Additional information on free text searches can be found under > page 154.
Loading previous destinations
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system
Your last destinations are automatically stored and can be loadeddirectly as a destination.
Requirement: a destination was already navigated to.
>» Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed > page 198,fig. 183.

Your last destination is listed directly in the Enter destination menu under the home address and identified with the symbol @) > page 198,
fig. 183.
-- Select and confirm one of the last destinations from the list.
Deleting previous destinations
-- Select one of the last destinations from the list. -- Select: right control button > Delete destina-
tion > Delete this last destination or Delete all last destinations.
The selected destination or all last destinations is/are deleted and no longer displayed in the Enter destination menu.
Entering an address
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
As an alternative to free text search, you can also enter an addressin stages.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198, fig. 183.
> Select: left control button > Enter address.
-- Entering a destination using a country/state: select and confirm Country/state. Select and confirm a country or state directly from the list. Or: search for a country or state using the input field.
-- Entering a destination using the City or ZIP code: select and confirm City/ZIP code. Enter a city or a ZIP code. Or: select and confirm a city from the list.
-- Select and confirm additional details about the
destination such as Street, House number or Downtown. -- Destination entry using a street intersection*: Requirement: you must enter a street. Select
and confirm Intersection. Select and confirm a street directly from the list. Or: search for a street using the input field. -- Select and confirm Start route guidance.

8W0012721BG

199

Navigation

Selecting a destination on the map
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and MMI touch
A point on the map can be usedasthe destination.
-- Adjusting the scale: turn the control knob to the left or right.
-- Activating the crosshairs: press the control knob. The crosshairs are shown on the map.
-- Moving the crosshairs: move the crosshairs to the destination using the MMI touch control pad* > page 149.
-- Setting as destination: press the control knob when the crosshairs are shown. Select and confirm Start route guidance.
-- Hiding the crosshairs: press the [BACK] button.
Additional information about the location of the crosshairs: when you select map content using the crosshairs,a display of available information appears(such as street name, address or points of interest) @) > page 207,fig. 191.
Tate Miele har elite Ty CS ET
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
You can quickly and easily start route guidance to your home address using the home address function. Favorites allow easier accessto frequently used destinations.
> Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198, fig. 183.
Setting a home addressas the destination
Requirement: a home address mustbe stored => page 205.
Your Home addressis shown directly in the Enter destination menu @) > page 198,fig. 183.
-- Select: Home address.
Setting a favorite as the destination
Requirement: a favorite must be stored as a destination > page 206.
-- Enter at least the first three letters of the desired favorite in the free text search input field.

The favorites found are shown in the Infotainment system display @) > page 198,fig. 183. -- Select and confirm the desired entry.
(i) Tips
-- Additional settings for the home address can be found under = page 205.
-- Additional settings for the favorites can be found under > page 206.
Miedo eMedia hacen) directory
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
You can navigate directly to destinations in the directory.
(orate
1 nan
beaac TELE eee oe
M a W Calica1 07¢ {AU -Lta C er
it 34°03°12.7°°N, 118°14°43.2°°W
Fig. 184 Possible directory/contacts
Requirement: an address with navigation data or a navigation destination must already be assigned to a contact > page 206.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198, fig. 183.
> Select: left control button > Directory > a con-
tact.
The directory/contacts are shown in alphabetical order and are marked with symbolsto indicate the storage location:
@ Business address @ Private address @®) Business destination @ Private destination
-- Select and confirm an address or a destination. When you haveselected a destination, the route guidance can be started directly.
-- Check the address input again when selecting an address.

200

Navigation

-- Then select and confirm Start route guidance.
Additional directory functions in the navigation system can be found under > page 206.
@) Tips
-- Addresses that have been imported from your mobile device into the MMI can also be used as a destination.
-- If a contact is grayed out in the directory, this contact has neither a destination nor an address assigned toit.
el elm 11a)
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the [NAV/MAP| button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198,fig. 183.
> Select: left control button > POIs.
-- Changing the search area: select and confirm Search area > a search area from the list.
The following search categories are available:
Nearby: points of interest can be selected from different categories. The pointsof interest are listed starting from the immediatevicinity of the vehicle up to a radius of approximately 124 miles (200 km).
Along the route: points of interest along the route can only be selected during active route guidance. The points of interest are located directly along or in the immediatevicinity of the calculated route. The points of interest can likewise be selected from various categories. For example, you can search for a hotel or parking lot at the destination.
Near destination/Near stopover: pointsof interest near a destination or a stopover can only be selected during active route guidance. The points of interest can likewise be selected from various categories. For example, you can search for a hotel or parking lot at the destination.
In a newcity: select a country/state or search in a newcity. Enter the name ofthe desiredcity. Points of interest can be selected from various categories. This function allows you to search for

points of interest in any city regardless of the active route guidance or the vehicle position.
-- Searching for a point of interest name in the selected search area: select Find entry > Enter point of interest. Enter the name of the point of interest.
-- Searching for a point ofinterest in a specific category: select Select category. Select and confirm a category such as Restaurants.
(i) Tips
-- Distancesto points of interest are displayed as a straight-line distance from your current location. The actual distance from your current location to the pointof interest is updated automatically. The list of points of interest that were found is not resorted when this happens.
-- There maybe entries in the list that cannot be displayed completely due to their length. Select the corresponding entry from the list. Select: right control button > Show destination details. Detailed information for the selected entry in the list is then displayed.
point of interest search (online
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi connect Infotainment
You can searchfor points of interest on the Inter-
net.
Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect Infotainment must be met > page 186.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198, fig. 183.
> Select: left control button > Online search. The search area last set is displayed in the input field.
-- Changing the search area: select: right control button > Select search area.
-- Searching for online destinations in the selected search area: enter a new city/state if necessary. Enter the search term, such as hotel. Press the control knob. Select and confirm an online destination from the list.

8W0012721BG

201

Navigation

-- Searching for online destinations in a specific category: select and confirm Select category. Select and confirm a category such as Restau-
rants.
Find which search areas are available under = page 201, Point of interest search.
You can search for online destinations using the voice recognition system > table on page 167.
G) Tips
Alwaysread the chapter > page 186, Audi
connect.
Accessing destinations from myAudi account
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi connect Infotainment
Importindividual destinations from your myAudi account into the MMI.
Requirement:
The requirements for Audi connect Infotainment must be met > page 186.
You must have a registered myAudi account at www.audiusa.com/myaudi. You must have a vehicle assigned to your myAudi account and you must have stored one or more destinations.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198,fig. 183.
> Select: left control button > myAudi contacts. > If necessary, enter your myAudi user data or
your myAudi PIN > page 187. The contacts stored in myAudi are displayed.
-- Select and confirm a contact. -- Select and confirm a private or business desti-
nation.
-- Select and confirm Start route guidance.
@) Tips
-- You only need to enter the myAudi user data
one time.
-- You can receive your myAudi PIN if you have set up a myAudi account.

-- For additional information, visit www.
audiusa.com.
Entering a destination using geo
leey
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198, fig. 183.
> Select: left control button > Geographical coordinates.
-- Select Latitude/Longitude. -- Press the control knob to set the individual val-
ues. -- Turn the control knob tothe left/right to
change the selected value. -- Select and confirm Start route guidance.
Adding a stopover
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
You can enter an additional destination when route guidanceis active.

DNI eeLuCe aeelres)
5 Cancel route guidance --@

Ni Elias Thomas Snack Bar

UU eter Ure Come

Precis --@

Fig. 185 Example: active route guidance with stopover
Requirement: route guidance mustalready be active.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198, fig. 183.
Entering a destination as a stopover
-- Enter a destination in the input line > page 198.
-- Select and confirm a destination from the results list.
-- Select and confirm Add as stopover.

[RAH-8620|

202

Deleting a stopover
-- Push the control knob up. Free text search and active route guidance are displayed. Or: Turn the control knob to the left until the active route guidance is shown.
-- Select and confirm Delete stopover (2) > fig. 185.
--The stopover is deleted.
(eT eee ET
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Requirement: route guidance mustbe active.
> Press the [NAV/MAP| button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198,fig. 183.
> Turn the control knob to the left until the active route guidance is shown > page 202, fig. 185.
> Select and confirm Delete destination @) => page 202,fig. 185. The destination is deleted. Or: select the right control button > Cancel route guidance.
Additional options when entering a eld lacey)
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the right control button.
Depending on the selected function, the following options may be available when entering a destination:
Cancel route guidance: Requirement: route guidance mustbe active. Route guidanceis canceled. For additional information, see > page 203.
Country information: you can display the applicable urban and rural speed limits for any country/state. If this function is activated, the information will be automatically shown to you in the route information ) > page 207,fig. 190 when the speed limit is exceeded > page 210.
Country/state selection: see > page 199, Narrowing the search area.
Routecriteria: see > page 207, Route criteria.

Navigation
Showlocation on map: Requirement: you must have selected a destination from the resultslist. The destination entered is displayed on the map.
Parking at this location*: Requirement: you must have selected a destination from the resultslist. All parking options near the selected location are displayed in the Infotainment system.
Delete: the selected entry is deleted. You can delete individual entries or all entries (for example, favorites or last destinations).
Audi connectat this location*: Requirement: you musthaveselected a destination from the results list. Allows you to search for items in the vicinity of the selected location, such as Travel information.
Online traffic data*: the online traffic information > page 213 can be switched on or off.
Add destination to contact: see > page 206.
Store as favorite: see > page 206.
Voice guidance: see > page 207.
Navigation settings: see > page 206.
@) Tips Information on online traffic data* can also be found online at www.audiusa.com.

8W0012721BG

203

Navigation

Personal route assistance
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and personal
route assistance
Your MMIcan learn the routes that you drivefrequently (such as your daily commute to work and back) and suggest route guidance based on the current vehicle position.

Un Colnnt-e-lele lg-ey

5 Siegal7)

® Market Street
14

Fig. 186 Example: display of personal routesin the "Enter destination" menu

Thereis a delay of 6 min on your personal route to Stevens Creek Blvd, San Jose, CA 95117. yelamer ella)
Pceuoersent kurtacorr
Ignore all messages
Fig. 187 Information on personal route
> Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198,fig. 183.
> Select: right control button > Navigation settings > Personal route assistance.
When the function is switched on M, the MMI records the frequently-driven routes regardless of whether a destination was entered and reached or not.
As long as route guidance is notactive, your personal routes are listed in the Enter destination menu under the home address and indicated with the symbol @ fig. 186. When personal route assistance is switched on, this symbol is displayed in the Navigation menu and in the Infotainmentsystem display status line at the same time.
The distance to the destination and the calculated arrival time are also displayed for your person-

al routes. Without starting route guidance, your MMI monitors the traffic conditions for your personal routes and showspossible traffic incidents for the possible routes to be driven in the Infotainment system display @) > fig. 186.
A message will be displayed if thereis a large traffic incident (more than 12 minute delay) regardless of which menu is selected > fig. 187. Select and confirm one of the following options:
-- Start route guidance: the MMI starts the route guidance for the personal route displayed and searches for a faster routeif available.
-- Ignorethis route and this message: the displayed destination with all applicable personal routes is no longer factored into the current trip. No more messages are shown for the displayed destination. The displayed destination with all applicable personal routes will be factored into the trip again only after stopping the vehicle and switching the ignition on again.
-- Ignore all messages: all personal routes are no longer factored into the current trip. No more messages are displayed. Messages for personal routes when thereis increased traffic will appear again after the vehicle is stopped and the ignition is switched on again.
As soon as you switch off personal route assis-
tance, the symbol in the status line turns off and
your trips are no longer recorded. Trips that were already stored remain stored.
Deleting personal routes:
-- Select the desired personal route in the Enter destination menu > fig. 186.
-- Select: right control button > Delete destination.
Deleting all personal routes:
-- Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > MMI settings > Factory settings.
-- Select: Navigation and online memory > Restore factory settings > page 241.

204

@) Tips -- Personal routes are learned based on the ve-
hicle position. The routeis prioritized according to how frequently you drive to a destination. --A maximum ofthree personal routes are displayed in the Enter destination menu. Based on the currentvehicle position, the traffic situation for the route that is most likely to be driven out of the three routes will always be monitored. -- Please note that personal routes that have already been stored will remain stored after the ignition is switched off and they must be deleted manually.
Alternative routes
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system
Fig. 188 Diagram: display of alternative routes in the overview map
Requirement: a destination must be entered and the route guidance mustbe started. > Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until
the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198,fig. 183. > Select: right control button > Navigation settings > Showalternative routes. Three routes are displayed in the overview map after you enter a destination.
Up to three route suggestions and their properties are displayed on the overview map when the function is switched on 4 © fig. 188. If available, the following information will ap-
pear on the route suggestions:
-- Route type(fast ©,fast alternative (2), economic route @))

Navigation
-- Distance to the destination and the calculated arrival time
-- Traffic congestion along the route including time delays
The route that was calculated according to the route criteria you selected is shown on the overview map . The special properties of the route are also displayed (@) > fig. 188 and given as a spoken message.
Using the control knob, you can select the possible routing for the alternative routes and show them on map Select and confirm the desired route that you wouldlike to use for route guidance.
Additional settings
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198,fig. 183.
Storing a home address
-- Select and confirm Home address (2) => page 198, fig. 183. After opening the home address for the first time, you will be asked to create a home address.
-- Select and confirm Create now. -- Enter a destination or select a destination from
the list.
Editing the home address
-- Select the Home address (2) > page 198, fig. 183.
-- Select: right control button > Edit home address.
-- Select and confirm a new destination as the home address.
The selected destination is stored as the new home address.

8W0012721BG

205

Navigation

Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198, fig. 183.
-- Storing a destination as a favorite: search for the desired destination using the input field. Or: select a destination from the list. Select: right control button > Store as favorite.
-- Renaming a favorite: select the left control button > Favorites > a favorite from the list > right control button > Rename favorite.
-- Movefavorite: select a favorite from the list > right control button > Movefavorite. Select and confirm the location of the selected favorite.
-- Deleting a favorite: select a favorite from the list > right control button > Delete favorite > Deletethis favorite or Deleteall favorites.
Directory contacts
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system
Two addresses(private/business) can be assigned as destinations for each contactin the di-
rectory.
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198,fig. 183.
Storing a destination as a contact in the directory
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI > page 171.
-- Select: a destination > right control button > Add destination to contact.
-- Enter the first letters of the desired contact in the free text search input field > page 198,
fig. 183 and then select a contact from the list.
-- Select and confirm Add business destination or Add private destination.

Navigation settings
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198,fig. 183.
> Select: right control button > Navigation settings.
Depending on the selected function, the following settings can be selected:
Showalternative routes
Up to three suggested routes are shown on the map when this function is switched on => page 205.
Low fuel warning
A message is displayed if the fuel gauge goes below the reserve marking when this function is switched on M. Confirming this message displays a list of gas stations in the area. When a gas sta-
tion is selected, route guidance from the current
vehicle position is calculated.
Trailer mode*
Trailer mode is switched off at the factory.
When the function is switched on M,the maxi-
mum permitted speed for vehicles with trailers is incorporated into the route guidance and the calculated arrival time is adjusted accordingly. Trailer mode is displayed using symbols "8 in the side menu on the map.
Personal route assistance*
Personal route assistance is switched off at the factory.
Your trips are recorded and destinations are suggested by the MMI when this function is switched
on = page 204.
The personal route assistance is indicated by the P& symbol in the status line of the Infotainment system display.
Notification when nearby*
The notification when nearbyis switched off at the factory.

206

Navigation

The MMI notifies you when you are approaching selected points of interest when this function is switched on [M. You can also have a Notification
tone.
Presentation mode
The Presentation mode helps you to effectively plan a trip and follow the planned route without moving the vehicle. You can use Select starting point when you would like to calculate a route starting from a location other than the vehicle position, for example. Start Presentation mode to simulate route guidance.
Route criteria
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system
2{ | 2 |&
>lik) °[=

RAH-8472|

Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198,fig. 183.
> Select: right control button > Voice guidance.
Voice guidance: voice guidance can be Complete
or Shortened. With the Traffic function, voice
guidance promptsare only given when thereare traffic incidents on your route. When Off is selected, no voice guidanceis given.
Voice guidance during phone call: voice guidance during a phone call can be switched on or off.
Entertainmentfader: see > page 245.
Voice guidance volume: you can adjust the volume during voice guidance using the On/Off knob = page 145 You can also find additional information under > page 245.
Map
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system

Fig. 189 Possible route criteria
> Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the Enter destination menu is displayed => page 198,fig. 183.
> Select: right control button > Routecriteria.
@ HOV/carpool lanes ): with the Avoid func-
tion, HOV lanes are excluded when calculating
routes. With Allow, the MMI will route you through HOV lanes and show them.
Q@bighways/ @)Toll roads/ @)Ferries: if the nav-
igation system should not include highways,toll roads or ferries - if possible - when calculating
routes, you can select the Avoid function.

Giri
kis

Fig. 191 Example: standard map with the crosshairs switched on

8W0012721BG

)_ High occupancyvehicle

207

Navigation

> Press the NAV/MAP. button repeatedly until the map is displayed > fig. 190.
Zooming in/out on the map
-- Turn the control knob to the left or to the right. Alternatively, you can also zoom in/out on the map using the MMI touch control pad* => page 150,if the crosshairs are switched on. Or: turn the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel* > page 16.
Turning the crosshairs on/off
-- Switching the crosshairs on: press the control knob in the map view > fig. 190.
-- Switching the crosshairs off: press the [BACK button.
When the crosshairs are switched off > fig. 190:
@ Direction. For additional information, see => page 209.
@ The distance to the destination includes the calculated arrival time.
@ When the trailer mode function is switched on, the corresponding symbol is displayed next to the arrival time.
@ Scale: turn the control knob tothe left or right to decrease or increase the scale. When
the Automatic zoom function is switched on &, an "A"for "Automatic"is displayed in the magnifying glass. Altitude Vehicle location Route information: various information will be displayed during active route guidance (for example, the upcoming maneuver including calculated distance and street names). The display also provides traffic information or points of interest on the current route. Road currently being driven on
When the crosshairs are switched on > fig. 191:
@) The crosshairs: move the crosshairs in the desired direction and set a point on the map using the MMI touch control pad" or the control

knob. When the crosshairs are turned off, the
road being currently driven on is shown.
@ Speed limit display"): display of the maxi-
mum permitted speed on the expressways and highways.
@ Entertainmentsliding menu*: see
=> page 150.
@® Additional information on the crosshairs position: if you move the crosshairs to a loca-
tion on the map, available information for the current position is displayed. Tap briefly on the MMI touch control pad. Or: press the control knob. In the destination details, you can start route guidance to the displayed location. Select and confirm Start route guidance. @ Map contents (points ofinterest, favorites). When there are multiple points of interest in the immediatevicinity, the symbols are shown stacked on the map. @®) Better route #9 if a better routeis available for the current route guidance, it will be indicated on the map including the time that would be saved. More information can be
found under > page 213.
Map functions
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the NAV/MAP button repeatedly until the map is displayed > page 207,fig. 190.
> Press the left control button.
The following map functions can be selected:
Switch to destination input
The free text search in the Enter destination menu is displayed > page 198,fig. 183.
Traffic messages
Current traffic information is displayed in the Infotainment system display. You can also find additional information under > page 212.

CO®

D_ Only applies to vehicles without camera-based speed limit display.
208

Routelist
The route list can only be displayed when route guidanceis active and contains information regarding the route, the names of the streets and the length ofthe route sections. When traveling on highways, possible parking lots and rest areas are shown, which you can select as a stopover.
POIs along the route
Requirement: route guidance mustbe active.
Searching for points of interest along your current route For additional information, see => page 201.
Additional options on the map
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the [NAV/MAP| button repeatedly until the map is displayed > page 207,fig. 190.
> Press the right control button.
Depending on the function selected, the following options can also be selected under the Map menu:
Cancel route guidance: see > page 203.
Map settings: see > page 209.
Routecriteria: see > page 207.
Voice guidance: see > page 207.
Navigation settings: see > page 206.
Showalternative routes: see > page 205.
Parking along the route": parking options near the vehicle are displayed.
Save current position: you can save your current
vehicle position as a favorite > page 206 or save it as a contact in the directory > page 206.
Audi connectat this location*: allows you to search for Travel information at the entered lo-
cation (events, weather at the destination, etc.).
Online traffic data*: you can switch the online
traffic data on or off (M).

Navigation
Country information: see > page 203.
Avoid route*: when route guidance is active, the calculated route will avoid the area you have
specified (maximum: 12 mi (20 km)), if possible.
The navigation system calculates an alternative route. The route to be avoided that you have entered applies only to the current route and must
be set again, if needed. The areas you have se-
lected to avoid will appear with red and white shading on the map.
Move route": move your finger over the MMI touch control pad* or use the control knob to adjust the route on the overview map.
Map settings
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the map is displayed.
> Select: right control button > Map settings.
Depending on the selected function, the following settings can be selected:
Map colors
Day/Night: the map is displayed with a light/ dark background.
Automatic: the map display adaptsto the lighting conditions (for example, changing from Day to Night when driving through a tunnel).
Map display
Standard: see > page 207,fig. 191.
Satellite map"): see > page 210,fig. 192.
Map orientation
Destination map: the map indicates the destination and is oriented to the north.
2D heading-up map/2D north-up map: the current vehicle position is displayed. The map is orientedin the direction of travel or to the north.
3D heading-up map": the current vehicle position is shown ona three-dimensional map andis >

8W0012721BG

2) AUDIAGprovides access to services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on the third party provider.

209

Navigation
aligned to the direction of travel. At a scale of 62 mi (100 km) and larger, the map orientation is to the north.
Overview map: the entire route from the vehicle position to the destination or the next stopover is displayed on the map. The map scale depends on the length of the route and adapts automatically. The map is oriented to the north.
Route information
The display of route information, such as the current street being driven on or pointsof interest along the current route > page 207,fig. 190, can be switched on/off or can be minimized on the display of upcoming maneuvers.
Automatic zoom
On: the map scale is adapted automatically depending on the type of road being traveled (expressway, highway, other roads) so that you always have an optimal overview of the road ahead. The scale will also be automatically adapted when there are upcoming maneuversto provide a better detailed view.
Intersection: when route guidance is active, the map temporarily zooms in to a detailed scale
when there are upcoming maneuversso that you can see the street or turn better.
Off: the map scale you have chosen is maintained.
MMI map contents
You can switch the display of additional information on the map in the Infotainment system display on or off.
The weather forecastis displayed on a 3 mi (5 km) scale on the map.
Instrumentcluster map contents
You can also set which map content displaysin the instrument cluster > page 160.

Satellite map
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi connect Infotainment
You can display the navigation mapwith satellite images.

Sitters
W Washington Blvd
Los Angeles Fig. 192 Example: satellite map

Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect services must be met > page 186.
> Press the [NAV/MAP button repeatedly until the map is displayed.
> Select: right control button > Map settings > Map display > Satellite map).

The map display is based on data received from
the Internet in the form ofsatellite images,
which are then combined with the roadways from the Standard map view. There are two gigabytes of memory space in the MMI memorythat can be used to temporarily store the map or navigation data that was received. This is roughly the
amountrequired for the map/navigation data for
a 2,485 mile (4,000 km)route. As long as the satellite images loaded for route guidance are stored, you can use them without having an active data connection.

G)Tips

--The stored satellite map data!) can be de-

leted under Factory settings > Navigation

and online memory > page 241.

--The satellite map) is updated regularly

whenever the function is opened. The proc-

ess may take several seconds.

-- When the satellite map display is switched

on )with the 3D position map type, the

2) AUDIAGprovidesaccessto services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on the third party provider.
210

MMI display automatically switches to the 2D map type when driving through tunnels. -- Also read the information in the chapter => page 186, Audi connect.
-- For additional information, visit www. audiusa.com.
Map update
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system
There are multiple options available for updating your map material:
-- Map updates through the online map update* > page 211.
-- Import map updates from the SD card* to your MMI. You can find additional information online at www.audiusa.com/myaudi.
-- Map update at an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. This can result in additional costs.
Online map update
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi connect Infotainment
Using the online map update, you can update the map material in your navigation system directly from yourvehicle.
Recommended regions > Confirmation
Do you want to install the selected regions?
Neen cases e ent cai) Crean Rel
BateCele)

Fig. 193 Example: display of a new online map update

Oncme etcEte)

Recommended regions: (2) any

Peete Bectaetry

All regions

Fig. 194 Example: selection of a country package

Navigation

Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect Infotainment services must be met > page 186.
You must have a myAudi account and have assigned your vehicle toit.
Using your vehicle position, the MMI identifies regions which you are frequently in. Based on this, the MMI suggests update packages for these regions,if they are available.
> Select and confirm @ Start download
=> fig. 193 if the message for a new map update appearsin the Infotainment system display. Or: > Select [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > System maintenance > System update > Online update.
A selection with the available update packages appearsin the Infotainment system display > fig. 194.

Selecting the online map update
-- Select an update package from the list (M%) @
> fig. 194.
-- Confirm your selection with the [BACK] button and go back to the selection.
--The number and amount ofdata for the selected update package are now displayed in the Infotainment system.

Starting the download
-- Select and confirm Start download. -- Confirm the security promptby selecting Start
download again.
The update packages begin to download and the status of the download progress is shown in the Infotainment system display.

Installation of online map updates

The downloaded map material installs after you stop your vehicle. The new update packages install only after you switch off the ignition. After restarting the MMI, the Infotainment system dis-
play indicates if the updates installed successfully.

-- Confirm the successful update with OK.

The new map material can now be used for navi-

gation.

8W0012721BG RAH-8624]

211

Navigation

@ Tips
-- Alwaysread the chapter > page 186. -- The amount ofavailable online map updates
in the vehicle is limited. To update moreregions, use the map updatevia SD card at www.audiusa.com/myaudi. -- Alwaysread the chapter > page 186, Audi
connect.

Traffic information
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system

( yee 5 @

@ Westbound # Eastbound

Northbound

©- Northbound

weoef
=

o-- Fig. 195 Example: traffic information overview

> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the map is displayed > page 207, fig. 190.
> Select: left control button > Traffic messages.
Depending on vehicle equipment,the following information may be shown in the traffic information overview > fig. 195:
@ Amessage @) > fig. 195 will appear if the MMI calculates a better route for the current route guidance. More information can be found under > page 213.
@ When route guidance is active, traffic inci-
dents along your route are displayed in the upper section of the list and are sorted by distance.
@® The traffic messages are sorted by street name. If there are multiple traffic messages for the same street, an arrowis displayed in front of the street name ()). Select and confirm the corresponding line to display all of the traffic information.
@ The current selected traffic message is also shownas a map preview*in the Infotainment system display.

© The status line in the Infotainment display also always indicates the reception oftraffic
information ((TMC] or [ONLINE)),
Showing traffic messages on the map: select: onetraffic message > right control button > Show on map.
Displaying the next traffic message on the map: press the control knob.
Traffic information display on the map or map preview*
Color-coded markings along the route indicate the traffic flow:
Green: traffic is flowing freely.
Yellow: stop-and-go traffic.
Red: congestion.
Shaded markings indicate the length of the area with congestion.
Colored warning symbols: an impending traffic incident directly ahead on your route.
All traffic incidents will display in color when route guidance is inactive.
Grayed out warning symbols: traffic incidents
that are not on your route.
Warning symbols with +: avoided traffic incidents.
The display of colored markings, warning symbols, etc. can be set in the Map content menu => page 210.
@) Tips
Particularly critical traffic information, such
as warnings about wrong-waydrivers, is automatically displayed. To hide the traffic information, press the [BACK] button or the control knob.
Traffic information (TMC)
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Receiving traffic information through TMC is switched on at the factory.

212

Navigation

> Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the map is displayed.
> Select: left control button > Traffic messages.
An overviewofall the traffic messages is displayed in the Infotainment system.
-- Opening a detailed view oftraffic information: select and confirm the traffic information from the list.
@) Tips
-- TMC traffic reports are not available in Canada. For more information, please contact Sirius Canada.
-- Critical traffic information, such as warnings
about wrong-waydrivers, is automatically displayed. To hide the traffic information, press the [BACK] button or the control knob.
Better route
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system and better route
By receiving traffic information through TMC, your MMIcalculates a better route if available and the possible time saved compared to the current route. You can decide which route you would like to use.
> Press the [NAV/MAP| button repeatedly until the map is displayed.
Requirement: route guidance mustbe active.
If your MMI has calculated a better route than the current route guidance, the message A better routeis available. appears for several seconds along with the time that maybe saved. A better routeis indicated in the map view by the symbol "3 © page 207, fig. 191.
A message will also appear in the traffic information overview @) > page 212,fig. 195.
Accept better route
-- Press the right control button.

-- Select and confirm the better route. Or: select and confirm Details to display details about the optimized route. You can zoom in or out on the map using the MMI touch control pad. Requirement: there must be more than one optimized route calculated. Press the control knob to switch to the next route in the detailed view. Closing the detailed view: press the [BACK button.
-- After you have selected a better route, the route will be recalculated.
Online traffic information
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi connect Infotainment
The MMI can receive real-time online traffic information about congestion, accidents, road construction, and otherincidents.
Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect Infotainment must be met > page 186.
> Switching online traffic information on and off: select [NAV/MAP| button > right control button > Online traffic data on (M)or off (
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the map is displayed.
> Select: left control button > Traffic messages.
The online traffic information will also be dis-
played on thesatellite map 1) > page 210 or on
the standard map > page 207,fig. 190.
If [ONLINE] traffic information cannotbe re-
ceived, then traffic information will automatically
be received through [TMC] > page 212.
G) Tips
-- Online traffic information is not available in Canada.
-- Alwaysread the chapter > page 186, Audi connect.
-- Having the Onlinetraffic data function switched on provides the most accurate reportsof traffic situations as well as traffic forecasting. Your vehicle transmits and

8W0012721BG

2) AUDIAGprovides access to services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that depends on the third party provider.

213

Navigation

Processes its anonymous, encrypted position information at regular intervals to the traffic data provider. If you do not want to
use this, you can switch off the online traf-
fic information function at any time.

-- The onlinetraffic information network is currently notavailablein all countries, and the coverage is not nationwide. For addi-
tional information, visit www.audiusa.com.

Troubleshooting
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system

Problem
Free text search: the desired destination cannot be found.

Solution
The destination might not be entered in the navigation database. Or: check the spelling of the term that was searched. Check if the desired country/state was selected for the free text search using the Country/state selection > page 199 or the option All countries/states.

214

Radio

Radio
Opening the radio
The radio supports the FM, AM and SiriusXM* (satellite radio) bands. Using the HD Radioreceiver also allows you to receive radio stations on the FM and AM bandsin digital format.

n e Pea) o aaa Saale

Fig. 196 FMstation list (HD Radio technology FM)

Sc 4NoSignal

ely) rea

NoSignal

002

la)

003

20 on 20

coloZ3

Cees

NoSignal Iessfefie19

RAH-8598

@ Presets
The station is stored as a preset. The symbol showsthe stored location in the presetslist (for
example, 21).
@ Radio text (shortened display)
If available, program information about the set station is displayed in all of the station lists.
@ Frequency @ Station name © Station with HD Radio technologyavailable HD) © Channel number
If there is a loss of radio signal (SiriusXM*), the following system information is displayed in the station list:
NoSignal: the tuner is currently not receiving a
satellite signal @.
The system information turns off when the radio stations are received again.

Fig. 197 SiriusXM station list
> Press the [RADIO] button.
After opening the radio, the last opened station list is displayed.
Selecting a station: select and confirm a station from the station list. FM/AM stations that can be received by digital radio are marked with the HD Radio technology symbol 4) ©) > fig. 196. If reception quality declines, the radio automatically switches to the analog FM/AM station depending on availability. Digital HD Radio stations* may contain multiple additional stations*. The available additional stations* are listed under the radio station. If you lose reception, the additional stations* are muted since they can no longer be received.
Setting the frequency band: press the [RADIO button repeatedly until the desired frequency band is set.
The following information is displayed in the station list > fig. 196/> fig. 197:

@ Tips
-- Contact the SiriusXM* provider if you would like to receive satellite programming.
-- Buildings, tunnels, bridges, open areas, other vehicles or objects on the vehicle roof can affect reception.
-- Satellite radio is not available in Alaska and Hawaii.

8W0012721BG

215

Radio

Radio functions
ct-Ma-y4aett- Lai)
Appliesto: vehicles with free text search
Using the free text search, you can select the order that the search termsare enteredin the input field. Search in all frequency bandsfor a station name or program type, such as News.
OTae STAs Tea PL
Fig. 198 Inputfield and results list for free text search
-- Opening the free text search: when in a station list, keep turning the control knob to the left until the free text search input fieldis displayed.
-- Using the free text search: see > page 154, Free text search.
You can also search for frequencies. Stations from the presets (3) are displayed in the
results list @ > fig. 198. The symbol (2) indicates
which station list you switched to based on the station selection.
dditional options
> Select: [RADIO] button > right control button. The following options are available depending on the frequency band:
-- Sound settings: see > page 244. -- Store as favorite: see > page 218, Presets.
-- Manage SiriusXMalerts: see > page 217,SiriusXM alerts.
-- Receivealerts for artist/Receive alerts for track: see > page 217, SiriusXM alerts.
-- Manual tuning: the frequency barsare displayed. Select and confirm the desired frequency.
-- Seek: the radio tunes to the previous or next receivable station.

-- Scan: all stations are played for several seconds each.
-- Radio settings: see > page 218.
CTL (ele)
> Select: [RADIO] button > left control button >a frequency band (such as FM) > a station.
> Select: right control button > Radio text.
Information that accompanies the program (such as artist, composer,track) is displayed.
Browsing through radio text entries: turn the control knob to the left or right.
Requirement: a radio text entry mustbe displayed and the station must be broadcasting a phone number,a navigation destination or a text message number as Radio Text Plus information.
If a location, a phone number or a text message number is included with a radio text entry, the radio text will be shown with a colored border. You have the following options:
Call*/Start route guidance*/Write text message*: -- Select a radio text entry with Radio Text Plus in-
formation and press the control knob. -- Select and confirm Call*/Start route guid-
ance*/Write text message*. Or: press the BACK] button to cancel.
Gi) Tips
The availability of radio text and Radio Text Plus depends on the radio station.

216

Radio

SiriusXM alerts
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM
You candisplay an overview ofyourfavorite ar-
tists or tracks that are currently being played on a SiriusXM channel.
Ates e) s
Fig. 199 SiriusXM alertnotification
> Select: [RADIO] button > left control button > SiriusXM.
After you have stored a SiriusXM alert for your favorite tracks or artists, you can display an overview of your favorite tracks or artists currently being received in the SiriusXM alerts menu and play them immediately. You can also receive a SiriusXM alert notification @ for these tracksor artists in the entertainment sliding menu > fig. 199.
Storing a SiriusXM alert
Requirement: your favorite track or artist must be playing on a SiriusXM channel. -- Select: right control button > Receivealerts for
track or Receivealertsfor artist. Switching SiriusXM alert notifications on and off -- Select: right control button > SiriusXM alert
notifications.
When the function is switched on, a SiriusXM
alert notification is displayed for several seconds in the entertainment sliding menu for the Radio and Navigation menus. @) > fig. 199 displayed.

Playing tracks/artists from Sirius XM alerts Requirement: a SiriusXM alert must be stored for a track/artist and it must be currently playing on a SiriusXM channel. -- Select: left control button > SiriusXM alerts >
an entry from the list. The selected track/artist is played. Playing tracks/artists from the
entertainmentsliding menu
Requirement: the SiriusXM alert notifications function must be switched on. You mustbe in the Radio and Navigation menu. A SiriusXM alert notification is displayed in the entertainment slid-
ing menu @) fig. 199.
-- Push the control knob down. -- Select and confirm the desired track/artist.
Managing SiriusXM alerts -- Select: right control button > Manage SiriusXM
alerts. -- Switching SiriusXM alerts on/off: when the
function is switched on [M, you are notified when this track or artist is being played ona
SiriusXM channel. -- Deleting Sirius XM alerts: select an entry from
the list > right control button > Delete from alerts > Delete this entry or Delete all entries.
View: additional station information
Fig. 200 Radio view: additional station information
Requirement: you mustbe tuned to a radio station. The "Now Playing" screen option must be switched on > page 219. Symbolsin the "Now Playing" screen > fig. 200:
@ Radiotext availability

8W0012721BG

217

Radio
Radio text is available for the selected station. See > page 216.
@ FM HD Radio technology
The station is received through FM HD Radio technology.
@ Screen view
Display Cover art or Station logo. See => page 219, Preferred picture view*. Displaying the station list: Turn the control knob. Or: press the [BACK] button.
o-- a ia)
©-:. Giite.od oe "a 9 ra
Fig. 201 Example: Radio menu
> Select: [RADIO] button > left control button.
Setting the frequency band: select and confirm the desired frequency band in the radio menu => fig. 201. Or: press the [RADIO} button repeatedly until the desired frequency band is set. Displays the station list.
@ Presets
The presetslist is displayed > page 218, Presets.
@ SiriusXM alerts
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM alerts
After you have stored a SiriusXM alert for your fa-
vorite tracks or artists > page 217, an overview
of your favorite tracks or artists currently being received on SiriusXM is displayed.
@® SiriuskM
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM alerts
The SiriusXM* channel list is displayed.

Additional frequency bands
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you mayalso be ableto select additional frequency bands
@/@® fig. 201 in the selection menu.
Presets
You canstore your favorite stations from every frequency bandin the presetslist.
> Select: the [RADIO] button > left control button
> Presets.
Requirement: the presetslist must be displayed.
-- Storing presets: select and confirm a free preset space. Follow the system instructions.
-- Select and confirm a station from the list if necessary.
Requirement: a station list must be displayed. -- Storing presets: select: an entry from the list >
right control button > Store as preset. Or: press and hold the control knob for several seconds.
The shortcut keys are automatically assigned to the presets 1 to 8. You can select the stations directly using the preset buttons > page 152.
-- Displaying the presets list: select: [RADIO] button > Presets.
Requirement: the presetslist must be displayed. -- Listening to presets: select and confirm a pre-
set from thelist. -- Movepreset: select a preset from the list >
right control button > Movepreset. Or: press and hold the control knob for several seconds. Select and confirm the location of the selected favorite. -- Deleting presets: select a preset from the list > right control button > Delete preset > Delete this preset or Delete all presets.
Additional settings
Radio settings
> Select: [RADIO] button > right control button > Radio settings.

218

Radio

The following settings can be selected, depending on the band that is selected:
Station names (FM)
Variable: scrolling text transmitted by the FM stations is shown in the Infotainment system display.
Fixed: scrolling text transmitted by the FM stations is not shownin the Infotainment system display. Only the current section of the scrolling text is displayed.
FM/AM HD Radio*
You can switch HD Radio reception on or off.
Channel sorting (SiriusXM*)
You can set the channel sorting for SiriusXM station lists* by:
-- Channel number: the channelsare sorted in ascending order according to their channel number.
-- Channel name: the channels arelisted in alphabetical order.
-- First category, then channel number: the channels are sorted by their category and then by their channel numbers.
-- First category, then channel name: the channels are sorted by their category and then by their channel names.
Category filter (SiriusXM*)
The stations shown in the station list can be filtered by your personal preferences and by program type. The program categories that you can select depend on what is offered by your provider. Select the All categories option to deactivate all filter options and displayall available stations in the satellite station list.

"Now Playing" screen
When the function is switched on ¥ and the stations or presetslist is open, the displaywill switch to the "Now Playing" screen view after approximately five seconds > page 217. Depending on availability, information about the set station (such as station name, artist and station logo) maybe displayed in this view.
Preferred picture view*
You can set your preferred screen view for the "Now Playing" screen > page 217.
-- Station logo: the station logo is displayed, depending on availability.
-- Cover art: the album cover is displayed if available.
Gracenote online database*
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet. The Cover art option mustbe selected => page 219, Preferred picture view*.
When the function is switched on M, the album
cover or genre cover for the song that is playing is
loaded from the Gracenote online database, de-
pending on availability.
Subscription status (SiriusXM)*
This option is available when your subscription is about to expire or has already expired. The expiration date for your license is displayed.
Call to SiriusXM"*: the contact information for your satellite radio provider is displayed. To call your satellite radio provider using the MMI, press Call to SiriusXM"*.

Troubleshooting

Problem
A station with poor reception is no longer displayed in the station list once you switch to a different station.

Solution
Store the station as a preset in advance. Accessthe presets using the presetslist > page 218.

8W0012721BG

219

Media

Media
Introduction
There are various media drives and connections available in the MMI. For example, you can play audio/video* files from the Jukebox* or connect your mobile device to the Audi music interface* and operate it through the MMI.
Notes
Media and formatrestrictions: the MMI (including the SD card reader and the USB storage device connection*) was tested with a variety of products and media available in the market. However, there may be cases whereindividual devices or media and audio/video* files may not be recognized, mayplay only with restrictions or maynot playat all.
Digital Rights Management: please note that the audio/video* files are subject to copyright protection.
The media drives do notplayfiles that are protected by DRM and thatare identified with the symbol fii.
Data security: never store important data on SD cards, the Jukebox*, CDs/DVDs or mobile devices. Audi AG is not responsible for damaged or lost files and media.
Loading times: the morefiles/folders/playlists that are on a storage medium, the longer it will take to load the audio/video* files. Audi recommends using storage media that only contain audio/videofiles*. To decrease the time it takes to
load audio/video files*, create subfolders (for ex-
ample, for the artist or album). The loading time will also increase when importing files.
Additional information: when playing, audio files are automatically displayed with any additional information that is stored (such as the ar-
tist, track and album cover). If this information is
not available on the storage medium, the MMI will check the Gracenote metadata database.

However, in some cases, the additional informa-
tion may notbe displayed.
Restricted functionality: reset the Media settings to the factory default settings if functionality is restricted > page 241.
If functionality is restricted, reset the Jukebox* to the factory default settings > page 241.
For information about the properties of supported media and file formats, see > page 235.
@) Note
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in Wi-Fi settings on page 193.
CD/DVD operation
CD/DVDandformatrestrictions: the functionality ofindividual storage media maybe limited due to the variety of blank CDs/DVDs available and the various capacities. Audio CDs or video DVDs with copy protection, CDs/DVDs that do not conform to the standard, and multisession CDs may have limited playback or may not play at all. Audi recommends finalizing the recording process when creating multisession CDs. Multisession DVDs are not supported.
Using CDs/DVDs,the CD drive or the DVD drive:
to ensurecorrect, high-quality playback and to prevent damage tothe drive or disc reading errors, always store CDs/DVDs in a protective sleeve and do not expose them to direct sunlight. Do not use:
-- Damaged, dirty or scratched CDs/DVDs -- Single CDs/DVDs with 3 in (8 cm) diameter -- CD/DVDs that are not round -- CDs/DVDs with labels -- Protective rings -- Cleaning CDs
Thermal protection switch: CD/DVD playback may be temporarily unavailable if outside temperatures are extremely hot or cold. A thermal protection switch is installed to protect the CD/DVD and the laser.
Laser devices: laser devices are divided into safety classes 1 to 4 in accordance with DIN IEC 76 >

220

Media

(CO) 6/VDE 0837. The optical readers thatare installed conform to safety class 1. Lasers in this
class are very weak and well-shielded, so there is
no danger if used correctly.
Media drives
SD card reader
The SD card reader is located in the glove com-
partment.
-- Inserting the SD card: the angled corner of the SD card mustface towardthe rightfront. Slide the SD card into the card reader slot until the SD card clicks into place.
-- Automatic playback: playback will start automatically if the inserted SD card contains supported audio/video files* > page 235.
-- Removing the SD card: press briefly on the SD card.
The SD card reader is accessed and operated
through the MMI @) > page 229,fig. 206.
@) Note
Only use one-piece SD cards. If adapter cards (SD cards with more than one piece) are used, the card could fall out of the adapter when driving becauseofvibrations. Individual pieces could then become stuck in the drive and impair the functionality.
@Tips
The SIM card reader then doesnotfunction.

-- Loading a CD/DVD: the CD/DVD is pulled in automatically. Slide the CD/DVD straight into the
DVD slot @) with the label facing up > fig. 202.
-- Automatic playback: playback will start automatically if the inserted CD/DVD contains supported audio/video* files > page 235.
-- Ejecting a CD/DVD: press the button @ > fig. 202.
The CD/DVD is pulled in again automaticallyif it is not removed from the DVD slot within approximately ten seconds after ejecting it.
The DVD drive is accessed and operated through the MMI Q) > page 229,fig. 206.
@) Note
-- Never force a CD/DVD into the drive. The CD/DVD is pulled in automatically.
-- Do not insert CDs/DVDswith labels into the drive. Labels can come loose from the CD/DVD and damage the drive.
@) Tips -- CDs/DVDs that contain audio files with a
high data rate maynotplay. --The SIM card reader then does not function.
Applies to: vehicles with a CD drive
oe

peel
Applies to: vehicles with a DVD drive
ee
Fig. 202 Glove compartment: DVD drive

Fig. 203 Glove compartment: CD drive
-- Loading a CD: the CD is pulled in automatically.
Slide the CD straight into the CD slot @)
=> fig. 203 with the label facing up. -- Automatic playback: playback will start auto-
matically if the inserted CD contains supported audio files > page 236, CD drive. -- Ejecting a CD: press the button @ © fig. 203. >

8W0012721BG RAH-8826|
RAH-8375|

221

Media

The CD is pulled in again automaticallyif it is not removed from the slot within ten seconds of ejecting it.
The CD drive is accessed and operated through the MMI > page 229.
@) Note
-- Never force a CD into the drive. The CD is pulled in automatically.
-- Do notinsert CDs with labelsinto the drive. Labels can come loose from the CD and damage the drive.
(i) Tips
CD playback cannot be guaranteed with audio files that have a high datarate.
Appliesto: vehicles with Jukebox
After you havefilled the Jukebox with music and/or videos, for example from your SD card, you can play thesefiles directly from the Jukebox. The Jukebox memory capacity is approximately 10 GB.
> Press the [MEDIA] button. Pressthe left control button until the sources overview > page 229 is displayed. Select and confirm Jukebox.
Adding files to the Jukebox
-- Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control button until the sources overview > page 229 is displayed. Select one of the following sources to copy to the Jukebox: SD card*, CD-ROM*,
DVD-ROM*, USB storage device*.
Requirement: the media center (for example, tracks, albums) must be open. -- Selecting an entry: select an entry from the
media center. Select: right control button > Copy to jukebox > This entry or Entire list.
Requirement: the playlist must be open. See => page 232. -- Selecting a track: select the track that is cur-
rently playing. Select: right control button >

Copy to jukebox > This track or Entire album or This artist.
Requirement: a video file must be playing. -- Select: right control button > Copy to jukebox.
The copying process begins. The status of the copying process is shown in the MMI. -- Hiding the importing process: select and con-
firm Continue copying in background. The importing process is hidden. -- Canceling the importing process: select and confirm Cancel copying. Or: remove the source that is being imported. Files already copied remain.
Requirement: the copying process must be active in the background. -- Showing the copying process: select: right
control button > Copying in progress.
When importing, the audio files are automatically sorted into the media center categories based on the stored additional information > page 230. The copied video files are stored in the media center under the Videos category.
Playing the Jukebox
Requirement: the Jukebox must contain audio/ video files > page 222, Addingfiles to the Jukebox.
The Jukebox is accessed and operated through
the MMI @ © page229,fig. 206.
Displaying Jukebox memorycapacity
Select: right control button > Jukebox memory capacity. Information about the Jukebox memory capacity and the number ofstored tracksis displayed.
Deleting tracks from the Jukebox!)
Requirement: the Jukebox must contain audio/ video files.
-- Deleting an entry: select an entry from the Jukebox media center. Select: right control button > Delete from jukebox > This entry or Entire list.

Notin the Playbackview.
222

Media

-- The status of the deleting process is shown in the MMI. Jukebox playback stops during the deleting process and starts again automatically once the deletion is complete.
@) Note
Do not import audio/video files when the engine is turned off becausethis will drain the vehicle battery.
@) Tips
-- Tracks from audio CDs cannot be imported to the Jukebox for legal reasons.
-- Files that have already been imported are automatically recognized and cannot be copied to the Jukebox again.
-- It is not possible to play audio/video*files in the CD/DVD* drive while importing them.
-- The Jukebox does not provide an export function due to legal reasons.
-- Files or tracks without additional stored information arelisted as Unknown. Audi recommends adding additional information (such as ID3 tags) to audio files.
-- Reset the Jukebox tothe factory default settings when selling your vehicle > page 241.
Bluetooth audio player
Applies to: vehicles with Bluetooth audio player
With the Bluetooth audio player, you can play music wirelessly from your Bluetooth-capable device (such as a cell phone) through the MMI.
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth settings will open on your mobile device during the connection setup. The Bluetooth function and visibility of the MMI > page 243 and mobile device must be switched on. The Bluetooth audio player > page 243 must be switched on in the MMI.
-- Connecting a Bluetooth player: press the MEDIA] button. Press the left control button until the sources overview is displayed. Select and confirm Bluetooth audio player ©)
> page 229,fig. 207.

--If necessary, select and confirm: Not connected
> Connect Bluetooth audio player. The Bluetooth device search starts. Follow the instructions in the MMI.
-- Select and confirm the desired Bluetooth device from the list. The MMI generates a PIN for the connection.
-- Select and confirm Yes. -- Enter the PIN for connecting on your Bluetooth
device. Or: if the PIN is already displayed on your Bluetoothdevice, confirm it in the Bluetooth device and in the MMI. The time allowed for entering the PIN is limited to approximately 30 seconds.
The media is started and operated through the mobile device or the MMI, depending on the device being used.
Gi) Tips
-- Check for any connection requests on your Bluetooth device.
-- Multiple Bluetooth audio players can be connected to the MMI, but only one mobile device can be active.
-- Bluetooth protocols AVRCP (1.0/1.3/1.4) and A2DP are supported.
-- Note the volume setting on your Bluetooth device. Audi recommends setting your mobile device to the maximum volume when using it as a Bluetooth audio player.
--The supported media functions (such as shuffle) depend on the Bluetooth device being used.
-- For more information on supported devices, visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.

8W0012721BG

223

Media
Wi-Fi audio player
Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi audio player
Using the Wi-Fi audio player media source on the
MMI, you can connect and operate your Wi-Fi-ca-
pable media player (such as a smartphone) to wirelessly play music from your media player library. The media player is connected through the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot. A UPnP Server app or an integrated UPnP/DLNA server on your media playeris required to access your media player library.
Requirement: the Wi-Fi function on your media player must be switched on. The myAudi app or a UPnP server app mustbe installed on your media player. Or: you must be using a media player with an integrated UPnP/DLNA server.
-- Connecting a media player: press the [MEDIA button. Press the left control button until the sources overview > page 229 is displayed. Select and confirm Wi-Fi audio player (7)
> page 229,fig. 207.
--If necessary, select and confirm Wi-Fi turned off > Turn on Wi-Fi to activate Wi-Fi in the MMI. Select Wi-Fi settings, if necessary. Select the same settings on the wireless media player that are used for the Wi-Fi hotspot.
-- Starting the Wi-Fi audio player: start the myAudi app or a UPnP server app, or set media permissions on your media player.
Operating the media player: the media player is operated through the MMI. -- Press the left control button repeatedly until
the Folders menu item appears. Select and confirm Folders. -- Playing music from the media player: select and confirm Media center.
Web radio: see > page 225.
ZA WARNING
-- Asthe driver, do not allow usage of the Wi-
Fi hotspotto distract you from driving, as this could increase the risk of an accident. -- It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile devices and other similar devices when the
vehicle is stationary because, like all loose

objects, they could be thrown around the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause serious injuries. Store these types of devices securely while driving. -- Do not use any wireless devices on the front seats within range of the airbags whiledriving. Also read and follow the warnings in = page 265, Front airbags.
C) Note
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in Wi-Fi settings on page 193.
G) Tips
-- Alwaysread the chapter > page 186, Audi
connect.
-- Please note that a Wi-Fi connection does not automatically makeit possible to use the Internet. For additional information, see > page 186.
-- To avoid interruptions during playback, deactivate the power saving function on the media player or connect it to a charger.
-- The loading times for the audio data depend on the media player used and the number of files that it contains.
--A maximum of 2,000 entries per directory are displayed in the MMI.
-- Songs downloaded for offline use using music streaming services are stored on your mobile device (such as a smartphone) and may be DRM protected. The Wi-Fi audio player will not play DRM protected files.
-- Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for additional information on the Wi-Fi audio player.

224

Media

Online media and Internet radio
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect
You can playback and operatevarious online media services and Internet radio using the MMI.
Fig. 204 Online media
> Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control button until the sources overview > fig. 204 is displayed.
Applies to: online media and Internet radio usage
Requirement: -- the myAudi app mustbe installed and open on
your mobile device. -- You must be logged in to your myAudi account
in the myAudi app and you musthave selected your vehicle. -- The Wi-Fi function on the mobile device and on the MMI must be switched on. --If necessary, check in the connection manager => page 241 if the mobile device you connected is selected under the MMI connect app (M). --The MMI must be connected to the network.
-- The symbolfor the Online media source (@)
=> fig. 204 is shown in the MMI.
Applies to: online media usage
Additional requirement: -- A supported online media service must be avail-
able in the country where the vehicle is being operated. -- You must have an account with a supported online media service. -- Depending on the online media service, you may need to install and open an app on your mobile device.
Starting Online media -- Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control
button until the sources overview > page 229is displayed.

-- Select and confirm an online media service.
Starting Internet radio -- Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control
button until the sources overview > page 229is displayed. -- Select and confirm Internetradio. The Internet radio browser or the last station that was playing is shown. -- Selecting the station: if necessary, select and confirm a categoryin the Internet radio Browser > a station.
Online media and Internetradio: additional options
-- Press the right control button.
The following options maybe available, depending on the information shown (such as the station/track that is currently playing):
-- Soundsettings: see > page 244. -- Wi-Fi settings: see > page 193, Wi-Fi settings. -- Connection manager: see > page 241. -- Additional options maybe available, depending
on the active online media service or Internet radio.
ZA\ WARNING
-- It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile devices and other similar devices when the
vehicle is stationary because,like all loose objects, they could be thrown around the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause serious injuries. Store these types of devices se-
curely while driving. -- Do not use any wireless devices on the front
seats within range of the airbags while driving. Also read and follow the warnings in => page 265, Front airbags.

@) Note

-- Alwaysfollow the information found in >®

in Wi-Fi settings on page 193.

-- There generally are additional costs when

using an online media service account, espe-

cially when it is used internationally.

8W0012721BG

225

-- Depending on the Internet connection and network traffic, the connection may disconnected when online media sources are playing.
-- Online media and Internet radio usage depends on the service availability of the third party provider.
-- Audi AG simply makes the accessto online media services possible through the MMI and does not take any responsibility for the contentsof the online media services.
-- Alwaysread the chapter > page 186, Audi
connect.
-- Depending on the mobile device being used, there may be interruptions during media playback and when using the myAudi app.
To prevent interruptions when using a mo-
bile device, do not lock the screen on your mobile device and keep the myAudi app in the foreground. -- Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for additional information about online media.
Multimedia connections
USB adapter for Audi music interface or USB charging port
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can connect your mobile devices (such as a smartphoneor MP3 player) to the Audi music interface or a USB charging port using a special USB adapter.
ao
a_l e S<e
Fig. 205 Audi Genuine Accessories: USB adapter

You can purchase the USB adapter > fig. 205 from an authorized Audi dealer or at specialty
stores:
@ USB adapter for devices with a micro USB connection
@ USB adapter for devices with an Apple Lightning connection
@ USB adapter for devices with USB type C connection
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may be able to connect your mobile devices through the Audi music interface to the MMI using the USB adapters and charge the battery at the same time.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi music interface
-- Audi music interface: see > page 226.
Applies to: vehicles with USB charging ports in the rear
-- USB charging portsin therear: refer to => page 228.
@) Note
Handle the USB adapter carefully. Do not allow it to be pinched.
(i) Tips
-- The USB adapter on the Audi music interface will support iPod touch or iPhone devices from the 5th generation or newer with the lightning connector.
-- Mobile devices with an Apple Dock connector can only be charged using a USB adapter designed for devices with an Apple Dock connector. Data cannot be transmitted.
NUT Tae)
Connect your mobile devices to the Audi music interface in order to operate them through the MMIand chargethe battery.
The Audi music interface USB portsare located in the storage compartment under the center armrest and at the front* of the center console. They are labeled with the «<> symbol.

ae
\ [RAH-9202

226

Media

The Audi music interface AUX input is located in the storage compartment under the center armrest and is labeled with AUX.
USB Input -- Connecting or charging a mobile device using
the USB adapter: connect the matching USB adapter to the Audi music interface USB port and then connectit to the mobile device, such as an iPhone. The battery will charge automatically. -- Disconnecting a mobile device from the Audi music interface:: remove the USB adapter from the Audi music interface USB port.
The media are started and operated through the mobile device or the MMI, depending on the device being used > page 229.
Connecting multiple mobile devices: if a mobile device (such as a smartphone)is connected at the respective USB port on the Audi music interface, then all devices can be used as a playback source.
AUX Input -- Connecting a mobile device to the AUX input:
connect the AUX cable to the AUX input on the Audi music interface and then to the mobile device (such as an MP3 player or smartphone). -- Disconnecting a mobile device from the AUX input: remove the AUX cable from the AUX input on the Audi music interface. -- Operation: select and confirm the External au-
dio player source G) > page 229,fig. 206. Me-
dia is started and operated on the mobile de-
VICE.
ZA WARNING
Driving requires your complete and undivided attention. As the driver, you have complete responsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate
mobile devices while driving, because this in-
creases the risk of an accident.
@) Note
-- Use a USB extension cable to connect devices that have an integrated USB connector

(such as a USB stick) to prevent damage to your USB device and the Audi music interface.
-- Extremely high or low temperatures that can occur inside vehicles can damage mobile devices and/or impair their performance. Never leave mobile devices in the vehicle in extremely high or low temperatures.

Gi) Tips

-- Alwaysfollow the information found in

=> page 62.

--When you switch the ignition off, the USB

ports are still supplied with power until the

energy management intervenes.

-- Do notuse an additional adapter or USB ex-

tension cable to connect mobile devices to

the Audi music interface that already have a

cable or that must be connected with a USB

adapter (> page 226). Using an additional

adapter or US extension cable may impair

functionality.

-- You can purchase the AUX connector cable

from an authorized Audi dealer or at spe-

cialty stores.

-- Audi recommends setting the volume of a

mobile device connected to the AUX input to

approximately 70% of the maximum vol-

ume.

-- Functionality is not guaranteed for mobile

devices that do not conform to the USB 2.0

specification.

-- USB hubs are not supported.

-- Some versions ofthe iPod such as the iPod

shuffle cannot be connected to the USB

adapter for devices with Apple Dock connec-

tor. Connect these devices using a AUX con-

nector cable.
-- Changed content on a mobile device that

is connected to the Audi music interface

may notbe displayed in the media center. In

this case, reset the Media settings back to

Factory settings > page 241.

-- Video playback through the Audi music in-

terface is only supportedif the connected

8W0012721BG

)) Applies only to MTP devices. Does notapply to Apple devices and USB massstorage devices.

227

Media

device is recognized as a USB storage device (for example a USB stick). Apple devices and MTP devices (such as smartphones)are not recognized as USB storage devices. -- iPod or iPhone malfunctions also affect the operation of the MMI. Reset your iPod or iPhone if this happens. -- Audi recommends updating the iPod or iPhone softwareto the latest version. For important information on operating your
iPod or iPhone, refer to the user guide for
the device. -- The USB adapter on the Audi music inter-
face will support iPod touch or iPhone devices from the 5th generation or newer with the lightning connector. -- For more information about the Audi music interface and supported devices, check the Audi database for mobile devices at www. audiusa.com/mp3 or contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
USB charging ports in the rear
Applies to: vehicles with USB charging ports in the rear
You can charge the battery on your mobile device through a USB charging port.
Two USB charging ports are located at the back of the center console. -- USB adapter: refer to > page 226, USB adapter
for Audi music interface or USB charging port. -- Charging a mobile device using the USB
adapter: connect your mobile device to a USB charging port using a suitable USB adapter. -- Disconnecting a mobile device from the charging port: remove the USB adapter from the USB charging port. -- Disconnecting mobile devices with an Apple Dock connector: remove the Apple Dock connector from the Apple device with the release tabs pressed in.
Z\ WARNING
Driving requires your complete and undivided attention. As the driver, you have completeresponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate

your mobile devices while driving, because this increases the risk of an accident.
() Note
Extremely high or low temperatures that can occur inside vehicles can damage mobile devices and/or impair their performance. Never leave mobile devices in the vehicle in extremely high or low temperatures.
G) Tips
--In preparation at the time of printing. -- Alwaysfollow the information found in
=> page 62. -- When you switch the ignition off, the USB
portsare still supplied with power until the
energy management intervenes.
-- Do not use any additional USB extension cables or adapters to connect mobile devices to the USB charging port that have already been connected by a USB adapter. Using an additional adapter or US extension cable mayimpair functionality.
-- USB hubs are not supported. -- Refer to the manufacturer's operating man-
ual for important information regarding the operation of your mobile device. -- Correct function of all mobile devices cannot be guaranteed. -- The vehicle battery drains when mobile devices are turned on but the engine is off.
Rear Seat Entertainment preparation
Applies to: vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment preparation
The Rear Seat Entertainment preparation includes cables and a mount for Audi Entertainment mobile in the driver's and front passenger's seat backrests.
The suitable Audi Entertainment mobile Rear Seat Entertainment package is available through Audi Genuine Accessories.
Using Audi Genuine Accessories is recommended.
Audi has verified their reliability, safety, and suit-
ability.

228

Media

Wecannot evaluate or endorse other products in this way, even if the product is approved bya certified testing agency or government agency.
@ Note
Only use devices that are approved for the Rear Seat Entertainment preparation. Unapproved equipment can cause damage to the vehicle electrical system.
@) Tips -- Contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility for additional information on Audi Entertainment mobile. -- Alwaysread the chapter > page 367. -- The Rear Seat Entertainment preparation is not intended to charge external electronic devices.
Playing media
You can start and operate various media through the MMI control panel.
LaC) Jukebox
SD card
Audi music interface Ma audio player
Fig. 206 Diagram: possible sources in the Media menu
Eltar ENs
eaeen ley
Conant 1c
Fig. 207 Diagram: possible sources in the Media menu

Requirement: a media source must contain audio/video* files > page 221.
> Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control button until the sources overviewis displayed.
> Select and confirm the desired source. Or: press the [MEDIA] button repeatedly until the desired source is selected.

Depending on the vehicle equipment,the following sources maybe displayed in the Media menu:

G@) Jukebox® os i 5 eas ss ewes i yewaes

222

@ DVD/CD drive*............0.0.. 221,221

@ SDeardreader ................

221

@ Audi music interface* ...........

226

such as an iPhone, USB stick

226

such as an MP3 player connected to

the AUX input

223

@ Wi-Fiaudio player* ............

224

Online media* and Internet radio* . 225

-- Playing audio/videofiles: select a source in the Media menu > Category (such as artists > album> track).
-- Moving one level up in the folder structure: press the [BACK] button. Or: select and confirm Folder up.
-- Selecting the previous or next track/chapter* 1): press the On/Off knob on the MMI control panel briefly to the left KM or right Do.
-- Fast-forwarding and rewinding audio/video* files: press and hold the On/Off knob on the MMI control panel to the left Kd or right PDI for a longer time.
-- Pausing or resuming playback: press the On/Off knob on the MMI control panel briefly.

(i) Tips

-- You can scroll through long lists quickly by

turning the control knob quickly. The scroll-

ing speed depends on the number oflist en-

tries.

8W0012721BG

)) Depending on the DVD, this may not be possible during
playback.

229

Media
-- For safety reasons, the video image is only displayed when the vehicle is stationary. Only the sound from the video plays while driving.

Various categories for selecting audio/video* files are available in the media center.
es P= Artists `fl [bums
enres
Fig. 208 Example: USB stick categories

(7)

Track SN zat
Playlists
7 Videos

Fig. 209 Example: USB stick categories
> Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control button until the sources overview is displayed. Select and confirm the desired source.
@ Active source
The active source is highlighted. The active source symbol (@) may change depending on the connected device, the online media service", or Internet radio*. The device name maybe dis-
played (for example: myPhone). As an example, a
USB stick is shown > fig. 208 connected to the Audi music interface*.
Depending on the active source, you can select audio/video files* from the following categories and add them tothe playlist:
@ Favorites
The Favorites category appearsif at least one entry is stored in the favorites list. See > page 232, Favorites.

@ Artists
All available artists are displayed. Select and confirm an artist, an album and then track.
@ Albums
All available albums are displayed. Select and confirm an album and then a track.
© Genres
All available genresare displayed. Select and con-
firm a genre (such as Pop), an artist, an album
and then a song.
© Tracks
All available tracks are displayed. Select and confirm a track.
@ Folders
The folder structure or track/chapter list is displayed. Select a folder, if necessary. Select and confirm a track.
Playlists
All available playlists from the source and the smartplaylists are displayed. Select and confirm a playlist and then a track.
Smartplaylists: -- Last played tracks: the last tracks played in the
selected source are displayed. -- Mostplayed: the most played tracksin the se-
lected source are displayed. -- stars to 1 star: tracks from the selected
source are displayed according to their rating. -- Unrated: all files from the selected source
without rating information (for example, in the ID3 tag) are displayed.
@ Videos*
All available videofiles are displayed. Select and confirm a video file.
C) Note
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and use ofthe radio category with iPod/iPhone
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in Wi-Fi settings on page 193.

230

@ Tips
-- Only the categories supported by the medium are available. For example, CD/DVDROM tracks cannotbe selected with categories such as Artists, Albums or Genres. With an iPod/iPhone (source: Audi music interface > page 226), the Podcasts, Audio books and Composerscategories are also available.
-- For safety reasons, the video image is only displayed when the vehicle is stationary. Only the sound from the video plays while driving.
-- When synchronizing a portable device with "Cloud" services, playlists may display incorrectly in the MMI. Use the media center in the device.
-- With an iPod/iPhone (media source: Audi music interface > page 226), the Podcasts, Audio books and Composerscategories are also available.
@ Tips
Applies to: iPod/iPhone on Audi music interface
-- An Internet connection is required to use the additional Radio category,an online media service. Also see the chapter => page 193, Wi-Fi settings. Also read the information on the Audi music interface and the supported devices > page 226.
-- Depending on the Internet connection and
network traffic, the connection may disconnected when online media sourcesare playing.
-- The use of online media services depends on the service availability of the third party provider.
-- Audi AG simply makes the access to online media services possible through the MMI and does not take any responsibility for the contentsof the online media services.

Media
a \eyaaytla)
Applies to: vehicles with free text search
You can searchin the active source by tracks and videofiles*, for example

(2 Nae Band

Rock Band

©-

Rock Band

@* eee

Fig. 210 Inputfield and resultslist for free text search
You can open the free text search depending on the selected source.
Requirement: the playlist > page 232 or media center > page 230 mustbe displayed.
Opening free text search
> Keep turning the control knob tothe left until the free text search input field @ © fig. 210 appears. Or: push the control knob up.
Using the free text search: see > page 154, Free text search.
Entries that contain the entered search term are listed in the results list ©) > fig. 210. You can search for artists @) © fig. 210, albums @) or tracks @) as well as genres and videos.
(i) Tips
-- Onlyfiles in the active source will be searched.
-- If you open free text search in the Folders category (7) > page 230,fig. 209 or the
Composers, Podcasts and Audio bookscat-
egories, it will only search through the files in that folder.

8W0012721BG

231

Media

Ets
Hymn
as
) The big B 2 Rock E
Sola kB
Fig. 211 Example: playlist
The track,artist, album and album cover,if appli-
cable, will appear in the playlist > fig. 211.
Options menu See > page 232, Additionalsettings.
Up to 50 entries for every media source can be stored in any orderin the favoriteslist.
Requirement: the playlist or media center must be open. -- Select the desired entry from the playlist or
media center. -- Select: right control button > Store as favorite.
Or: press and hold the control knob for several seconds.
When you store a track as a favorite, the associated album will appear in the favorites list as an entry.
Requirement: at least one entry must be stored in the favorites list.
Displaying the favoriteslist: press the [MEDIA button. Press the left control button until the sources overview > page 229 is displayed. Select the source that contains the categories => page 230 (for example, SD card). Select the Favorites category.
Requirement: the presetslist must be displayed. -- Listening to a favorite: select and confirm a fa-
vorite from the list. -- Movefavorite: select a favorite from the list >
right control button > Movefavorite. Select and confirm the location of the selected favorite.

-- Deleting a favorite: select a favorite from the list > right control button > Delete favorite > Delete this favorite or Delete all favorites.
Additional settings
Context-specific functions and settings are available depending on the selected source.
> Press the right control button.
Sound settings
See > page 244.
Input level
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the AUX connection cable or to a USB adapter => page 226, Multimedia connections.
The volume of the mobile device is adapted to the MMI. Audi recommends adjusting the volume on the mobile device to 70% of the maximum volume output.
Bluetooth settings
See > page 243.
Wi-Fi settings* See > page 193, Wi-Fi settings.
Connection manager
See > page 241.
Show "NowPlaying" screen With the function switched on ¥ and a playlist
open, various information about the current track (such as artist, album and album cover*) as well
as the playing time and the remaining playing time are displayed.
Jukebox memorycapacity* Information on the Jukebox memorycapacity and the number ofstored tracks in the Jukeboxis displayed.

232

Rewind/Fast forward
Turn the control knob to the left or to the right. Or: move your finger across the MMI touch control pad* from left to right.
Shuffle)
With the function switched on,all files in the
playlist are played and shown in random order.
Repeattrack!)
When the function is switched on ¥,the current track repeats.
Repeat*
Requirement: an iPod/iPhone* mustbe selected as the media source in the Audi music interface = page 229, Accessing media.
-- Track: the current track will be repeated. -- Folder: the tracks in the current folder are
played continuously in a loop. -- Off: the function is switched off.
Back to 'Playback'
The options menu is closed. The track currently playing appearsin the playlist.
Play similar music*
The track currently playing is quickly analyzed for features such as artist, genres, mood, and beat, and a smartplaylist with similar tracks will be shown.
Play more...
A smartplaylist is shown based on the track currently playing. You can select between a playlist
with moretracks bythis artist, from this album
or ofthis genre.
Copyto jukebox*
See > page 222, Addingfiles to the Jukebox.

Media
Set as ringtone*"
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI. The track currently playing must be in the Jukebox* > page 222.
The selected track will be used as the ringtone for incoming calls.
Gracenote online database*
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Internet.
Depending on availability, various information will load about the track currently playing when this function is switched on.
Favorites
See > page 232.
Additional options
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and a video file* or a DVD* mustbe playing.
Parental control*
Playback of video DVDs can be restricted using parental control.
Enter the passwordfor parental control. Passwordsetat the factory: 1234. You havethe following options:
-- Protection level: select and confirm the protection level (for example, Level 5). Eight different protection levels can be set for parental control. If you set the parental control level at Level 5, all DVDs from levels 1-5 can be played. Video DVDs with a higher level will not play. Select Unrestricted to removeall of the restrictions.
-- Change password: edit the current password.
Switch to full screen
The video image is displayed. Turn the control knob to display the playlist. Or: press the [BACK button.

8W0012721BG

) The function automatically switches off when the sourceis changed.
2) This function is notavailable for all cell phones.

233

Media

Replay video!)
When this function is switched on ¥, the current
video will replay.

Show DVD menu
The DVD main menu opens in the Infotainment system display.
-- Selecting a menu item: select and confirm a menu item. Or: move your finger on the MMI touch control pad* and press the control knob.
Audio track?)
You can manually set the audio track (language and audio format). The language and audio format options depend on the video DVD.

Subtitles2)
You can manually select subtitles for playback. The languages available depend on the DVD.

Aspect
Audi recommends the Automatic setting for the picture format. You can set the picture format depending on the active file or source (for example video file*, DVD*).

Aspect ratio Automatic
Zoom

Description
The MMI detects the picture format of the source and displays the image in the optimum ratio. Black bars may appear on the sides of the display, depending on the source format and the Infotainment system display that is installed.
The image is enlarged tofill the entire Infotainment system display. Switch the function off if the image is distorted.

Aspect ratio Cinemascope
Original
4:3
16:9

Description
Use this setting for films in cinema format 21:9. Black bars are shown in the upper and lower edges of the Infotainment system display.
The image is displayed in the ratio of the source format. Select this option if the image is distorted or a section of the image is cut off when Autois selected.
The image is set to the 4:3 picture format. Black bars are shown on the sides of the Infotainment system display.
The image is set to the 16:9 picture format. Black bars are shown in the upper and lower edgesofthe Infotainment system display.

(i) Tips

-- Not all video DVDs have parental control. -- The protection levels for the Parental con-
trol are based on the US standards from the
Motion Picture Association of America (MPAA). Note that the age levels for video DVDs in European countries maydiffer.
-- Password entry for Parental control will be locked for approximately one minuteif you enter the incorrect password three timesin a row. The passwordcan only be reset by an authorized Audi dealer.

) The function automatically switches off when the sourceis changed.
2) Depending on the DVD,this may not be possible during
playback.
234

Supported media and file formats

Media

The Jukebox*, SD card reader and the USBstorage device* connection supportthe following audio/ video file properties:

Supported media
File system
Metadata
Format
File extension
Playlists
Characteristics Number of files

Audio files

Video files*

SD/SDHC/SDXC/MMC memory cards: with a capacity of up to 128 GB DVD drive: audio CDs (up to 80 min) with CD text(artist, album, song)*, CD-ROMs with
a capacity of up to 700 MB; DVD+R/RW;DVD video; DVD audio with audio tracks that are compatible with a DVD video player;
Audi music interface: mobile devices (such as an iPod > page 226, MTP player, USB storage device in "USB Device Subclass 1 and 6" that conforms to USB 2.0: USB sticks,
USB MP3 players (Plug-and-Play-capable), external USB flash drives and hard drives

Memorycards: exFAT, FAT, FAT32, NTFS
USB storage device: FAT, FAT32, NTFS USB storage device partitions (primary/logical*: 2 per USB-connection
CD/DVDfile system: ISO9660, Joliet, UDF

Album cover: GIF, JPG, PNG with max.
800x800 px. The album cover from the medium or from Gracenote® is displayed, depending on availability.

MPEG
1/2 Layer3

Windows Media |Audio9
and 10

MPEG 2/4

FLAC

MPEG 1/2 |MPEG4 AVC Windows Media

(H.264)

Video 9

-mp3

.wma

.m4a;
.m4b;
-aac

-flac

-Mpg; -mpeg

-mp4;
.mA4v;
-Mov;
.avi

.wmv; .asf

.M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX

up to maximum 320 kbit/s and 48 kHz 48 kHz sampling frequencies |sampling

up to maximum 2,000 kbit/s and 720x576 px. at maximum 25 fps

frequen-

DVD drive*: maximum 1,000 files per medium

Jukebox*: approximately 10 GB memory capacity; maximum 3,000 files can be imported

USB storage device and memory cards: maximum 10,000 files per medium; maximum

1,000 files per playlist/directory

@ Tips
-- The media drives do not support the Windows Media Audio 9 Voice format.
-- For compressing MP3 files, Audi recommends a bit rate of at least 160 kbit/s. The

display showing the remaining play time maydiffer for audio files with variable bit rate.
-- Special characters (such as those in ID3 tag information) maydisplay differently or may >

235

8W0012721BG

Media
not always display, depending on the system language. -- The manufacturer of the storage device can provide information about its "USB Device Subclass".

-- Some MTP player functions are not supported, such as rating music tracks and video playback.

Applies to: vehicles with a CD drive
The following audio file properties are supported by the CD drive:

Audio files

Supported media

Audio CDs (up to 80 min) with CD text (artist, album, track)*, CD-ROMs with a capacity of up to 700 MB

File system

CD file system: ISO9660, Joliet, UDF

Metadata

Album cover: GIF, JPG, PNG with max. 800x800 px. The album cover from the medium may be displayed, depending on availability.

Format

MPEG 1/2 Layer 3

WindowsMedia Au- MPEG 2/4 dio 9 and 10

FLAC

File extension |.mp3

.wma

-m4a;

flac

.m4b;

-aac

Playlists

-M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX

Characteristics up to maximum 320 kbit/s and 48 kHz sampling frequencies |48 kHz sampling frequency

Number of files

Maximum 1,000 files per medium

G) Tips
-- For compressing MP3 files, Audi recommends a bit rate of at least 160 kbit/s. The display showing the remaining play time maydiffer for audio files with variable bit
rate.

-- Special characters (such as those in ID3 tag information) maydisplay differently or may not always display, depending on the system language.

Troubleshooting

Problem Audi music interface/Bluetooth audio player*: mobile deviceis not supported.
Audi music interface: the volume is too high/too low when starting playback through the AUX input.

Solution
Read the instructions in the chapter > page 226, Multimedia connections/= page 223, Bluetooth audio player. You can learn about supported mobile devices in the Audi database for mobile devices at www.audiusa.com/bluetooth.
Adjust the volume of the mobile device to approximately 70% of |the maximum output > page 232, Input level.

236

Media

Problem

Solution

Audi music interface: the mobile device is not recognized as a
source.

For many cell phones or mobile devices, playback is not possible
when the battery level is too low (less than 5% ofits capacity). The mobile device will only be recognized as a source in the MMI after connecting if the battery charge is sufficient.

Audi music interface: malfunctions during audio playback through an iPod/iPhone.

The Bluetooth audio player function is switched on. Switch this function off > page 243 when you are not using the Bluetooth au-
dio player.

Audi music interface: contents that are changed on a mobile de-
vice connected to the Audi music interface ®) are not displayed in
the media center.

Reset the Media settings to the factory default settings > page 241.

AUX input: thereis static when connecting and disconnecting the
AUX connection cable.

When connecting and disconnecting, the External audio player source is already selected. Before connecting or disconnecting the
mobile device, either mute the device (see > page 245) or switch to a different audio source (for example > page 215, Opening the radio).

Bluetooth audio player*/Wi-Fi audio player*: audio playback in-
terference.

Only one interface should be actively used at a time to ensure problem-free playback.

Jukebox®*: tracks on the imported When importing playlists, all of the files themselves must be im-

playlist are grayed out.

ported.

Jukebox*: imported tracks cannot If you cannotfind imported tracks in the media center, they may

be played or found.

not be supported. Only copy supported files > page 235 to the

Jukebox.

Online media*: connection failed To establish a connection to the MMI, the MMI connection switch between the MMI and the myAudi must be switched on in the myAudi app status screen.

app.

Bluetooth audio player*: interfer- Playback interference can occur when using the Bluetooth audio

ence with track display and audio player if a music player app from a third party provider is open.

playback.

Audi recommends using the integrated media player on your Blue-

tooth device (such as a smartphone).

Wi-Fi hotspot*: your Wi-Fi device
is disconnected from the Wi-Fi hotspot.

Make sure the network optimization functions are switched off in the Wi-Fi settings or in the network settings for your Wi-Fi device. For additional information refer to the user guide for your Wi-Fi device.

Audi music interface: audio playback through the connected mo-
bile device is not possible.

Make sure the USB mode MTPis selected in the settings on your mobile device.

2) Applies only to MTP devices. Does notapply to Apple devices and USB massstorage devices.

8W0012721BG

237

Audi smartphone interface
Audi smartphone interface
Setup
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
You can connect your smartphone to the MMI using the Audi smartphone interface. Certain content on your smartphone is adapted to the Infotainment system display while driving and can be operated through the MMIcontrol panel.
Requirement
The vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on.
An iPhone generation 5 or newer with Lightning connector and iOS 7.1.2 operating system or higher is required. Or:
A smartphone with the Android Auto app and Android 5.0 Lollipop operating system or higher is required.
> Connect your smartphone to the Audi music interface > page 226 using the applicable USB adapter > page 226,fig. 205.
> Select and confirm Activate Apple CarPlay or Activate Android Auto now.
> Follow the system instructions. >» Pay attention to any additional system prompts
on your smartphone, if applicable.
If you chose not to use Apple CarPlay or Android Auto when connecting your smartphone for the first time, you can start the Audi smartphone interface later on using the Connection manager. > Select: [MENU] button > Audi smartphonein-
terface > Change to connection manager. > Connect your smartphone to the Audi music in-
terface using the appropriate USB adapter => page 226,fig. 205. >» Select and confirm Audi smartphone interface in the Connection manager > page 241. You can select your smartphone in the list of devices that are already paired > page 243. > Follow the system instructions.
Z\ WARNING
Driving requires your complete and undivided attention. As the driver, you have completere-
238

sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate
mobile devices while driving, because this increases the risk of an accident.
@) Note
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in Wi-Fi settings on page 193.
@) Tips
-- The functions that can be used depend on the following factors, among others: --The brand of your smartphone --The version of the operating system in your smartphone -- The software version of the app used -- The USB adapter cable and correct connection -- Your cell phone service provider -- The customized settings on your smartphone
-- One of the factors above or a combination of any of them could cause your smartphone to be incompatible with the Audi smartphone interface. Compatibility cannot be guaranteed for all types of smartphones. For more information and assistance, refer to the user guide and the manufacturer of your smartphone.
-- If the connected smartphone has voice con-
trol, you can operate your smartphone using
the external voice recognition system => page 169. -- The menu language shown in the MMI is based on the settings in your smartphone. -- The time displayed in the MMI is based on the settings in your smartphone. -- Some MMI functions are not available when Apple CarPlay or Android Autois active. -- You cannot connect any mobile devices via Bluetooth when an Apple CarPlay connection is active.

Audi smartphone interface

Operating
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
Opening a menu
Apple CarPlay: you can go back to the Apple CarPlay main menu regardless of the selected menu item by pressing and holding the [BACK] button.

Android Auto: to go back to the Android Auto
menu bar, push the control knob down.
Opening a menu item
Select and confirm a menu item using the MMI control panel.

Troubleshooting
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface

Problem

Solution

Audi smartphone interface cannot be
opened.

Check the battery charge level on your smartphone. Check the USB cable and use a different one if necessary.
Check if Android Auto or Apple CarPlayis available in the country wherethe vehicle is being operated.

Android Auto: check if the Android Auto app is installed on your smartphone.

Connecting the smartphone to the MMI failed.

Makesure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface => page 226.

Apple CarPlay: check if Apple CarPlay is activated on your smartphone.

Android Auto: check in the Android Auto app if Android Auto permits new vehicles.

The smartphone is not automatically detected.

Makesure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface => page 226.
Check if the requirements needed to connect a smartphone have been met.

8W0012721BG

239

System settings
System settings Setting the date and time
You canset the clock time manually or using the GPS*.
> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > MMI settings > Date & time.
> Or: select: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings > Date & time.
Automatic setting
When this function is switched on ¥, the time
and date are automatically set.
Time
Requirement: the Automatic setting must be switched off.
Press the control knob. You can set the Time manually by turning and pressing the control knob.
Date
Requirement: the Automatic setting must be switched off.
Press the control knob. You can set the Date manually by turning and pressing the control knob.
Time zone
When selecting the appropriate time zone, a sampling of countries in this zone will be listed.
Automatic time zone*
When this function is switched on, the time
will automatically adjust to the corresponding
time zone.
Automatic daylight saving time*
When this function is switched on ¥, the time
will automatically switch to daylight saving time.

Time format
If you select 24h, the clock will display, for example, 13:00. If you select AM/PM, the clock will display, for example, 1:00 PM.
Date format
If you select DD.MM.YYYY,the date display will show,for example, 31.08.2018. If you select
MM/DD/YYYY,the date display will show,for ex-
ample, 08/31/2018. If you select YYYY-MM-DD, the date display will show, for example, 2018-08-31.
MMI settings
> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > MMI settings.
Language
You can change the display language as well as the language for the voice guidance* and voice recognition system*.
The number of languages available depends on the market.
Measurement units
The following measurement units can be set depending on availability: Speed, Distance, Tem-
perature, Fuel consumption, Volume, Pressure.
Mobile device reminder signal
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box
Requirement: your cell phone must be Qi-capable ) or connected to the Audi music interface @ with a USB adapter cable > page 174, fig. 172.
When the device reminder signal is switched on, you will be notified that your mobile deviceis still in the Audi phone box* when you leave the vehicle. You can select between Spoken cue, Signal tone and Off.
Mobile device reminder signal volume: you can adjust the reminder signal volume by turning the control knob.

)) The Qi standard makesit possible to charge your mobile device wirelessly.
240

System settings

Switch off pop-up: when the function is switched on [M, the messages in the Infotainment system display regarding the charging status of your cell phone in the Audi phone box* are hidden. The reminder not to forget your cell phone when leaving the vehicle is also switched off.
Tool tips
When this function is switched on M, your MMI showsyou tips for input. The frequency of how
often it displays decreases with time.
Speech dialog system
Appliesto: vehicles with voice recognition system
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following functions may be available:
Command display: when this function is switch-
ed on [M, the MMI will show youthepossible
commands for voice input in the respective menu.
Short dialog: when this function is switched on
, a shorter form of the promptsis used.
Command during voice output": this function is switched on at the factory. When this function is switched on M,you can say new commands during announcements. You do not need to wait for the signal tone (beep) during an announcement. When the function is switched off |_J, you need to wait for the signal tone (beep) to say a new command.
Volume: you can adjust the volume of the prompts by turning the control knob.
Individual speech training (only when the vehicle is stationary): you can adapt the voice recognition system to your voice or pronunciation in order to improve the system's ability to recognize your speech. Individual speech training is comprised of 20 speech entries that consist of commands and sequences of numbers. You can delete the programmed voice training with the Reset individual speech training function.
Display brightness
You can adjust the brightness ofthe Infotainment system display by turning the control knob.

Factory settings
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following functions can be resetto factory settings:
-- Soundsettings -- Radio -- Media settings
--Jukebox* -- Directory
-- Telephone -- Bluetooth and Wi-Fi* -- Navigation settings* -- Navigation and online memory* -- Voice recognition system* -- Shortcut keys -- Message settings* -- Apps* -- Tool tips -- Audi connect* -- Audi smartphone interface*
You can select the desired functions individually or all at once with the option Selectall entries. Select and confirm Restore factory settings.
(i) Tips
Makesure that not only the settings were de-
leted but also the stored data, if necessary.

Connection manager

Introduction

The connection managerprovides an overview of your connected devices and their network status.

> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > MMI settings > Connection manager.
> Select and confirm a menu item.

If a mobile device was already connected and you select and confirm the corresponding menu item,
the device name and connection status are displayed under the menu item.

You can individually Connect ()or Disconnect

(L) a paired device.

8W0012721BG

241

System settings

Requirement:
-- The vehicle must be stationary and the ignition must be switched on.
-- The Bluetooth settings will open on your mobile device during the connection setup.
-- The Bluetooth function and visibility of the MMI => page 243 and mobile device must be switched on.
-- The mobile device to be connected must not be connected to any other Bluetooth device.
aaluatleva dali)
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
-- Connect new device: search for and connect a cell phone.
-- List of devices already paired: select your cell phone from the list of all the devices that are already paired.
Yo Tava eli
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
-- Connect new device: search for and connect a cell phone.
-- List of devices already paired: select your cell phone from the list of all the devices that are already paired.
PEL eMeolaal-vaa lela)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
-- The data connection is made using the embedded SIM card ) > page 186. You do not need to adjust any additional settings.
@) Note Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in
Wi-Fi settings on page 193.
myAudi app
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
Requirement: the myAudi app mustbe installed and open on your mobile device.

-- Connect new device: search for and connect a mobile device (such as a smartphone).
-- List of devices already paired: select your mobile device from the list of all the devices that are already paired.
Audio player
Applies to: vehicles with Bluetooth or Wi-Fi audio player
Bluetooth player* Requirement: the Bluetooth function and visibility must be switched on in the MMI > page 243 and on the Bluetooth audio player.
-- Connect new device: press the control knob. Select Bluetooth audio player. Search for and connect a mobile device.
-- List of devices already paired: select a Bluetooth device from the list of all the devices that are already paired.
Wi-Fi audio player*
Requirement: the Wi-Fi hotspot* on the MMI = page 193 and on your Wi-Fi audio player must be switched on.
-- Connect new device: press the control knob. Search for and connect a Wi-Fi capable device.
-- Disconnect Wi-Fi audio player: deactivate the Wi-Fi on your Wi-Fi capable device. The device will be automatically removed from the list.
C) Note
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in Wi-Fi settings on page 193.
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Display contacts from a cell phone (or an additional cell phone).
Requirement: no cell phones can be connected to the MMI using the Handsfreeprofile.
-- Connect new device: search for and connect a new cell phone.

D_ SIM cardinstalled in the vehicle at the factory.
242

-- List of devices already paired: select your cell phone from the list of all the cell phones that are already paired.
ONT ladaelM llals)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
-- Connect your cell phone to the Audi music interface > page 226 using a USB adapter => page 226,fig. 205.
-- Select your cell phone from the list of cell phones that have already been connected.
Additional options
Depending on the selected function, you can use the right control button to access the available additional options in the connection manager.
Delete Bluetooth device*
The selected cell phone/mobile device is disconnected from the MMI and is removed from the list of all devices that are already paired.
Show Bluetooth profiles*
You can Connect or Disconnect the Handsfree,
Messages', Directory/contacts, and Bluetooth audio player profiles separately.
Bluetooth settings*
-- Bluetooth: select and confirm a setting for the Bluetooth connection visibility. Select Visible for the MMI to be visible to other devices. Select Invisible for the MMI to not be visible to other devices. However,it is still possible to establish a Bluetooth connection with paired devices when the visibility is switched off. Select Off to turn visibility off. Then a Bluetooth connection is not possible.
-- Bluetooth audio player: when this function is switched on,the Bluetooth audio player is available as a source in the Media menu.
-- Bluetooth name: the MMI Bluetooth name (for example "AUDI MMI") is displayed and can be changed.
Online settings*
-- Data usage counter: the amount of data packets that are sent and received through the MMI

System settings
is displayed. You can reset the data usage information to zero using the Reset data counter option. -- Network status: the mobile network provider for data service as well as the network status are displayed.
Wi-Fi settings*
See > page 193, Wi-Fi settings.
Storing as a default telephone
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected to the MMI > page 171.
When the mobile device is in range and the Bluetooth function on the mobile device and in the MMLis switched on, this mobile device will be given priority over the other Bluetooth devices and will be connected directly to the MMI. The connected mobile device is displayed first in the device list.
Network settings*
-- Login: you can chose an Automatic login to your cell phone service provider's network, or you can choose a Manual login from the list of available networks.
-- Network selection: available networks in the present location can be selected under network selection. This function is only available for the Manual login setting.
Apple CarPlay sound settings/Android Auto sound settings
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
See > page 244.
AboutApple CarPlay/About Android Auto
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
Here you will find legal information regarding the use of Apple CarPlay or Android Auto and information about device-specific data exchange.
Delete Apple CarPlay device/Delete Android Auto device
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
Requirement: your cell phone must not be connected to the Audi music interface with a USB adapter.

8W0012721BG

243

System settings

Select: Audi smartphone > a device from the list > right control button.
To remove your mobile device from the list, select and confirm Delete Apple CarPlay device or Delete Android Auto device.
System update
> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control button > System maintenance.
-- System update: insert the storage device with the update data into the appropriate drive = page 221. Select and confirm the drive > Start update. The length of the process depends on the size of the update.
-- Resetdriver installation: the selected media driver package is reset to the settings at the time ofdelivery.
-- Version information: information on the MMI software version and the navigation database* software version is displayed. The Softwareinformation function also provides information on the software contained in the MMI and the licensing agreement.
Sound settings
The sounddistribution and volume of the MMI can be adjusted individually. The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
Fig. 212 Adjusting the balance/fader
> Select: [MENU] button > Sound > left control button > Entertainment.
Treble/Bass You can adjust the Treble and Basssettings by turning the control knob. The changed settings only apply for the audio source thatis active at

the time. This allows you to adjust the sound settings for each audio source separately.
Balance/fader (Sound focus)
-- Adjusting the sound distribution to the left or right: press the control knob. Turn the control knob to the left or right to the desired position.
-- Adjusting the sound distribution to the front or rear: press the control knob again. Turn the control knob to the left or right to the desired
Position.
-- Adjusting the sound distribution using the MMI touch*: move your finger on the MMI touch control panel in the desired direction.
Sound effects
Select and confirm a Focus setting: -- All: all speakers in the vehicle are active (sym-
metrical sound distribution). -- Front: only the speakersin the front of the ve-
hicle are active. -- Rear*: only the speakers in the rear of the vehi-
cle are active.
Select and confirm a 3D effect* setting (surround sound): -- Off: the 3D effect is switched off. -- Low: the 3D effect is optimized, for example
for audio books. -- Medium: the 3D effect is optimized for all sour-
ces. -- High: the 3D effect is at the maximum.
Subwoofer*
Turn the control knob to adjust the subwoofer.
Speed dependentvolume control
Turn the control knob to adjust the playback volume to the noise inside the vehicle.

244

System settings

Volume settings
Adjusting the volume
The volume of an audio source or a system message (for example, from the voice recognition system*) can be adjusteddirectly while the sound is playing using the On/Off knob.
-- Increasing or decreasing the volume: turn the On/Off knob @) > page 145,fig. 149 to the right or left.
-- Muting or pausing: press the On/Off knob briefly. Or: turn the On/Off knob tothe left until the symbol @) > page 155 appears. An active audio/video source is stopped.
--Unmuting or resuming: press the On/Off knob briefly. Or: turn the On/Off knob tothe right.
Z\ WARNING
To reduce the risk of an accident, adjust the volume of the audio system so that audible signals from outside the vehicle, such as po-
lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all
times.
@® Tips
Volume that is too high or too low is automatically adjusted to a set level when the MMI is switched on.
NeUeare Maney) Oy
> Select: [MENU] button > Sound > left control button.
Telephone
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Mute telephone: messages and ringtonesare set
to mute.
Ringtone: see > page 183, Ringtone and volume settings.
Ringtone volume: you can adjust the volume of the selected ringtone by turning the control knob.
Message volume: you can adjust the volume of the notification for an incoming text message by turning the control knob.

Microphoneinput level: you can adjust the call volume during a phone call by turning the control knob.
Navigation
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Voice guidance: see > page 207.
Voice guidance during phone call: see => page 207.
Voice guidance volume: you can adjust the voice guidance volume by turning the control knob. Or: you can adjust the voice guidance volume during active route guidance by turning the On/Off knob.
Entertainment fader: the volume of audio playback can be temporarily lowered when the parking system or voice guidanceis active.
Voice recognition system Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system
Command display: see > page 241.
Short dialog: see > page 241.
Speech dialog system volume: see > page 241.
Individual speech training: see > page 241.
Parking aid*
You can adjust the volume of the signal tone by turning the control knob.
-- Adjusting the Front volume: select and confirm High, Medium or Low.
-- Adjusting the Rear volume: select and confirm
High, Medium or Low.
MMI touch*
Turn the control knob to adjust the volume of the spoken prompts from the MMI touch*.

8W0012721BG

245

[RAH-8611

System settings
Restarting the MMI
wv

Fig. 213 Button combinationtorestart the system
> Briefly press the control knob and both buttons at the same time to immediately open the menu upward > fig. 213.
Software license information
Information on MMI softwareand licensing agreements -- Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control
button > System maintenance > Version information. -- Or: online at www.audiusa.com/softwareinfo.
Information on head-up display softwareand licensing agreements -- Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary. -- Press and hold the head-up display button 67
for more than five seconds after switching on the ignition. -- Press the control knob to close the information. Or: start driving.
Information on instrument cluster software and licensing agreements
Press the reset button [0-0] )) twice within five
seconds of switching the ignition on.

D_ Notavailable in all vehicles.
246

Driving safety
Basics
Safe driving habits
Please remember- safetyfirst!
The individual safety features of your vehicle can work together as a system to help protect you and your passengersin a wide range ofaccidents. These features cannot work as a system if they are not always correctly adjusted and correctly used.
This chapter contains important information, tips, instructions and warnings that you need to read and observe for your own safety, the safety of your passengers and others. We have summarized here what you need to know about safety belts, airbags, child restraints as well as child safety. Your safety is for us priority number1. Always observethe information and warnings in this section - for your own safety as well as that of your passengers.
The information in this section applies to all model versions of your vehicle. Some of the features described in this sections may be standard equipment on some models, or maybe optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized Audi dealer.
ZA WARNING
-- Always makesure that you follow the instructions and heed the WARNINGS in this manual. It is in your interest and in the interest of your passengers.
-- Alwayskeep all of the Owner's Literature manuals in your Audi when you lend or sell your vehicle so that this important information will always be available to the driver and passengers.
-- Always keep the Owner's Literature handy so that you can find it easily if you have questions.

Driving safety
Important things to do before driving
Safety is everybody's job! Vehicle and occupant safety always depends on the informed and careful driver.
For your safety and the safety of your passengers, before driving always:
> Make surethat all lights and signals are operating correctly.
> Make surethat the tire pressure is correct. > Makesure that all windowsare clean and afford
good visibility to the outside. > Secureall luggage and other items carefully
> page 64. > Make sure that nothing can interfere with the
pedals.
> Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors
correctly for your height. > Applies to: adjustable head restraints: Instruct
passengersto adjust the head restraints according to their height. > Make sureto use the right child restraint correctly to protect children > page 285, Child safety. > Sit properly in your seat and make sure that your passengers do the same > page 58, Front seats. > Fasten your safety belt and wear it properly. Al-
so instruct your passengersto fasten their safe-
ty belts properly > page 253.
What impairs driving safety?
Safe driving is directly related to the condition of
the vehicle, the driver as well as the driver's abili-
ty to concentrate on the road without being distracted.
The driver is responsible for the safety of the vehicle and all of its occupants. If your ability to drive is impaired, safety risks for everybody in the vehicle increase and you also become a hazard to everyone else on the road > A\.Therefore:
> Do not let yourself be distracted by passengers or by using a cellular telephone.
> NEVER drive when your driving ability is impaired (by medications, alcohol, drugs, etc.). >

8W0012721BG

247

Driving safety

> Observeall traffic laws, rules of the road and
speed limits and plain common sense. > ALWAYSadjust your speed toroad, traffic and
weather conditions. > Take frequent breaks on long trips. Do not drive
for more than two hoursat a stretch. > Do NOTdrive when you are tired, under pres-
sure or when you are stressed.
ZX WARNING
Impaired driving safety increases the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used.
Correct passenger seating positions
Proper seating position for the driver The properdriver seating position is important for safe, relaxed driving.
Fig. 214 Correct seating position
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend that you adjust the driver's seat to the following position: > Adjust the driver's seat so that you can easily
push the pedalsall the wayto the floor while keeping your knee(s) slightly bent > /\. > Adjust the angle of the seatback so that it is in an upright position so that your back comesin full contact with it when you drive. > Adjust the steering wheel so that thereis a distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the steering wheel and your breast bone fig. 214. If not possible, see your authorized Audi dealer about adaptive equipment.

B4G-0375

> Adjust the steering wheel so that the steering wheel and airbag cover points at your chest and not at your face.
> Grasp the top of the steering wheel with your elbow(s) slightly bent.
> Applies to: adjustable head restraints: Adjust
the head restraint so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head. If that is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to this position as possible. > Fasten and wear safety belts correctly => page 256. >» Always keep both feetin the footwell so that you are in control of the vehicle at all times.
For detailed information on how to adjust the driver's seat, see > page 58.
ZA WARNING
Drivers who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it unfolds. To help reduce the risk of serious personal injury: -- Always adjust the driver's seat and the
steering wheel so that there are at least 10 inches (25 cm) between your breastbone and the steering wheel. -- Alwaysadjust the driver's seat and the steering wheel so that there are at least 4 inches (10 cm) between the knees and the lower part of the instrument panel. -- Always hold the steering wheel on the outside of the steering wheel rim with your hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to help reducethe risk of personal injury if the driver's airbag inflates. -- Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position or with your hands at other positions inside the steering wheel rim or on the steering wheel hub. Holding the steering wheel the wrong way can cause
serious injuries to the hands, arms and head
if the driver's airbag deploys. -- Pointing the steering wheel toward your
face decreasesthe ability of the supplemental driver's airbag to protect you in a collision.

248

-- Alwayssit in an upright position and never lean against or place any part of your body too close to the area wherethe airbags are located.
-- Before driving, always adjust the front seats and head restraints properly and make sure that all passengers are properly restrained.
-- Never adjust the seats while the vehicleis moving. Your seat may move unexpectedly and you could lose control of the vehicle.
-- Never drive with the backrest reclined or tilted far back! The farther the backrests are tilted back, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the safety belt and improper seating position.
-- Children must alwaysride in child safety seats > page 285. Special precautions apply when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat > page 261.
Proper seating position for the front passenger
The properfront passenger seating positionis important for safe, relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident, we recommend that you adjust the seat for the front passenger to the following position:
> Adjust the angle of the seatback so that it is in an upright position and your back comes in full contact with it whenever the vehicle is moving.
> Applies to: adjustable head restraints: Adjust the head restraint so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head. If that is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to this position as possible => page 59.
> Keep both feet flat on the floor in front of the front passenger seat.
> Fasten and wear safety belts correctly> page 256.
For detailed information on howto adjust the front passenger's seat, see > page 58.

Driving safety
ZA WARNING
Front seat passengers who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured or killed by the airbag as it unfolds. To help reduce the risk of serious personal injury:
-- Passengers mustalwayssit in an upright position and never lean against or place any part of their body too close to the area wherethe airbags are located.
-- Passengers who are unbelted, out ofposition or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it unfolds with great force in the blink of an eye.
-- Always makesure that there are at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the front passenger`s breastbone and the instrument panel.
-- Always makesure that thereare at least 4 inches (10 cm) between the front passenger`s knees and the lower part of the instrument panel.
-- Each passenger mustalwayssit on a seat of their own and properly fasten and wear the safety belt belonging to that seat.
-- Before driving, always adjust the front passenger seat and head restraint properly.
-- Alwayskeep your feet on the floor in front of
the seat. Never rest them on the seat, instrument panel, out of the window,etc. The
airbag system and safety belt will not be able to protect you properly and can even increase the risk of injury in a crash. -- Never drive with the backrestreclined or tilted far back! The farther the backrests are tilted back, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the safety belt and improper seating position. -- Children mustalwaysride in child safety seats > page 285. Special precautions apply when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat > page 261.

8W0012721BG

249

Driving safety

B4G-0454

Proper seating positions for passengers in
itr try
Rear seat passengers must sit upright with both feet on the floor consistent with their physical size and be properly restrained wheneverthe vehicle is in use.
To reduce the risk of injury caused by an incorrect seating position in the event of a sudden braking
maneuver or an accident, your passengers on the rear bench seat must always observe the follow-
ing:
» Applies to: adjustable head restraints: If there are passengers on the outer rear seats, adjust the head restraints so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head. If that is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to this position as possible. If
there is a passenger in the center rear seat,
slide the head restraint upward > page 60. > Make sure that the seatback is securely latched
in the upright position > page 66. > Keep both feetflat in the footwell in front of
the rear seat. >» Fasten and wear safety belts properly
=> page 256. > Make sure that children are always properlyre-
strained in a child restraint that is appropriate for their size and age > page 285.
Z\ WARNING
Passengers who are improperly seated on the rear seat can be seriously injured in a crash. -- Each passenger must alwayssit on a seat of
their own and properly fasten and wear the safety belt belonging to that seat. -- Safety belts only offer maximum protection when the seatback is securely latched in the upright position and the safety belts are properly positioned on the body. By notsitting upright, a rear seat passenger increases the risk of personal injury from improperly positioned safety belts! -- Always adjust the head restraint properly so that it can give maximum protection.

Proper adjustmentof head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraints are an important partofyour vehicle's occupant restraint system and can help to reducethe risk of injuries in accident situations.
Fig. 215 Head restraint: viewed from the front
The head restraints must be correctly adjusted to achieve the best protection. > Applies to: adjustable head restraints: Adjust
the head restraints so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head. If that is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to this position as possible. Position* the head restraint as close as possible to the back of your head. > If there is a passenger in the center rear seat, slide the head restraint upward.
Adjusting head restraints > page 59.
Z\ WARNING
All seats are equipped with head restraints. Driving without head restraints or with head restraints that are not properly adjusted increases the risk of serious or fatal neck injury dramatically. To help reduce the risk of injury: -- Alwaysdrive with the head restraints in
place and properly adjusted. -- Every person in the vehicle must have a
properly adjusted head restraint. -- Always makesure each person in the vehicle
properly adjusts their head restraint. Adjust the head restraints so the upper edge is as even as possible with the top of your head. If that is not possible, try to adjust the head restraint so thatit is as close to this position as possible.

250

Driving safety

-- Never attemptto adjust head restraint while driving. If you have driven off and must adjust the driver headrest for any reason, first stop the vehicle safely before attempting to adjust the head restraint.
-- Children must always be properly restrained in a child restraint that is appropriate for their age and size > page 285.
Examples of improper seating positions
The occupant restraint system can only reduce the risk of injury if vehicle occupants are properly seated.
Improper seating positions can cause serious in-
jury or death. Safety belts can only work when they are properly positioned on the body. Improper seating positions reduce the effectiveness of safety belts and will even increase the risk of injury and death by moving the safetybelt to critical areas of the body. Improper seating positions also increase the risk of serious injury and death when an airbag deploys and strikes an occupant who is not in the proper seating position. A driver is responsible for the safety of all vehicle occupants and especially for children. Therefore:
> Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect seating position when the vehicle is being used
>A.
The following bulletins list only some sample positions that will increase the risk of serious injury and death. Our hope is that these exampleswill make you more awareof seating positions that are dangerous.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is moving:
-- never stand up in the vehicle -- never stand on the seats -- never kneel on the seats -- never ride with the seatback reclined -- never lie down on the seats -- never lean up against the instrument panel -- never sit on the edge of the seat -- never sit sideways -- never lean out the window -- never put your feet out the window

-- never put your feet on the instrument panel -- never rest your feet on the seat cushion or back
of the seat -- never ride in the footwell -- never ride in the cargo area
AN WARNING
Improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used. -- Always makesure that all vehicle occupants
stay in a proper seating position and are properly restrained whenever the vehicle is being used.
Driver's and front passenger's footwell
Importantsafety instructions
Z\ WARNING
Always makesure that the knee airbag can inflate without interference. Objects between yourself and the airbag can increase the risk of injury in an accident by interfering with the way the airbag deploys or by being pushed into you as the airbag deploys. -- No persons (children) or animals should ride
in the footwell in front of the passenger seat. If the airbag deploys, this can result in serious or fatal injuries. -- No objects of any kind should be carried in the footwell area in front of the driver's or passenger's seat. Bulky objects (shopping bags, for example) can hamper or prevent proper deployment of the airbag. Small objects can be thrownthrough the vehicle if the airbag deploys and injure you or your passengers.

8W0012721BG

251

Driving safety

Pedal area
The pedals must always be free to move and must neverbe interfered with by a floor mat or any other object.
Makesure that all pedals movefreely without interference and that nothing prevents them from returning to their original positions.
Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area free and can be secured with floor mat fasteners.
If a brake circuit fails, increased brake pedal travel is required to bring the vehicle to a full stop.
Z\ WARNING
Pedals that cannot movefreely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious injury. -- Never place any objects in the driver's foot-
well. An object could get into the pedal area and interfere with pedal function. In case of sudden braking or an accident, you would not be able to brake or accelerate! -- Always makesure that nothing can fall or moveinto the driver's footwell.

tions that could interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Z\ WARNING
Pedals that cannot movefreely can result ina loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. -- Always makesure that floor mats are prop-
erly secured.
-- Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured in place to prevent them from slipping and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
-- Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
-- Alwaysproperly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been taken out for cleaning.
-- Always makesure that objects cannotfall into the driver footwell while the vehicleis moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.

1a Coley urlMele Mealy-eed (el
Always use floor mats that can be securely attached to the floor mat fasteners and do not interfere with the free movement ofthe pedals.
> Make sure that the floor mats are properly secured and cannot move and interfere with the
pedals > /A\.
Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and thatare firmly secured so that they cannotslip out of position. You can obtain suitable floor mats from your authorized Audi dealer.
Floor mat fasteners are installed in your Audi.
Floor mats used in your vehicle must be attached to these fasteners. Properly securing the floor matswill prevent them from sliding into posi-

252

8W0012721BG
B42-0526

Safety belts
General information
OEELaeLLaes
Wearing safety belts correctly saveslives!
This chapter explains why safety belts are necessary, how they work and howto adjust and wear them correctly.
> Read all the information that follows and heed all of the instructions and WARNINGS.
ZA WARNING
Not wearing safety belts or wearing them improperly increasesthe risk of serious personal injury and death. -- Safety belts are the single most effective
means available to reduce the risk of serious injury and death in automobile accidents. For your protection and that of your passengers, alwayscorrectly wear safety belts when the vehicle is moving. -- Pregnant women, injured, or physically impaired persons mustalso use safetybelts. Like all vehicle occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear Safety belts. The best way to protect a fetus is to protect the mother - throughout
the entire pregnancy.
Tn taemet)
Your Audi has a total offive seating positions: twoin the front and three in the rear. Each seating position has a safety belt.
ZA WARNING
Not wearing safety belts or wearing them improperly increasesthe risk of serious personal injury and death. -- Never strap more than one person, including
small children, into any belt. It is especially dangerous to place a safety belt over a child sitting on your lap. -- Never let more peopleride in the vehicle than there are safety belts available.

Safety belts
-- Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is properly restrained with a separate safety belt or child restraint.
Safety belt warning light Your vehicle has a warning system for the driver and front seat passenger to remind you about the importanceof buckling-up.
Fig. 216 Safety belt warning light in the instrument cluster - enlarged
Before driving off, always: > Fasten your safety belt and makesure you are
wearing it properly. > Make sure that your passengersalso buckle up
and properly wear their safety belts. > Protect children with a child restraint system
appropriatefor the size and age.
The warning light in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on as a reminder to fasten the safety belts. In addition, you will hear a warning tone for a certain period of time. Fasten your safety belt and make sure that your passengersalso properly put on their safety belts.
ZA WARNING
-- Safety belts are the single most effective means available to reduce the risk of serious injury and death in automobile accidents. For your protection and that of your passengers, always correctly wear safety belts when the vehicle is moving.
-- Failure to pay attention to the warning light that comes on could lead to personal injury.

253

Safety belts
Whyuse safety belts?
eee eee em we ee Ney Frontal crashes create very strong forces for people riding in vehicles.

B4H-0465

(2,000 lbs. or 1,000 kg) or more. At greater speeds, these forces are even higher.
People who do notuse safety belts are also not attached to their vehicle. In a frontal collision they will also keep moving forward at the speed their vehicle was travelling just before the crash. Of course, the laws of physics don't just apply to frontal collisions, they determine what happens in all kinds of accidents and collisions.

What happens to occupants not wearing aa inte
In crashes unbelted occupants cannot stop themselves from flying forward and being injured or killed. Always wear yoursafety belts!

B4H-0466

Fig. 218 The vehicle crashes into the wall
The physical principles are simple. Both the vehicle and the passengers possess energy which varies with vehicle speed and body weight. Engineerscall this energy "kinetic energy."
The higher the speed of the vehicle and the greater the vehicle's weight, the more energy that has to be "absorbed"in the crash.
Vehicle speed is the most significant factor. If the speed doubles from 15 to 30 mph (25 to 50 km/h), the energy increases 4 times!
Because the passengersofthis vehicle are not using safety belts > fig. 217, they will keep moving at the same speed the vehicle was moving just before the crash, until something stops them here, the wall > fig. 218.
The same principles apply to people sitting ina vehicle that is involved in a frontal collision. Even at city speeds of 20 to 30 mph (30 to 50 km/h), the forces acting on the body can reach one ton

Fig. 219 A driver not wearing a safety belt is violently thrown forward

Fig. 220 A rear passenger not wearing a safety belt will fly forward andstrike the driver

Unbelted occupants are not able to resist the tre-

mendous forces of impact by holding tight or

bracing themselves. Without the benefit of safe-

ty restraint systems, the unrestrained occupant

will slam violently into the steering wheel, in-

strument panel, windshield, or whatever else is

in the way > fig. 219. This impact with the vehi-

cle interior has all the energy they had just before

the crash.

254

Safety belts

Never rely on airbags alone for protection. Even when they deploy,airbags provide only additional protection. Airbags are not supposed to deployin all kinds of accidents. Although your Audi is equipped with airbags, all vehicle occupants, including the driver, must wear safety belts correctly in order to minimize the risk of severeinjury or death in a crash.
Remember too,that airbags will deploy only once and that your safety belts are always there to offer protection in those accidents in which airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they havealready deployed. Unbelted occupants can also be thrown out of the vehicle where even more severe or fatal injuries can occur.
It is also important for the rear passengers to wear safety belts correctly. Unbelted passengers in the rear seats endanger not only themselves but also the driver and other passengers => fig. 220. Ina frontal collision they will be
thrown forward violently, where they can hit and
injure the driver and/or front seat passenger.
Safety belts protect
Peoplethinkit's possible to use the hands to brace the body in a minor collision. It's simply not true!

Safety belts attach passengers to the car and give them the benefit of being slowed down more gently or "softly" through the "give" in the safety belts, crush zones and other safety features engineered into today's vehicles. By "absorbing" the kinetic energy over a longer period of time, the safety belts make the forces on the body more "tolerable" and less likely to cause injury.
Although these examplesare based on frontal collision, safety belts can also substantially reduce the risk of injury in other kinds of crashes. So, whether you're on long trip or just going to the corner store, always buckle up and make sure
others do, too. Accident statistics show that vehi-
cle occupants properly wearing safety belts have a lower risk of being injured and a much better chance of surviving an accident. Properly using safety belts also greatly increases the ability of the supplemental airbags to do their job in a collision. For this reason, wearing a safety belt is legally required in most countries including much of the United States and Canada.
Although your Audi is equipped with airbags, you still have to wear the safety belts provided. Front airbags, for example, are activated only in some frontal collisions. The front airbags are not acti-
vated in all frontal collisions, in side and rear col-
lisions, in rollovers or in cases wherethereis not enough deceleration through impact to the front of the vehicle. The same goes for the other airbag systems in your Audi. So, always wear your safety belt and make sure everybodyin your vehicleis properly restrained!

8W0012721BG A B4H-0244

Fig. 221 Driver is correctly restrained in a sudden braking maneuver
Safety belts used properly can make big difference. Safety belts help to keep passengersin their seats, gradually reduce energylevels applied to the bodyin an accident, and help prevent the uncontrolled movement that can causeserious injuries. In addition, safety belts reduce the danger of being thrownout of the vehicle.

Tul teal Py bey
Safety belts must always be correctly positioned across the strongest bonesofyour body.
> Always wear safetybeltsas illustrated and described in this chapter.
> Make sure that your safety belts are always ready for use and are not damaged.
ZA\WARNING
Not wearing safety belts or wearing them improperly increases the risk of serious personal |»

255

Safety belts
injury and death. Safety belts can work only when used correctly. -- Alwaysfasten your safety belts correctly be-
fore driving off and makesure all passengers are correctly restrained. -- For maximum protection, safety belts must always be positioned properly on the body. -- Never strap more than one person, including small children, into any belt. -- Never placea safety belt over a child sitting on your lap. -- Alwayskeep feetin the footwell in front of the seat while the vehicle is being driven. -- Never let any person ride with their feet on the instrumentpanel or sticking out the window or on the seat. -- Never remove safety belt while the vehicle is moving. Doing so will increase your risk of being injured or killed. -- Never wear belts twisted. -- Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eye
glasses, pens, keys, etc., as these may cause injury.
-- Never allow safety belts to become damaged by being caughtin door or seat hard-
ware.
-- Do not wear the shoulder part of the belt under your arm or otherwise out of position.
-- Several layers of heavy clothing mayinterfere with correct positioning of belts and reduce the overall effectiveness of the system.
-- Alwayskeep belt buckles free of anything that may prevent the buckle from latching securely.
-- Never use comfortclips or devices that create slack in the shoulder belt. However, special clips may be required for the proper use of some child restraint systems.
-- Torn or frayed safety belts can tear, and damaged belt hardware can break in an accident. Inspect belts regularly. If webbing, bindings, buckles, or retractors are damaged, have belts replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop.
-- Safety belts that have been worn and loaded in an accident must be replaced with the
256

correct replacementsafety belt by an authorized Audi dealer. Replacement may be necessary even if damage cannotbe clearly seen. Anchoragesthat were loaded mustalso be inspected. -- Never remove, modify, disassemble, or try to repair the safety belts yourself. -- Alwayskeep the belts clean. Dirty belts may not work properly and can impair the function of the inertia reel > table Interior cleaning on page 344.
Safety belts
Fastening safety belts
Safety first - everybody buckle up!
+aa azao
Fig. 222 Belt buckle and tongue onthedriver's seat
To provide maximum protection, safety belts must always be positioned correctly on the wearer's body.
> Adjust the front seat and head restraint properly > page 58, Front seats.
» Make sure the seatback of the rear seat bench is in an upright position and securely latched in place before using the belt > /\.
> Pull the safety belt evenly across the chest and pelvis > fig. 222, > /\.
> Insert the tongue into the correct buckle of your seat until you hear it latch securely.
> Pull on the belt to make sure that it is securely latched in the buckle.
Automatic safety belt retractors Every safety belt is equipped with an automatic belt retractor on the shoulder belt. This feature
locks the belt when the belt is pulled out fast, during hard braking and in an accident. The belt >

Safety belts

mayalso lock when you drive up or down a steep hill or through a sharp curve. During normal driving the belt lets you movefreely.
Safety belt pretensioners
Safety belts with pretensioners help to tighten the safety belt and remove slack when the pretensioners are activated > page 259. The function of the pretensioner is monitored by a warning light > page 23.
Convertible locking retractor
Every safety belt except the one on the driver seat is equipped with a convertible locking retractor that must be used when the safetybelt is used to attach a child safety seat. Be sure to read the important information about this feature => page 296.
ZA\ WARNING
Improperly positioned safety belts can cause serious injury in an accident > page 257, Safety belt position. -- Safety belts offer optimum protection only
when the seatback is upright and belts are properly positioned on the body. -- Always makesure that the rear seat backrest to which the center rear safety belt is attached is securely latched whenever the rear center safety belt is being used. If the backrest is not securely latched, the passenger will move forward with the backrest during
sudden braking, in a sudden maneuver and especially in a crash.
-- Never attach the safety belt to the buckle for another seat. Attaching the belt to the wrong buckle will reduce safety belt effectiveness and can cause serious personal injury.
-- A passenger who is not properly restrained can be seriously injured by the safety belt itself when it moves from the stronger parts of the bodyintocritical areas like the abdo-
men.
-- Alwayslock the convertible locking retractor when you are securing a child safety seat in the vehicle > page 298.

SFL i-1amelie Letha(o)a) Correct belt position is the key to getting maximumprotection from safety belts.
Fig. 223 Safety belt position
Standard features on your vehicle help you adjust the position of the safety belt to match your body size. -- belt height adjustment for the front seats, -- height-adjustable front seats.
Z\ WARNING
Improperly positioned safety belts can cause serious personal injury in an accident. --The shoulder belt should lie as close to the
center of the collar bone as possible and should fit well on the body. Hold the belt above the latch tongue and pull it evenly across the chest so that it sits as low as possible on the pelvis and there is no pressure on the abdomen. The belt should alwaysfit snugly > fig. 223. Pull on the belt to tighten if necessary. -- The lap belt portion of the safety belt must be positioned as low as possible acrosspelvis and never over the abdomen. Make sure the belt lies flat and snug > fig. 223. Pull on the belt to tighten if necessary. --A loose-fitting safety belt can cause serious injuries by shifting its position on your body
from the strong bonesto more vulnerable, soft tissue and cause serious injury.
-- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS and other important information > page 255.

B4H-0751

8W0012721BG

257

Safety belts

Pregnant women mustalso be correctly restrained
The best wayto protectthe fetus is to make sure that expectant mothers always wearsafety belts correctly - throughout the pregnancy.

Ue eet
Unbuckle the safety belt with the red release button only after the vehicle has stopped.
2>an a3ao

B4L-1296

Fig. 224 Safety belt position during pregnancy
To provide maximum protection, safety belts must always be positioned correctly on the wearer's body > page 257.
> Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly > page 58, Front seats.
> Make sure the seatback of the rear seat bench is in an upright position and securely latched in place before using the belt.
> Pull the safety belt evenly across the chest so that it sits as low as possible on the pelvis and there is no pressure on the abdomen
> fig. 224, > A.
> Insert the tongue into the correct buckle of your seat until you hear it latch securely.
> Pull on the belt to make sure that it is securely latched in the buckle.
-Z\WARNING
Improperly positioned safety belts can cause serious personal injury in an accident. -- Expectant mothers must always wear the
lap portion of the safety belt as low as possible across the pelvis and below the rounding of the abdomen. -- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS and other important information => A\ in Fastening safety belts on page 257.

Fig. 225 Releasing the tongue from the buckle
> Push the red release button on the buckle > fig. 225. The belt tongue will spring out of
the buckle > /\.
> Let the belt wind up on the retractor as you guide the belt tongue to its stowed position.
ZAWARNING
Never unfasten safety belt while the vehicleis moving. Doing so will increase your risk of being injured or killed.
Adjusting safety belt height With the aid of the safety belt height adjustment, the three point safety belt strap routing can befitted to the shoulder area, according to bodysize.
tings
The shoulder belt should lie as close to the center of the collar bone as possible and shouldfit well
on the body > A\ in Safety belt position on
page 257.

B4G-0004

258

Safety belts

> Pushthe loop-around fittings up > fig. 226 @),
or
> squeeze together the (@ button, and push the
loop-around fittings down (2).
> Pull the belt to make sure that the upper attachment is properly engaged.
ZA\ WARNING
Always read and heed all WARNINGSand other important information > page 255.
@) Tips
With the front seats, the height adjustment of the seat can also be used to adjust the position of the safety belts.
Improperly worn safety belts
Incorrectly positioned safety belts can cause severe injuries.
Wearing safety belts improperly can cause serious injury or death. Safety belts can only work when theyare correctly positioned on the body. Improper seating positions reduce the effectiveness of safety belts and will even increase the risk of injury and death by moving the safety belt to critical areas of the body. Improper seating positions also increase the risk of serious injury and death when an airbag deploys and strikes an occupant who is not in the correct seating position. A driver is responsible for the safety ofall vehicle occupants and especially for children. Therefore:
> Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in the vehicle while traveling
ofA.
Z\ WARNING
Improperly worn safety beltsincrease the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used. -- Always makesurethat all vehicle occupants
are correctly restrained and stay in a correct seating position whenever the vehicle is being used. -- Always read and heed all WARNINGS and other important information > page 255.

Belt tensioners
WALLA Steamel 4
Reversible safety belt pretensioners
The following functions are available when safety belts with reversible safety belt tensioners are fastened:
--Incertain driving situations, the safety belts may tighten with a reversible tensioning function > page 112.
-- The safety belts may also tighten with this reversible tensioning function in minor collisions.
Pyrotechnic safety belt pretensioners
Seat belts with pyrotechnic safety belt pretensioners are tensioned automatically in severe collisions, depending on the circumstances. This helps to reduce the forward motion of the occu-
pants.
ZA\ WARNING
--It is possible for the pretensioners to deploy incorrectly.
-- Any work on the tensioner system or removal and installation of system components for other repairs must be performed by a qualified workshop.
-- The pyrotechnic system can only provide protection for one collision. If the pyrotechnic pretensioners deploy, the pretensioning system mustbe replaced.
G) Tips
--A fine dust is released when the pyrotechnic safety belt pretensioners deploy. This is normal and is not caused bya fire in the vehicle.
-- The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. A qualified dealership is familiar with these regulations and will be pleased to pass on the information to you.

8W0012721BG

259

Safety belts
Service and disposal of safety belt pretenCTs The safety belt pretensioners are parts of the safety belts on your Audi. Installing, removing, servicing or repairing of belt pretensioners can damage the safety belt system and prevent it from working correctly in a collision. There are some importantthings you have to know to makesure that the effectiveness of the system will not be impaired and that discarded components do notcauseinjury or pollute the environment.
ZX WARNING
Improper care, servicing and repair proce-
dures can increase the risk of personal injury and death by preventing a safety belt pretensioner from activating when neededor activating it unexpectedly: -- The pyrotechnic safety belt pretensioners
can only be activated once. If pyrotechnic safety belt pretensioners have been activated, the system mustbe replaced. -- Never repair, adjust, or change any parts of the safety belt system. -- Safety belt systems including safety belt pretensioners cannot be repaired. Special proceduresare required for removal,installation and disposal of this system. -- For any work on the safety belt system, we strongly recommend that you see your authorized Audi dealer or qualified technician who has an Audi approved repair manual, training and special equipment necessary.
260

Airbag system

Airbag system
Important information
allele MolMICU ra LTT} sitting properly
Airbags are only supplemental restraints. For airbags to do theirjob, occupants must always properly weartheir safety belts and be in a proper seating position.
For your safety and the safety of your passengers, before driving off, always:
> Adjust the driver's seat and steering wheel properly > page 248,
> Adjust the front passenger's seat properly => page 249,
> Wear safety belts properly > page 255, > Always properly use the proper child restraint
to protect children > page 285.
Ina collision, airbags mustinflate within the
blink of an eye and with considerable force. The supplemental airbags can cause injuries if the driver or the front seat passenger is not seated properly. Thereforein order to help the airbag to do its job, it is important, both as a driver and as a passenger to sit properlyat all times.
By keeping room between your body and the steering wheel and the front of the passenger compartment,the airbag can inflate fully and completely and provide supplemental protection in certain frontal collisions > page 248, Correct passenger seating positions. For details on the operation of the seat adjustment controls => page 58.
It's especially important that children are properly restrained > page 285.
There is a lot that the driver and the passengers can and must do to help the individual safety features installed in your Audi work together as a
system.
Proper seating position is important so that the
front airbag on the driver side can do its job. If you have a physical impairment or condition that prevents you from sitting properly on the driver seat with the safety belt properly fastened and

reaching the pedals, or if you have concerns with regard to the function or operation of the Advanced Airbag System, please contact your authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop, or call Audi Customer Relations at 1-800-822-2834 for possible modifications to your vehicle.
When the airbag system deploys, a gas generator will fill the airbags, break open the padded covers, and inflate between the steering wheel and the driver and between the instrument panel and the front passenger. The airbags will deflate immediately after deployment so that the front occupants can see through the windshield again without interruption.
All of this takes place in the blink of an eye, so fast that many people don't even realize that the airbags have deployed. The airbags also inflate with a great deal of force and nothing should be in their way when they deploy. Front airbags in combination with properly worn safety belts slow downand limit the occupant's forward movement. Together they help to prevent the driver and front seat passenger from hitting parts of the inside of the vehicle while reducing the forces acting on the occupant during the crash. In this way they help to reducethe risk ofinjury to the head and upper body in the crash. Airbags do not protect the arms or the lower parts of the body.
Both front airbags will notinflatein all frontal collisions. The triggering of the airbag system depends on the vehicle deceleration rate caused by the collision and registered by the electronic control unit. If this rate is below the reference value programmed into the control unit, the airbags will not be triggered, even though the car may be badly damaged as a result of the collision. Vehicle damage, repair costs or even the lack of vehicle damage is not necessarily an indication of whether an airbag should inflate or not.
Since the circumstances will vary considerably
between one collision and another,it is not possi-
ble to define a range of vehicle speeds that will cover every possible kind and angle of impact that will always trigger the airbags. Important factors include, for example, the nature (hard or soft) of the object which the car hits, the angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc. The front airbags will >

8W0012721BG

261

Airbag system

also notinflate in side or rear collisions, or in roll-
overs.
Always remember: Airbags will deploy only once, and only in certain kinds ofcollisions. Your safety belts are alwaysthere to offer protection in those situations in which airbags are not supposed to deploy, or when they have already deployed; for example, when your vehicle strikes or is struck by another vehicle after the first collision.
This is just one of the reasons whyan airbag is a supplementary restraint and is not a substitute for a safety belt. The airbag system works most effectively when used with the safety belts. Therefore, always properly wear your safety belts => page 253.
ZA WARNING
Sitting too close to the steering wheel or instrumentpanel will decrease the effectiveness of the airbags and will increase the risk of personal injury in a collision. -- Never sit closer than 10 inches (25 cm) to
the steering wheel or instrument panel. -- If you cannot sit more than 10 inches
(25 cm) from the steering wheel, investi-
gate whether adaptive equipment may be available to help you reach the pedals and increase your seating distance from the steering wheel. -- All vehicle occupants and especially children mustbe restrained properly whenever riding in a vehicle. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child could be injured by striking the interior or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or impact. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child is also at greater risk of injury or death through contact with an inflating airbag. -- If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way,
your risk of injury is much higher.
-- You will also receive serious injuries and could even be killed if you are up against the airbag or too close to it when it inflates even with an Advanced Airbag.

--To reducethe risk of injury when an airbag inflates, always wear safety belts properly => page 256, Safety belts.
-- Always makecertain that children age 12 or younger alwaysride in the rear seat. If children are not properly restrained, they may be severely injured or killed when an airbag inflates.
-- Never let children ride unrestrained or improperly restrained in the vehicle. Adjust the
front seats properly.
-- Never ride with the backrest reclined. -- Alwayssit as far as possible from the steer-
ing wheel or the instrument panel => page 248.
-- Alwayssit upright with your back against the backrest of your seat.
-- Never place your feet on the instrument panel or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat to help prevent serious injuries to the legs and hips if the airbag inflates.
-- Never recline the front passenger's seat to transport objects. Items can also moveinto the area of the side airbag or the front airbag during braking or in a sudden maneuver. Objects near the airbags can become projectiles and cause injury when an airbag inflates.
ZA WARNING
Airbags that have deployed in a crash must be replaced. -- Use only original equipmentairbags ap-
proved by Audi and installed by a trained technician who has the necessary tools and diagnostic equipment to properly replace any airbag in your vehicle and assure system effectiveness ina crash. -- Never permit salvaged or recycled airbags to be installed in your vehicle.

Child restraints on the front seat - some aa) aeamie men ale

> Be sure to read the important information and

heed the WARNINGS for important details

262

Airbag system

about children and Advanced Airbags => page 285.
Even though your vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Airbag System, makecertain that all children, especially those 12 years and younger,always ride in the back seat properly restrained for their age and size. The airbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a child in a forward-facing child safety seat. It can be a very dangerous place for an infant or a child in a rearward-facing seat.
The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has been certified to comply with the requirements of United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time your vehicle was manufactured. According to requirements, the front Advanced Airbag System on the passenger side has been certified for "suppression"for infants of about 12 month old and younger and for "lowrisk deployment"for children aged 3 to 6 years old(as defined in the standard).
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF 9;light in the headliner tells you when the front Advanced Airbag on the passenger side has been turned off by the electronic control unit.
Each time you turn on the ignition, the PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFF #¥; ON @ light will come on
for a few seconds and:
-- PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF 3; will come on if the front passenger seat is not occupied
-- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3; will come on if
the electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system for the front passenger seat equals the combined capacitance of an infant up to about one year of age and one of the rearward-facing or forwardfacing child restraints listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified. For a listing of the child restraints that were used to certify your vehicle's compliance with the Safety Standard => page 287.

-- PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF 3; will come on if there is a small child or child restraint on the
front passenger seat -- PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ will come on if the
front passenger seat is occupied by an adult as registered by the capacitive passenger detection system > page 273, Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System.
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF %; light comes on when electrical capacitance registered on the front passenger seat is equal to or less than the combined capacitance of a typical 1 year-oldinfant and one of the rearward-facing or forwardfacing child restraints listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified.
If the total electrical capacitance registered on the front passenger seat is more than that of a typical 1 year-old child but less than the weight of a small adult, the front airbag on the passenger side can deploy (the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %;light does not come on).
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF %;light does not come on, the front airbag on the passenger side has not been turned off by the electronic control unit and can deployif the control unit
senses an impact that meets the conditions stored in its memory.
For example, the airbag may deployif:
--asmall child that is heavier than a typical 1 year-old child is on the front passenger seat (regardless of whether the childis in one of the child safety seats listed > page 287), or
--a child who has outgrown child restraints is on the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger airbag is turned off, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3; light comes on in
the headliner and stays on.
If the front passenger airbag deploys, the Federal Standard requires the airbag to meet the "low risk" deployment criteria to reduce the risk of injury through interaction with the airbag. "Low risk" deployment occurs in those crashes that take place at lower decelerations as defined in >

8W0012721BG

263

Airbag system
the electronic control unit > page 273, PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFF $#; ON ® light.
Always remember, a child safety seat or infant carrier installed on the front seat may be struck and knocked out of position by the rapidly inflating passenger's airbag in a frontal collision. The airbag could greatly reduce the effectiveness of the child restraint and even seriously injure the child during inflation.
For this reason, and because the back seat is the safest place for children - when properly restrained according to their age and size - we strongly recommend that children alwayssit in the back seat > page 285,Child safety.
ZA WARNING
A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat installed on the front passenger seatwill be seriously injured and can bekilled if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. -- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety
seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, door
or roof. -- Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats
on the rear seat. -- If you mustinstall a rearward facing child
safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the
PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF 3%; light does not
come on and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer. -- Forward-facing child safety seats installed on the front passenger's seat may interfere with the deployment of the airbag and cause serious personal injury to the child.
ZA WARNING
If, in exceptional circumstances, you mustin-
stall a forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger's seat:
-- Always makesure the forward-facing seat has been designed and certified by its manu-
264

facturer for use on front seat with a passenger front and side airbag. -- Never put the forward-facing child restraint
up againstor very near the instrument pan-
el. -- Always movethe front passenger seat to the
highest position in the up and down adjustment range and moveit back to the rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible, before installing the forwardfacing child restraint. -- Always makesure that the safety belt upper anchorage is behind the child restraint and not next to or in front of the child restraint so that the safety belt will be properly positioned. -- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 7%; light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on.
ZA\ WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury, make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF 3, light will be displayed whenever a child restraint is installed on the front passenger seat and the ignition is switched on.
-- If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF %;light does notstay on, perform the checks described page 273, Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System.
-- Takethe child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #¥;light does notstay on.
-- Have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer immediately.
-- Alwayscarefully follow instructions from child restraint manufacturers when installing child restraints.
Z\ WARNING
If, in exceptional circumstances, you mustinstall a forward or rearward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat:

Airbag system

B8W-0054

-- Improper installation ofchild restraints can reduce their effectiveness or even prevent them from providing any protection.
-- An improperly installed child restraint can interfere with the airbag as it deploys and seriously injure or even kill the child - even with an Advanced Airbag System.
-- Alwayscarefully follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child safety seator carrier.
-- Always makesure that there is nothing on the front passenger seat that will cause the capacitive passenger detection system in the seat to signal to the Airbag System that the seat is occupied by a person when it is not, or to signal that it is occupied by someone who is heavier than the person actually sitting on the seat. The presence of additional objects could cause the passenger front airbag to be turned on when it should
be off, or could cause the airbag to work ina
waythatis different from the wayit would have worked without the object on the seat.
Front airbags
pyTd et yeCelaMeMila ligey- lel)
The airbag system can provide supplemental protection to properly restrained front seat occu-
pants.
ao8Ss =a2a
Fig. 227 Location ofdriver airbag: in steering wheel

Fig. 228 Location of front passenger's airbag: in the instrument panel

Your vehicle is equipped with an "Advanced Airbag System" in compliance with United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time your vehicle was manufactured.

The airbag for the driver is in the steering wheel hub > fig. 227 and the airbag for the front pas-
senger is in the instrument panel > fig. 228. The general location of the airbags is marked "AIRBAG".

Thereis a lot you need to know about the airbags in your vehicle. We urge you to read the detailed information about airbags, safety belts and child safety in this and the other chapters that make up the owner's literature. Please be sure to heed the WARNINGS - they are extremely important for your safety and the safety of your passengers,
especially infants and small children.

Z\WARNING

Never rely on airbags alone for protection.

-- Even when they deploy, airbags provide only

supplemental protection.

-- Airbag work mosteffectively when used

with properly worn safety belts.

-- Therefore, always wear your safety belts and

make sure that everybodyin your vehicleis

properly restrained.

-- Alwayshold the steering wheel with both

hands on the outside of the steering wheel

rim at the 9:00 o'clock and 3:00 o'clock po-

sitions to help reduce the risk of personal in-

jury if the driver's airbag inflates.

8W0012721BG

265

Airbag system
-- Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position or with your hands anywhereinside the steering wheel or on the steering wheel hub. Holding the steering wheel the wrong wayincreases the risk of
severe injury to the arms, hands, and head if
the driver airbag deploys.
ZA\ WARNING
Objects between you and the airbag will increase the risk of injury in a crash byinterfering with the way the airbag unfolds and/or by being pushedinto you as the airbag inflates. -- Always makesure nothing is in the frontair-
bag deploymentzone that could be struck by the airbag when itinflates. -- Objects in the zone of a deploying airbag can become projectiles when the airbag deploys and causeserious personal injury. -- Never hold things in your hands or on your lap when the vehicleis in use.
-- Never place accessories or other objects
(such as cup holders, telephone brackets,
note pads, navigation systems,or things that are large, heavy, or bulky) on the doors; never attach them to the doorsor the windshield; never place them over or near or attach them to the area marked ,,AIRBAG" on the steering wheel, instrument panel or the
seat backrests; never place them between
these areas and you or any other person in the vehicle. -- Never attach objects to the windshield above the passenger front airbag, such as accessory GPS navigation units or music players. Such objects could cause serious injury in a collision, especially when the airbags inflate.
-- Never recline the front passenger seat to transport objects. Items can also moveinto
the deployment area of the side airbags or the front airbag during breaking or in a sudden maneuver. Objects near the airbags can fly dangerously through the passenger compartment and cause injury, particularly when the seat is reclined and the airbags inflate.

ZA WARNING
A person on the front passenger seat, espe-
cially infants and small children, will receive
serious injuries and can even be killed by being too close to the airbag when it inflates.
-- Although the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag if an infant or a small child is on the front passenger seat, nobody can absolutely guarantee that deployment un-
der these special conditions is impossible in all conceivable situations that may happen during the useful life of your vehicle.
-- The Advanced Airbag System can deploy in accordance withthe ,,low risk" option for 3and 6-year-old children under the U.S. Federal Standard if a child with electrical capacitance greater than the combined capacitance of a typical one-year old infant restrained in one of the forward facing or rearward-facing child seats with which your vehicle was certified is on the front passenger seat and the other conditions for airbag deployment are met.
-- Accident statistics have shownthat children are generally safer in the rear seat area than in the front seating position.
-- For their ownsafety,all children, especially 12 years and younger, should alwaysride in the back properly restrained for their age and size.

Advancedfront airbag system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front Advanced Airbag System in compliance with United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
208, as well as Canada Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time your vehicle was manufactured.

The front Advanced Airbag System supplements

the safety belts to provide additional protection

for the driver's and front passenger's heads and

upper bodiesin frontal crashes. The airbags in-

flate only in frontal impacts when the vehicle de-

celeration is high enough.

266

Airbag system

The front Advanced Airbag System for the front seat occupantsis not a substitute for your safety belts. Rather, it is part of the overall occupant restraint system in your vehicle. Always remember that the airbag system can only help to protect you, if you are sitting upright, wearing your safety belt and wearing it properly. This is why you and your passengers must always be properly restrained, not just because the law requires you to be.
The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has been certified to meet the "low risk" requirementsfor 3 and 6 year-old children on the passenger side and very small adults on the driver side. The low risk deployment criteria are intended to help reduce the risk of injury through interaction with the front airbag that can occur,for example, by being too close to the steering wheel and instrument panel when the airbag inflates.
In addition, the system has been certified to
comply with the "suppression" requirements of the Safety Standard, to turn off the front airbag for infants 12 months old and younger who are restrained on the front passenger seat in child restraints that are listed in the Standard = page 287, Child restraints and AdvancedAirbags.
"Suppression" requires the front airbag on the passenger side to be turned off if:
--a child up to about one year of age is restrained on the front passenger seat in one ofthe rearfacing or forward-facing infant restraintslisted in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified. For a listing of the child restraints that were used to certify your vehicle's compliance with the US Safety Standard => page 287,
-- When a person is detected on the front passenger seat that has an electrical capacitance that is more than the total electrical capacitance of a child that is about 1 year old restrained in one of the rear-facing or forward-facing infant restraints (listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified), the front

airbag on the passenger side may or may not deploy.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %;light comes on when the electronic control unit detects a total electrical capacitance on the front passenger seat that requires the front airbag to be turnedoff. If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF 3; light does not
come on, the front airbag on the passenger side
has not been turned off by the control unit and can deployif the control unit senses an impact that meets the conditions stored in its memory.

If the total electrical capacitance registered on
the front passenger seat is more than thatof a typical 1 year-old, but less than the weight of a
small adult, the front airbag on the passenger side may deploy (the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
8%; light does not come on).

For example, the airbag may deployif:

--asmall child that is heavier than a typical 1 year-old child is on the front passenger seat (regardless of whether the child is in one of the child safety seatslisted > page 287),
--a child who has outgrown child restraints is on the front passenger seat.

If the front passenger airbag is turned off, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %;light in the headliner will come on and stay on.

If the front passenger airbag deploys, the Federal Standard requires the airbag to meet the "low risk" deployment criteria to help reduce the risk
of injury through interaction with the airbag.
"Low risk" deployment occurs in those crashes that take place at lower decelerations as defined in the electronic control unit. > page 273

Always remember: Even though your vehicle is equipped with Advanced Airbags, the safest place for children is properly restrained on the back seat. Please be sure to read the important information in the sections that follow and be sure to heed all of the WARNINGS.

ZXWARNING

To reduce the risk of injury when an airbag in-

flates, always wear safety belts properly.

8W0012721BG

267

Airbag system
-- If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, your risk of injury is much higher.
-- You will also receive serious injuries and could even be killed if you are up against the airbag or too close to it when it inflates even with an Advanced Airbag > page 261.
Z\WARNING
A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat installed on the front passenger seatwill be seriously injured and can bekilled if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. -- Although the Advanced Airbag System in
your vehicle is designed to turn off the front airbag when a rearward-facing child restraint has been installed on the front passenger seat, nobody can absolutely guarantee that deployment is impossible in all conceivable situations that may happen during the useful life of your vehicle. -- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door, or roof. -- Alwaysinstall rearward-facing child re-
straints on the rear seat.
-- If you mustinstall a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer.
ZA WARNING
If, in exceptional circumstances, you mustin-
stall a forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger's seat:
-- Always makesure the forward-facing seat has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on front seat with a passenger front and side airbag.

-- Never put the forward-facing child restraint
up againstor very near the instrument pan-
ele -- Always movethe front passenger seat to the
highest position in the up and down adjustment range and moveit back to the rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible, before installing the forwardfacing child restraint. -- Always makesure that the safety belt upper anchorage is behind the child restraint and not next to or in front of the child restraint so that the safety belt will be properly positioned. -- Always makesure that there is nothing on the front passenger seat that will cause the capacitive passenger detection system in the seat to signal to the Airbag System that the seat is occupied by a person when itis not, or to signal that it is occupied by someone who is heavier than the person actually sitting on the seat. The presence of additional objects could cause the passenger front airbag to be turned on when it should
be off, or could cause the airbag to work ina
waythatis different from the wayit would have worked without the object on the seat. -- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 7%; light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on.
Advanced Airbag System components
The front passenger seat in your vehicle has a lot of very important parts of the Advanced Airbag System in it. These parts include the capacitive passenger detection system, wiring, brackets, and more. The control unit monitors the system on the front passenger seat when the ignition is switched on and turns the airbag indicator light on when a malfunction in the one of the system componentsis detected > page 273. Because the
front passenger seat contains important parts of the Advanced Airbag System, you must take care
to prevent it from being damaged. Damage to >

268

the seat may prevent the Advanced Airbag System for the front passenger seat from doing its job ina crash.
The front Advanced Airbag System consists of the following:
-- Crash sensorsin the front of the vehicle that measurevehicle acceleration/deceleration to provide information to the Advanced Airbag System about the severity of the crash.
-- An electronic control unit, with integrated
crash sensorsfor front and side impacts. The control unit "decides" whether tofire the front airbags based on the information received from the crash sensors. The control unit also "decides" whether the safety belt pretensioners should be activated. -- An Advanced Airbag with gas generator and control valve for the driver inside the steering wheel hub. -- An Advanced Airbag with gas generator and control valve inside the instrument panel for the front passenger. -- A capacitive passenger detection system underneath the front passenger seat cover. This system measures the electrical capacitance of the person in the seat. The information registered is sent continuously to the electronic control unit to regulate deployment ofthe front Advanced Airbag on the passenger side. -- An airbag monitoring system and indicator light ka in the instrument cluster. --Asensor in each front seat registers the distance between the respective seat and the steering wheel or instrument panel. The information registered is sent continuously to the electronic control unit to regulate deployment of the front Advanced Airbags.
-- The PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF #; ON @ light
comes on in the headliner > page 273, fig. 230 and tells you the status of the Advanced Airbag on the passenger side. --Asensor in the safety belt latch for the driver and for the front seat passenger that senses whether that safety belt is latched or not and transmits this information to the electronic control unit.

Airbag system
ZA WARNING
Damage to the front passenger seat can pre-
vent the front airbag from working properly. -- Improper repair or disassembly of the front
passenger and driver seat will prevent the Advanced Airbag System from functioning properly. -- Repairs to the front passenger seat must be performed by qualified and properly trained workshop personnel. -- Never remove the front passenger or driver seat from the vehicle.
-- Never remove the upholstery from the front
Passenger Seat.
-- Never disassemble or remove parts from the seat or disconnect wires from it.
-- Never carry sharp objects in your pockets or put them on the seat. The capacitive passenger detection mat in the front passenger seat will not function properlyif it is punctured.
-- Never carry things on your lap or carry objects on the front passenger seat. Such objects can influence the capacitance registered by the capacitive passenger detection system, so that incorrect information is provided to the airbag control unit.
-- Never store items under the front passenger seat. Parts of the Advanced Airbag System under the passenger seat could be damaged, preventing them and the airbag system from working properly.
-- Never place seat covers or replacement upholstery that have not been specifically approved by Audi on the front seats.
-- Seat covers can prevent the Advanced Airbag System from recognizing child restraints or occupants on the front passenger seat and prevent the side airbag in the seat backrest from deploying properly.
-- If a seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise addedto the front passenger seat, never install any child restraint system on this seat.
-- Never use cushions,pillows, blankets, or
similar items on the front passenger seat. The additional layers prevent the capacitive

8W0012721BG

269

Airbag system
passenger detection system from accurately
measuring the capacitance of the child safety seat and/or the person on the seat and thus keep the Advanced Airbag System from
working properly.
-- Never place or use anyelectrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats) on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12-volt socketor the cigarette lighter socket. Such devices can influence the capacitance registered by the capacitive passenger detection system, so that incorrect information is provided to the airbag control unit.
-- If you mustuse a child restraint on the front passenger seat and the child restraint manufacturer's instructions require the use of a
towel, foam cushion or something else to properly position the child restraint, make
certain that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ¥; light comeson and stays on whenever the child restraint is installed on the front
Passenger seat.
-- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 7%; light does not come on and stay on, immediately install child restraint in a rear seating position and havethe airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer.
A WARNING ~
If the front passenger seat gets wet,dry it immediately. -- If liquid soaksinto the front passenger seat,
this can keep the airbag system from working properly and may, for instance, deactivate the passenger frontal airbag. If this happens, the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF #¥, light will come on and stay on together with the airbag indicator light ka in the instrument cluster. -- If liquid is pooled on the seat, but has not soakedin, this may also keep the airbag system from working properly and cause the passenger frontal airbag to be enabled (turned on), even though thereis a properly installed child restraint system on the seat. Wet towels or other wet things on the seat
270

cushion can have the same effect. If the front passenger frontal airbag is turned on,
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; light will turn off.
How the Advanced Airbag System componentswork together
The front Advanced Airbag System and the side airbags supplement the protection offered by the front three-point safety belts and the adjustable head restraints to help reduce the risk of injury in a wide range of accident and crash situations. Be sure to read the important information about safety and heed the WARNINGS in this chapter.
Deployment of the Advanced Airbag System and the activation of the safety belt pretensioners depend on the deceleration measured by the crash sensors and registered by the electronic control unit. Crash severity depends on speed and deceleration as well as the mass and stiffness of the vehicle or object involved in the crash.
On the passenger side, regardless of safety belt use, the front passenger frontal airbag will be turned off if the electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system on the front passenger seat is less than the amount programmed in the electronic control unit. The front passenger frontal airbag will also be turned off if the capacitance measured by the system for the front passenger seat equals that of an infant of about one year of age in one ofthe child seats that was used to certify the Advanced Airbag System under Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #;light comeson and stays on to tell you when the front Advanced Airbag System on the passenger side has been turned off > page 273.
Z\ WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury when an airbag inflates, always wear safety belts properly. -- If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-
ting sidewaysor out of position in any way,
your risk of injury is much higher.
-- You will also receive serious injuries and could even be killed if you are up against the |>

Airbag system

airbag or too close to it when it inflateseven with an Advanced Airbag > page 261.
TMLee MoM dahaiam celta airbags
Fig. 229 Inflated front airbags
Safety belts are important to help keep front seat occupantsin the proper seated position so that airbags can unfold properly and provide supplemental protection in a frontal collision. The front airbags are designed to provide additional protection for the chest and face of the driver and the front seat passenger when: -- safety belts are worn properly -- the seats have been positioned so that the oc-
cupant is properly seated as far as possible from the airbag -- and the head restraints have been properly adjusted Because airbags inflate in the blink of an eye with great force, things you have on your lap or have placed on the seat could become dangerous projectiles, and be pushedinto you if the airbag inflates. When an airbag deploys,fine dust is released. This is normal and is not caused bya fire in the vehicle. This dust is made up mostly of a powder used to lubricate the airbags as they deploy.It could irritate skin. It is important to remember that while the supplemental airbag system is designed to reduce
the likelihood of serious injuries, other injuries, for example swelling, bruising and minor abra-
sions, can also happen when airbags inflate. Airbags do not protect the arms or the lower parts

B4L-1300

of the body. Front airbags supplement the threepoint safety belts only in some frontal collisions in which the vehicle deceleration is high enough to deploy the airbags.
Front airbags will not deploy:
-- if the ignition is switched off when a crash occurs
-- in side collisions --in rear-end collisions -- in rollovers -- when the crash deceleration measured by the
airbag system is less than the minimum threshold needed for airbag deployment as registered by the electronic control unit
The front passenger airbag also will not deploy:
--when the front passenger seat is not occupied, -- when the electrical capacitance measured by
the capacitive passenger detection system for the front passenger seat indicates that the passenger side frontal airbag must be switched off by the electronic control unit (the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %;light > page 273 comes on and stays on).
ZAWARNING
Sitting in the wrong position can increase the risk of serious injury in crashes. --To reducethe risk of injury when the airbags
inflate, the driver and passengers must alwayssit in an upright position, must not lean againstor place any part of their body too close to the area wherethe airbags are located. -- Occupants who are unbelted, out ofposition or too close to the airbag can beseriously injured by an airbag as it unfolds with great force in the blink of an eye > page 262.
Z\WARNING
A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat installed on the front passenger seatwill be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System.

8W0012721BG

271

Airbag system
-- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, door
or roof. -- Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats
on the rear seat. -- If you mustinstall a rearward-facing child
safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the
PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF%; light does not
come on and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer.
ZA WARNING
Objects between you and the airbag will increase the risk of injury in a crash by interfering with the waythe airbag unfolds or by being pushed into you as the airbag inflates. -- Never hold things in your hands or on your
lap when the vehicleis in use. -- Never transport items on or in the area of
the front passenger seat. Objects could moveinto the area of the front airbags during braking or other sudden maneuvers and become dangerous projectiles that can cause serious personal injury if the airbags inflate. -- Never place or attach accessories or other objects (such as cupholders, telephone brackets, large, heavy or bulky objects) on the doors, over or near the area marked
"AIRBAG"on the steering wheel, instrument panel, seat backrests or between those
areas and yourself. These objects could cause injury in a crash, especially when the airbags inflate. -- Never recline the front passenger's seat to transport objects. Items can also moveinto the area of the side airbag or the front airbag during braking or in a sudden maneuver. Objects near the airbags can become projectiles and causeinjury, particularly when the seat is reclined. -- Never place or transport objects on the front passenger seat. Objects on the front passen-
272

ger seat could cause the capacitive sensor in the seat to signal to airbag system that the seat is occupied by a person when it in fact is
not, or that the person on the seatis heavier
than he or she actually is. The change in electric capacitance because of such objects can cause the passenger front airbag to be turned on when it should be off, or can cause the airbag to work in a waythatis different from the way it would have worked without objects on the seat. -- Always makesure that there is nothing on the front passenger seat that will cause the capacitive passenger detection system in the seat to signal to the Airbag System that the seat is occupied by a person when itis not, or to signal that it is occupied by someone who is heavier than the person actually sitting on the seat. The presence of an object could cause the passenger front airbag to be turned on when it shouldbe off, or could cause the airbag to work in a way that is different from the wayit would have worked without the object on the seat.
Z\ WARNING
The fine dust created when airbags deploy can cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing conditions.
--To reduce the risk of breathing problems, those with asthma or other respiratory conditions should getfresh air right away by getting out of the vehicle or opening windowsor doors.
-- If you are in a collision in which airbags deploy, wash your hands and face with mild soap and water before eating.
-- Be careful not to get the dust into your eyes,
or into any cuts or scratches.
-- If the residue should get into your eyes, flush them with water.

Airbag system

Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System
`oring indicator light
Two separateindicators monitor the function of the AdvancedAirbag System: the 2] light and
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF#; ON @ light.
The Advanced Airbag System as well as the side airbags and side curtain airbags with ejection mitigation features (including the electronic control unit, sensors and system wiring) are all monitored continuously to make sure that they are functioning properly whenever the ignition is on. Every time you turn on the ignition, the airbag system indicator light ka will come on fora few seconds (function check).
The system must be inspected when the indicator light Ba:
-- does not come on when the ignition is switched on
-- does not go out a few seconds after you have switched on the ignition, or
-- comes on while driving
If an airbag system malfunction is detected, the indicator light will come on to serve as a constant reminder to have the system inspected immediately.
If a malfunction occurs that turns the front airbag on the passenger side off, the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF %; light will come on and stay on whenever the ignition is on.
Z\ WARNING
An airbag system that is not functioning properly cannot provide supplemental protection in a frontal crash. - If the airbag indicator light > page 23
comes when the vehicle is being used, have the system inspected immediately by your
authorized Audi dealer. It is possible that the airbag will inflate when it is not supposed to, or will not inflate when it should.

PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF 2%; ON light
Fig. 230 Section from the headliner: PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF 2%, ON @ light
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF #¥; ON @ light is located in the headliner > fig. 230. The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF 3;light will come on and stay on to tell you when the front Advanced Airbag on the passenger side has been turned off by the electronic control unit. If the
bulb for the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3¥; ON @
light burns out, the airbag indicator light ka will come on to signal a malfunction in the Advanced Airbag System. Although the burned-out bulb will not change the waythe front passenger's frontal airbag works, it will no longer be possible
to use the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF #7; ON ®
light to make sure that the airbag on/off status is correct for the occupant on the front passenger seat. Have the airbag system inspected immediately by your authorized Audi dealer.
The PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF 3; ON @ light
will blink for about 5 seconds when: -- the capacitive passenger detection system,
which switches the front seat passenger's fron-
tal Advanced Airbag on and off, detects a change in the status of the front passenger seat.
As soon as the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF #¥; ON ® light stops blinking, always makesure that the airbag status (on or off) as shown bythe light is proper for the age, size and electrical capacitance of the person occupying the front passenger seat. Always makesure that the safety belt for the front passenger seat is properly fastened.
The PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF 3; / PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ lightwill show the status of the >

8W0012721BG

273

Airbag system
front seat passenger's frontal Advanced Airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF %;light:
-- will come on if the front passenger seat is not occupied;
-- will come on if the electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system for the front passenger seat equals the combined capacitance of an infant up to about
one year of age and one of the rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraints listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified; For a listing of the child restraints that were used to certify your vehicle's compliance with the U.S. Safety Standard => page 287. -- will go out if the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult as registered by the capacitive
passenger detection system.
-- The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF #¥;light must come on and stay on if the ignition is on and...
--a-car bed has been installed on the front pas-
senger seat, or
--arearward-facing child restraint has been installed on the front passenger seat, or
--a forward-facing child restraint has been installed on the front passenger seat,
--and if the electrical capacitance registered on the front passenger seat is equal to or less than the combined capacitance ofa typical 1 yearold infant and one of the rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraints listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certified.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front airbag will not deploy, and the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF 3; light will stay on.
Never install a rearward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, the safest place for a child in any kind of child restraint is at one of the seating positions on the rear seat > page 262, Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know and > page 285, Child safe-
ty.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF 3;light
comes on...
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF #;light comes on when one of the conditions listed aboveis met, be sure to check the light regularly to make certain that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3; light stays on continuously whenever the ignition is on. If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF %;light does not appear on and does notstay on all the time, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and
-- reactivate the system by turning the ignition off for more than 4 seconds and then turning it on
again;
-- remove and reinstall the child restraint. Make sure that the child restraint is properly installed and that the safety belt for the front passenger seat has been correctly routed through the child restraint as described in the child restraint manufacturer's instructions;
-- makesure that the convertible locking retractor on the safety belt for the front passenger seat has been activated and that the safety belt has been pulled tight.
-- make sure that no electrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats)is placed or used on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12-volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket;
-- makesure that no seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise added to the front passenger seat;
-- makesure that nothing can interfere with the safety belt buckles and that they are not obstructed;
-- makesure that there are no wet objects (such as a wet towel) and no water or other liquids on the front passenger seat cushion.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF &, light still does not come on...
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF 3%;light still does not come on and doesnotstay on continu-
ously (when the ignition is switched on),
-- take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear >

274

seat positions. Have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer immediately. -- movethe child to a rear seat position and make sure that the child is properly restrained ina child restraint that is appropriate for its size and age.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3; light should NOT come on...
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF 3%;light should NOT come on when the ignition is on and an adult
is sitting in a proper seating position on the front
passenger seat. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ¥; light comeson and stays on while driving, un-
der these circumstances, make sure that:
-- the adult on the front passenger seat is properly seated on the center of the seat cushion with his or her back up against the backrest and the
backrest is not reclined,
--the adult is not taking weight off the seat by holding on to the passenger assist handle above the front passenger door or supporting their weight on the armrest,
-- the safety belt is being properly worn and that there is not a lot of slack in the safety belt webbing,
-- there are no aftermarket seat covers or cush-
ions or other things (such as blankets) on the
front passenger seat that might cause the capacitive passenger detection system to miscalculate electrical capacitance.
Macatawa) monitoring the Advanced Airbag System
ZA WARNING
-- If the status of the Advanced Airbag System has changed while the vehicle is moving, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; ON ® light blinks for about 5 seconds to catch the driver's attention. If this happens, always stop as soon as it is safe to do so and check the steps described above.
-- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %;light does not go off when an adult who is not very small is sitting on the front passenger seat after taking the steps described above,

Airbag system
make sure the adult is properly seated and restrained at one of the rear seating positions. Have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer before trans-
porting anyone on the front passenger seat.
ZA WARNING
An airbag system that is not functioning properly cannot provide supplemental protection in a frontal crash. -- If the airbag indicator light > page 23
comes when the vehicle is being used, have
the system inspected immediately by your authorized Audi dealer. It is possible that the airbag will inflate when it is not supposed to, or will not inflate when it should.
ZA\ WARNING
If the front airbag inflates, a child without a
child restraint, or in a rearward-facing child
safety seat, or in a forward-facing child restraint that has not been properly installed will be seriously injured and can be killed. -- Even though your vehicle is equipped with
an Advanced Airbag System, makecertain that all children, especially 12 years and younger, alwaysride on the back seat properly restrained for their age and size. -- Alwaysinstall forwardor rear-facing child safety seats on the rear seat - even with an Advanced Airbag System. -- If you mustinstall a rearward-facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the
PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF#;light does not
appear and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and havethe airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer.
--If, in exceptional circumstances, you must
install a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, always move the seat into its rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible. The backrest mustbe adjusted to an upright position. Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG

8W0012721BG

275

Airbag system
OFF $¥; light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on.
ZA WARNING
-- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %;light
does not go out when an adultis sitting on the front passenger seat after taking the steps described above, makesure the adult is properly seated and restrained at one of
the rear seating positions. -- Have the airbag system inspected by your
authorized Audi dealer before transporting anyone on the front passenger seat.
G) Tips
If the capacitive passenger detection system determines that the front passenger seat is empty, the frontal airbag on the passenger side will be turned off, and the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF ;light will stay on.
Repair, care and disposal of the airbags
Parts of the airbag system are installed at many different places on your Audi. Installing, removing, servicing or repairing a part in an area of the vehicle can damage a partof an airbag system and prevent that system from working properly in a collision.
There are some important things you have to know to makesure that the effectiveness of the system will not be impaired and that discarded components do notcauseinjury or pollute the environment.
ZA\ WARNING
Improper care, servicing and repair procedures can increase the risk of personal injury and death by preventing an airbag from deploying when needed or deploying an airbag unexpectedly: -- Never cover, obstruct, or change the steer-
ing wheel horn pad or airbag cover or the instrument panel or modify them in any way. -- Never attach any objects such as cupholders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
276

-- For cleaning the horn pad or instrument panel, use only a soft, dry cloth or one moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could damage the airbag cover or change the stiffness or strength of the material so that the airbag cannot deploy and protect properly.
-- Never repair, adjust, or change anyparts of the airbag system.
-- All work on the steering wheel, instrument
panel, front seatsor electrical system (including the installation of audio equipment,
cellular telephones and CB radios,etc.) must be performed by a qualified technician who has the training and special equipment
necessary. -- For any work on the airbag system, we
strongly recommend that you see your authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop.
-- Never modify the front bumper or parts of the vehicle body.
-- Always makesurethat the side airbag can inflate without interference:
-- Never install seat covers or replacement upholstery over the front seatbacks that
have not been specifically approved by Au-
di. -- Never use additional seat cushions that
cover the areas wherethe side airbags inflate.
-- Damage tothe original seat coversor to the seam in the area of the side airbag module must always be repaired immediately by an authorized Audi dealer.
-- The airbag system can deployonly once. After an airbag has been deployed, it must be replaced with new replacement parts designed and approved especially for your Audi model version. Replacement of complete airbag systems or airbag components must be performed by qualified workshops only. Makesure that anyairbag service action is entered in your Audi Warranty & Maintenance booklet under AIRBAG REPLACEMENT RECORD.
--For safety reasons in severe accidents, the alternator and starter are separated from

the vehicle battery with a pyrotechnic circuit interrupter.
-- Work on the pyrotechnic circuit interrupter mustonly be performed by a qualified technicians who have the experience, information and special tools necessary to perform the work safely.
-- If the vehicle or the circuit interrupter is scrapped, all applicable safety precautions mustbe followed.

Airbag system
Knee airbags
prea al)aCe ait Ls- eh) The knee airbag system can provide supplemen-
tal protection to properly restrained front seat occupants.
=8=g

Other things that can affect Advanced Airbag performance
Changing the vehicle's suspension system can change the way that the Advanced Airbag System performs in a crash. For example, using tire-rim combinations not approved by Audi, lowering the vehicle, changing the stiffness of the suspension, including the springs, suspension struts, shock absorbersetc. can change the forces that are measured by the airbag sensors and sent to the electronic control unit. Some suspension changes can, for example, increasethe force levels measured by the sensors and makethe airbag system deploy in crashes in which it would not deployif the changes had not been made. Other kinds of changes may reduce the force levels measured by the sensors and prevent the airbag from deploying when it should.
ZA\ WARNING
Changing the vehicle's suspension including use of unapproved tire-rim combinations can change Advanced Airbag performance and increase the risk of serious personal injury ina crash. -- Never install suspension components that
do not have the same performance characteristics as the componentsoriginally installed on your vehicle. -- Never usetire-rim combinations that have not been approved by Audi.

Fig. 231 Driver's knee airbag

The driver kneeairbag is in the instrument panel underneath the steering wheel > fig. 231, the
airbag for the passenger is at about the same height in the instrument panel underneath the glove compartment.

The knee airbag offers additional protection to
the driver's and passenger's knees and upper and lower thigh areas and supplements the protection provided bythe safety belts.

If the front airbags deploy, the knee airbags also
deployin frontal collisions when the deployment threshold stored in the control unit is met = page 271, More important things to know
about front airbags.

In addition to their normal safety function, safety belts help keep the driver or front passenger in
position in a frontal collision so that the airbags can provide supplemental protection.

The airbag system is not a substitute for your

safety belt. Rather,it is part of the overall occu-

pant restraint system in your vehicle. Always re-

member that the airbag system can only help to

protect you if you are wearing your safety belt

and wearing it properly. This is why you should al-

ways wear your safety belt, not just because the

law requires you to do so > page 253, Generalin-

formation.

8W0012721BG

277

Airbag system

Remember too,airbags will deploy only once and only in certain kinds of accidents - your safety belts are alwaysthere to offer protection in those accidents in which airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they have already deployed, for example when your vehicle strikes or is struck by another after the first collision.
This is just one of the reasons whyan airbag is not a substitute for the safety belt. The airbag system works mosteffectively when used with the safety belts. Therefore, always wear your safety belts correctly.
It is important to remember that while the supplemental knee airbag system is designed to reduce the likelihood of serious injuries, other inju-
ries, for example, swelling, bruising and minor abrasions and friction burns can also occur when
an airbag inflates.
The knee airbag system basically consistsof:
-- The electronic control module -- Twoinflatable airbags (airbag and gas genera-
tor), one for the driver and one for the front passenger -- The airbag indicator light in the instrument panel
The knee airbag system will not deploy:
--when the ignition is switched off -- in frontal collisions when the deceleration
measured by the control unit is too low --in side collisions -- in rear-end collisions --in rollovers --in the event of a system malfunction (warning/
indicator light is on) > page 23.
Z\ WARNING
-- Safety belts and the airbag system can only provide protection when occupantsare in the proper seating position > page 271.
-- If the airbag indicator light > page 23
comes when the vehicle is being used, have
the system inspected immediately by your authorized Audi dealer. It is possible that the airbag will inflate when it is not sup-
posed to,or will not inflate when it should.

ata an-\-i-lia ey 1e mela
The risk of injury to the leg area can be reduced by fully inflated knee airbags.
5¢ =a32
Fig. 232 Inflated airbags protecting in frontal collision
The knee airbag system has been designed so that the airbags for the driver and front passenger deployin certain but not all frontal collisions. If the front airbags deploy, the knee airbags also deploy in frontal collisions when the deployment threshold stored in the control unit is met. When the system deploys, the airbags fill with a propellant gas, and inflate between the lower part of the instrumentpanel and the driver and the lower part of the instrument panel and the front passenger > page 271, fig. 229. Although theyare not a soft pillow, they can "cushion" the impact and in this way they can help to reduce the risk of injury to the lower extremities. All of this takes place in the blink of an eye, so fast that many people don't even realize that the airbags have deployed. The airbags also inflate with a great deal of force and it is important for occupant safety that nothing should bein their way when they deploy. Fully inflated airbags in combination with properly worn safety belts slow downand limit the occupant's forward movement and help to reduce the risk of injury.

278

Airbag system

tail Selec aet Liamiedo Mol mat -M dal -1-) airbag system
Airbags are only supplemental restraints. Always wearsafety belts correctly and ride in a proper seating position.
There is a lot that you and your passengers must know and do to help the safety belts and airbags to provide supplemental protection.
Z\ WARNING
An inflating knee airbag can cause serious injury. Wearing safety belts incorrectly and improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used. -- The knee airbag system cannot protect you
properlyif you are seated too closeto any of the airbag locations. When adjusting their seat positions, it is important that both the driver and the front passenger keep their upper bodies and kneesat the following minimum safe distances:
--at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the chest and the steering wheel/instrument panel.
--at least 4 inches (10 cm) between the knees and the lower part of the instrument panel.
-- The risk of personal injury increases if you lean forward or to the side, or if the seat is improperly positioned and you are not wearing your safety belt. The risk increases even more should the airbag deploy.
-- Always makesure that the knee airbag can inflate without interference. Objects between you and the airbag can increase the risk of injury in an accident by interfering with the way the airbag deploys or by being pushed into you as the airbag deploys.
-- Never let anybody, especially children or animals ride in the footwell in front of the passenger seat. If the airbag deploys, this can result in serious or fatal injuries.
-- Never carry objects of any kind in the footwell area in front of the driver's or passenger's seat. Bulky objects (shopping bags, for example) can interfere with or

prevent proper deployment ofthe airbag. Small objects can be thrown through the vehicle if the airbag deploys and injure you or your passengers.
-- Make sure there are no cracks, deep scratch-
es or other damage in the area of the instrument panel where the kneeairbags arelocated. -- If children are incorrectly seated, their risk of injury increases in a collision > page 285, Child safety.
Side airbags
Description of side airbags
The airbag system can provide supplemental protection to properly restrained occupants.
QS 9 =3=S

Fig. 233 Side airbag location in the driver's seat

The side airbags are located in the sides of the front seat backrests > fig. 233 and the rear back-
rest* facing the doors.

The side airbags installed for the front seating positions have been designed and certified to help reduce the risk of injury that can be caused
by airbags when theyinflate, particularly when
the occupant sitting next to it is not seated properly. The side airbag for the front passenger seat can be used with properly installed child restraints. Please be sure to read the important information and warnings whenever using a child restraint in a vehicle: Safety belts > page 253, Airbag system > page 261, Child safety => page 285.

The side airbag system basically consists of:

--the electronic control module and external side

impact sensors

279

8W0012721BG

Airbag system

-- the twoside airbags located in the sides of the front backrests
-- tworear side airbags* -- the airbag warning light in the instrument clus-
ter.
The airbag system is monitored electronically to makecertain that it is functioning properlyat all times. Each time you turn on the ignition, the airbag system indicator light will come on for a few seconds (self diagnostics).
The side airbag system supplementsthe safety belts and can help to reduce the risk of injury to the driver's, front and rear* passenger's upper torso on the side of the vehicle that is struck in a side collision. The airbag deploysonly in side impacts and only when the vehicle acceleration registered by the control unit is high enough. If this rate is below the reference value programmed in-
to the control unit, the side airbags will not be
triggered, even though the car may be badly damagedas a result of the collision. It is not possible to define an airbag triggering range that will cover every possible angle of impact, since the circumstances will vary considerably between one collision and another. Important factorsinclude, for example, the nature (hard or soft) of the impacting object, the angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc. > page 281, Important safety instructions on the side airbag system.
Aside from their normal safety function, safety belts work to help keep the driver or front passenger in position in the event of a side collision so that the side airbags can provide protection.
The airbag system is not a substitute for your safety belt. Rather,it is part of the overall occupant restraint system in your vehicle. Always remember thatthe side airbag system can only help to protect you if you are wearing your safety belt and wearing it properly. This is another reason why you should always wear your safety belts, not just because the law requires you to do so > page 253, General information.
It is important to remember that while the supplemental side airbag system is designed to reduce the likelihood of serious injuries, other injuries, for example, swelling, bruising, friction

burns and minor abrasions can also be associated with deployed side airbags. Remember too,side airbags will deploy only once and only in certain kinds of accidents - your safety belts are always there to offer protection.
Vehicle damage, repair costs or even the lack of vehicle damage are not necessarily an indication of over-sensitive or failed airbag activation. In some collisions, both front and side airbags may inflate. Remember too, that airbags will deploy only once and onlyin certain kinds of collisions your safety belts are always there to offer protection in those accidents in which airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they have already deployed.
The side airbag system will not deploy:
--when the ignition is turned off -- in side collisions when the acceleration meas-
ured by the sensor is too low -- in front-end collisions --in rear-end collisions
--in rollovers.
In some typesof accidents the front airbags, side curtain airbags and side airbags maybe triggered together.
Z\ WARNING
-- Safety belts and the airbag system will only provide protection when occupantsare in the proper seating position > page 281.
- If the airbag indicator light > page 23
comes when the vehicle is being used, have
the system inspected immediately by your authorized Audi dealer. It is possible that the airbag will inflate when it is not sup-
posed to, or will not inflate when it should.

280

Airbag system

How supplemental side airbags work
Side airbags deploy instantly and can help reducethe risk of upper torsoinjuries for occupants who are properly restrained.
=3r8Seors
Fig. 234 Inflated side airbags on left side of vehicle, rear side airbag optional equipment
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas and breaks through a seam in the seat surface area. It expands between the side trim panel and the passenger. In order to help provide this additional protection, the side airbag mustinflate within a fraction of a second at very high speed and with great force. The supplemental side airbag could injure you if your
seating position is not proper or upright or if
items are located in the area where the supplemental side airbag expands. This applies especially to children > page 285, Child safety. Supplemental side airbags inflate between the occupant and the door panel on the side of the vehicle thatis struck in certain side collision > fig. 234.
Although they are not a soft pillow, they can "cushion" the impact and in this way they can help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper part of the body.
A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and does not mean thereis a fire in the vehicle.

Important safety instructions on the side airbag system
Airbags are only supplemental restraints. Always properly wear safety belts and ride in a proper seating position.
There is a lot that you and your passengers must know and act accordingly to help the safety belts and airbags do their job to provide supplemental protection.
Z\ WARNING
An inflating side airbag can cause serious or fatal injury. Improperly wearing safety belts and improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used. -- In order to reducethe risk of injury when the
supplemental side airbag inflates:
-- Alwayssit in an upright position and never lean against the area where the supplemental side airbag is located.
-- Never let a child or anyone else rest their head against the side trim panel in the area where the supplemental side airbag inflates.
-- Always makesurethat safety belts are
worn correctly,
-- Do not let anyone sitting in the front seat put their hand or any other parts of their body out of the window.
-- Always makesure that the side airbag can inflate without interference.
-- Never install seat covers or replacement upholstery over the front seatbacks that have not been specifically approved by Audi.
-- Never use additional seat cushions that cover the areas wherethe side airbags deploy.
-- Damage to the original seat covers or to the seam in the area of the side airbag module must always be repaired immediately by an authorized Audi dealer.
-- Objects between you and the airbag can increase the risk of injury in an accident byinterfering with the waythe airbag unfolds or

8W0012721BG

281

Airbag system
by being pushed into you as the airbag inflates.
-- Never place or attach accessories or other objects (such as cupholders, telephone brackets, or even large, bulky objects) on
the doors, over or near the area marked
"AIRBAG"on the seat backrests. -- Such objects and accessories can become
dangerous projectiles and cause injury when the supplemental side airbag deploys. -- Never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. -- Alwaysuse the built-in coat hooks* only for lightweight clothing. Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objectsin the pockets that mayinterfere with side airbag deployment and can cause personal injury in an accident.
-- Alwaysprevent the side airbags from being damaged by heavy objects knocking against or hitting the sides of the seatbacks.
-- The airbag system can only be triggered once. If the airbag has been triggered, the system mustbe replaced by an authorized Audi dealership.
-- Damage (cracks, deep scratches etc.) to the original seat covers or to the seam in the area of the side airbag module must always be repaired immediately by an authorized Audi dealer.
-- If children are seated improperly,their risk of injury increases in the case of an accident = page 285, Child safety.
-- Never attempt to modify any components of the airbag system in any way.
-- Ina side collision, side airbags will not function properly if sensors cannotcorrectly measureincreasing air pressure inside the
doors when air escapes through larger, unclosed openings in the door panel.
-- Never drive with interior door trim panels removed.
-- Never drive when parts have been removed from the inside door panel and the open-

ings they leave have not been properly closed. -- Never drive when loudspeakersin the doors have been removed unless the speaker holes have been properly closed. -- Always makecertain that openings are covered or filled if additional speakers or other equipmentis installed in the inside door panels. -- Alwayshave work on the doors done by an authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop.
Side curtain airbags
pyre eteel meee] ilar leh The side curtain airbags can provide supplemental protection to properly restrained occupants.
Fig. 235 Side curtain airbags,driver's side: location
The side curtain airbags are located on both sides of the interior above the front and rear side windows > fig. 235. The side curtain airbags contain features that provide ejection mitigation to help prevent vehicle occupantsor parts of their bodies from being completely or partially ejected from the vehicle interior in certain side impacts and vehicle rollovers. The side curtain airbag system supplements the safety belts and can help to reducethe risk ofinjury for occupants' heads and upper torso ina side collision. The side curtain airbag inflates in side impacts and only when the vehicle acceleration registered by the control unit is high enough. If this rate is below the reference value programmed into the control unit, the side curtain airbag >

B8W-0056.

282

Airbag system

will not be triggered, even though the car may be badly damaged as a result of the collision. It is not possible to define an airbag triggering range that will cover every possible angle of impact, since the circumstances will vary considerably between one collision and another. Important factors include, for example, the nature (hard or soft) of the impacting object, the angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc. > page 283, How side curtain airbags work.
Aside from their normal safety function, safety belts work to help keep the driver or front passenger in position in the event ofa collision so that the side curtain airbags can provide protection.
The airbag system is not a substitute for your safety belt. Rather,it is part of the overall occupant restraint system in your vehicle. Always remember that the airbag system can only help to protect you if you are wearing your safety belt and wearing it properly. This is another reason whyyou should always wear your safety belts, not just because the law requires you to do so = page 253, General information.
It is important to remember that while the side curtain airbag system is designed to help reduce
the likelihood of serious injuries, other injuries,
for example, swelling, bruising, friction burns and minor abrasions can also be associated with these airbags upon deployment. Remember too, these airbags will deploy only once and onlyin certain kinds of accidents - your safety belts are always thereto offer protection.
The side curtain airbag system basically consists of:
-- The electronic control module and external side impact sensors
--The side curtain airbags above the windowsof the outer seating positions with ejection mitigation features
-- The airbag indicator light in the instrument panel
The airbag system is monitored electronically to makecertain it is functioning properly at all times. Each time you turn on the ignition, the air-

bag system indicator light will come on for a few seconds (self diagnostics).
The side curtain airbag is not activated: -- if the ignition is turned off -- in side collisions when the acceleration meas-
ured by the sensor is too low --in rear-end collisions.
Z\ WARNING
-- Safety belts and the airbag system will only provide protection when occupantsare in the proper seating position > page 58, Front seats.
--If the airbag indicator light > page 23 comes when the vehicle is being used, have the system inspected immediately by your authorized Audi dealer. It is possible that the airbag will inflate when it is not supposed to, or will not inflate when it should.
Howside curtain airbags work
Side curtain airbags can work togetherwith side airbags to help reduce the risk of head and upper torso injuries for occupants who are properly restrained.
S2=S3~isB
Fig. 236 Illustration of principle: Inflated side curtain airbags on the left side
The side curtain airbags inflate between the occupant and the windowsin side collision > fig. 236.
When the system is triggered, the side curtain airbag is filled with propellant gas and breaks through a seam abovethe front and rear side windowsidentified by the AIRBAGlabel. In order to help provide this additional protection, the >

8W0012721BG

283

Airbag system
side curtain airbag must inflate within the blink of an eye at very high speed and with great force. The side curtain airbag could injure you if your seating position is not proper or upright or if items are located in the area where the supplemental side curtain airbag inflates. This applies especially to children > page 285.
Although theyare nota soft pillow,side curtain airbags can "cushion" the impact and in this way they can help to reduce the risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body.
A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is quite normal and does not mean there is a fire in the vehicle.
Important safety instructions on the side curtain airbag system
Airbags are only supplemental restraints. Always properly wearsafety belts and ride in a proper seating position.
There is a lot that you and your passengers must know and do to help the safety belts and airbags do their job to provide supplemental protection.
Z\ WARNING
Improperly wearing safety belts and improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used. -- Never let occupants place any parts of their
bodies in the area from which the side curtain airbag inflate. -- Always makesurethat the side curtain airbags can inflate without interference. -- Use the built-in coat hooks onlyfor lightweight clothing. Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets that may interfere with airbag deployment and can cause personal injury in a collision. -- Never use hangersto hang clothes on the hooks. -- Only use factory-installed sun shades or,if shadesinstalled after the vehicle leaves the factory, use only genuine Audi sun shades. -- Never swing the sun visors over to the side windowsif things such as pens, garage door

openers, hands-free speakers,etc. are attached to the sun visors. They could come loose and cause serious injury if the side curtain airbag inflates. -- A deploying airbag inflates in a fraction of a second and with great force. -- Never attach objects to the cover or in the deployment zone of a side curtain airbag. --The airbag deployment zones must be kept clear at all times. Make sure there are no objects, pets, or other persons in the space between anyvehicle occupant and any airbag at any time.
-- Do not attach any accessories to the doors.
ZA WARNING
-- The airbag system can deployonly once. If the airbag has been triggered, the system mustbe replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop.
-- Always have work involving the side curtain airbag system, removal and installation of the airbag components,or other repairs performed by a qualified dealership. Otherwise the airbag system may not work correctly.
-- Never attempt to modify any components of the airbag system in any way.

284

Child safety

Child safety
Important information
Introduction
The rear seat is generally the safest place ina collision.
The physical principles of what happens when your vehicle is in a crash applyalso to children = page 254, What happens to occupants not wearing safety belts?. But unlike adults and teenagers, their muscles and bonesare notfully developed. In many respects children are at greater risk of serious injury in crashes than adults.
Becausechildren's bodies are not fully developed, they require restraint systems especially designed for their size, weight, and body structure. Many countries and all states of the United States and provinces of Canada havelawsrequiring the use of approved child restraint systems for infants and small children.
Ina frontal crash at a speed of 20 - 35 mph (30 56 km/h)the forces acting on a 13-pound (6 kg) infant will be more than 20 times the weight of the child. This means the weight of the child would suddenly be more than 260 pounds (120 kg). Under these conditions, only an appropriate child restraint properly used can reduce the risk of serious injury. Child restraints, like adult safety belts, must be used properly to be effective. Used improperly, they can increase the risk of serious injury in an accident.
All children, especially those 12 years and younger must alwaysride in the back seat properlyrestrained for their age and size. If you mustinstall a child restraint on the front passenger seat in
exceptional circumstances, be sure to read and
heed the important information and warnings = page 262. Infants and other children who are properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint that is for their size and age can benefit from the protection that supplemental side airbags provide in some kinds of crashes.
For more information please see information provided by the:

-- National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), currently at : http://www.safercar.gov (for the USA)
-- Transport Canada Information Centre, currently at: http://www.tc.gc.ca (for Canada)
Consult the child safety seat manufacturer's instructions in order to be sure the seat is right for your child's size > page 289, Important safety instructions for using child safety seats. Please be sure to read and heed all of the important information and WARNINGS about child safety, Advanced Airbags, and the installation of child restraints in this chapter.
There is a lot you need to know about the Advanced Airbags in your vehicle and how they work when infants and children in child restraints are on the front passenger seat. Becauseof the large amountof important information, we cannotrepeat it all here. We urge you to read the detailed information in this owner's manual about airbags and the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle and the very important information about transporting children on the front passenger seat. Please be sure to heed the WARNINGS - they are extremely important for your safety and the safety of your passengers, especially infants and small children.
ZA WARNING
-- Accident statistics have shownthat children are generally safer in the rear seat area than in the front seating position. Always restrain any child age 12 and under in the rear.
-- All vehicle occupants and especially children mustbe restrained properly whenever riding in a vehicle. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child could be injured by striking the interior or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or impact. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child is also at greater risk of injury or death through contact with an inflating airbag.
--A suitable child restraint properly installed and usedat one ofthe rear seating positions provides the highest degree of protection for infants and small children in mostaccident situations.

8W0012721BG

285

Child safety
ZA\ WARNING
Children on the front seat of any car even with Advanced Airbags can be seriously injured or even killed when an airbag inflates. A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat installed on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates. -- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety
seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, or
door. -- Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats
on the rear seat. -- If you mustinstall a rearward facing child
safety seat on the front passenger seat in exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF %;light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rearfacing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected immediately by your Audi dealer.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Forward-facing child seats installed on the front passenger seat mayinterfere with the deployment of the airbag and cause serious personal injury to the child.
-- If exceptional circumstances require the use of a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat, the child's safety and well-being require the following special precautions to be taken: -- Always makesure that the forward-facing seat has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on a front passenger seat with a front and side airbag. -- Alwayscarefully follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child seat or infant carrier. -- Never install a child restraint without a properly attached top tether strap if the child restraint manufacturer's instructions require the top tether strap to be used.
286

-- Never put the forward-facing child restraint up against or very near the instru-
ment panel.
-- Alwaysset the safety belt upper anchorage to the adjustment position that per-
mits proper installation in accordance with the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
-- Always movethe front passenger seat to the highest position in the up and down adjustment range and moveit back to the rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible, before installing the forward-facing child restraint.
-- Always makesurethat the safety belt upper anchorage is behind the child restraint and not next to or in front of the child restraint so that the safety belt will be properly positioned.
-- Always makesure that nothing prevents the front passenger's seat from being moved to the rearmostposition in its fore and aft adjustment range.
-- Never place objects on the seat (such as a
laptop, CD player, electronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child
seats). These may influence the electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system and can also fly around in an accident and cause serious personal injury.
-- Never place or use anyelectrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic gamesdevice, power inverter or seat heater for child seats) on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket.
-- If a seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise added to the front passenger seat, never install any child restraint system on this seat.
-- Make sure that there are no wet objects
(such as a wet towel) and no water or other liquids on the front passenger seat cushion.
-- Always makesure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; light comes on and stays

on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on. -- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %;light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the forward-facing child seat in a rear seating position and havethe airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer. -- Always buckle the child seat firmly in place even if a child is not sitting in it. A loose child seat can fly around during a sudden stop or in a collision. -- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restraint in a vehicle > page 253, Safety belts, > page 261, Airbag system and > page 285, Important information.
@) Tips
Alwaysreplace child restraints that were installed in a vehicle during a crash. Damage to a child restraint that is not visible could cause it to fail in another collision situation.
ONE Tee Ricerca Cele)
Your vehicle is equipped with an "Advanced Airbag System"in compliance with United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time your vehicle was manufactured.
The Advanced Airbag system in your vehicle has been certified to meet the "low-risk" requirementsfor 3- and 6-year old children on the passenger side and small adults on the driver side. The low risk deployment criteria are intended to reduce the risk of injury through interaction with the airbag that can occur, for example, by being too close to the steering wheel and instrument panel when the airbag inflates. In addition, the system has been certified to comply with the "suppression" requirementsof the Safety Standard, to turn off the front airbag for infants up to 12 months who arerestrained on the front passenger seat in child restraints that are listed in the Standard.

Child safety
Even though your vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Airbag system, all children, especially those 12 years and younger, should alwaysride in the back seat properly restrained for their age and size. The airbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a child in a forward-facing child safety seat. It can be a very dangerous place for an infant or a larger child in a rearward-facing seat.
The vehicle's Advanced Airbag System has a capacitive passenger detection system in the front passenger seat cushion that can detect the presence of a baby or child in a child restraint system on this seat.
The capacitive passenger detection system registers the changes that result in an electrical field when a child, a child restraint, and a baby blanket are on the front passenger seat. The change in the measured capacitance due to the presence of a child, a child restraint, and a baby blanket on the front passenger seat is related to the child restraint system resting on the seat. The measured capacitance of a child restraint system varies depending on the type of system and specific make and model.
The electrical capacitance of the various types, makes, and modelsof child restraints specified by the U.S. National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)in the relevant safety standard are stored in the Advanced Airbag System control unit together with the capacitances typical of infants and a 1-year old child. When a child restraint is used on the front passenger seat with a typical 1 year-old infant, the Advanced Airbag System compares the capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system with the data stored in the electronic control unit.
ea CMeeeTea ANE laete Wty lel)
Regardless of the child restraint that you use, makesure that it has been certified to meet Safety Standards and has been certified by its manufacturer for use with an airbag. Always be sure that the child restraint is properly installed at

8W0012721BG

287

Child safety

one of the rear seating positions. If in exception-
al circumstances you mustuse it on the front passenger seat, carefully read all of the information on child safety and Advanced Airbags and
heedall of the applicable WARNINGS. Make certain that the child and child restraint are correct-
ly recognized by the capacitive passenger detection system in the front passenger seat, that the
front passenger airbag is turned off, and that the airbag status is always correctly signaled by the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF 3%;light.

Manytypes and models of child restraints have
been available over the years, new modelsareintroduced regularly incorporating new and improved designs and older models are taken out of production. Child restraints are not standardized. Child restraints of the same type typically have different weights and sizes and different "footprints", the size and shape of the bottom of the child restraint that sits on the seat, when they are installed on a vehicle seat. These differences makeit virtually impossible to certify compliance with the requirements for advanced airbags with
each and every child restraint that has ever been sold in the past or will be sold over the course of the useful life of your vehicle.

For this reason, the United States National High-
wayTraffic Safety Administration has published a list of specific type, makes and modelsofchild restraints that must be used to certify compliance of the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle with the suppression requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. Thesechild
restraints are:

Subpart A - Car bed child restraints

Model Angel Guard Angel Ride AA2403FOF

Manufactured on or after
September 25, 2007

Subpart B - Rear-facing child restraints

Model

Manufactured on or after

Century SmartFit 4543 December 1, 1999

Cosco Arriva 22-013PAW and base 22-999WHO

September 25, 2007

Evenflo Discovery Adjust Right 212

December 1, 1999

Evenflo First Choice 204

December 1, 1999

Graco Infant 8457

December 1, 1999

Graco Snugride

September 25, 2007

Peg Perego Primo Viag- September 25, 2007 gio SIP IMUNOOUS

SubpartC - Forward-facing and convertible child restraints

Model
Britax Roundabout E9LO2xx
Cosco Touriva 02519 Cosco Summit Deluxe
High Back Booster 22-262 Cosco High Back Booster 22-209 Evenflo Tribute V 379Xxxxx Evenflo Medallion 254 Evenflo Generations 352xxxx Graco ComfortSport Graco Toddler Safety Seat Step 2 Graco Platinum Cargo

Manufactured on or after September 25, 2007
December 1, 1999
September 25, 2007
September 25, 2007
September 25, 2007
December 1, 1999 September 25, 2007
September 25, 2007 September 25, 2007
September 25, 2007

Z\ WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury, make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #%;light
comes on and stays on whenever a child restraintis installed on the front passenger seat and the ignition is switched on.

288

8W0012721BG

-- Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %;light does notstay on.
-- Have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer immediately.
@ Tips
The child seatslisted in categories A to C have been statically tested by Audi only for the Advanced Airbag function.
Importantsafety instructions for using child safety seats
Correct use ofchild safety seats substantially reduces the risk ofinjury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for the safety of everybody in the vehicle, especially children:
> Alwaysuse the right child safety seat for each child and alwaysuse it properly > page 291.
> Always carefully follow the child safety seat manufacturer's instructions on how to route the safety belt properly through the child safe-
ty seat.
> When using the vehicle safety belt to install a child safety seat, you mustfirst activate the convertible locking retractor on the safety belt to preventthe child safety seat from moving => page 296.
> Push the child safety seat down with your full weight to get the safety belt really tight so that the seat cannot move forward or sideways more than one inch (2.5 cm).
> Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat => page 291.
Always remember: Even though your vehicleis equipped with an Advanced Airbag system, all children, especially those 12 years and younger, should alwaysride in the back seat properly restrained for their age and size.
Z\ WARNING
Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong child safety seat or improperlyinstalling a

Child safety
child restraint increases the risk of serious personal injury and death. -- All vehicle occupants and especially children
mustbe restrained properly whenever riding in a vehicle. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child could be injured by striking the interior or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or impact. An unrestrained or improperly restrained child is also at greater risk of injury or death through contact with an inflating airbag. -- Commercially available child safety seats are required to comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 213 (in Canada CMVSS 213).
-- When buying a child restraint, select one that fits your child and the vehicle.
-- Only usechild restraint systems that fully contact the flat portion of the seat cush-
ion. The child restraint must nottip or lean to either side. Audi does not recom-
mend using child safety seats that rest on legs or tube-like frames. They do not provide adequate contact with the seat. -- Alwaysheedalllegal requirements pertaining to the installation and use ofchild safety seats and carefully follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the seat you are using.
-- Never allow children under 57 inches (1.45 meters) to wear a normal safetybelt. They must alwaysberestrained by a proper child restraint system. Otherwise, they could sustain injuries to the abdomen and neck areas during sudden braking maneuvers or accidents.
-- Never let more than one child occupya child safety seat.
-- Never let babies or older children ride ina
vehicle while sitting on the lap of another passenger.
-- Holding a child in your arms is never a substitute for a child restraint system.
-- The strongestperson could not hold the child with the forces that exist in an accident. The child will strike the interior of the vehicle and can also be struck by the passenger.
289

Child safety
--The child and the passenger can also injure each other in an accident.
Never install rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the front passenger seat. A child will be seriously injured and can be killed when the passenger airbag inflates even with an Advanced Airbag System. The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof. Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the rear seat. Before you carry a child in a rear-facing child safety seat on the rear seat, remove the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* and its holder* from the backrest of the front seat.
Makesure there is enough spacein front of the child in the child seat. If necessary, adjust the angle and position of the seat in front ofthe child seat. Forward-facing child safety seats installed on the front passenger's seat can interfere with the airbag when it inflates and cause serious injury to the child. Alwaysinstall forward-facing child safety seats on the rear
seat.
If exceptional circumstances require the use of a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat, the child's safety and well-being require that the following special precautions be taken:
-- Make sure the forward-facing seat has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on a front seat with a passenger front and side airbag.
-- Alwayscarefully follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child safety seat or carrier.
-- Always movethe front passenger seat to the highest position in the up and down adjustment range and moveit back to the rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible, before installing the forward-facing child restraint.

-- Always makesurethat the safety belt upper anchorage is behind the child restraint and not next to or in front of the child restraint so that the safety belt will be properly positioned.
-- Always makesure that nothing prevents the front passenger's seat from being moved to the rearmostposition in its fore and aft adjustment range.
-- Always makesure that the backrestis in the upright position.
-- Never place or use anyelectrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic
gamesdevice, power inverter or seat heat-
er for child seats) on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket. -- If a seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise added to the front passenger seat, never install any child restraint system on this seat. -- Make sure that there are no wet objects (such as a wet towel) and no water or other liquids on the front passenger seat cushion. -- Never place objects on the seat (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats). These may influence the electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system and can also fly around in an accident and cause serious personal injury.
-- Alwaysbuckle the child safety seatfirmly in place even if a child is not sitting in it. A loose child safety seat can fly around during a sudden stop or ina collision.
-- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used > page 253, Safety belts, => page 261, Airbag system and > page 285, Child safety.
ZX WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury, make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %;light

290

comes on and stays on whenever a child restraintis installed on the front passenger seat and the ignition is switched on. -- Take the child restraint off the front passen-
ger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF#¥;light does not stay on.
-- Have the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer immediately.
Ya eMa s-Le etiiaatom da MTT -T-9

Child safety
-- Always secure unusedrear seat safety belts out of reach of children in child seats such as by properly routing them around the head restraint of the seat where the child restraint is installed.
-- Never activate the convertible locking retractor when routing the safety belts around the head restraints.
-- Never let anyone sit at the center rear seat-
ing position if the center rear safety belt has been routed around a rear head restraint.
Child safety seats
Meaty
Babies andinfants up to about one year old and 20 lbs. or 9 kg need special rearward-facing child restraints that support the back, neck and head in acrash.

B4G-0466 B4l-1424

Fig. 237 Schematic overview: keep unusedsafety belts awayfrom childrenin child safety seats. @) - outer rear safety belt, - centerrear safety belt
If a child safety seat is used on the rear bench, especially with LATCH universal lower anchorages, the unused safety belts must be secured so that the child in the child restraint cannot reach them >A.
-- Guide the safety belt webbings (@) and be-
hind the head restraint of the seat where the child restraint is installed > fig. 237. When doing so, do not engage the convertible locking retractor! You should not hear a "clicking" sound when winding up the safety belt. -- Let the belt retractor wind up the safety belt webbing.
Z\ WARNING
A child in a child safety seat installed with the LATCH lower anchorages or with the standard safety belt or a child in a booster seat on the rear seat could play with unused rear seat safety belts and become entangled. This could cause the child serious personal injury and even death.

Fig. 238 Schematic overview: rearward-facing infant seat, properlyinstalled on therear seat
> When using the vehicle safety belt to install a child safety seat, you mustfirst activate the convertible locking retractor on the safety belt to prevent the child safety seat from moving => page 296or install the seat using the LATCH attachments.
> Push the child safety seat down with your full weight to getthe safety belt really tight so that the seat cannot moveforward or sideways more
than one inch (2.5 cm).
> Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat => page 291.
Infants up to about one year (20 lbs. or 9 kg) are best protected in special infant carriers and child safety seats designed for their age group. Many experts believe that infants and small children >
291

8W0012721BG

Child safety
should ride only in special restraints in which the child faces the back of the vehicle. These infant seats support the baby's back, neck and head ina crash fig. 238.
The airbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a child in a forward-facing child seat. It is a very dangerous place for an infant or a larger child in a rearward-facing seat.
ZA WARNING
Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong child safety seat or improperly installing a child restraint increases the risk of serious personal injury and death in a crash. -- Never install rear-facing child safety seats or
infant carriers on the front passenger seat even with an Advanced Airbag System. A child will be seriously injured and can be killed when the inflating airbag hits the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and smashes the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof > page 262, Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know. -- Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the rear seat. -- Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the forward-facing direction. Such restraints are designed for the special needs ofinfants and very small children and cannot protect them properlyif the seat is forward-facing. -- If you mustinstall a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #%; light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer. -- Never place or use any electrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic
games device, power inverter or seat heater
for child seats) on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12-volt socketor the cigarette lighter socket.
292

Child safety

Convertible child safety seats Properly used convertible child safety seats can help protect toddlers and children over age one who weigh between 20 and 40 lbs. (9 and 18 kg) inacrash.
8=
a+all
Fig. 239 Schematic overview: installation of the attachments applicable to a LATCH seat
g=4a
Fig. 240 Schematic overview: installation of the seat using the vehicle's safety belt system
> When using the vehicle safety belt to install a child safety seat, you mustfirst activate the convertible locking retractor on the safety belt to preventthe child safety seat from moving => page 296or install the seat using the LATCH attachments.
> Push the child safety seat down with your full weight to get the safety belt really tight so that the seat cannot move forward or sideways more than one inch (2.5 cm) > page 296.
> If the child safety seat is equipped with a tether
strap, attach it to the tether anchors
=> page 302. > Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat
>page 291. A toddler or child is usually too large for an infant restraint if it is more than one year old and weighs more than 20 lbs. (9 kg).

Toddlers and children who are older than one year up to about 4 years old and weigh more than 20 lbs. (9 kg) up to 40 lbs. (18 kg) must always be properly restrained in a child safety seat certified for their size and weight > fig. 239 and
© fig. 240.
The airbag on the passenger side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a child in a forward-facing child safety seat. Itis a very dangerous placefor an infant or a larger child in a rearward-facing seat.
ZA\ WARNING
Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong child safety seat or improperlyinstalling a child restraint increases the risk of serious personal injury and death in a collision or other emergencysituation. -- Children on the front seat of anycar, even
with Advanced Airbags, can be seriouslyinjured or even killed when an airbag inflates. A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat installed on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can bekilled if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. -- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof. -- Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats on the rear seat. -- If you mustinstall a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat be-
cause of exceptional circumstances and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #;light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer. --The rear side of the child safety seat should be positioned as close as possible to the backrest on the vehicle seat. Adjust or removethe rear seat head restraint if it is difficult to install the child seat with the head restraint in place > page 60. Install the

8W0012721BG

293

Child safety
head restraint again immediately once the child seat is removed. Driving without head restraints or with head restraints that are not properly adjusted increases the risk of serious or fatal neck injury dramatically. -- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used > page 253, Safety belts, => page 261, Airbag system and > page 285, Important information.
ZA\ WARNING
If exceptional circumstances require the use of a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat, the child's safety and wellbeing require that the following special precautions be taken: -- Make sure the forward-facing seat has been
designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on front seat with a passenger front and side airbag. -- Alwaysfollow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child safety seat or infant carrier. -- Always movethe front passenger seat to the highest position in the up and downadjustment range and moveit back to the rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible, before installing the forwardfacing child restraint. -- Always makesure that the safety belt upper anchorage is behind the child restraint and not next to or in frontof the child restraint so that the safety belt will be properly positioned. -- Always makesure that nothing prevents the front passenger's seat from being moved to the rearmostposition in its fore and aft adjustment range. -- Always makesure the backrest is in an upright position. -- Never place or use any electrical device (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic
games device, power inverter or seat heater
for child seats) on the front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12-volt socketor the cigarette lighter socket.
294

-- If a seat heater has been retrofitted or otherwise addedto the front passenger seat, never install any child restraint system on this seat.
-- Make sure that there are no wet objects (such as a wet towel) and no water or other liquids on the front passenger seat cushion.
-- Never place objects on the seat (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic games device, power inverter or seat heater for child seats). These may influence the electrical capacitance measured by the capacitive passenger detection system and can alsofly around in an accident and cause serious personal injury.
-- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %;light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on.
-- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; light does not come on and stay on, immediately install the forward-facing child seat at a seating position on the rear seat and have
the airbag system inspected by your authorized Audi dealer. -- Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF $¥;light does not stay on whenever
the ignition is switched on.
Booster seats and safety belts
Properly used booster seats can help protect children weighing between about 40 lbs. and 80 lbs. (18 kg and 36 kg) who areless than 4 ft. 9 in. (S7 inches/1.45 meters) tall.

B4H-0275

Fig. 241 Rear seat:child properly restrained in a booster

seat

Child safety

The vehicle's safety belts alone will not fit most children until they are at least 4 ft. 9 in. (57 inches/1.45 meters) tall and weigh about 80 lbs. (36 kg). Booster seats raise these children up so that the safety belt will pass properly over the stronger parts of their bodies and the safety belt can help protect them in crash.
> Do not use the convertible locking retractor when using the vehicle's safety belt to restrain a child on a booster seat.
> The shoulder belt must lie as close to the center of the child's collar bone as possible and mustlie flat and snug on the upper body.It must never lie across the throat or neck. The lap belt mustlie across the pelvis and never across the stomach or abdomen. Makesure the belt lies flat and snug. Pull on the belt to tighten if necessary.
> If you must transport an older child in a boos-
ter seat on the front passenger seat, you can
use the safety belt height adjustment to help adjust the shoulder portion properly. > Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat =>page 291.
Children up toat least 8 years old (over 40 lbs. or 18 kg) are best protected in child safety seats designed for their age and weight. Experts say that the skeletal structure, particularly the pelvis, of these children is not fully developed, and they mustnotuse the vehicle safety belts without a suitable child restraint.
It is usually best to put these children in appropriate booster seats. Be sure the booster seat meetsall applicable safety standards.
Booster seats raise the seating position of the child and reposition both the lap and shoulder parts of the safety belt so that they pass across the child's body in the right places. The routing of the belt over the child's bodyis very important
for the child's protection, whether or not a boos-
ter seat is used. Children age 12 and under must alwaysride in the rear seat.
Children who areat least 4 ft. 9 in. (57 inches/ 1.45 meters) tall can generally use the vehicle's three point lap and shoulder belts. Never use the lap belt portion of the vehicle's safety belt alone

to restrain any child, regardless of how big the child is. Always remember that children do not have the pronounced pelvic structure required for the proper function of lap belt portion of the vehicle's three point lap and shoulder belts. The child's safety absolutely requires that a lap belt portion of the safety belt be fastened snugly and as low as possible around the pelvis. Never let the lap belt portion of the safety belt pass over the child's stomach or abdomen.
In acrash, airbags mustinflate within a blink of an eye and with considerable force. In order to do its job, the airbag needs room toinflate so that it will be there to protect the occupant as the occupant moves forward intothe airbag.
A vehicle occupant who is out of position and too close to the airbag gets in the wayof an inflating airbag. When an occupant is too close, he or she will be struck violently and will receive serious or possibly even fatal injury.
In order for the airbag to offer protection, it is important that all vehicle occupants, especially any children, who mustbe in the front seat because of exceptional circumstances, be properly restrained and as far away from the airbag as possible. By keeping room between the child's body and the front of the passenger compartment,the airbag can inflate completely and provide supplemental protection in certain frontal collisions.
ZA\ WARNING
Not using a booster seat, using the booster seat improperly, incorrectly installing a booster seat or using the vehicle safety belt improperly increasesthe risk of serious personal injury and deathin a collision or other emergencysituation. To help reduce the risk of serious personal injury and/or death: --The shoulder belt mustlie as close to the
center of the child's collar bone as possible and mustlie flat and snug on the upper body. It must never lie across the throat or neck. The lap belt mustlie across the pelvis and never across the stomach or abdomen. Makesurethe belt lies flat and snug. Pull on the belt to tighten if necessary.

8W0012721BG

295

Child safety
-- Failure to properly route safety belts over a child's bodywill cause severeinjuries in an accident or other emergencysituation => page 253.
-- The rear side of the child safety seat should be positioned as close as possible to the backrest on the vehicle seat. Adjust or removethe rear seat head restraintif it is difficult to install the child seat with the head restraint in place > page 60. Install the head restraint again immediately once the child seat is removed. Driving without head restraints or with head restraints that are not properly adjusted increases the risk of serious or fatal neck injury dramatically.
-- Never let a child put the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back, becauseit could cause severeinjuries in a crash.
-- Children on the front seat of any car, even
with Advanced Airbags, can be seriously injured or even killed when an airbag inflates.
-- Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat,
for examplethe front seat. -- Never let a child ride in the cargo area of
your vehicle. -- Always remember that a child leaning for-
ward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way during an accident can be struck by a deploying airbag. This will result in serious personal injury or death. -- If you mustinstall a booster seat on the front passenger seat becauseof exceptional circumstances the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; light must come on and stay on, whenever the ignition is switched on. -- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3;light does not come on and stay on, perform the checks described > page 273, Monitoring the AdvancedAirbag System. -- Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %;light does not stay on whenever the ignition is switched on. -- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used > page 253, Safety belts,

=> page 261, Airbag system and > page 285, Important information.
Securing child safety seats
Securing a child safety seat using a safety Prt
Safety belts for the rear seats and the front passenger can be locked with the convertible locking retractor to properly secure child safety seats.
The safety belts for the rear seats and for the front passenger's seat have a convertible locking retractor for child safety seats. The safety belt mustbe locked so that belt webbing cannot unreel. The retractor can be activated to lock the safety belt and prevent the safety belt webbing from loosening up during normal driving. A child safety seat can only be properly installed when the safety belt is locked so that the child and child safety seat will stay in place.
Always remember: Even though your vehicleis equipped with an Advanced Airbag system, all children, especially those 12 years and younger, should alwaysride in the back seat properly restrained for their age and size.
Z\ WARNING
Improperly installed child safety seats increase the risk of serious personal injury and death in collision. -- Always makesure that the safety belt retrac-
tor is locked when installing a child safety seat. An unlocked safety belt retractor cannot hold the child safety seat in place during normal driving or in a crash. -- Always buckle the child safety seat firmly in place even if a child is not sitting in it. A loose child safety seat can fly around during a sudden stop or ina collision. -- Always makesure that the rear seat backrest to which the center rear safety belt* is attached is securely latched whenever the rear center safety belt is being used to secure a child restraint.

296

-- If the backrest is not securely latched, the child and the child restraint will be thrown forward together with the backrest and will strike parts of the vehicle interior. The child can be seriously injured or killed.
-- Never install rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the front passenger seat. A child will be seriously injured and can be killed when the passenger airbag inflates.
-- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof.
-- Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats or infant carriers on the rear seat.
-- Forward-facing child safety seats or infant carriers installed on the front passenger's seat mayinterfere with the deploymentof the airbag and causeserious injury to the child.
-- It is safer to install a forward-facing child safety seat on the rear seat.
-- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used > page 285. Special precautions apply when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat > page 262, Child
restraints on the front seat - some impor-
tant things to know.
Z\ WARNING
Always take special precautions if you must install a forward or rearward-facing child re-
straint on the front passenger's seat in exceptional situations: -- Whenever a forward or rearward-facing
child restraint is installed on the front passenger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
#; light must come on and stay on whenever the ignition is switched on. -- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3%;light does not come on and stay on, perform the checks described > page 273, Monitoring the AdvancedAirbag System. -- Take the child restraint off the front passenger seat and install it properly at one of the

Child safety
rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #¥%;light does not stay on whenever the ignition is switched on. -- Improper installation ofchild restraints can reduce their effectiveness or even prevent them from providing any protection. -- An improperly installed child restraint can interfere with the airbag as it deploys and seriously injure or even kill the child. -- Alwayscarefully follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the child safety seat or carrier. -- After checking to makesure that the child restraint is properly installed, make certain that the child restraint is correctly recognized by the capacitive passenger detection system in the front passenger seat and that
the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF %;light signals the correct front passenger frontal airbag status.
Z\ WARNING
Forward-facing child restraints: -- Always makesure the forward-facing seat
has been designed and certified by its manufacturer for use on front seat with a passenger front and side airbag. -- Never put the forward-facing child restraint up, against or very near the instrument panall. -- Always movethe front passenger seat to the highest position in the up and down adjustment range and moveit back to the rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft adjustment range, as far away from the airbag as possible, before installing the forwardfacing child restraint. -- Always makesure that the safety belt upper anchorage is behind the child restraint and not next to or in front of the child restraint so that the safety belt will be properly positioned. -- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on.

8W0012721BG

297

Child safety
ZA\ WARNING
Rearward-facing child restraints: --Achild in a rearward-facing child safety seat
installed on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured and can be killed if the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. -- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child against the backrest, center armrest, door or roof. -- Alwaysbe especially careful if you must install a rearward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat in exceptional cir-
cumstances.
-- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %;light comes on and stays on all the time whenever the ignition is switched on.
-- If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF 3, light
does not come on and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat ina rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer.
Nae elie MUNA ole dU meelaels
Use the convertible locking retractor to secure a child restraint.
Always heed the child safety seat manufacturer's instructions when installing a child restraint in your vehicle. To activate the convertible locking
retractor:
> Place the child restraint on a seat, preferably on the rear seat.
> Slowly pull the belt all the way out. > Route it around or through the child restraint
belt path > A\.
> Push the child safety seat down with your full weight to get the safety belt really tight.
> Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for that seating position.
> Guide the safety belt back into the retractor until the belt lies flat and snug on the child safety
seat.
> You should hear a "clicking" noise as the belt winds back into the inertia reel. Test the con-
298

vertible locking retractor by pulling on the belt. You should no longer be ableto pull the belt out of the retractor. The convertible locking retractor is now activated. > Make sure that the red release button is facing away from the child restraint so that it can be unbuckled quickly. > Pull on the belt to make sure the safety beltis properly tight and fastened so that the seat cannot move forward or sideways more than
one inch (2.5 cm).
ZA WARNING
Using the wrong child restraint or an improperly installed child restraint can cause serious personal injury or death in a crash. -- Always makesure that the safety belt retrac-
tor is locked when installing a child safety seat. An unlocked safety belt retractor cannot hold the child safety seat in place during normal driving or in a crash. -- Alwaysbuckle the child safety seat firmly in place even if a child is not sitting in it. A loose child safety seat can fly around during a sudden stop or in a crash.
-- Always make sure the seat backrest to which the child restraint is installed is in an upright position and securely latched into place and cannotfold forward. Otherwise, the seatback with the child safety seat attached toit could fly forward in the event of an accident or other emergencysituation.
-- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used > page 285. Special precautions apply when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat > page 262, Child
restraints on the front seat - some impor-
tant things to know.

Deactivating the convertible locking retractor
The convertible locking retractorfor child restraints will be deactivated automatically when the belt is wound all the way backinto the re-
tractor.
> Press the red button on the safety belt buckle. The belt tongue will pop out of the buckle.
> Guide the safety belt all the way back intoits stowed position.
Alwayslet the safety belt retract completely into its stowed position. The safety belt can now be used as an ordinary safety belt without the convertible locking retractor for child restraints.
If the convertible locking retractor should be activated inadvertently, the safety belt must be unfastened and guided completely back into its stowed position to deactivate this feature. If the
convertible locking retractor is not deactivated,
the safety belt will gradually become tighter and uncomfortable to wear.
Z\ WARNING
Improperly installed child safety seats increase the risk of serious personal injury and deathin collision. -- Never unfasten the safety belt to deactivate
the convertible locking retractor for child restraints while the vehicle is moving. You would notbe restrained and could be seriously injured in an accident. -- Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS whenever using a child restrained in a vehicle is being used > page 285. Special precautions apply when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat > page 262, Child restraints on the front seat - some important things to know.

Child safety
LATCH system (Lower
anchorages and tethers
for children)
COCRrideleyeae are miley are they related to child safety
To provide a simpler and more practicable way to attach the child restraint on the vehicle seat, Federal regulations require special lower anchorages in vehicles and devices on new child restraints to attach to the vehicle anchorages.
In the United States, the combination of the
tether anchorages and the lower anchorages is nowgenerally called the LATCH system for "Lower Anchorages and Tethersfor Children". In Canada, the terms "top tether" with "lower universal anchorages"(or "lower universal anchorage bars") are used to describe the system.
In other countries the term "ISOFIX"is used to describe the lower anchorages.
Forward-facing child restraints manufactured after September 1, 1999, are required by U.S. federal regulations to comply with new child head movement performance requirements. These new performance requirements make a tether necessary on most new child seats.
Installing a child restraint that requires a top tether without one can seriously impair the performance of the child restraint and its ability to protect the child in a collision. Installing a child restraint that requires a top tether without the top tether may be a violation of state law.
Child restraint manufacturers offer LATCH lower anchorages on their child seats with hook-on or push-on connectors attached to adjustable
straps.
In addition to the LATCH lower anchorages, these
child restraint systems usually require the use of tether straps to help keep the child restraint firmly in place.
ZXWARNING
Improper installation of child restraints will increase the risk of injury and death inacrash. |>

8W0012721BG

299

B4L-1436
BaL-1374

Child safety
-- Alwaysfollow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint you intend to install in your vehicle.
-- Never install a child restraint without a properly attached top tether strap if the child restraint manufacturer's instructions require the top tether strap to be used.
-- Improper useof child restraint LATCH lower anchorage points can lead toinjury in a collision. The LATCH lower anchorage points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints.
-- Never mount twochild restraint systems on one LATCH lower anchorage point.
-- Never secure or attach any luggage or other item to the LATCH lower anchorages.
Location
Fig. 242 Schematic overview: LATCH anchorage pointlocations (example)
The illustration showsthe seating locations in your vehicle which are equipped with the lower anchorages system.

Description The lower anchoragepositions are marked for quick locating.
Fig. 243 Rear seats: locator buttons for lower anchorages
Lower anchorages
The lower anchorage attachment pointsare located between the rear seatback and rear seat cushion fig. 243. Lower anchorages securethe child restraint in the seat without using the vehicle's safety belts. Anchorages provide a secure and easy-to-use attachment and minimize the possibility of improper child restraint installation. All child restraints manufactured after September 1, 2002, must have lower anchorage attachments for the LATCH system. Remember that the lower anchorage points are only intended for installation and attachmentof child restraints specifically certified for use with LATCHlower anchorages. Child restraints that are not equipped with the lower anchorage attachmentscan still be installed in compliance with the child restraint manufacturer's instructions on using vehicle safety belts.
ZA WARNING
Improper use of LATCH lower anchorages can cause serious personal injury in an accident. -- Alwayscarefully follow the child restraints
manufacturer's instructions for proper installation of the child restraint and proper use of the lower anchorages or safety belts in your vehicle. -- Never secure or attach any luggage or other items to the LATCH lower anchorages.

300

-- Alwaysread and heed the important information about child restraints in this chapter and WARNINGS page 285,Child safety.
Installing a child restraint with LATCH lower anchorages Wheneveryouinstall a child restraint alwaysfollow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Fig. 244 Lower anchorages: proper mounting
Mounting > Make sure the seatback of the rear seat bench is
in the upright position and securely latched in place. > Removethe covers to access the lower anchorage brackets. > Attach both hook-on connectorswith the spring catch release on the child safety seat onto the LATCH lower anchorage so that the connectors lock into place > fig. 244. > Pull on the connector attachments to make sure they are properly attached to the LATCH lower anchorage. > Pull straps tight following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Releasing > Loosen the tension on the straps following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. > Depress the spring catches to release the anchorage hooksfrom the lower anchorages.
Remember: Use tether straps to help keep the child restraint firmly in place.

B4L-1434

Child safety
ZX WARNING
Improper use of the LATCH system can increase the risk of serious personal injury and death in an accident. -- These anchors were developed onlyfor child
safety seats using the "LATCH" system. -- Never attach other child safety seats, belts
or other objects to these anchors. -- Always makesure that you hear a click when
latching the seat in place. If you do not hear a click the seat is not secure and could fly forward and hit the interior of the vehicle, or be ejected from the vehicle.
ZA\WARNING
Improper installation ofchild restraints will increase the risk of injury in an accident. -- Alwaysfollow the child restraint system
manufacturer's instructions for proper installation of the child restraint system and proper use of tether straps as well as the lower anchoragesor safety belts in your vehicle. -- Alwaysread and heed the important information and WARNINGS aboutchild safety and the installation of child restraint systems > page 285, Child safety.

8W0012721BG

301

Child safety

adil) chors and tether straps
22°x©oO
Applies to: Sedan Fig. 245 Tether anchors: recess flaps behind the rear seatbacks
Applies to: allroad Fig. 246 Tether anchors: attachmenthooklocations behind the rear seatbacks
Applies to: Sedan: The tether anchorsfor the rear seating positions are located in recesses in the rear window shelf. Applies to: allroad: The tether anchorsfor the rear seating positions are located on the backside of the rear seatbacks. A tether is a straight or V-shaped strap that attaches the top part of a child restraint to special anchorage pointsin the vehicle. The purposeof the tether is to reduce the forward movement ofthe child restraint in a crash, in order to help reducethe risk of head injury that could be caused bystriking the vehicle interior. Forwardfacing child restraints manufactured after September 1, 1999, are required by U.S. federal regulations to comply with new child head movement performance requirements. These new performance requirements makea tether necessary on most newchild safety seats.

88-0183

A WARNING
Improper installation ofchild restraints will increase the risk of injury and deathin a crash.
-- Alwaysfollow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint you intend to install in your Audi.
-- Improper useofchild restraint anchors(including tether anchors) can lead toinjuryin a collision. The anchors are designed to withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints.
-- Never mount twochild restraint systems on one LATCH lower anchor point.
-- Never attach twochild restraint systems to one tether strap or tether anchorage.
-- Never attach a tether strap to a tie-down hook in the luggage compartment.
-- Never usechild restraint tether anchorages to secure safety belts or other kinds of occupant restraints.
-- Never secure or attach any luggage or other items to the LATCH lower anchorages or to the tether anchors.

302

Installing the upper tether strap on the anchorage
Applies to: Sedan Fig. 247 Tether strap: proper routing and mounting

B4L-1435

Child safety
Releasing the tether strap
> Loosen the tension following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
> Depress the spring catch on the hook and release it from the anchorage.
cy Note
If you leave the child restraint with the tether strap firmly installed for several days, this could leave a mark on the upholstery on the seat cushion and backrest in the area where the tether strap was installed. The upholstery would also be permanently stretched around the tether strap. This applies especially to leather seats.

Applies to: allroad Fig. 248 Tether strap: proper routing and mounting
Installing the tether strap
> Release or deploy the tether strap on the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
> Guide the upper tether strap under the rear head restraint (raise the head restraint if necessary). For child restraints with V-tether straps, always makesure that the head restraint guide rods do notinterfere with any part of the top tether strap.
» Applies to: Sedan: Tilt the recess flap up to expose the anchor bracket.
» Applies to: Sedan: Attach the tether strap anchorage hook into the opening of the tether anchorage.
> Applies to: allroad: Guide the upper tether strap into the rear cargo area and slide the tether strap hook over the anchor bracket.
> Pull on the tether strap hook so that the spring catch of the hook engages.
> Tighten the tether strap firmly following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

Using tether straps on rearward-facing Caaice Made)
Currently, few rear-facing child restraint systems come with a tether. Please read and heed the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions carefully to determine how to properlyinstall the tether.
ZXWARNING
A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat installed on the front passenger seatwill be seriously injured and can be killedif the front airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag System. -- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety
seat or infant carrier with great force and will smash the child safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, or
door. -- If you mustinstall a rearward facing child
safety seat on the front passenger seat because of exceptional circumstances and the
PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF#;light does not
come on and stay on, immediately install the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear seating position and have the airbag system inspected by your Audi dealer.

8W0012721BG

303

Child safety
Additional information
Sources of information about child restraints and their use There are a number of sources of additional information about child restraint selection, installation and use: NHTSAadvises that the best child safety seat is the one that fits your child and fits in your vehicle, and that you will use correctly and consistently. Try before you buy! U.S. National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration Tel.: 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) http://www.nhtsa.gov http://www.safercar.gov National SAFE KIDS Campaign Tel.: (202) 662-0600 http://www.safekids.org Safety BeltSafe U.S.A.
Tel.: (800) 745-SAFE (English)
Tel.: (800) 747-SANO (Spanish) http://www.carseat.org Transport Canada Information Centre Tel.: 1-800-333-0371 or call 1-613-998-8616 if you are in the Ottawa area http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htm Audi Customer Experience Center Tel.: (800) 822-2834
304

Checking and Filling
Fuel
ahem elt)
The correct gasoline gradeis stated on the inside of the fuel filler door.
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter and mustonly be driven with unleaded gasoline.
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. For additional information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
The individual gasoline grades are differentiated by octane ratings. This value is given with (R +M)/2 equating to AKI or in RON.
The headings below match the sticker in the fuel filler door.
UNLEADED FUEL ONLYMIN. (R+M)/2 87
Regular / MIN. RON 91 Regular
Use regular gasoline with minimum 87 AKI / 91 RON > ©.
The maximum engine power is only reached if premium gasoline 91 AKI / 95 RON is used.
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY PREMIUM MIN. (R +M)/2 91 / SUPER MIN. RON 95
Using premium gasoline with minimum 91 AKI / 95 RON is recommended.
If premium gasoline is not available, you can also use regular gasoline 87 AKI / 91 RON. However this does reduce the engine power slightly.
@) Note -- Filling the tank just one time with leaded
fuel or other metallic additives will cause permanent deterioration to the catalytic converter function. -- When gasoline with an octane rating that is too low is used, high speeds or heavy engine load can lead to engine damage.

Checking and Filling

@ Tips
The vehicle maybe filled with fuel that has a higher octane rating than whatis required by the engine.

Gasoline mixture

Gasoline with alcohol or MTBE (Methyl-TertButyl-Ether)
You can use unleaded gasoline mixed with alcohol or MTBE (generally labeled as oxygenated compounds)as long as the fuel meets the following conditions:

Gasoline with methanol content (methylalcohol or methanol)
-- Anti-Knock Indexis at least 87 AKI --No more than 3% methanol -- More than 2% solvent

Gasoline with ethanol content (ethyl alcohol or ethanol)
-- Anti-Knock Indexis at least 87 AKI --No more than 15% ethanol

Gasoline with MTBE content
-- Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI --No more than 15% MTBE

Gasoline adapted to the season

Manygasoline fuels are adapted to the seasons.
When the season changes, we recommend refu-
eling at high-traffic gas stations. It is morelikely that the gasoline will be suitable for the season there.

() Note

-- Gasoline with methanol content that does

not meetthe specified conditions may cause

corrosion damage and damage toplastic or

rubber componentsin the fuel system.

-- Do not use gasoline that does not meet the

specifications.

-- If you are unable tofind outif a specific gas-

oline mixture meets the specifications, ask

the gas station operator or their fuel suppli-

er.

8W0012721BG

305

Checking and Filling
-- Do not use any gasoline mixture whose composition cannotbe identified.
-- Audi does not assume anyresponsibility for damage to the fuel system or for performance problems caused by using gasoline mixtures different from those specified. This type of damage also doesnotfall under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty or under the emissions control system warranty.
-- If you notice a higher fuel consumption or poor handling or performance problems due to such gasoline mixtures, we recommend fueling with unblended gasoline.
Gasoline additives
An important issue for many automobile manufacturers is combustion residue in the engine that results from the use of certain fuels.
Although typesof gasoline differ depending on the manufacturer, there are similarities. Certain substances in the gasoline may cause deposits in the engine. Additives in the gasoline that should keep the engine and fuel system clean do notall function equally.
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. For additional information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
If you use incorrect fuels over a long period of time, the maximum engine performance may be impaired by combustion residue.
@) Note
Damage or malfunctions caused bythe use of incorrect types of gasoline are not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refueling
Fueling procedure
Fig. 249 Rightrear side of the vehicle: opening the fuel filler door
Fig. 250 Fuel filler door with attached fuel cap
The fuel filler door is unlocked or locked by the central locking system. > Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to
open it > fig. 249. > Unscrew the tank cap counterclockwise. » Place the cap from above on the open fuel filler
door fig. 250. > Insert the fuel pump nozzleall the way into the
fuel filler neck. > Begin fueling. Once the fuel pump nozzle turns
off the first time, the fuel tank is full. Do not
continue fueling, or else the expansion space in the tank will be filled with fuel. > After the fuel pump has switched off, wait five seconds before removing the nozzle to allow the rest of the fuel to finish dripping into the fuel tank. > Turn the fuel cap clockwise until it clicks into place. > Close the fuel filler door and then press on the left side until it latches.

306

The correct fuel type for your vehicle can be found ona label located on the inside of the fuel
filler door. For additional information on fuel, see => page 305.
For the tank capacity in your vehicle, refer to the Technical Data > page 373.
To reduce the risk of fuel leaking out or vapors escaping, makesure that the fuel tank is closed correctly. Otherwise the Ey indicator light will
turn on.
If the central locking system malfunctions, there is a fuel filler door emergency release => page 308.
Z\ WARNING
Improper fueling procedures and improper
handling of fuel can lead to explosions,fires,
severe burns, and other injuries. -- Do not smoke. Keep away from open flames. -- The ignition must be switched off when re-
fueling. -- Mobile devices, radio devices, and other ra-
dio equipment should always be switched off when refueling. Electromagnetic rays could cause sparks and start fire. -- If you do not insert the fuel pump nozzleall the wayinto the filler tube, then fuel can leak out. Spilled fuel can ignite and start a fire. -- Never get into the vehicle when refueling. If there is an exceptional situation where you mustenter the vehicle, close the door and touch a metal surface before touching the fuel pump nozzle again. This will reduce the risk of electrostatic discharge that can cause flying sparks. Sparks can start a fire when refueling.
Z\ WARNING
Transporting fuel containers inside the vehicle is not recommended. Fuel could leak out of the container and ignite, especially during an
accident. This can cause explosions,fires, and injuries.

Checking and Filling
-- If you must transportfuel in a fuel contain-
er, note the following:
-- Alwaysplace the fuel container on the ground before filling. Never fill the fuel container with fuel while it is inside or on the vehicle. Electrostatic discharge can occur while refueling and the fuel vapors could ignite.
-- When using fuel containers made of metal, the fuel pump nozzle must always remain in contact with the container to reduce the risk of static charge.
-- Insert the fuel pump nozzle as far as possible into the filler opening while refueling.
-- Follow the applicable legal regulations in the country whereyou are driving when using, storing and transporting fuel containers.
-- Makesure that the fuel container meets the industry standards, for example ANSI or ASTM F852-86.
() Note
-- Removefuel that has overflowed onto any vehicle components immediately to reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle.
-- Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty. The irregular supply of fuel that re-
sults from that can cause engine misfires. Uncombusted fuel may enter the exhaust system and increase the risk of damage to the catalytic converter.
(@) For thesake of the environment
Do notoverfill the fuel tank, or fuel could leak out when the vehicle is warming up.
@) Tips
The fuel filler door on your vehicle does not lock if you lock the vehicle from the inside using the central locking switch.

8W0012721BG

) Depending on the engine

307

Checking and Filling Fuel filler door emergency release If the central locking system malfunctions, the fuel filler door can be unlocked manually.
Fig. 251 Rightside trim panelin the luggage compartment: opening the trim panel
Fig. 252 Luggage compartment:fuel filler door emergency release
The emergency opening mechanism is located behind the right side trim panel in the luggage compartment. > Open the cover in the side panel > fig. 251. > To unlock the fuel filler door, loosen the loop
from the retainer and then pull on the loop
carefully > fig. 252 >@.
> Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to open it > page 306,fig. 249.
® Note
Only pull on the loop until you feel resistance. You will not hear it release. If you continue to pull, you could damage the emergencyrelease mechanism.

Catalytic converter
The vehicle mayonly be driven with unleaded gasoline, or the catalytic converter will be destroyed. Never drive until the tank is completely empty. The irregular supply of fuel that results from that can cause engine misfires. Uncombusted fuel could enter the exhaust system, which could cause overheating and damage tothe catalytic
converter.
ZAWARNING
The temperature of the exhaust system is high, both when driving and after stopping the engine. -- Never touch the exhausttail pipes once they
have become hot. This could result in burns. -- Do not park your vehicle over flammable
materials such as grass or leaves because the high temperature of the emissions system could start a fire. -- Do not apply underbodyprotectant in the
exhaust system area, becausethis increases
the risk offire.
On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)
The On Board Diagnostic System monitors the engine and transmission componentsthat influ-
ence emissions.
Fig. 253 Footwell onleft side of the vehicle: connection port for the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)

308

On Board Diagnostic System
Engine data can be read out at the On Board Diagnostic System connection port using a special testing device > fig. 253.
Indicator light
If the S indicator light blinks or turns on, there is a malfunction that is causing poor emissions quality and that could damage the catalytic converter. Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction corrected.
The indicator light can also turn on if the fuel fill-
er cap is not closed correctly > page 306).
Z\ WARNING
Incorrect use of the connection portfor the On Board Diagnostic System can cause malfunctions, which can then result in accidents and serious injuries. -- Only allow an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility to read out the engine data.
Engine compartment
Melati mim saCeM tale meen) Seen 1n
Special care is required ifyou are working in the
engine compartment
For workin the engine compartment, such as checking and filling fluids, thereis a risk of in-
jury, scalding, accidents, and burns. For this
reason, follow all the warnings and general safety precautions provided in the following information. The engine compartmentis a dangerous area. > /\.
Z\ WARNING
-- Turn the engine off. -- Switch the ignition off. -- Set the parking brake.
-- On vehicles with a manual transmission,
movethe gearshift lever to neutral, and on

Checking and Filling
vehicles with an automatic transmission, select the "P" (Park) position. -- Allow the engine to cool. -- Keep children away from the engine com-
partment.
-- Never spill fluids on a hot engine. These fluids (such as the anti-freezing agent contained in the coolant) can ignite.
-- Avoid short circuits in the electrical system. -- Never reach into the radiator fan. The fan is
temperature-controlled and can turn on suddenly, even when the ignition is switched off. -- Never open the hood when there is steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment, because thereis a risk that you could be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is escaping. -- Never open the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the engine is warm. The cooling system is under pressure.
--To protect your face, hands, and arms from
hot steam or coolant, cover the cap with a thick cloth when opening. -- Do not removethe engine cover under any circumstances. This increases the risk of burns.
-- Due to the risk of electric shock, never touch
the ignition cable or other componentsin the electronic high-voltage ignition system when the engine is running or is starting. -- If a gear is engaged whilethe vehicle is stationary and the engine is running, do not press the accelerator pedal inadvertently. Pressing the accelerator pedal will cause the vehicle to move, and this could result in an accident. --If inspections or repairs must be performed while the engine is running, moving compo-
nents (such as the ribbed belt, generator,
and radiator fan) pose an additional risk.
-- First set the parking brake, and then move the gearshift lever to neutral on vehicles with a manual transmission or select the

8W0012721BG

) Depending on the engine

309

Checking and Filling
"P"(Park) position on vehicles with an automatic transmission. -- Always makesure that no parts of the body, jewelry, ties, loose clothing, and long hair can be caught in moving engine components. Before any work, always remove any jewelry and ties, tie back long hair, and makesureall clothing fits close to the body to to reducethe risk of anything becoming caught in engine compo-
nents.
-- Pay attention to the following warnings when work on the fuel system is required:
-- Do not smoke. -- Never work near open flames. -- Always have a working fire extinguisher
nearby. -- All work on the battery or electrical system
in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi-
cal burns, accidents, or burns. Because of this, all work must be performed only by an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. -- Limit your exposure to exhaust and chemicals to as short a time as possible.
Z\WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning:
-- Engine exhaust, some ofits constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids containedin vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals knownto the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. -- Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals knownto the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harms. Wash hands after handling.

CG) Note
When filling fluids, be sure not to add anyfluids to the wrong reservoirs. Otherwise severe malfunctions and engine damage will occur. @) For the sake of the environment You should regularly check the ground under your vehicle in order to detect leaks quickly. If
there are visible spots from oil or other fluids,
bring your vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to be checked. Opening and closing the hood The hoodis released from inside the vehicle.
Fig. 255 Unlocked hood: lever
Makesure the wiper arms are not raised up from the windshield. Otherwise the paint could be damaged. Opening the hood > With the driver's door open, pull the lever be-
low the instrument panel in the direction of the arrow > fig. 254.
> Raise the hoodslightly > A\.

B8W-0042

310

> Press the lever > fig. 255 in the direction of the arrow.This releases the hooks.
> Open the hood.
Closing the hood
> Push the hood down until you override the force of the struts.
>» Let the hoodfall lightly into the latch. Do not
press it in. > /\.
ZA WARNING
-- Never open the hood when thereis steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment, because thereis a risk that you could be burned. Wait until no steam or coolantis escaping.
Engine compartment ove
The most important check points.

Checking and Filling
-- For safety reasons, the hood must always be closed securely while driving. Because of this, always check the hood after closing it to makesureit is latched correctly. The hood is latched if the front corners cannotbe lifted.
-- If you notice that the hoodis not latched while you are driving, stop immediately and
close it, because driving when the hoodis
not latched increases the risk of an accident. -- If the hoodis not latched completely,it
could fly up while you are driving and ob-
struct your vision.

8W0012721BG

aimN Fig. 256 Typical location of the reservoir and the engine oil filler opening

Follow the safety precautions > page 309. @ Washer fluid reservoir (S) > page 320

@ Jump start points: (+) under a cover,(-) with hex head screw > page 319 > page 362
) Engine oil filler opening (7) > page 313 >

311

Checking and Filling

@® Engine oil label* with VW standard
=> page 312 © Coolant expansion tank (-£) > page 316 © Brakefluid reservoir (C)) > page 317
The coolant expansion tank and the engine oil filling opening maybe located in different places within the engine compartment, depending on the engine version.
Engine oil
If the engine oil level is too low
If you need to add engine oil, use an oil thatis listed on thesticker. The sticker is located at the front of the engine compartment > page 311, fig. 256.
If the recommended engine oil is not available, in an emergency you may add a maximum of 1
quart(1 liter) of ACEA C3 or API SN engine oil
one time until the next oil change.
For more information on the correct engine oil
for your vehicle, contact an authorized Audi deal-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have the oil changed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Service Facility.
Audi recommends
Slastiol (ZIDIBIEProrzssional
Audi recommends using the LongLife high-performanceengine oil from Audi Genuine Parts.
Messages
Engine oil pressure
& Turn off engine. Oil pressure too low
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the engine oil level > page 313.
--If the engine oil level is too low, add engine oil => page 314. Only continue driving once the indicator light turns off.
-- If the engine oil level is correct and the indicator light still turns on, turn the engine off and do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.

Engine oil level
Applies to: vehicles with oil level warning
B Please add oil immediately.
Stop the engine and do not continue driving. Check the engine oil level > page 313 and add engine oil immediately > page 314.
2 Please add max. x qt (x l) oil. You can continue driving
Add the amount ofoil shown immediately > page 314.
Reducing the oil level
3 Please reduceoil level.
There is too much oil in the engine and thereis a risk of damaging the catalytic converter or engine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have engine oil extracted if necessary. Avoid high engine speeds,full acceleration, and heavy engine loads.
Engine oil sensor
& Oil level sensor: oil change necessary. Please contact Service
Fuel has entered the engine oil. This will cause the engine oil level to rise slowly and the engine oil quality to decrease. Do not extract engine oil to reduce the level, becausethis will increase the risk of engine damage. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have engine oil extracted.
& Oil level system: malfunction! Please contact Service
The sensor that checks the engine oil level has malfunctioned. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
2 Oil pressure sensor: malfunction! Please contact Service
The sensor that checks the engine oil pressure has malfunctioned. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.

312

8W0012721BG

Engine warm-up request
F Please drive to warm up engine
Fuel has entered the engine oil, either due to low
outside temperatures or frequent short drives. Drive until the engine is warm so that the fuel in the engine oil will evaporate. Avoid high engine speeds, full accelerating, and heavy engine loads when doing this.
@ Tips
The oil pressure warning 2 is not an oil level indicator. Always check the oil level regularly.
Checking the engine oil level
The engine oil level can be checkedin the Info-
tainment system
Observethe safety precautions > A\ in Working in the engine compartment on page 309.
> Park the vehicle on a level surface. >» Shut the engine off when it is warm. > Switch only the ignition back on. > Wait approximately two minutes. > Select in the Infotainment system: the [MENU
button > Vehicle > left control button > Service & checks > Oil level. > Read the oil level in the display. Add engine oil if the bar in the oil level indicator is just below "min" > page 314.
@) Note
If the engine oil level is too low or too high, thereis a risk of engine damage.
@) Tips
The oil level indicator in the display is only an informational display. If the oil level is too low, a minimum oil warning appearsin the instrumentcluster. Add oil and close the hood. The current oil level is displayed in the Infotainment system the next time the ignition is switched on.
@ Tips
The engine oil consumption may be up to 0.5 quart/600 miles (0.5 liter/1,000 km), de-

Checking and Filling
pending on driving style and operating conditions. Consumption maybe higher during the first 3,000 miles (5,000 km). The engine oil level must be checked regularly. It is best to check each time you refuel your vehicle and before long drives. -- Because ofthe lubrication and cooling of
the engine, combustion engines consume oil. The oil consumption varies depending on the engine and may change during the servicelife of the engine. Engines generally consume moreoil at the beginning during the break-in period. Then oil consumption stabilizes after the break-in period. -- Under normal conditions, oil consumption depends on the quality and viscosity of the oil, the engine RPM, the climate conditions, and the road conditions. The dilution of oil from condensation or fuel residue as well as the age ofthe oil also play a role. Because engine wear increases with mileage, oil consumption will increase again over time until it may be necessary to replace worn components. -- Becauseall these variables play a role, it is not possible to define an oil consumption standard. Therefore, the oil level must be checked regularly. -- If you believe that your engine has in-
creased its oil consumption, contact an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to determine the cause. Please note that an exact oil consumption measurement must be done with the necessary care and accuracy and maytake time. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility is trained in accurately measuring the oil consumption. -- You can find information on engine oil and engine oil capacities for the USA at www. audiusa.com/help/maintenance, or for Canada at www.audi.ca/ca/web/en/ customer-area/care-and-maintenance/
audi-service-schedules.html,or call
800-822-2834.
313

Checking and Filling
Adding engine oil
Fig. 257 Engine compartment:engine oil filler opening cover
Observethe safety precautions > A\ in Working in the engine compartment on page 309. > Turn the engine off. > Open the hood > page 310. > Unscrew the cap %~ for the engine oil filler
opening > fig. 257. > Carefully add 0.5 quart (0.5 liter) of the correct
oil > page 312. > Close the engine oil filler opening cap. > Close the hood > page 310. > Restart the ignition after two minutes and read
the current oil level in the Infotainment system => page 313, Checking the engine oillevel. > Add moreoil if necessary.
ZX WARNING
-- When adding oil, do notlet oil drip onto hot engine components. This increases the risk ofa fire.
-- You mustseal the cap on the oil filler opening correctly so that oil does not leak out onto the hot engine and exhaust system when the engine is running, becausethis is a fire hazard.
-- Alwaysclean skin thoroughlyif it comes into contact with engine oil.
-- Engine oil is poisonous and mustbe kept out of reach of children.
-- Store the engine oil securely in the original container.
@) Note
-- The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage or malfunctions if the recom-
314

B8K-2120

mended intendeduse of the vehicle and maintenance measures listed in the Audi Owner's Manual and the Warranty & Maintenance Booklet were not followed. -- Only use high-grade engine oil that explicitly meets the Audi oil quality standard for your vehicle. Using another oil may cause severe vehicle damage. -- Do not mix any additional lubricants into the engine oil. Damage caused by such additives is not covered by the warranty.
(@) For the sake of the environment
-- Oil should never enter the sewer system or come into contact with the ground.
-- Follow the legal regulations in the country whereyou are located when disposing of emptyoil containers.
Changing engine oil
We recommend having the oil changed at an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Follow the safety precautions > page 309, Working in the engine compartment.
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals specified in the Warranty & Maintenance Booklet. This is very important because the lubrication function of the oil gradually declines during regular vehicle operation.
The engine oil should be changed morefrequently under certain circumstances. Havethe oil changed more frequently if you often drive short distances, your vehicle is predominantly in stopand-go traffic situations,is in very dusty environments, or is operated for long periods of time in temperatures below zero.
Cleansing additives in the oil makefresh oil appear darker after the engine has run briefly. This is normal and no reason to change the engine oil more frequently than recommended.
Becausecorrectly disposing of engine oil is difficult and special tools and technical knowledge are needed for an oil change, having your engine

oil changed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility is recommended.
If you change the engine oil yourself, please note the following important information:
ZA\ WARNING
If you change the engine oil on the vehicle yourself, the following precautions must be followed: -- Wear protective eyewear. -- Due to the risk of scalding, allow the engine
to cool downsufficiently. -- Maintain enough distance when you arere-
moving the oil drain plug. While doing this, keep your forearm parallel to the ground to reduce the risk of hotoil dripping down your arm. -- Drain the oil into a container designed for this purposethat is large enough to hold the full amountof oil in your engine. -- Engine oil is poisonous. Always store out of reach ofchildren. -- Prolonged contact of used engine oil with the skin may cause skin damage. Always wash oil off immediately with soap and wa-
ter to protect your skin.
@®) Note
Do not mix any additives with the engine oil. Additives may cause engine damage that is not covered by your New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
@ For the sake of the environment
-- Before changing the engine oil, make sure you can disposeof the used engine oil correctly.
-- Engine oil must always be disposed of correctly. Do not dump it in the yard, in the forest, or in open water,river channels, or sewers.
-- Have your used engine oil recycled by bringing it to a used oil collection site or contact a gas station.

Checking and Filling
Cooling system

The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture of purified water and coolant additive at the factory. This coolant must not be not changed.
The coolant level is monitored through the B indicator light > page 22. However, occasionally checking the coolant level manually is recommended.

If you must add coolant, use a mixture of water and coolant additive. Mixing the coolant additive with distilled water is recommended.

Coolant additive
The coolant additive is made of anti-freezing and corrosion protection agents. Only use the following coolant additives. These additives may be mixed with each other.

Coolant additive G12++ G13

Specification TL774G 1TL774]

The amount of coolant additive that needs to be
mixed with water depends on the climate where the vehicle will be operated. If the coolant addi-
tive percentage is too low, the coolant can freeze and damage the engine.

Warm
regions
Cold regions

Coolant additive
min. 40%
max. 45%
min. 50% max. 55%

Freeze protection
min. -13 °F
(-25 °C)
max. -40 °F (-40 °C)

C@) Note
-- Before the start of winter, have an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility check if the coolant additive in your vehicle matches the percentage appropriate for the climate. This is especially important when driving in colder climates.
-- If the appropriate coolant additive is not available in an emergency, do not add any other additive. You could damage the

8W0012721BG

315

Checking and Filling

engine. If this happens, only use water and restore the correct mixture ratio with the specified coolant additive as soon as possible. -- Onlyrefill with new coolant. -- Radiator sealant must not be mixed with the coolant.
Adding coolant
MIN
Fig. 258 Engine compartment- coolant expansion tank
(diagram): @ coverwith release button; 2) markings
Observethe safety precautions > page 309, Working in the engine compartment.
Checking the engine coolantlevel > Park the vehicle on level surface. > Switch the ignition off. > Read the coolant level on the coolant expansion
tank > page 311, fig. 256. The coolantlevel must be between the markings @) > fig. 258 when the engine is cold. When the engine is warm it can be slightly above the upper marking.
Adding coolant > Allow the engine to cool. > Place a large, thick towel on the coolant expan-
sion tank cover. > Push the release button (@) 9 fig. 258 on the
cap and carefully turn it to the left until you
feel resistance > /\.
> Push the release button again and remove the cap completely.
> Make sure thatthe fluid level remains stable. Add more coolant if necessary.
> Turn the cap to the right to tighten it until you feel resistance a second time.

Coolant loss usually indicates that thereis a leak. Immediately drive your vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and have the cooling system inspected. If the cooling system is not leaking, coolant loss can result from the coolant boiling due overheating and then being forced out of the cooling system.
ZA\ WARNING
-- The engine compartment in any vehicle can be a dangerous area. Stop the engine and allow it to cool before working in the engine compartment. Alwaysfollow the information found in > page 309, Working in the engine compartment.
-- Never open the hood if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. This increases the risk of burns. The cooling system is under pressure. When you no longer see or hear steam or coolant escaping, you may open the engine compartment with caution.
--When working in the engine compartment, remember that the radiator fan can switch on even if the ignition is switched off, which increasesthe risk of injury.
-- Coolant additive and coolant can be dangerous to your health. For this reason, store the coolantin the original container and away from children. Thereis a risk of poisoning.
@) Note
Do not add coolant if the expansion tank is empty. There maybeair in the cooling sys-
tem, which increases the risk of engine dam-
age. If this is the case, do not continue driv-
ing. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.

316

Checking and Filling

Brake fluid

equivalent quality may be used, and it must meet the U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Standard (FMVSS) 116 DOT4,Class 6.

B8K-2122

Fig. 259 Engine compartment:cap on brakefluid reservoir
Observe the safety precautions > A\ in Working
in the engine compartment on page 309.
Checking the brakefluid level
> Read the brakefluid level on the brakefluid reservoir > page 311, fig. 256. The brake fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX markings
>A.
The brakefluid level is monitored automatically.
Changing the brakefluid
Brakefluid should be changed at regular intervals. Have the brake fluid changed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. The authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility will inform you of the replacement intervals.
ZA WARNING
-- If the brake fluid level is below the MIN marking, it can impair the braking effect and
driving safety, which increase the risk of an
accident. Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
-- If the brakefluid is old, bubbles may form in
the brake system during heavy braking. This could impair braking performanceand driving safety, which increases the risk of an accident. -- The brakefluid in your vehicle must meet the standard VW 501 14 and is available at an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. If this brake fluid is not available, another high-grade brakefluid of

Q) Note
-- If the brake fluid level is above the MAX marking, brake fluid may leak out over the edge of the reservoir and result in damage to the vehicle.
-- Do not allow any brake fluid to come into contact with the vehicle paint, becauseit will corrode the paint.
Electrical system
If the = or fl indicator light turns on, there is a malfunction in the generator, the battery, or the vehicle electrical system.
= Electrical system: malfunction! Safely stop vehicle
Do not continue driving and switch the engine off => AX. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
[Hl Electrical system: malfunction! Restart not possible. Please contact Service
It will not be possible to restart the engine once you turn it off. Vehicle functions/driving stability maybe limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately.
z= Electrical system: malfunction! Please contact Service
Switch off all electrical equipment that is not needed. Vehicle functions/driving stability may be limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately.
z= Electrical system: low battery charge. Battery will be charged while driving
The starting ability may be impaired.
If this message turns off after a little while, the
vehicle battery has charged enough while driving. >

8W0012721BG

317

Checking and Filling

If this message does notturn off, drive immedi-
ately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
ZA\ WARNING
When thereis an electrical system malfunc-
tion, vehicle functions may not work and driv-
ing stability may be limited, which increases the risk of an accident. Stop driving and switch the engine off. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Battery
Pr laameeeelec)
Because of the complex power supply, all work on batteries such as disconnecting, replacing, etc., should only be performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility > A\.
Multiple batteries with different technologies maybe installed in your vehicle:
-- Vehicle battery (for example, for starting the engine, basic power supply) > page 319, Lead battery or > page 319, Other battery types
-- Auxiliary battery (for example, for recuperation or optional equipment) > page 319, Other bat-
tery types
Not running the vehicle for long periods of time
The battery will gradually drain if the vehicle does not run for long periods of time. To ensure
that the vehicle can still be started, the electrical equipment will be reduced or switched off => page 143. Some convenience functions, such as interior lighting or power seat adjustment,
may not be available under certain circumstances. These convenience functions will be available again once you switch the ignition on and start the engine.
Even when electrical equipment is switched off, the equipmentcan still drain the batteryif the vehicle is not driven for long periods of time. Deep draining results in a chemical reaction that destroys the inside of the battery. The battery

must be charged every month to prevent this = page 319. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.
Winter operation
Cold weather places higher demands on the battery. This results in reduced starting ability. Have the battery checked by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility before cold weather begins.
Z\ WARNING
-- All work on the batteryor electrical system in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemical burns, accidents, or burns. Because of this, all work must be performed only by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Never connect the charging cable or jump start cable directly to your vehicle battery. Only use the connections in the engine compartment > page 319.
ZA WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning: -- Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive problems. Wash hands after handling.
() Note
-- If the vehicle will be parked for long periods of time, protect the battery against the cold so that it will not be destroyed by "freezing" = page 319, Charging the battery.
-- There are electrical components under the cargo floor behind a trim panel that warm up during operation. To reduce the risk of the componentsoverheating, do not store objects such as blankets under the cargo floor. If the components overheat, they will switch off temporarily. This will be indicated by a message that will be displayed in the instrument cluster until the temperature returns to normal.

318

Lead battery

Explanation of warnings:
Always wear eye protection.

Batteryacid is highly corrosive. Always
wear protective gloves and eye protection.
® Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are forbidden.
A A highly explosive mixture of gases can form when charging batteries.
® Always keep children away from battery acid and the battery.
e/ Alwaysfollow the instructions in the oper-
oo ating manual.
@ For the sake of the environment ¥ Do notdispose oflead batteries in household trash. They contain harmful sub-
stan ces, such as sulfuric acid and lead, and also recyclable raw materials. Contact an author ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.

oy i1a yh 48

Explanation of warnings:

® Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are forbidden.

® Always keep children away from battery acid and the battery.

@faa/)

Alwaysfollow the instructions in the operating manual.

ZN WARNING
All work on the batteries must only be performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Gases that escape from these different battery types can be poisonous or flammable.
-Th e contents of these battery types can be
corrosive. If any battery contents come into
contact with the skin, flush the affected
area for at least 15 minutes with clean water. Then wash the affected area with soap.

Checking and Filling
Have the affected area examined by a medical professional.
() Note
Components must not be connected to the battery terminals and wires on these battery types because this increases the risk of damage, for example due to overvoltage.
@) For thesake of the environment
XX Do not dispose ofthesetypes of batteries in household trash. They contain harmful substances and recyclable raw materials. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information.
Charging the battery

Fig. 260 Engine compartment: connectors for a charger or jump start cables

Note the safety precautions > page 309, Work-
ing in the engine compartment, > /\ in Battery
general information on page 318 and > /\.

Requirement: only use chargers with a maximum charging current of 14.8 volts. The battery ca-
bles remain connected.

> Switch off the ignition and all electrical equip-

ment.

> Open the hood > page 310.

> Open the red cover on the positive terminal

> fig. 260.

> Clamp the charger terminal clampsto the jump

start pins according to the instructions. (pin un-

der the cover = "positive", pin with hexagonal

head = "negative").

> Insert the power cable for the charging device

into the socket and switch the device on.

8W0012721BG

319

Checking and Filling
> At the end of the charging process, switch the charger off and pull the power cable out of the socket.
> Removethe charging device terminal clamps. > Close the red cover on the positive terminal. > Close the hood > page 310.
ZX WARNING
-- Never connect the charging cable directly to your vehicle battery. Only use the connections in the engine compartment => page 319.
-- A highly explosive mixture of gases can form when charging batteries. Only charge the battery in well-ventilated areas.
-- A drained battery can freeze at temperatures around 32 9F (0 2C). Do not charge or
use a frozen or thawed battery. If ice forms,
the battery housing can crack and battery
electrolyte can leak out, which increases the
risk of an explosion and chemical burns. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for more information. -- Do not connector disconnect the charging cable while charging becausethis increases the risk of an explosion.
@) Tips Read all of the manufacturer's instructions for the charger before charging the battery.
Windshield washer system
Fig. 261 Engine compartment: washer fluid reservoir cap
The windshield washer fluid reservoir S contains the cleaning solution for the windshield and the
320

B8W-0125

headlight washer system* > page 311, fig. 256. The reservoir capacity can be found in => page 373.
To reducethe risk oflime scale deposits on the spray nozzles, use clean water with low amounts of calcium. Always add windowcleaner to the water. When the outside temperatures are cold, an anti-freezing agent should be added to the water so that it does not freeze.
C) Note
-- The concentration of anti-freezing agent mustbe adjusted to the vehicle operating conditions and the climate. A concentration that is too high can lead to vehicle damage.
-- Never add radiator anti-freeze or other additives to the washer fluid.
-- Do not use a glass cleaner that contains paint solvents, because this could damage the paint.
Service interval display
The service interval display detects when your vehicle is due for service.
Checking service intervals
You can check the remaining distance or time until the next oil change or next inspection in the Infotainment system.
> Select in the Infotainment system: the [MENU button > Vehicle > left control button > Service & checks > Service intervals.
Resetting the indicator
An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility will reset the service interval display after performing service.
If you have changed the oil yourself, you must reset the oil change interval.
> Select in the Infotainment system: the|MENU button > Vehicle > left control button > Service & checks > Service intervals > Reset oil change interval.

If an oil change or inspection is due, you can accessit in the Infotainment system. The display
worksin two stages:
-- Service reminder: after a certain distanceis driven, a message appearsin the instrument cluster display every time the ignition is switched on. The remaining distance and time is displayed briefly.
-- Service due: if your vehicle has reached a service interval, a message appearsbriefly after switching the ignition on.
() Note
-- Only reset the oil change indicator if the oil was changed.
-- Following the serviceintervalsis critical to maintaining the service life and value of your vehicle, especially the engine. Even if the mileage on the vehicleis low, do not exceed the time for the next service.

Checking and Filling

8W0012721BG

321

Wheels
Wheels
Wheels and Tires
General information
> Check your tires regularly for
damage, such as punctures, cuts, cracks, and bulges. Remove
foreign objects from the tire tread. >If driving over curbs or similar obstacles, drive slowly and approach the curb at an angle. > Have faulty tires or rims replaced immediately. >Protect your tires from oil,
grease, and fuel.
>Mark tires before removing them so that the same running direction can be maintained if they are reinstalled. >Lay tires flat when storing and
store them ina cool, dry location
with as little exposureto light as possible.
A WARNING
--Never drive faster than the maximum permitted speed for your tires. This could cause the tires to heat up too much. This increases the risk of an accident because it can cause the tire to burst.

--Always adapt your driving to the road and traffic conditions. Drive carefully and reduce your speed on icyor slip-
pery roads. Even winter tires
can lose traction on black ice.
() Note
--Please note that summer and winter tires are designed for the conditions that are typical in those seasons. Audi recommends using winter tires during the winter months. Low temperatures significantly decrease the elasticity of summ-
er tires, which affects traction
and braking ability. If summer tires are used in very cold tem-
peratures, cracks can form on
the tread bars, resulting in
permanent tire damage that can cause loud driving noise and unbalanced tires.
--Burnished, polished or
chromed rims must not be used in winter driving conditions. The surface of the rims does not have sufficient corrosion protection for this and could be permanently damaged byroad salt or similar substances.

322

Tire designations
Fig. 262 Tire designations on the sidewall
@ Tires for passenger vehicles (if applicable)
"P" indicates a tire for a passenger vehicle. "T" indicates a tire desig-
nated for temporaryuse.
@ Nominal width
Nominal width of the tire between the sidewalls in millime-
ters. In general: the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
@) Aspect ratio
Height/width ratio expressed as a
percentage.

B8K-2316

Wheels

@ Tire construction

Size of the rim diameter in inches.

© Load index and speed rating
The load index indicates the tire's
load-carrying capacity.
The speed rating indicates the maximum permitted speed. Also see > A in General information on
page 322.

"EXTRA LOAD", "xl" or "RF" indicates that the tire is reinforced or is an Extra Load tire.

Speed rating
P
Q
R S T
U
H
Vv
Zz w Y

/Maximum permitted speed
up to 93 mph (150 km/h) up to 99 mph (160 km/h) up to 106 mph (170 km/h) up to 110 mph (180 km/h) up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
up to 124 mph (200 km/h)
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)?
above 149 mph (240 km/h)? up to 168 mph (270 km/h)? up to 186 mph (300 km/h)?

@) For tires above 149 mph (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the code "ZR".

8W0012721BG

323

Wheels
@ US DOT number (TIN) and
manufacture date
The manufacture dateis listed on the tire sidewall (it may only appear on the inner side of the tire):
DOT... 2218...
means, for example, that the tire
was produced in the 22nd week of the year 2018.
@) Audi Original Tires
Audi Original equipment tires with the designation "AO" have
been specially matched to your
Audi. When used correctly, these
tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility will be able to provide you with moreinformation.
@) Mud and snowcapability
"M/S"or "M+S"indicates the tire
is suitable for driving on mud and
snow./A\ indicates a winter tire.
Composition of the tire cord and materials
The number ofplies indicates the number of rubberized fabric layers in the tire. In general: the
morelayers, the more weight a
tire can carry. Tire manufacturers

mustalso specify the materials used in the tire. These include
steel, nylon, polyester and other materials.
@) Maximum permitted load
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that the tire can carry.
@ Uniform tire quality grade
standards for treadwear,
traction and temperature resistance
Treadwear, traction and tempera-
ture ranges > page 339.
@ Runningdirection
The arrowsindicate the running direction of unidirectional tires. You must always follow the specified running direction > page 354.
Maximum permitted
inflation pressure
This number indicates the maximum pressureto which a tire can be inflated under normal operating conditions.

324

Glossary of tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
means the combined weight (in
excess of those standard items
which may be replaced) of auto-
matic transmission, power steer-
ing, power brakes, power win-
dows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).
Aspect ratio
means the ratio of the height to the width of the tire in percent. Numbersof 55 or lower indicate a low sidewall for improved steering response and better overall handling on dry pavement.
Bead
means the partof the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped tofit the rim.
Bead separation
means a breakdown of the bond between componentsin the bead.

Wheels
Cord
means the strands forming the plies in the tire.
Cold tire inflation pressure
means the tire pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for a tire of a designated size that has not been driven for more than a coupleof miles (kilometers) at low speeds in the three hour period before the tire pressure is measured or adjusted.
Curb weight
means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil, and coolant, air condi-
tioning and additional weight of optional equipment.
Extra load tire
means a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire. Extra load tires may be identified as "XL", "xL', "EXTRA LOAD", or "RF" on the sidewall.

8W0012721BG

325

Wheels
Gross Axle Weight Rating
("GAWR")
means the load-carrying capacity
of a single axle system, measured
at the tire-ground interfaces.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
("GVWR")
means the maximum total loaded
weight of the vehicle.
Groove
means the space between two adjacent tread ribs.
Load rating (code)
means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
Maximum load rating
means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.
Maximum loadedvehicle
weight
means the sum of:
(a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight, and
(d) Production options weight

Maximum (permissible)
inflation pressure
means the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated. Also called "maximum inflation pressure."
Normal occupant weight means 150 lbs. (68 kilograms)
times the number of occupants seated in the vehicle up to the total seating capacity of your vehicle.
Occupant distribution
means distribution of occupants in a vehicle.
Outer diameter
means the overall diameter of an inflated newtire.
Overall width
means the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs.
Ply
means a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.

326

Production options weight
means the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs. (2.3 kg) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight,including heavy duty brakes, ride
levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Radial ply tire
means a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Recommended inflation pressure
see > page 325, Cold tire infla-
tion pressure.
Reinforced tire
means a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire. Reinforced tires may be identified as "XL", "xl", "EXTRA LOAD", or "RF" on the sidewall.

Wheels
Rim
means a metal supportfor a tire
ora tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.
Rim diameter
means nominal diameter of the
bead seat. If you change your wheel size, you will have to pur-
chase new tires to match the new rim diameter.
Rim size designation
means rim diameter and width.
Rim width
means nominal distance between
rim flanges.
Sidewall
means that portion of a tire between the tread and bead.
Speed rating (letter code)
means the speed at which a tireis designed to be driven for extended periods of time. The ratings
range from 93 mph (150 km/h) to 186 mph (298 km/h) > table
on page 323. You maynotfind this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
The speed rating letter code, where applicable, is molded on the tire sidewall and indicates the >

8W0012721BG

327

Wheels

maximum permissible road speeds. See also > A in General
information on page 322.
Tire pressure monitoring system
means a system that detects when one or moreofa vehicle's tires are underinflated and illumi-
nates a low tire pressure warning telltale.
Tread
means that portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Tread separation
means pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass.
Treadwear indicators (TWI)
means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread. See => page 331, Treadwearindicator for more information on measuring tire wear.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
is a tire information system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)that is designed to help buyers makerelative com-

parisons among tires. The UTQG is not a safety rating and not a guarantee that a tire will last for a prescribed number of miles (kilometers) or perform in certain way. It simply gives tire buyers additional information to combine with other considerations, such as price, brand loyalty and dealer recommendations. Under UTQG, tires are graded bythe tire manufacturers in three areas:
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. The UTQG information on the tires, molded into the sidewalls.
U.S. DOTTire Identification
Number (TIN)
This is the tire's "serial number".
It begins with the letters "DOT"
and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbersor letters indicate the plant where it was manufactured, and the last four numbers represent the week and year of manufacture. For example,
DOT... 2218...
means that the tire was produced in the 22nd week of 2018. The other numbers are marketing codes that may or may not be used >

328

Wheels

by the tire manufacturer. This information is used to contact consumersif a tire defect requires a recall.
Vehicle capacity weight
means the rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lbs. (68 kilograms) times the vehicle's desig-
nated seating capacity.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
means that load on an individual tire that is determined bydistributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.
Vehicle normal load on the tire
means that load on an individual tire that is determined bydistributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with > ta-
ble on page 334) and dividing by
two.
Occupantloading anddistribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating
capacities
Refer to the tire inflation pressure label > page 332, fig. 265 for the

number of seating positions. Refer to the table > table on page 334 for the number of people that correspond to the vehicle normal load.
Newtires or wheels
Audi recommends having all work on tires or wheels performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. These facilities have the proper knowledge and are equipped with the required tools and replacement parts.
>Newtires do not yet have the optimum gripping properties. Drive carefully and at moderate speeds for the first 350 miles
(500 km) with newtires. > Only use tires with the same de-
sign, size (rolling circumfer-
ence), and as close to the same
tread pattern as possible on all four wheels. >Do notreplace tires individually. At least replace both tires on the same axle at the same time. > Audi recommends that you use Audi Original Tires. If you would
like to use different tires, please
note that the tires may perform >

8W0012721BG

329

Wheels
differently even if they are the
same size > A.
>If you would like to equip your vehicle with a tire and rim combination that is different from what was installed at the factory, consult with an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility before making a purchase > A.
Because the sparetire" is different from the regular tires installed on the vehicle (such as winter
tires or wide tires), only use the
sparetire* temporarily in case of emergency and drive carefully while it is in use. It should be replaced with a regular tire as soon as possible.
Applies to: vehicles with all wheel drive: All four wheels must be equipped with tires that are the same brand and have the same construction and tread pattern so that the drive system is not damaged bydifferent wheel speeds.
For this reason, in case of emer-
gency, only use a sparetire* that is the same circumference as the regular tires.

Z\ WARNING
--Do notusesteel rims that are
17 inches or larger. Otherwise,
damage to the vehicle and an
accident could result. --Only use tire/rim combina-
tions and suitable wheel bolts that have been approved by Audi. Otherwise, damage to
the vehicle and an accident could result.
--For technical reasons,it is not
possible to use tires from oth-
er vehicles. In some cases, you
cannot even use tires from the same vehicle model.
--Makesurethat the tires you select have enough clearance to the vehicle. Replacement
tires should not be chosen simply based on the nominal
size, because tires with a different construction can differ
greatly even if they are the
same size. If there is not
enough clearance, the tires or
the vehicle can be damaged and this can reduce driving safety and increase the risk of
an accident.

330

--Only use tires that are more than six years old when abso-
lutely necessary and drive
carefully when doing so.
--Do not use run-flat tires on
your vehicle. Using them when
not permitted can lead to ve-
hicle damage or accidents. --If you install wheel covers on
the vehicle, make sure theyal-
low enough air circulation to
cool the brake system. If they
do not, this could increase the risk of an accident.
Tire wear and damage
Fig. 263 Tire profile: creaniwene ace
tor Tire wear
Check the tires regularly for wear.

Wheels
--Inflation pressure that is too low or high can increase tire wear
considerably.
--Driving quickly through curves,
rapid acceleration, and heavy
braking increasetire wear.
--Havean authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility check the wheel alignment if
there is unusual wear.
--Have the wheels rebalanced if an
imbalance is causing noticeable
vibration in the steering wheel. If you do not, the tires and other
vehicle components could wear more quickly.
Treadwear indicator
Original equipment tires contain treadwear indicators in the tread pattern, which are bars that are 1/16 in (1.6 mm) high and are spaced evenly around the tire perpendicular to the running direc-
tion > fig. 263. The letters "TWI" or triangles on the tire sidewall
wienadriciantdeictahteolrosc.ation of the tread-

The tires have reached the mini-
mum tread depth!) whenthey >

8W0012721BG

D Obey anyapplicable regulations in the country where the vehicle is being operated.
331

Wheels

have worn down tothe treadwear indicators. Replace the tires with new ones > A.
Tire rotation
Rotating the tires regularly is recommended to ensurethe tires
wear evenly. To rotate the tires, install the tires from the rear axle on the front axle and vice versa. This will allow the tires to have
approximately the same length of service life.
For unidirectional tires, make sure
the tires are installed according to the running direction indicated on the tire sidewall > page 354.
Hidden damage
Damage to tires and rims can often occur in locations that are hidden. Unusual vibrations in the vehicle or pulling to one side may indicate that thereis tire damage. Reduce your speed immediately. Check the tires for damage. If no damage is visible from the outside, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the vehicle inspected.

Z\ WARNING
Tread that has worn too low or uneven tread depths on the tires can reduce driving safety. This can increase the risk of an accident because it has a negative effect on handling, driving
through curves, and braking,
and because it increases the risk of hydroplaning when driving through deep puddles.
SUT cw yee)
ef)

B8W-0152

Fig. 264 Driver's side B-pillar: tire pressure label

B8K-1151

SNEOAMTBIRNEGDCEAPPALCAICTYES TTOOTTAALL py FARVOANNTT

1x9Aa oROo RFIER) u E bs. a20Fr

FPTRNIORENEUT DEAA`SRRVSREEPAICAANEROTRREU,ERS

DIMESNIZSEIONS

PRESSCIOOLNDD ETISREPPNREEUSSASURFEROID
Ma KPA, MM PSI a KPA, Ml PSI
ll KPA, Ml PSI

Fig. 265 Tire pressure label
The correct tire pressure for tires installed at the factoryis listed on a label. The label is located on the >

332

B-pillar (driver's side) > fig. 264, > fig. 265. The location may vary depending on the model.
Use the tire pressure specified for a normal vehicle load when the vehicle is partially loaded > table on page 334. If driving the vehicle when fully loaded, you must increase the tire pressure to the maximum specified pressure > A.
Checking and correctingtire pressure
>Check the tire pressure at least once per month and also check it before every long drive.
> Always check the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Do not reduce the pressureif it increases when the tires are warm.
>Check the label > fig. 265 for the correct tire pressure based on vehicle load. > Correct the tire pressure if necessary. >Store the newtire pressure in the Infotainment system > page 341. >Check the pressure in the spare tire (compact sparetire)*. Al-
ways maintain the maximum
temperature that is specified for the tire.

Wheels
Z\ WARNING
Always adaptthe tire pressure to your driving style and the vehicle load. --Overloading can lead to loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of an accident. Read and follow the important safety precautions in > page 335, Tires and vehicle loadlimits. --The tire must flex moreif the tire pressure is too low or if the vehicle speed or load are too high. This heats the tire up too much. This increases the risk of an accident because it can cause the tire to burst and result in loss of vehicle control.
--Incorrect tire pressure increas-
es tire wear and has a negative effect on driving and braking
behavior, which increases the
risk of an accident.
() Note
Replace lost valve caps to reduce the risk of damage to the tire valves.

8W0012721BG

333

Tire pressure thatis too low increases fuel consumption.
Uw edeem] 9)
Please note that the information contained in the following table was correct at the time of printing, and the information is subject to change. If there are any differences, you should always follow the tire pressure sticker
=> page 332, fig. 264.

Makesure that the tire designation on your tire matches the designation on the tire pressure label and the tire pressure table.
The following table lists recommended tire pressures in cold tires according to the load and the size of the tires installed.

A4 sedan:
2.0L
aGacsorliinPpeden-
gine
A4 sedan: 2.0L
tGasooloinPpn.een-
gine
S4 sedan:
3.0L
6G-acsyolliinndeeren-
gine

225/50 R17 94H
245/40 R18 93Y
245/40 R18 97H 245/35 R19 93Y
225/50 R17 94H 245/40 R18 93Y
245/40R1897H
245/35 R19 93Y
245/40 R18 97Y
245/40 R18 97H
245/35 R19 93Y

30 210 28 190 32 220 32 220
30 210 28 190 32 220] 32 220
35 240 32 220 35 240] 35 240 35 240 32 220 36 250] 39 270
30 210 28 190 35 240] 35 240 30 210 28 190 33 230] 33 230
35 240 32 220 36 250| 36 250
36 250 33 230 41 280 44 300
36 250 33 230 38 260] 38 260
35 240 32 220 36 250 36 250
39 270 35 240 44 300] 45 310

334

Wheels

Model/
Engine
allroad:
2.0L
4g-acsyolliinndeeren-
gine

Tire designation
225/55 R17 97Y
245/45 R18 96Y
(345/45R18100H
245/40 R19 98Y

Tire pressure

Normal load (up to 3 people)"

Maximum load

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

PSI

kPA

PSI

kPA

PSI kPA

PSI

kPA

220

200

230

210

32 220 29 200 35 240 32 220
32 220 32 220 35 240/ 35 240

240

220

260

240

a) Two peoplein the front, one person in the rear

A WARNING
Please note the important safety precautions regarding tire pressure > page 332 and load limits > page 335.
Tires and vehicle load limits
There are limits to the amount of
load or weight that any vehicle
and any tire can carry. A vehicle that is overloaded will not handle
well and is moredifficult to stop. Overloading can not only lead to
loss of vehicle control, but can al-
so damage important parts of the vehicle and can lead to sudden
tire failure, including a blowout and sudden deflation that can cause the vehicle to crash.
Your safety and that of your passengers also depends on making sure that load limits are not exceeded. Vehicle load includes ev-

erybody and everything in and on the vehicle. These load limits are technically referred to as the vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ("GVWR").
The "GVWR"includes the weight
of the basic vehicle, all factory in-
stalled accessories, a full tank of
fuel, oil, coolant and other fluids plus maximum load. The maxi-
mum load includes the number of passengersthat the vehicle is intended to carry ("seating capacity") with an assumed weight of
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each passenger at a designated seating position and the total weight of any luggage in the vehicle. If you tow
a trailer, the weight of the trailer
hitch and the tongue weight of the loaded trailer must be included as part of the vehicle load.
The Gross Axle Weight Rating ("GAWR") is the maximum load >

8W0012721BG

335

Wheels
that can be applied at each of the
vehicle's two axles.
The fact that there is an upper limit to your vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating means that the total weight of whatever is being carried in the vehicle (including the weight of a trailer hitch and the tongue weight of the loaded trailer) is limited. The more passengersin the vehicle or passengers who are heavier than the standard weights assumed mean that less weight can be carried as luggage.
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and the Gross Axle Weight Rating are listed on the safety compliance sticker on the driver's side Bpillar respectively on the front end of the driver's door.
Z\ WARNING
Overloading a vehicle can cause
loss of vehicle control, a crash or other accident, serious per-
sonal injury, and even death. --Carrying more weight than
your vehicle was designed to carry will prevent the vehicle from handling properly and increase the risk of the loss of vehicle control.

--The brakes on a vehicle that has been overloaded may not be able to stop the vehicle within a safe distance.
--Tires on a vehicle that has been overloaded can fail suddenly, including a blowout and sudden deflation, causing loss of control and a crash.
--Always make sure that the total load being transported including the weight ofa trailer hitch and the tongue weightof a loaded trailer -
does not make the vehicle heavier than the vehicle's
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Determining correct load Thali
Use the example belowto calculate the total weight of the passengers and luggage or other things that you plan to transport so that you can make surethat your vehicle will not be overloaded.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement "THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD >

336

NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OR XXX
LBS" on your vehicle's placard (tire inflation pressure label) => page 332, fig. 265.
. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and passengersthat will be riding in your vehicle. . Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from "XXX" kilograms or "XXX"
pounds shown on the sticker> page 332, fig. 265. . The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. . If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer

Wheels
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. >Check the tire sidewall (= page 323, fig. 262) to determine the designated load rating for a specific tire.
Wheel bolts and rims
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be clean and loosen/tighten easily.
Rims
Rims with a bolted rim ring* or with bolted wheel covers* consist of multiple pieces. These components were bolted together using special bolts and a special procedure. You mustnot repair or disassemble them > A\.
ZA WARNING
Wheel bolts that are tightened or repaired incorrectly can become loose and result in loss of vehicle control, which increases the risk of an accident. For the correct tightening specification, see > page 354, Finishing. -- Always keep the wheel bolts and the threads
in the wheel hub clean and free of grease. -- Only use wheel bolts thatfit the rim. -- Always have damagedrims repaired by an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Never repair or disassemble rims yourself, because this increases the risk of an accident.
Winter tires significantly improve the vehicle's handling when driving in winter conditions. Be-
cause of their construction (width, compound,

8W0012721BG

337

Wheels

tread pattern), summer tires provide less traction on ice and snow.
> Use winter tires on all four wheels. > Only use winter tires that are approved for your
vehicle. > Please note that the maximum permitted
speed may be lower with winter tires > A\ in General information on page 322. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility can inform you about the maximum permitted speed for your tires. > Check the tire pressure after installing wheels => page 332.
The effectiveness of winter tires is reduced greatly when the tread is worn down to a depth of 0.16 in (4 mm). The characteristics of winter tires also decrease greatly as the tire ages, regardless of the remaining tread.
@ For the sake of the environment
Reinstall summer tires at the appropriate time, because they provide better handling when roads are free of snow and ice. Summer
tires cause less road noise, tire wear, and fuel consumption.
@ Tips
You can also use all season tires instead of winter tires. Please note that in some coun-
tries where winter tires are required, only win-
ter tires with the -4\ symbol may be permitted.
Snow chains improve both driving and braking in winter road conditions.
> Only install snow chains on the front wheels. > Check and correct the seating of the snow
chains after driving a few feet,if necessary. Follow the instructions from the manufacturer. > Note the maximum speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). Observethe local regulations.
Use of snow chains is only permitted with certain rim/tire combinations due to technical reasons. Check with an authorized Audi dealer or author-

ized Audi Service Facility to see if you may use snow chains.
Use fine-mesh snowchains. They must not add
more than 0.53 in (13.5 mm) in height, including
the chain lock.
You must remove the snow chains on roads without snow. Otherwise, you could impair driving ability and damage the tires.
Z\ WARNING
Using incorrect snow chains or installing snow chains incorrectly can result in loss of vehicle
control, which increasesthe risk of an acci-
dent.
C) Note
Snowchains can damage the rims and wheel covers* if the chains come into direct contact with them. Remove the wheel covers*first. Use coated snow chains.
G) Tips
When using snowchains, it may be advisable to limit the ESC > page 139.
Low-profile tires
Applies to: vehicles with low-profile tires
Compared to other tire/rim combinations, low-
profile tires offer a wider tread surface and a larger rim diameter with shorter tire sidewalls. This results in an agile driving style. However,it may reduce the level of comfort and increase road noise when driving on roads in poor condition.
Low-profile tires can become damaged more quickly than standard tires when driving over large bumps, potholes, manhole covers, and curbs. Therefore, it is particularly important to maintain the correct tire pressure > page 332.
To reduce the risk of damage tothe tires and rims, drive very carefully on poor roads.
Check your wheels regularly every 2,000 mi (3,000 km) for damage. For example, check for bulges/cracks on the tires or deformations/cracks on the rims.

338

Wheels

After a heavy impact or damage, havethe tires and rims inspected or replaced immediately by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Low-profile tires can wear out faster than standard tires.
Uniform tire quality grading
-- Tread wear -- Traction AAABC -- Temperature A BC
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire side wall between tread shoulder and maximum section width > page 323, fig. 262.
For example: Tread wear 200, Traction AA, Temperature A.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Tread wear
The tread weargrade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performanceoftires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
maydepart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance SA.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the mate-
rial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure > A\.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performanceon the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Z\ WARNING
The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Z\ WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.
Z\ WARNING
Temperature grades apply to tires that are properly inflated and not over or underinflated.
Tire pressure monitoring system
(1) General notes
Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on >

8W0012721BG

339

Wheels

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or moreofyour tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and mayaffect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system maynotbe able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacementor alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacementor alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

If the tire pressure monito g indicator appears
Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator
The tire pressure indicator in the instrument cluster informsyou if the tire pressure is too low or if there is a system malfunction.
Using the ABS sensors, the tire pressure monitor-
ing system compares the tire tread circumference and vibration characteristics of the individual tires. If the pressure changesin one or more tires, this is indicated in the instrumentcluster display with an indicator light @ and a message. If only one tire is affected, the location of that tire will be indicated.
The tire pressures must be stored in the Infotainment system again each time the pressures change (switching between partial and full load pressure) or after changing or replacing a tire on
your vehicle > page 341. The tire pressure monitoring system only monitors the tire pressure you have stored. Refer to the tire pressure label for
the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle => page 332, fig. 265.
Tire tread circumference and vibration characteristics can change and cause a tire pressure warning if:
-- The tire pressure in one or moretires is too low
-- The tires have structural damage -- The tire was replaced or the tire pressure was
changed and it was not stored > page 341 -- Tires that are only partially used are replaced
with newtires
Indicator lights
@® - Loss of pressure in at least one tire > A\. Check the tires and replaceor repair if necessary. Check/correct the pressures ofall four tires and store the pressure again in the Infotainment system > page 341.
is (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Tire pressure: malfunction! See owner's manual. fi appears after switching the ignition on or while driving and the (19) indicator light in the instrument cluster blinks for approximately one minute and then stays on, there is system malfunction. >

340

Try to store the correct tire pressures => page 341. In some cases, you mustdrive for several minutes after storing the pressures until the indicator light turns off. If the indicator light doesturn off or turns on again after a short period of time, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the malfunction corrected.
ZA\ WARNING
-- If the tire pressure indicator appearsin the display, reduce your speed immediately and avoid any hard steering or braking maneuvers. Stop as soon as possible and check the tires and their pressure.
-- The driver is responsible for maintaining the correct tire pressure. You must check the tire pressure regularly.
-- Under certain conditions (such as a sporty driving style, winter conditions, or unpaved roads), the tire pressure monitoring system indicator may be delayed.
@) Tips
-- The tire pressure monitoring system can also stop working when there is an ESC malfunction.
-- Using snow chains mayresult in a system malfunction.
-- The tire pressure monitoring system in your Audi was calibrated with "Audi Original Tires" > page 329. Using thesetires is recommended.

Wheels
monitoring > Store tire pressure > Yes, store
now.
@ Tips Do notstore the tire pressures if snow chains are installed.

Storing tire pressures
Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator
If the tire pressure changesor a tire is replaced, it must be confirmed in the Infotainment system.
> Before storing the tire pressures, make sure the tire pressures in all four tires meet the specified values and are adapted to the load => page 332.
> Switch the ignition on. > Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] but-
ton > Vehicle > Service & checks > Tire pressure

8W0012721BG

341

Care and cleaning

Care and cleaning
General information
Regular, proper care helps to maintain your vehicle's value. It can also be a requirement when submitting warranty claims for corrosion damage and paint defects on the body.
The required cleaning and care products can be obtained from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Service Facility. Read and follow the instructions for use on the packaging.
ZA WARNING
-- Using cleaning and care products incorrectly can be dangerous to your health.
-- Alwaysstore cleaning and care products out of reach ofchildren to reducethe risk of poisoning.
@ For the sake of the environment
-- Purchase environmentally-friendly cleaning productsif possible.
-- Do notdispose of cleaning and care products with household trash.
Car washes
The longer that deposits such as insects, bird droppings, tree sap or road salt remain on the vehicle, the more the surface can be damaged. High temperatures such as those caused by sunlight increase the damaging effect.
Before washing, rinse off heavy deposits with plenty of water.
Stubborn deposits such as bird droppings or tree sap are best removed with plenty of water anda microfiber cloth.
Also, wash the underside of your vehicle once
road salt stops being used for the season.
Pressure washers
When washing your vehicle with a pressure washer, always follow the operating instructions provided with the pressure washer.This is especially important in regard to the pressure and spraying distance. Do not aim the spraydirectly at the

seals on the side windows, doors, lids or the sun-
roof* or at tires, rubber hoses, insulating materi-
al, sensors* or camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least 16 in (40 cm).
Do not remove snowand ice with a pressure washer.
Never use cone nozzles or high pressure nozzles.
The water temperature must not be above 140 °F (60 °C).
Automatic car wash
Spray off the vehicle before washing.
Makesure that the windowsand roof* are closed and the windshield wipersare off. Follow instructions from the car wash operator, especially if there are accessories attached to your vehicle.
If possible, use car washes that do not have brushes.
Washing by hand
Clean the vehicle starting from the top and working downward using a soft sponge or cleaning brush. Use solvent-free cleaning products.
Washing vehicles with matte finish paint by hand
To reduce the risk of damaging the paint when washing, first remove dust and large particles from your vehicle. Insects, grease spots, and fingerprints are best removed with a special cleaner for matte finish paint.
Apply the product using a microfiber cloth. To reduce the risk of damaging the paint surface, do not use too much pressure.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water. Then clean using a neutral shampoo and soft microfiber cloth.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly again and letit air dry. Remove any water residue using a chamois.
ZA WARNING
--To reducethe risk of accidents, only wash the vehicle when the ignition is off and follow the instructions from the car wash oper-
ator.

342

Care and cleaning

--To reducetherisk of cuts, protect yourself from sharp metal components when washing the underbodyortheinside of the wheel
housings.
-- After washing the vehicle, the braking effect
maybe delayed due to moisture on the brake rotorsor ice in the winter. This increases the risk of an accident. The brakes mustbedried with a few careful brake appli-
cations.
@) Note
-- If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash, you mustfold the exterior mirrors in
to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors.
Power folding exterior mirrors* must only
be folded in and out using the power folding
function.
-- To reduce the risk of damage to the rims and tires, compare the width between the
wheels on your vehicle with the distance between the guide rails in the car wash. --To reducethe risk of damage, compare the height and width of your vehicle with the height and width ofthe inside of the car wash.

-- To reducetherisk of paint damage, do not washthe vehiclein direct sunlight.
-- To reduce therisk of damage,do not wash
decorative decals* with a pressure washer.
-- To reducetherisk of damage to the surface,
do not use insect removing sponges, kitchen sponges,or similar items. -- When washing mattefinish painted vehicle components: --To reduce the risk of damage to the sur-
face, do not use polishing agents or hard wax.
-- Never use protective wax. It can destroy
the mattefinish effect.
-- Do notplace anystickers or magnetic
signs on vehicle componentspainted with
mattefinish paint. The paint could be
damaged when the stickers or magnets
are removed.
@) For the sake of the environment Only wash the vehicle in facilities specially designed for that purpose. This will reduce the risk of dirty water contaminatedwithoil from entering the sewer system.

Cleaning and care information

When cleaning and caring for individual vehicle components, refer to the following tables. The
information contained there is simply recommendations. For questions or for components that

are notlisted, consult an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Also follow
the information found in > A.

Exterior cleaning

Component

Situation

Windshield wiper | Deposits blades

Headlights/ Tail lights

Deposits

Sensors/ camera lenses

Deposits

Wheels

Snow/ice Road salt Brake dust

Solution Soft cloth with glass cleaner, > page 54

Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®

Sensors: soft cloth with a solvent-free cleaning solution Cameralenses: soft cloth with an alcohol-free cleaning sol-
ution

Hand brush/solvent-free de-icing spray

Water

Acid-free special cleaning solution

8W0012721BG

343

Care and cleaning

Component

Situation

Solution

Exhausttail pipes Road salt

Water, cleaning solution suitable for stainless steel, if necessary

Decorative parts/ Deposits
trim

Mild soap solution ®), a cleaning solution suitable for stain-
less steel, if necessary

Paint

Paint damage

Refer to the paint number on the vehicle data label, repair with touch up paint > page 372.

Spilled fuel

Rinse with water immediately

Surface rust

Rust remover, then protect with hard wax;for questions,
consult an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.

Corrosion

Have it removed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.

Water no longer
beads on the surface of clean paint

Protect with hard wax (at least twice per year)

No shine even though Treat with suitable polish; then apply paint protectant if
paint has been pro- the polish that was used does not contain any protectant tected/paint looks poor

Deposits such as insects, bird droppings,
tree sap, and road salt

Dampen with water immediately and remove with a microfiber cloth

Grease-based con-

Remove immediately with a mild soap solution ®) and a

taminants such as

soft cloth

cosmetics or sunblock

Carbon compo-
nents

Deposits

Clean the same way as painted components > page 342

Decorative decals Deposits

Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®

a) Mild soap solution: maximum twotablespoonsof neutral soap in 1 quart(1 liter) of water

Interior cleaning

Component Windowglass Decorative parts/ trim Plastic parts

Situation Deposits Deposits
Deposits Heavier deposits

Displays/instrument cluster
Controls

Deposits Deposits

Solution Glass cleaner, then wipe dry Mild soap solution®
Damp cloth Mild soap solution @), detergent-free plastic cleaning solution, if necessary Soft cloth with LCD cleaner; dust in the lower area of the instrument cluster can be removed using a soft brush. Soft brush, then a soft cloth with a mild soap solution®

344

Care and cleaning

Component Safety belts Textiles, artificial leather, Alcantara
Natural leather
Carbon compo-
nents

Situation

Solution

Deposits

Mild soap solution ®, allow to dry before letting them re-
tract

Deposits adhering to Vacuum cleaner the surface

Water-based deposits Absorbent cloth and mild soap solution®
such as coffee, tea,
blood, etc.

Oil-based deposits such as oil, make-up,
etc.

Apply a mild soap solution ®), blot away the dissolved oil or
dye, treat afterward with water, if necessary

Specific types of de-
posits such as ink,
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish, etc.

Special stain remover, blot with absorbent material, treat afterward with mild soap solution, if necessary

Fresh stains

Cotton cloth with a mild soap solution®

Water-based deposits Fresh stains: absorbent cloth such as coffee, tea, Dried stains: stain remover suitable for leather blood, etc.

Oil-based deposits such as oil, make-up,
etc.

Fresh stains: absorbent cloth and stain remover suitable for leather Dried stains: oil cleaning spray

Specific types of de- Spot remover suitable for leather
posits such as ink,

nail polish, latex paint, shoe polish, etc.

Care

Regularly apply conditioning cream that protects from

light and penetrates into the material. Use special colored

conditioning cream, if necessary.

Deposits

Clean the same wayas plastic components

a) Mild soap solution: maximum twotablespoonsof neutral soap in 1 quart(1 liter) of water

ZX WARNING
The windshield must not be treated with water-repelling windshield coating agents. Unfavorable conditions such as wetness, darkness, or low sun can result in increased glare. Wiper blade chatter is also possible.
@) Note
-- Headlights and tail lights

-- Never clean headlightsor tail lights with a dry cloth or sponge.
-- Do not use any cleaning products that con-
tain alcohol, because they could cause
cracks to form. -- Wheels
-- Never use any paint polish or other abrasive materials.
-- Damage to the protective layer on the rims, such as stone chips or scratches, mustbe repaired immediately.

8W0012721BG

345

Care and cleaning
-- Camera lenses
-- Never use warm or hot water to remove snowor ice from the cameralens. This could cause the lens to crack.
-- Never use abrasive cleaning materials or alcohol to clean the cameralens. This could cause scratches and cracks.
-- Door windows
-- Removesnow and ice on windowsand exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper. To reduce the risk of scratches, move the scraper only in one direction and not back and forth.
-- Never remove snowor ice from door windowsand mirrors using warm or hot water because this could cause cracks to form.
--To reduce the risk of damage to the rear windowdefogger, do not apply anystickers on the heating wires on the inside of the window.
-- Decorative parts and trim
-- Never use chrome careor cleaning prod-
ucts. -- Paint
--To reduce the risk of scratches, the vehicle mustbe free of dirt and dust before polishing or waxing.
--To prevent paint damage, do notpolish or wax the vehicle in direct sunlight.
--To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not polish awayrust spots.
-- Remove cosmetics and sunscreen immediately because they could damage the paint.
-- Decorative decals
--To reduce the risk of damage, do not use any rough powder or abrasive cleaning products.
--To reduce the risk of damage, do notpolish decorative decals that have a matte or printed finish.
-- Due to the risk of damage, do not use an ice scraper to remove snow and ice on windowswith decorative decals on them.
-- Displays and instrumentcluster

-- Make sure that the instrumentcluster is switched off and has cooled off before cleaning it.
-- Displays, the instrument cluster, and the
trim surrounding it must not be cleaned with dry cleaning methods because they could become scratched. -- Make sure no fluids enter the spaces between the instrument cluster and the trim, because that could cause damage.
-- Controls
-- Make sure that no fluids enter the controls, because this could cause damage.
-- Safety belts
-- Do not removethe safety belts to clean them.
-- Never clean safety belts or their components with chemicals or with corrosivefluids or solvents and never allow sharp objects to come into contact with the safety belts. This could cause damage to the belt webbing.
--If there is damage to the webbing, the
connections, the retractors, or the buck-
les, have them replaced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Textiles, artificial leather, and Alcantara
-- Never treatartificial leather or Alcantara with leather care products, solvents,floor polish, shoe polish, spot remover, or similar products.
-- Have a cleaning specialist remove stubborn stains to reduce the risk of damage.
-- Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. when cleaning. -- Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry
the seat.
-- Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
damage to the surface. -- Open hook and loop fasteners, for exam-
ple on clothing, can damage seatcovers. Make sure hook and loop fasteners are closed.
-- Natural leather

346

-- Never treat leather with solvents, floor
polish, shoe polish, spot remover or similar products. -- Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause damage to the surface.
-- Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges,etc. when cleaning. -- Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry
the seat. --To help prevent the leather from fading,
do notleave the vehicle in direct sunlight for long periods of time. If leaving the vehicle parked for long periods of time, you should cover the leather to protect it from direct sunlight.
@) Tips
-- Insects are easier to removefrom paint that has been freshly waxed.
-- Regular waxing can prevent rust spots from forming.
-- Decorative decals can age due to environ-
mental conditions, which can result in dam-
age such as brittleness. The color may fade if exposed to excessive sunlight.
Taking your vehicle out of service
If you would like to take your vehicle out of service for a Long period of time, contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. They will advise you of important measures, such as corrosion protection, service, and storage procedures. Also follow the information about the vehicle battery > page 318.

Care and cleaning

8W0012721BG

347

Emergency assistance

Emergency assistance General information
> Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic in the event of a breakdown. In the event
of a flat tire, park the vehicle ona level surface. If you are on a steep hill, be especially careful.
> Set the parking brake. > Switch the emergencyflashers on. > Have the passengersexit the vehicle. They
should moveto a safe place, for example behind a guard rail.
Z\ WARNING
Follow the steps given above. This is for your protection and the for the safety of others on the road.
Equipment
Vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit, and vehicle jack
Appliesto: vehicles with the vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit, and vehicle jack
\
SM TOTAL
Fig. 266 Luggage compartment:cargo floor cover
The vehicle tool kit, vehicle jack, tire mobility kit
and compressor are stored in the luggage compartment under the cargo floor cover. > Applies to: sedan: To open the front compart-
ment,lift the cargo floor cover by the strap (@). > Appliesto: allroad: To open the front compart-
ment,pull the cargo floor cover by the plastic handle @) slightly toward the rear.Lift the cargo floor cover over the front compartment. > To open the rear compartment,lift the cargo floor cover by the plastic handle @).

> Applies to: sedan: Hook the plastic handle (2) into the luggage compartmentseal.
> To removethe cargo floor cover completely, pull it towardthe rear at the plastic handle @).
> Applies to: vehicles with spare tire: Turn the handle counter-clockwise and remove the spare tire.
> Applies to: sedan: Unhook the cargo floor cover again before closing the luggage compartment lid.
Depending on vehicle equipment,the vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit, and compressor may be located under another cover that is secured with a handwheel.
Applies to: vehicles with vehicle jack in the storage bag: The bag with the vehicle jack is secured to the tie-downs in the luggage compartment and must be secured to the tie-downs again after using it.
ZX WARNING
Applies to: vehicles with vehicle jack in the storage bag
A vehicle jack that is unsecured, incorrectly secured, or not secured in the luggage compartment mayslide out of place when braking, turning, or in an accident, which increases the risk of injuries to vehicle passengers. To reducethe risk of an accident, never transport the vehicle jack without securing it.
ZA\ WARNING
Improper use of the vehicle jack can cause serious personal injuries. -- Never use the screw driver hex head to tight-
en wheel bolts, since the bolts cannot attain the necessary tightening torque if you use the hex head, potentially causing an accident. -- The factory-supplied jack is intended only for your vehicle model. Under no circumstances should it be usedto lift heavy vehicles or other loads; you risk injuring yourself. -- Never start the engine when the vehicleis raised, which could causean accident. -- Support the vehicle securely with appropriate stands if workis to be performed

348

Emergency assistance

underneath the vehicle; otherwise, there is a potential risk for injury. -- Never usethe jack supplied with your Audi on another vehicle, particularly on a heavier one. The jack is only suitable for use on the vehicle it came with.
@ Tips
--Insome vehicles, the rear compartment may not open.
-- The vehicle jack in your vehicle is maintenance-free.
Tire mobility kit
Appliesto: vehicles with tire mobility kit
> Read and follow the important safety precautions > page 348.
> Set the parking brake.
Applies to: vehicles with manual transmission
> Shift into 1st gear.
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
> Select the "P" selector lever position.
> Check if a repair with the tire mobility kit is possible > page 349.
Using the tire mobility kit
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit

If the tire is pierced by an object such as a nail, do not remove the object from the tire.
The tire mobility kit can be used at temperatures as low as -4 °F (-20 °C).
The tire mobility kit must not be used:
--If the tire has cuts or punctures that are larger
than 0.16 in (4 mm) @ © fig. 267 --If the rim is damaged @)
-- If you have driven with very lowtire pressure or without air in the tire @)
See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance in these situations.
Z\ WARNING
-- Please note that the tire mobility kit cannot be used in all situations, and that it may only be used temporarily.
-- The tire sealant must not come in contact with skin, eyes, or clothing.
--If tire sealant comesinto contact with your eyes or your skin, thoroughlyrinse the affected area immediately with clean water.
-- Do notinhale the fumes. -- If you swallow anyofthe tire sealant, thor-
oughly rinse your mouth immediately and drink a lot of water. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. -- Change your clothing immediatelyif it comesinto contact with tire sealant. -- If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. -- Keep the tire sealant away from children.

Fig. 267 Tire: tire damage that cannotbe repaired
The tire repair is only meant for temporary use. Change the damaged tire as soon as possible >A.

G@) Tips
-- If sealant leaks, allowit to dry in place. You can then peel it off like a sticker.
-- Note the expiration date on the sealant bottle. Replace the tire sealant at an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
-- Radio reception can be interrupted when
operating the compressor.
-- Follow the legal regulations that are applicable in the country where you are operating the vehicle.

8W0012721BG
B8K-1475

349

Emergency assistance eee macy
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
Fig. 269 Diagram: tire mobility kit connection
Requirement: the tire mobility kit must be laid out and ready for use > page 348. Setting up the tire mobility kit > Open the cover @) on the compressor)
> fig. 268. > Removethe connector (4) and pressure hose (5)
with pressure gauge from the housing.
> Connect the compressor pressure hose (5) to
the flange © on thetire sealant bottle @.
> Insert the sealant bottle with the flange at the bottom into the opening @) on the compressor cover.
> Removethe valve cap from the faultytire.
> Install thefiller hose @) on the valve (7)
> fig. 269. > Connect the plug @ > fig. 268 to an outlet in
the vehicle. > Switch the ignition on.

[RAZ-0054]

Inflating a tire
> Move the switch > fig. 269 on the compres-
sor into position I.
> Inflate the tire to between 29 psi (200 kPA) and 36 psi (250 kPA) and read the pressure on the gauge.
> If this tire pressure is not reached, remove the filler hose. Drive slowly approximately 33 feet (10 m) forwardor in reverse so that the sealant can be distributed in the tire. Inflate the tire
again > A\.
Z\ WARNING
-- Read and follow the manufacturer's safety precautions on the compressor and in the instructions on the bottle of sealant.
--Ifatire pressure of 29 psi (200 kPA) cannot
reached after inflating for 6 minutes, then
the tire is too severely damaged. Do not continue driving. -- If the tire cannot be repaired with the tire sealant, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
(i) Tips
Do not operate the compressor for more than six minutes continuously, or it can overheat.
Once the compressor has cooled, you can con-
tinue to use it.
(eya ay) Clalare)
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
> Affix the sticker that says "max. 50 mph (max. 80 km/h)"that is provided with the tire mobility kit within the driver's field of vision.
> Stop the vehicle after driving for about 10 minutes and check the tire pressure.
» If the tire pressure is lower than 19 psi (130 kPA), then the tire is too severely damaged. Do not continue driving.

D_ The compressor may look different. However, the wayit is operatedis generally the same.
350

ZA\ WARNING
Pay attention to the following after repairing the tire: -- Do notdrive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). -- Avoid hard acceleration, heavy braking, and
fast cornering. -- The vehicle may become moredifficult to
control. -- If the tire is too severely damaged, see an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
() For the sake of the environment You can give the used tire sealant bottle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for disposal.
@) Tips Remember to obtain a new bottle of sealant from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility after repairing a tire.
Changing a tire
You must complete the preparation before changinga tire.
> Read and follow the important safety precautions > page 348.
> Set the parking brake.
Applies to: vehicles with manual transmission
> Shift into 1st gear.
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
> Select the "P" selector lever position.
> When towing trailer: disconnect the trailer from your vehicle.
> Lay out the vehicle tool kit > page 348 and the spare tire > page 355.
> Switch the ignition off.
Z\ WARNING
When using the vehicle jack" on a road with a steep hill or when offroad, you must take ex-

Emergency assistance
tra precautions to preventthe vehicle from rolling. Use suitable objects to block the front
and back of the wheel thatis diagonal from
the wheel with the flat tire.
Z\ WARNING
You or your passengers could be injured while changing a wheel if you do not follow these
safety precautions: -- Ifyou have a flat tire, move a safe distance
off the road. Turn off the engine, turn the emergency flashers on and use other warning devices to alert other motorists. -- Make sure that passengers wait in a safe place away from the vehicle and well away from the road and traffic. --To help prevent the vehicle from moving suddenly and possibly slipping off the jack*, alwaysfully set the parking brake and block the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed. When one front wheel is lifted off the ground, placing the Automatic Transmission in P (Park) will not prevent the vehicle from moving. -- Before you change a wheel, be sure the ground is level and firm. If necessary, use a sturdy board under the jack". -- Alwaysstore the vehicle tool kit, the jack* and the replaced tire in the luggage compartment > page 64.
(i) Tips
Obeyall laws.
\ Removing the caps
Fig. 270 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps

8W0012721BG
?éaN

351

Emergency assistance
> Slide the plastic clip from the vehicle tool kit onto the cap until it engages > fig. 270.
> Removethe cap with the plastic clip.

Loosening the wheel bolts
©=. x©a.
Fig. 271 Wheel: loosening the wheel bolt
> Slide the wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit all the way onto the wheel bolt.
> Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn to the left -arrow-. To achieve the required torque, hold the end of the wheel wrench. If the wheel bolt will not loosen, press carefully on the wheel wrench with your foot. Hold onto the vehicle securely while doing this and make sure your footing is stable.
Z\ WARNING
To reduce the risk of an accident, only loosen the wheel bolts gently one turn beforeraising the vehicle with the vehicle jack*.
Raising the vehicle
Fig. 272 Sill panels: markings

B8W-0076

Fig. 273 Sill: positioning the vehicle jack

> Place the vehicle jack* from the vehicle tool kit
ona firm surface. Use a flat, stable supportif necessary. On slippery surface such as tile,
you should use a non-slip pad such as a rubber
mat > /\.
> Find the marking on the sill that is closest to
the tire that will be changed > fig. 272. Behind the marking, thereis a lifting point on the side
sill for the vehicle jack*. > Turn the handwheel to raise the vehicle jack*
under the lifting point on the side sill until the bracket on the jack @ completely covers the notch on the vehicle.
> Align the vehicle jack* so the bracket @ covers
the notch and the base (2) is flat on the ground.
The base @) mustbe directly under the mount-
ing point @.
> Mount the crank on the vehicle jack*: insert the crank into the opening on the handwheel. Turn
the crank to the left or right to secureit. > Continue raising the vehicle jack* with the crank
until the wheel lifts off the ground slightly.

ZA WARNING

-- Makesure the vehicle jack* is stable. There

is a risk of injury when the ground is slippery

or soft, because the vehicle jack* could slide

or sink.

-- Only raise your vehicle with the vehicle jack*

provided by the factory. If you use a vehicle

jack designed for another vehicle, your vehi-

cle could slip and cause injury.

-- Position the vehicle jack* only at the desig-

nated mounting pointson the side sill and

align the jack. Otherwise, the vehicle jack*

could slip and cause an injuryif it does not

have sufficient hold on the vehicle.

352

-- To reduce the risk of an accident, never start the engine when the vehicleis raised.
--To reducethe risk of injury, support the vehicle securely with suitable stands if work is to be performed underneaththe vehicle.
ZA WARNING
To help preventinjury to yourself and your passengers: -- Do notraise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack* is securely engaged. -- Passengers must not remain in the vehicle
when it is jacked up. -- Make sure that passengerswait in a safe
place away from the vehicle and well away from the road and traffic. -- Makesure jack position is correct, adjust as necessary and then continue to raise the jack*.
-- If work has to be done under the vehicle, ensure that it is safely supported on suitable
stands - risk of injury! -- Never start the engine when the vehicle is
on the jack* - risk of accident!
@) Note
Do notlift the vehicle by the sill. Position the vehicle jack* only at the designated mounting points on the side sill. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
Removing and installing a wheel
@TRtg "ooO
mTM
Fig. 274 Wheel: internal hex socket to turn the wheel bolts

Emergency assistance
5i+s ~0a%

Fig. 275 Wheel: alignmentpin in the top hole

Removing a wheel
> Removethe top wheel bolt completely using the hex socket in the screwdriver handle from the vehicle tool kit > fig. 274 and place it ona clean surface.
> Then install the alignment pin from the vehicle tool kit in the empty wheel bolt hole by hand > fig. 275.
> Removethe rest of the wheel bolts. > Remove the wheel >(). The alignment pin re-
mains in the hole while doing this.
Installing a wheel
Read the directions on page 354 when installing unidirectional tires.
> Slide the wheel on over the alignment pin >@. > Install the wheel bolts and tighten them gently
using the hex socket. > Removethe alignment pin and tighten the re-
maining wheel bolt. > Carefully lower the vehicle using the vehicle
jack*. » Tighten the wheel bolts in a diagonal pattern
using the wheel wrench.

The wheel bolts must be clean and loosen and
tighten easily. Check the contact surfaces for the wheel and hub. Contaminants on these surfaces must be removed before installing the wheel.

Z\ WARNING

Never use the hex socket in the screwdriver

handle or the hex socket wrench with the

ratchet to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts.

This increases the risk of an accident, because

you will not be able to achieve the correct

tightening specification.

8W0012721BG

353

Emergency assistance

@) Note
When removing or installing the wheel, the rim could hit the brake rotor and damage the rotor. Work carefully and have a second person help you.
G) Tips
-- When mounting tires with unidirectional tread design makesure the tread pattern is pointed the right way > page 354.
-- The wheel bolts should be clean and easy to turn. Check for dirt and corrosion on the mating surfaces of both the wheel and the hub. Removeall dirt from these surfaces before remounting the wheel.
Unidirectional tires
A unidirectional tire profile is identified by arrows on the tire sidewall that point in the running direction. You must always maintain the specified running direction. This is necessary to ensure the tire's optimum performancein regard to adhe-
sion, running noise, and friction, and to reduce
the risk of hydroplaning.
To benefit fully from the advantages of the unidirectional tire design, you should replace faulty tires as soon as possible and restore the correct running direction on all of the tires.
> Reinstall the caps on the wheel bolts if necessary.
> Store the vehicle tool kit in its designated place.
> If the removed wheel does notfit in the spare wheel well, store it securely in the luggage compartment > page 64.
> Check the tire pressure on the installed wheel as soon as possible.
> Correct the tire pressure and store it in the Infotainment system > page 341.
> The wheel bolt tightening specification must be 90 ft lbs (120 Nm). Haveit checked it as soon as possible with a torque wrench. Drive carefully until then.

> Have the faulty wheel replaced as quickly as possible.
@) Tips
-- If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn while changing a tire, they should be replaced before you check the tightening torque.
-- Drive at reduced speed until you have the tightening torques checked.

Notes on wheel changing

Please read the information > page 329 if you are going to use a replacement tire which is dif-
ferent from the tires on your vehicle.

After you change a tire:

-- Check the tire pressure on the replacement
tire immediately after installation.
-- Have the wheel bolt tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as pos-
sible by your authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop.
-- With steel and alloy wheel rims, the wheel
bolts are correctly tightened at a torque of 90 ft lbs (120 Nm). -- If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn while changing a tire, they should be replaced before you check the tightening torque.
-- Replacethe flat tire with a new one and have it installed on your vehicle as soon as possible. Remountthe wheel cover.

Until then, drive with extra care and at reduced speeds.

ZA WARNING

-- If you are going to equip your vehicle with

tires or rims which differ from those which

werefactory installed, then be sure to read
the information > page 329.

-- Always makesure the damaged wheel or

even a flat tire and the jack* and tool kit are

properly secured in the luggage compartment and are notloosein the passenger

compartment.

354

Emergency assistance

--Inan accident or sudden maneuver they could fly forward, injuring anyone in the vehicle.
-- Always store damaged wheel, jack* and tools securely in the luggage compartment. Otherwise, in an accident or sudden maneuver they could fly forward, causing injury to passengersin the vehicle.
Space-saving sparetire
Applies to: vehicles with space-saving spare tire (compact sparetire)
The sparetire is intended for short-term use only. Have the damaged tire checked and replacedif necessary by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon as possible.
There are some restrictions on the use of the compactsparetire. The compactsparetire has been designed specifically for your type of vehicle. Do not replace it with the spare tire from another type ofvehicle.
The compact sparetire is located in the luggage compartment under the cargo floor cover => page 348.
The tire pressure must be 61 PSI (420 kPA).
Snow chains
For technical reasons, the use of snow chains on the compactsparetire is not permitted.
If you have to drive with snow chains and a front tire fails, mount the sparetire in place of a rear tire. Install the snow chains on the rear tire that you removed, and install that in place of the front tire that failed.
A WARNING
-- After installing a sparetire, the tire pressure mustbe checked as soon as possible.
-- Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) with a compactsparetire. Driving faster than that increases the risk of an accident.
--To reducethe risk of an accident, avoid fullthrottle acceleration, heavy braking, and fast cornering with the compactsparetire.

--To reducethe risk of an accident, never drive with more than one compactsparetire.
-- Normal summer or winter tires must not be mounted on the compact spare wheel rim.
Collapsible sparetire
Applies to: vehicles with collapsible sparetire
The collapsible sparetire is intended for shortterm use only. Have the damaged tire checked and replaced if necessary by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon as possible.
There are some restrictions on the use ofthe collapsible spare tire. The collapsible sparetire has been designed specifically for your type of vehicle. Do not replace it with the collapsible spare tire from another type of vehicle.
The collapsible sparetire is located in the luggage compartment under the cargo floor cover.
Requirement: the vehicle tool kit > page 348 and the compressor mustbe laid out.
Removing
> Removethe cargo floor cover > page 348, fig. 266.
> Turn the handwheel counter-clockwise and remove it.
> Removethe collapsible sparetire.
You mustinflate the collapsible spare tire beforehand in order to use it.
Inflating
> Removethe valve cap from the collapsible
sparetire.
> Tighten the compressor hose on the collapsible sparetire valve.
> Connect the compressor hose to a vehicle socket and switch it on.
> Let the compressor run until the specified value on the tire pressure sticker is reached
> page 332, fig. 265>@.
> Screw the valve cap back onto the valve.
Returning to storage
> Removethe valve cap to drain the air.

8W0012721BG

355

Emergency assistance
> Wait several hours before placing the collapsible sparetire in the spare wheel well. Only then will it fold down completely so that you can store it securely.
> Then screw the valve cap back ontothe valve. > Secure the collapsible spare tire with the hand-
wheel. > Fold the cargo floor cover back into place.
Snow chains
Using snowchains on the collapsible sparetire is not permitted for technical reasons.
If you have to drive with snow chains and a front tire fails, mount the collapsible sparetire in place of a rear tire. Install the snow chains on the rear tire that you removed, and install that in place of the front tire that failed.
ZA\ WARNING
-- Only usethe collapsible sparetire in emergencies and drive very carefully, especially if it is more than six years old.
-- The compressor and the hose can become very hot during operation which increases the risk of burn injuries.
-- After installing a collapsible spare tire, the tire pressure must be checked as quickly as possible to reduce the risk of an accident.
-- Do notdrive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) with the collapsible sparetire. Driving faster than that increases the risk of an accident.
-- Avoid full-throttle acceleration, heavy braking, and fast cornering with the collapsible spare tire, becausethis increasesthe risk of an accident.
-- Never drive using more than one collapsible spare tire, becausethis increasesthe risk of an accident.
-- Normal tires or winter tires must not be mounted on the collapsible spare tire rim.
® Note
The compressor must be switched off after 12 minutes at the mostto reducethe risk of overheating. Let the compressor cool down for several minutes before using it again.
356

A fuse that has blown will have metal strips that have burned through.

Fuses and bulbs aS=ao6|O

Fig. 276 Driver's side footwell (left-hand drive vehicles): footrest ront passenger's footwell(right-hand drive vehicles): cover ®)

Fig. 277 Driver's side cockpit (left-hand drive/right-hand drive vehicles): cover ©,left side of luggage compartment: cover ()
The fuses are located in the footwell under the footrest (left-hand drive vehicle) (@) or behind the cover (right-hand drive vehicle) fuses are located on the front side of the cockpit (driver's side) © and under the left cover in the
luggage compartment ©
> Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment off.
» Check the table that follows to see which fuse belongs to the equipment.
> Removethe screwdriver and the reversible Torx bit from the vehicle tool kit > page 348.
> Removethe footrest or the corresponding cover.
> Removethe colored plastic clip from the fuse panel,if necessary > page 358,fig. 278. You can dispose ofthe plastic clip.
> Removethe clip from the rear side of the cover
(Cc).
> Removethe fuse using the clip. > Replace the blown fuse only with a fuse that
has the same current rating. » Reattach the footrest or the cover.

357

8W0012721BG

Fuses and bulbs

Fusecolor identification

Color
Black Purple Light brown Brown Red Blue Yellow White or transparent Green Orange

Current rating in amps 1 3 5
5 10 iS 20 /|25 30 40

Z\WARNING
Do not repair fuses and never replace a blown fuse with one that has a higher amp rating. This can cause damage to the electrical system and increases the risk offire.

@) Note
If a new fuse burns out again shortly after you
haveinstalled it, have the electrical system
checked as soon as possible by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty.

G@) Tips
-- The following table does notlist fuse locations that are not used.
-- Some of the equipment listed in the following tables applies only to certain model versions or certain optional equipment.

Fig. 278 Driver's footwell(left-handdrive vehicle): fuse panel with plastic clip

358

Fig. 279 Front passenger's footwell(right-hand drive vehicle): fuse panel with plastic clip

Fusepanel(4)(brown)

No. Equipment

2 Mass airflow sensor, camshaft adjustment,
charge air cooler pump
3 Exhaust doors, fuel injectors, radiator in-

Eseyelet hehe ATO eSSHTig HCOECE
Vacuum pump, hot water pump, particu-

4 |late sensor, biodiesel sensor, exhaust

5 6 7 8

WdB||pEHorraneeoatgaskrei:tsesnreuedlrp-iveougaxhmlrtyvepgeg,suseehl,nnaisct-gsooaerhrmnvsspaohrlrae,vfsetsmuaarsdsej:apuisur-tmfmple,onwthi-sgehnsor

9 10

O|iH-lotpwraetsesurrpe usmenpsor, oi-l temperature sensor

11 Clutch pedal position sensor, engine start

12 Engine valves

13 Radiator fan
14 Fuel injectors, engine control module 15 |Igni_tion coi-ls, heated oxygen sensors

16 Fuel pump

Fuse panel(8)(red) No.| Equipment
Anti-theft alarm system 2 |Engine control module
Lumbar support
4 Automatic transmission selector mecha-
Hen 5 |Horn
6 Electromechanicaliparking brake
7 |Gateway control module

8 Interior headliner lights 9 |Emergencycall system
10 Airbag control module
11 Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)
12 Diagnostic connector,light/rain sensor 13 Climate control system 14 Right front door control module
15 A/C compressor

Fuses and bulbs

Fuse panel © (black)
No. Equipment 1 |Front seat heating
2 Windshield wipers
3 |Left headlight electronics
Panoramic glass roof/ sliding/tilting sun-
4 roof © Letetront door control module

6 |Sockets

7 |Right rear door control module

8 9 10

|W|ARil-iln:gwdhhstehheiele:adldrdlii-wvgaehstheelrecstyrsotnie-cms/headli- ght

washer system

11 |Left rear door control module

Fuse panel (©) (black) No. Equipment
Seat ventilation, rearview mirror, climate
1 |control system, rear climate control system controls, windshield defogger
2 Gateway, climate control system
3 Sound actuator/exhaust sound tuning
4 Clutch pedal position sensor 5 |Engine start
7 |Rear USB charging port
8 Garage door opener
9 Adaptive cruise control
10 Exterior sound
11 |Video camera 12 Matri5x LED headli: ght/ri= ght LED headli= ght
13 Matrix LED headlight/left LED headlight
14 Rear window wiper

16 Rear Seat Entertainmentpreparation --
Fuse panel ©) (red)
No.:| Equipment
1 Ignition coils 5_|Engine mount 6 [Automatic transmission
7 |Instrumentpanel
8 |Climate control system (blower)

8W0012721BG

359

Fuses and bulbs
Fuse panel (©) (red)
10 Dynamic steering 11 Engine start
Fuse assignment - Driver's side of the (fold 4o)ig

Fuse assignment- Left side of the luggage
compartm

B4M-0148

Fig. 280 Driver side cockpit: fuse panel with plastic bracket
Fuse panel No. Equipment
1 |Vehicle opening/start (NFC)
2 Telephone
4 |Head-up display
5 |Audi music interface, USB charging port
6 |Front climate control system controls 7 Steering column lock
8 Infotainment system display
9 |Instrument cluster 10 Infotainment unit
11 Light switch, switch panel 12 Steering column electronics 14 Infotainment system 16 Steering wheel heating

-
Paine of the luggage compartment:fuse panel
Fuse panel (@) (black)
No. Equipment 2 |Windshield defroster
3 |Windshield defroster
S Suspension control 6 |Automatic transmission
7 Rear window defogger 8 Rear seat heating 9 Left tail lights 10 Left safety belt tensioner 11 Central locking system 12 |Luggage compartment lid
Fuse panel(8)(red)
No. | Equipment Not assigned
Fuse panel © (brown)
No. Equipment 2 |Telephone Lumbar support

360

Fuses and bulbs

WO}/@OlIN/M]wi)n

Fuse panel©(brown)
4 |Audi side assist 5 |Rear Seat Entertainment preparation 7 |Vehicle opening/start (NFC)
8 Smart module (tank) 11 Auxiliary battery control module
12 Garage door opener 13 Rearview camera, peripheral cameras
14 Righttail lights
16 Right safety belt tensioner
Fuse panel() (red)
No. Equipment Sound-amplifier AdBlue heating Trailer hitch (right light) Trailer hitch Trailer hitch (left light) Trailer hitch (socket)
10 Sport differential 11 |AdBlue heating
Bulbs
Replacing light bulbs
For your safety, we recommend that you have your authorized Audidealer replace any bulbs for you.
It is becoming increasingly more and moredifficult to replace vehicle light bulbs since in many cases, other parts of the car mustfirst be removed before you are able to get to the bulb. This applies especially to the light bulbs in the front of your car which you can only reach through the engine compartment.
Sheet metal and bulb holders can have sharp edges that can cause serious cuts, parts must be correctly taken apart and then properly put back together to help prevent breakage of parts and long term damage from water that can enter housings that have not been properly resealed.
For your safety, we recommend that you have your authorized Audi dealer replace any bulbs for

you, since your dealer has the proper tools, the correct bulbs and the expertise.
Gas discharge lamps (Xenon lights):
Due to the high electrical voltage, have the bulbs replaced by a qualified technician. Headlights with Xenon light are identified by the high voltage sticker.
LED headlights*
LED headlights require no maintenance. Please contact your authorized Audi dealer if a bulb needs to be replaced.
ZA WARNING
Changing Xenon lampswithout the necessary equipmentcan causeserious personal injury. -- Bulbs are pressurized and can explode when
being changed. Potential risk of injury! -- On vehicles equipped with gas discharge
bulbs (Xenon light)life-threatening injuries can result from improper handling of the high-voltage portions of such lamps! -- Only your authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop should change the bulbs in gas discharge lamps. There are parts with sharp edges on the openings and on the bulb holders that can causeserious cuts. If
you are uncertain about what to do, have the
work performed by an authorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop. Serious personal injury may result from improperly performed work.
G) Tips
--If you still prefer to replace the light bulbs yourself, be aware that the engine compartmentis a hazardous area to work in > A\ in Working in the engine compartment on page 309.
--It is best to ask your authorized Audi dealer whenever you want to change a bulb.

8W0012721BG

361

Emergencysituations
Emergencysituations General
This chapter is intended for trained emergency crews and working personnel whohave the necessary tools and equipmentto perform these operations.
Starting by pushing or towing
@) Note
Vehicles with an automatic transmission cannotbestarted by pushing or towing.
Starting with jumper cables
If necessary, the engine can be started by connecting it to the battery of anothervehicle.
If the engine should fail to start because of a discharged or weak battery, the battery can be connected to the battery of another vehicle, using a pair of jumper cablesto start the engine.
Jumper cables
Use only jumper cablesof sufficiently large cross section to carry the starter current safely. Refer to the manufacturer's specifications.
Use only jumper cables with insulated terminal clamps which are distinctly marked:
plus (+) cable in most cases colored red
minus (-) cable in most cases colored black.
Z\ WARNING
Batteries contain electricity, acid, and gas. Anyof these can cause very serious or fatal injury. Follow the instructions below for safe handling of your vehicle's battery. -- Alwaysshield your eyes and avoid leaning
over the battery whenever possible. -- A dead battery can freeze at temperatures
around 32 °F (0 °C). If the vehicle battery is frozen, you must thawit before connecting the jump start cables. If you do not,this in-

creases the risk of an explosion and chemical burns. After jump starting the vehicle, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the vehicle battery checked. -- Do not allow battery acid to contact eyes or skin. Flush any contacted area with water immediately.
-- Improper use of a booster battery to start a vehicle may cause an explosion.
-- Vehicle batteries generate explosive gases. Keep sparks, flame and lighted cigarettes away from batteries.
-- Do nottry to jump start anyvehicle with a low acid level in the battery.
-- The voltage of the booster battery must also have a 12-Volt rating. The capacity (Ah) of the booster battery should not be lower than that of the discharged battery. Use of batteries of different voltage or substantially different "Ah" rating may cause an explosion and personal injury.
-- Never charge a frozen battery. Gas trapped in the ice may cause an explosion.
-- Never charge or use a battery that has been frozen. The battery case may have be weakened.
-- Use ofbatteries of different voltage or substantially different capacity (Ah) rating may cause an explosion and injury. The capacity (Ah) of the booster battery should not be lower than that of the discharged battery.
-- Before you check anything in the engine compartment, always read and heed all WARNINGS & page 309.
C) Note
-- Applying a higher voltage booster battery will cause expensive damage to sensitive electronic components, such as control
units, relays, radio, etc.
-- There must be no electrical contact between the vehicles as otherwise current could already start to flow as soon as the positive
(+) terminals are connected.

362

Emergencysituations

@ Tips The discharged battery must be properly connected to the vehicle's electrical system. When jump starting or charging the battery, never connect the negative ground cable to the battery negative post because the battery manager system mustbe able to detect the battery's state of charge. Always connect the negative ground cable to the negative ground post of the battery manager control unit.
Using the jump start cable
Both jump start cables must be connectedin the correct order.
Fig. 282 Engine compartment: connectorsfor jump start cables and a charger
Fig. 283 Jump starting using a battery in another vehicle:
@- providing current, @)- drained
Please note that the connecting process for the jump start cables described belowis intended for when your vehicle is being jump started. Vehicle with drained vehicle battery > Set the parking brake and select the "P" (Park)
selector lever position*.

> Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment off.

Connecting the positive cable (red) to the positive terminal
> Open the red cover on the positive terminal > fig. 282.
1. Secure one end ofthe positive cable (red) to the jump startpin > fig. 283 @ (pin under the red cover = "positive") on the vehicle that
needs to be started @).
2. Secure the other end of the positive cable (red) to the positive terminal @) on the battery providing the current @).

Connecting the negative cable (black) to the
negative terminal
3. Secure one end of the negative cable (black) to the negative terminal @) on the battery that is providing the current @).
4. Secure the other end of the negative cable
(black) to the jump start pin @ (hex head pin
= "negative") on the vehicle that needs to be
started ®).

Starting the engine
» Start the engine in the vehicle providing the jump start @ and letit run atidle.
> Now start the engine on the vehicle with the
drained battery @).
> If the engine does not start, stop the starting procedure after 10 seconds and then repeatit after approximately 30 seconds.
» Once the engine with the drained vehicle bat-
tery has been started, remove the cables in the
reverse order from the waythey wereinstalled. > Close the red cover on the positive terminal.

The battery is vented to the outside to prevent gases from entering the vehicle interior. Make sure that the jumper clamps are well connected
with their metal parts in full contact with the battery terminals.

Z\ WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury and damage

to the vehicle, heed all warnings and instruc-

tions of the jumper cable manufacturer. If in

doubt,call for road service.

8W0012721BG

363

Emergencysituations

-- Jumper cables must be long enough so that the vehicles do not touch.
-- When connecting jumper cables, make sure that they cannot get caught in any moving parts in the engine compartment.
-- Do not bend over the batteries - danger of chemical burns!
-- The batterycell locking screws must be tightened securely.
-- Before you check anything in the engine compartment, always read and heed all WARNINGS > page 309.
@ Note
Improper hook-up of jumper cables can ruin the generator. -- Always connect POSITIVE (+) to POSITIVE
(+), and NEGATIVE (-) to NEGATIVE (-) ground postof the battery manager control
unit. -- Check that all screw plugs on the battery
cells are screwed in firmly. If not, tighten plugs prior to connecting clamp on negative battery terminal. -- Please note that the procedure for connecting ajumper cable as described above applies specifically to the case of your vehicle being jump started. When you are giving a jump start to another vehicle, do not connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal on the discharged battery @) > fig. 283. Instead, securely connect the negative (-) cable to either a solid metal componentthat is firmly bolted to the engine block or to the engine block itself. If the battery that is being charged does not vent to the outside, escaping battery gas could ignite and explode!
Towing with a tow truck
General hints
Your Audi requires special handling for towing.
The following information is to be used by commercial tow truck operators who know howto operate their equipment safely.

-- Never tow your Audi, towing will cause damage to the engine and transmission.
-- Never wrap the safety chains or winch cables around the brakelines.
-- To prevent unnecessary damage, your Audi mustbe transported with a flatbed truck.
-- To load the vehicle on to the flatbed, use the
towing loop found in the vehicle tools and attach to the front or rear anchorage > page 364 and > page 365.
ZX WARNING
A vehicle being towed is not safe for passengers. Never allow anyone toride in a vehicle being towed, for any reason.
Front towing loop
Only install the front towing loop whenitis needed.

Fig. 284 Front bumper:installing the towing loop

The threaded opening for the towing loop is located on the right side of the front bumper.

» Removethe towing loop from the vehicle tool kit > page 348.
> Press the cap inward with brief, strong pressure => fig. 284. The cap will loosen from the bump-
er.
> Tighten the towing loop in the threaded opening until it stops and then tighten it with a wheel wrench.
> After using, place the towing loop back in the vehicle tool kit.

ZA\ WARNING

If the towing loop is not tightened until it

stops when installing, the threads may be

364

pulled out when towing the vehicle and result in an accident.
Rear towing loop
Fig. 285 Rear bumper:installing the towing loop
The threaded opening for the towing loop is located on the right rear of the bumper. > Removethe towing loop from the vehicle tool
kit > page 348. > Press the cap inward with brief, strong pressure
=> fig. 285. The cap will loosen from the bumper. > Tighten the towing loop in the threaded opening until it stops and then tighten it with a wheel wrench. >» After using, place the towing loop back in the vehicle tool kit.
Z\ WARNING
If the towing loop is not tightened until it stops when installing, the threads may be pulled out when towing the vehicle and result in an accident.

B8W-0081

Emergencysituations
Front hook up > Align the vehicle with the centerline of the car
carrier ramp.
> Attach the winch hook to the front towline eye previously installed.
Rear hook up > Align the vehicle with the centerline of the car
carrier ramp. » Attach the winch hook tothe rear towline eye
previously installed.
(i) Tips
Check carefully to make sure the hook-up is secure before moving the car up the flatbed truck ramp.
Raising the vehicle
Lifting with workshop hoist and with floor
sea The vehicle may only be lifted at the lifting pointsillustrated.
Fig. 287 Frontlifting point

B8W-0154

Loading the vehicle onto a flatbed truck

|
B8W-0155

B8W-0153 4

8W0012721BG

Fig. 286 Vehicle on flatbed truck

Emergencysituations
> Adjust lifting arms of workshop hoist or floor jack to match vehiclelifting points.
> Insert a rubber pad between the floor jack/ workshop hoist and the Lifting points.
If you mustlift your vehicle with a floor jack to work underneath,besure thevehicle is safely supported on stands intendedfor this purpose.
Frontlifting point
The lifting point is located on the floor pan reinforcement about at the same level as the jack mounting point > fig. 287. Do notlift the vehicle at the vertical sill reinforcement.
Rear lifting point
The lifting point is located on the vertical reinforcement of the lower sill for the onboard jack > fig. 288.
Lifting with vehicle jack
Refer to > page 352.
ZA\ WARNING
--To reducethe risk of serious injury and vehicle damage. -- Alwayslift the vehicle only at the special workshop hoist and floor jack lift pointsillustrated > fig. 287 and fig. 288. -- Failure tolift the vehicle at these points could cause the vehicle totilt or fall from a lift if there is a change in vehicle weight distribution and balance. This might happen, for example, when heavy components such as the engine block or transmission are removed.
-- When removing heavy componentslike these, anchor vehicle to hoist or add corresponding weights to maintain the center of gravity. Otherwise, the vehicle mighttilt or slip off the hoist, causing serious personal injury.
() Note
-- Be awareofthe following points beforelifting the vehicle: -- The vehicle should never belifted or jacked up from underneath the engineoil
366

pan, the transmission housing, the front
or rear axle or the body side members. This could lead to serious damage. -- To avoid damage to the underbodyor
chassis frame, a rubber pad mustbeinserted betweenthe floor jack and thelift points.
-- Before driving over a workshophoist, check that the vehicle weight does not exceed the permissible lifting capacity of the hoist.
-- Before driving over a workshophoist, en-
surethatthere is sufficient clearance between thehoist and low partsof the ve-
hicle.

Accessories and technical changes

Accessories and technical changes
Warranty
Your vehicle is covered by various warranties:
-- New Vehicle Limited Warranty -- Limited Warranty Against Corrosion Perforation -- Emissions Control System Warranties: Federal
Emissions Control System Defect Warranty, Federal Emissions Performance Warranty -- Applies to: USA models: Kansas Safety Belt Limited Warranty -- Applies to: USA models: California Emissions Control Warranties: Short-term Emissions Defects Warranty, Long-term Emissions Defects Warranty, TZEV models Emissions Defects Warranty, California Emissions Performance Warranty
You can find detailed information in your Warranty & Maintenance Booklet and in the California Emissions Booklet*.
Audi Literature Shop
Service information is made available as soon as possible after a model is introduced and can be ordered in the Audi Literature Shop: http:// literature.audiusa.com
Driving in other countries
Government regulations in the United States and Canada require motor vehicles to comply with emissions regulations and safety standards.
Therefore, vehicles that were produced for the
U.S. and Canadian marketsare different from vehicles produced for other countries.
If you plan to use your vehicle outside of the
United States or Canada, it is possible that:
-- Fuel may have a significantly lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuels can cause engine damage.
-- Proper maintenance and repair work may not
be possible because special service equipment, tools, or measuring devices needed for your vehicle may notbe available.

-- Replacement parts may not always be available.
-- Navigation systems for vehicles built for the U.S.A. and Canada will not necessarily work in Europe, and may not work in other countries.
() Note
Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle resulting from these country-specific differences.
Maintenance, repairs, and technical modifications
Note the safety precautions > page 309, Working in the engine compartment and > page 352, Raising the vehicle.
General information
Due to the increasing complexity of technologyin
these vehicles, as well as the safety and environ-
mental standards that apply, you can only perform a very limited amount of repairs and modifications to the vehicle yourself.
Proof of maintenance work maybe required to submit a claim within the warranty period.
We recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and that Audi Genuine Parts and Audi Genuine Accessories are used. This helps to ensure that your vehicle's functionality, performance, and safety are not impaired.
Maintenance and repairs
Your vehicle was designed to help keep maintenance requirements to a minimum. Some regular maintenance is required to help ensure that your vehicle runs in a safe, economical, and reliable manner. Please refer to your Warranty & Maintenance Booklet for more detailed information about vehicle maintenance.
When operating the vehicle under more extreme operating conditions, for example when outside
temperatures are very low or in very dusty envi-
ronments, certain maintenance should be performed between the specified intervals.

8W0012721BG

367

Accessories and technical changes
Usually maintenance and repair work requires special tools, measuring devices, and other equipment that is available to trained vehicle technicians in order to help ensure that your vehicle and all of its systems operate correctly, reliably, and safely. Performing work on the vehicle incorrectly can impair the operation and reliability of your vehicle and may void one or more of your vehicle's warranties.
Technical Modifications
Interference with electronic components,their software, the wiring, and data transfer may cause malfunctions. Because of the way electronic componentsare interconnected, such malfunctions can also impair systems that are notdirectly involved. This means that you risk both a substantial reduction in the operational safety of your vehicle and increased wear of vehicle components.
Some convenience functions, such as the conven-
ience turn signal function, individual door opening function, and displays, can be reprogrammed using special workshop equipment. If functions are reprogrammed, the information and descriptions about these functions in this Owner's Manual may no longer apply to the changed functions. Audi recommends that an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility perform and verify any reprogramming procedures.
ZA\ WARNING
Maintenance procedures, repairs, or technical modifications that are performed incorrectly increase the risk of an accident and can lead to serious injuries.
ZA\ WARNING
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a potentially dangerous area and can cause serious personal injury. -- Always use extreme caution when doing any
work in the engine compartment. Always follow commonly accepted safety practices and use common sense. Never risk personal injury. -- Never perform any work in the engine compartment unless you know exactly how to

carry out the job and havethe correct technical information and the correct tools.
-- If you are uncertain about what to do, have
the work performed by an authorized Audi
dealer, an authorized Audi Service Facility, or another qualified workshop. Serious per-
sonal injury may result from improperly performed work.
C) Note
-- Maintenance procedures,repairs or technical modifications that are performed incorrectly can cause damage to the vehicle, such as corrosion.
-- If emergency repairs must be performed, take your vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon as possible.
-- Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle resulting from failure to comply with these guidelines.
@) For the sake of the environment
-- Regular maintenancecan help protect the environment.
-- Technical modifications to the vehicle can have a negative impact on fuel consumption and vehicle emissions.
@) For the sake of the environment
Undeployed airbag modules and pretensioners are classified as Perchlorate Material special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca. gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. When the vehicle or parts of the restraint system including airbag modules and safety belts with pretensioners are scrapped, all applicable laws and regulations must be observed. Your authorized Audi dealer is familiar with these requirements and we recommend that you have your dealer perform this service for you.
G) Tips
Because ofyour vehicle's aluminum body design, all service and repair procedures affecting the body should be performed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi

368

Service Facility, who will perform the work according to Audi factory specifications. Only Audi Genuine Parts are used when Audi experts perform repair or service procedures. Failure to use Audi Genuine Parts or Audi Genuine Accessories or performing repairs incorrectly may result in severe vehicle damage, such as corrosion.
Accessories and parts
Consult with an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility before purchasing accessories or replacement parts. We recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility and that Audi Genuine Parts and Audi Genuine Accessories are used.
Audi does not endorse the use of products and accessories that it has not evaluated, even if the productis approved by a certified testing agency or government agency.
ZA WARNING
-- Installing unapproved accessories or incorrect replacement parts can cause vehicle damage and can increasethe risk of an accident.
-- Never attach accessories, such as telephone holders or cup holders, to the airbag covers or within the airbag deploymentzone, because this increases the risk of injury if the airbag deploys.
-- Do not use license plate bracket on the front bumper that is different from the bracket installed at the factory, and do not attach any additional brackets.
() Note
A correctly-installed exterior antenna is required for operating radio equipmentin the vehicle. Otherwise, the increased electromagnetic waves can cause malfunctions in the vehicle. Observe the regulations in the country wherethe vehicle is being operated and the instructions from the radio equipment manufacturer.

Accessories and technical changes
Reporting Safety Defects
Applicable to U.S.A.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)in addition to notifying
Audi of America, Inc. 2200 Ferdinand Porsche Drive Herndon, VA 20171
If NHTSAreceives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehi-
cles, it may order recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or Audi of America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you maycall
the Vehicle Safety Hotline tollfree at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov;

8W0012721BG

369

Accessories and technical changes
or write to:
Administrator NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Ave.,
S.E. West Building
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safe-
ty from http://www.safercar.gov.
Applicable to Canada
If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect that could cause a crash, in-
jury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls. You should also notify Audi Canada.
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to
Transport Canada, DefectInvesti-
gations and Recalls, may either call Transport Canada toll-free at:
Tel.: 1-800-333-0510 or Tel.: 1-819-994-3328 (Ottawaregion and from other countries) TTY for hearing impaired: 1-888-675-6863
or contact Transport Canada by mail at:

Motor Vehicle Safety Investigations Laboratory 80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z OA1
For additional road safety information, please visit the Road Safety websiteat:
English:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm
French:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/ securiteautomobile/menu.htm
Declaration of compliance for telecommunications equipment and electronic systems
The manufacturer is not liable for radio malfunctions that are caused by unauthorized changes to the equipment.
Equipment
The following equipment complies with FCC section 15 and RSS-Gen:
-- Audi adaptive cruise control* -- Audi side assist* -- Remote control key
-- Garage door opener (HomeLink)*
FCC Part 15.19
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.

370

FCC Part 15.21
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
RSS-Gen
This device complies with Industry Canada'slicence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Accessories and technical changes

8W0012721BG

371

aa B4H-0800

Technical data

Technical data Identification data
Vehicle identification label

XXXXX XX -X-XXXX XXX XX

WOMEEMTnt, XXXXXXXX XX x XXXXXXKX

[Tye /TyPE

XXX XXX

XX XXXXXXX
XXX KW
XXXX `MOTORKB./ GETR. KB.
ENG. CODE / TRANS. CODE

XX. X.X XX
XXX.
XXX. XXX

LrAaCKnNRr.iINaNEsNiAUeSSaTt. a"--XXXX
M,-AUSST./ OPTIONS

/ XXXX

XXX / XX

EOA 7D5 4UB 6XM 5SG 5RW

2EH JOZ 1LB

1AS 1BA

3FC

5MU 7X1

FOA

9G3 OG7 OYH OJF

TL6 3KA 8EH U1A X9B QZz7

1xw

803 908 824 D2D

716 CV7 7KO 4X3 2K2

3L4

4KC 3Y0 413 5D2

1SA

7GB QiA

46Q

XX. X XX. X XK. X_--XXXK
rr

Fig. 289 Vehicle identification label
The vehicle identification label > fig. 289 is located in the luggage compartment under the cargo floor cover.
The vehicle identification label information can also be found in the Warranty and Maintenance booklet.

The sticker contains the following vehicle data:
@® Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
@ Vehicle type, engine output, transmission ® Engine and transmission codes
@ Paint and interior codes
© Optional equipment numbers
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The VIN is located in the following areas:
-- Select: the MENU button > Vehicle > left control button > Service & checks > Vehicle infor-
mation.
-- On the vehicle identification label -- At the front behind the windshield* -- inthe engine compartment on the right side
Notes about technical data
The values may vary based on special equipment as well as market-specific equipment and measuring methods.
Please note that the specifications listed in the vehicle documentation always take precedence.
G) Tips Any technical data that is missing was not available at the time ofprinting.

Vehicle data

A4 sedan S4 sedan allroad

Length (in (mm))
186.1 (4,726) 186.8 (4,745) 187.0 (4,750)

Width (in (mm))
72.5 (1,842) 72.5 (1,842) 72.5 (1,842)

Width across the Height at curb mirrors (in (mm)) weight (in (mm))

79.6 (2,022)

56.2 (1,427)

79.6 (2,022)

55.3 (1,404)

79.6 (2,022)

58.8 (1,493)

372

Capacities
Fuel tank, front wheel drive Fuel tank, all wheel drive Windshield and headlight washer system* Motels

Technical data
14.3 gal (54 L) 15.3 gal (58 L) 5.1 qt (4.8 L) Roofload The maximum permissible roof load is 200 lbs (90 kg).

Applies to: Sedan Fig. 290 safety certificate

Le |
| G
B8U-0380

Applies to: allroad Fig. 291 safety certificate
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The maximum permitted total weight @ ofthe vehicle is listed on the safety certificate on the side area of the door or on the driver's door pillar.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The maximum permitted load on the front axle
@ orthe rear axle @) is listed on thesafety cer-
tificate on the side area of the door or on the driver's door pillar.
Load
The maximum permittedload is listed on the tire pressurelabel on the driver's door pillar.

373

8W0012721BG

Index

A
A/C (climate control system) .............. 72 ABS... kee 138
AcCcCeSSOriS..... 2... cee eee eee 62, 369
Active lane assist Cleaning the camera area.............. 343 also refer to Audi active lane assist...... 117
Adaptive cruise control................. 102 Cleaning the sensors...............--- 343 MESSAGES Seniece » 0 consosce » © ecatons & m cent ® wea Lil Predictive control.................... 101
Adjusting air distribution (automatic climate
COMO)was: s & aeres = = eres & 8 oeeS 7 EER ee 73
Adjusting the additional display........... 17
Adjusting the sound..............-...0- 244
Adjusting the temperature (automatic climate
GOTEFO)) wo: = = sewers = Bes FE RUE BOS ERE FOE 73
Adjusting the volume..............20-005 17
Advanced key refer to Convenience key........+.0.000- 78
AllbaG seen = e wane 2 geen 2 2 ewe Fe GORE ee ee 261
Airbag systems s yaw 5 x wae 5 2 gem ee 261, 281 Advanced Airbag System components.... 268 Care... eee eee 276 Children... 0.0... cee eee eee 287 Child restraintst: « wees ¢ ¢ ewes 2 s ewe = 2 He 287 Components(front airbags)............ 268 Danger offitting a child safety seat on the front passenger seat...............05. 262 Disposal. .... 0.0.0... eee eee eee eee 276 Front airbags ........ cece eee eee eee 266 How do the front airbags work?......... 271 How manyairbags does myvehicle have?. 268 Howthe Advanced Airbag System components work together...............05. 270 Important safety instructions on the knee airbag system...................000. 279 INGICatOr light & cary se eeay + eee we RE 273 Kneesairb agin. es mecic 2 o mune ev anmne wo oe 277 Monitoring.......... 0. cece ee eee eee 273 PASSENGER AIR BAG light............. 273 REpalisi: « & misses oe inves «3 mamen 2% samen W 8 we 276 Safety instructions.............-..00- 275 When mustthe system be inspected?.... 273
Alarm system refer to Anti-theft alarm system.......... 34
Alignment pin (changing the wheel)....... 348

All-weather lights...............-..2000- 47
All SeaSON CIPS srs + wawm » werwn a eseve a ¥ ¥ 337
All wheel drive Indicator light.................-000005 26 also refer to quattro... .. ee. cece ee eae 143
AMI refer to Audi music interface........... 226
Android Auto refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 238
Anti-freeze Windshield washer system............. 320
Anti-Lock Braking System refer toABS......... 0. cece eee ee eee 138
Anti-Slip Regulation referto ASR... cc cece cece eee ee eee 138
Anti-theft alarm system...........-...0-- 34 Apple CarPlay
refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 238
ArroW VIEW... ee eee 161
Ashtray... . cece eee ee 62 ONS 5 138
Audi active lane assist.............2.0.. 117 MessageS .. 0... cece eee eee eee ee 119
Audi adaptive cruise control Distance display, distance warning....... 110 Traffic jam assistesves + 6 cvs os ween oo ew 109
Audi connect Infotainment Services overvieW.........0..0e ee eee 187
Audi drive select...... 0.0.0 sceeeeeen eens 126
Audi Entertainment mobile.............. 228
Audi music interface............-.0000- 226
Audi music stream TEPER EO Withee « = erevine 6 2 eevee + 2 wicerane wo ov 224
AUGIOFICS wccics 2 omen oo san oe wom + wae 229 Audio player
Bluetooth audio player................ 223 Wi-Fi audio player................0005 224
Audio track... 02... cee eee eee eee 232 Audi phone box.............-.0 eee eee 174 Audi presense.............-.0 ee eee eee 112
Messages .... 0... cece cece eee eee 117 SOttINGS wus s = wee sp owes § GSE 4 gee 117
Audi Side:assist : sen: 2 ¢ eees se ees te ees 121 Rear cross-traffic assist................ 125
Audi smartphone interface.......... 238, 243

374

8W0012721BG

Audi virtual cockpit refer to Instrument cluster.............. 13
AUTO Automatic headlights.................. 47
Auto Lock (central locking system) ......... 28 Automatic belt retractor.............2.. 256 Automatic climate control..............05 71
AUdi drive SelECE wisn: ss aan so eam & 2 tee 126 Operation « cess cues oo own o 2 erm vo ar 72 Automatic climate control system StU scsaus a a omewens a « osamen 4 © onaweme wa armen © ete 74 Automatic luggage compartment lid.... 36,37 Automatic transmission................05 85 Emergency program... .........0e eens 90 Hill descent control......... 0.0 e eee eee 88 KIGkKeC OW finn x + cours & 2 nwgne 7 2 seme 4 e ee a 89 Launch control program.............-.- 89 Manual shifting...............02..000- 88 Parking lock emergency release.......... 91 Selector lever positions...............05 85 Automatic wipe/wash system............. 53 AUTO (button) Automatic climate control system........ 73 Auxiliary heater (automatic climate control). 74
AUX i pUtesas. + ¢ ees se ena oo ema oo oo 226 Average consumption...............0-5- 19 AVETAGE SHEE s « s nowy 5 7 aur 4 o see ee ER 19
B
BACK, DUttON sue « < seas 2 coeme ts nem 2 eos 145 Balance (sound) ..............00000000- 244 Band
refer to Frequency band............... 215 Bass\ (SOU) sam: x x zene ¢ 2 ems 2 e wee 2 5 2 244
Battery...............0 000.0202 318 GCharginGhsws + wusay s wean « e mene 6 © eee 3 319 JUMP SEANEIING «eave s sxameay @ © sieawey oc o prone 6 362 Winter operation...............-.0005 318
Before driving.................0 eee eee 247 Belt tensioners...................2200. 259 Blower (automatic climate control system).. 73 Bluetooth
Audio player..........-.. 00 e ee eee 223 Connecting acell phone............... 171 SeteimgStcvcns so acon « «mea + wees 6 wesw 4 243
BOOSt: 2 woes os muon sv cea va ee we vee 20

BoosterSeats's i essere «= ewes oo ces « 3 comes 294 Boost pressure indicator................. 20 Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level........... 317
BrakeS 0... eee ee 141 Brake assist... 2.00.00... eee ee eee eee 138
Brake flidies « sas « = yeux 2 » come se eee 2 B17 Electromechanical parking brake......... 82 Emergency braking function............. 82 New brake pads » seus « « wean ss amen 2 2 oe 141 Break-in security feature................. 34 Breaking in New brake pads « says 5 = caw o » gees o ¢ eas 141 New til@Sis ie ccceses io coerce ov comseee vw eens 329 Browser refer to Media center.............-000 230 BUlBSis a cmos samme 6 serene a 0 cranes 0 ones 8 361 Buttons Control panel (MMI)..............000. 145
Multifunction steering wheel......... 15,18
Switching the Infotainment system display
Cable (USB adapter/AUX connector cable).. 226 California Proposition 65 Warning........ 310
Battery specific.................-.04. 318 Calllist.. 0.0... eee eee 176 Calloptions.......... 0.0.0 ee eee eee 183 Capacities
Fueltank................0000 eee 373 Washer fluid reservoir.............000. 373 Cargo area refer to Loading the luggage compartment. 64 Cat keVius + 2 eaws yo gees xy cao y eee» ees 29 Garwashic < aaams s geen 5 x Rae oe OUR te 342 Catalytic converter'. ¢ cs ss ean se eee sues 308 CD drive (media drives)................. 221 Cell phone refer to Telephone ..........ceeeeeeee 171 Cell phone compartment refer to Audi phone box............... 174 Center armrest « « 2 cess 2 saws os eee oe ee 59 Central locking): « s sees sy eeu: s peers se wes 28 Gonvenience key sca « x snuens «6 sume «3 een « 31 Convenience opening and closing......... 41

Index

Luggage compartment lid............... 35 Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 33 Remote control key... 0.0... cb eee ee eens 31 Setting x 2 wcmse 6 vemos 2 corms oo omnes vv vee 33) Vehicle key... . 00... cece eee eee eee 31
Central locking switch. ............0 ee eee 32
Certifications. « = sisson s a sessns s 2 ewesane «0 sense @ 370
Changing theiseale:. «vcs as wsan «2 wenn oo we 16
Charging refer to Power sourcesS.........---00 000 62
Charging the battery (mobile deviCOS) eee eee eee eee 174, 226, 228 Child restraints
Danger of using child restraints in the front to) ee 262 Wherecan I get additional information about child restraints and their use?..... 304
Child restraint system anchors........... 299
Child safety... 0.0... cece cece eee eee 285 Important safety instructions for using child Safetyseats.. « weve ¢ wae + wenn a 6 meen a 289 Installing a child restraint using the LATCH SYStGM scum 9 f Mem & WORM & E BONN oT BEEF 301 Mounting and releasing the anchorage hook... 02. eee eee 301 TetheRanchOrSias s s xerox 2 g sam 9g ease ao: 302 Tether'straps = cos «2 swe oo owes ao ees < 302
Child safety lock
POWerwindOWStss. + © scons a 6 memes w 2 omens + 6 « 40
Rear doors... 2... 2... eee cece 40
Child safety seats........ 0.0.00 eee eee 291 BOOSTER S@atSiccs so eae so seme s Bees He 294 Convertible:child seats... oc... ieee es 293 Danger of using child restraints in the front SCAU: < § sgeah @ § SRNR FS AGE Fd Be oe 262 How do I properlyinstall a child safety seat in my vehicle? ........ cee eee eee eee 289 Infant seats................0.0000 00 291 LATGH System's « s sss x 9 saw ¢ 6 eae 2 owe 301 Safety instructions................00- 289 SECUrING . eee eee eee eee eee 296 Unused safety belts on the rearseat..... 291
Child seats Lower anchorages............-0000005 300
Cigarette lightel ion io sce ee mews oo men we 62
ClASSICVIEW's 2 = sane: & 2 sure «= siemme & 2 nome 3 17
ClGANING saws + ¢ weve ¢ s woe ae ewes ge cee e 342

Cleaning Alcantara................0000. 345
Cleaning artificial leather............... 345
Cleaning carbon components........ 344, 345
Cleaning controls': « seas ¢ ¢ eves x eee go ex 344 Cleaning decorative parts/trim........... 344
Cleaning exhausttail pipes.............. 344
Cleaning plastic parts.................. 344
Cleaning textiles................00000. 345
Climate control system refer to Automatic climate control........ 71
Clock... eee 19, 240
Closing Automatic luggage compartment lid...... 36 Convenience closing..............-.05. 41 IGOR), » « smiwse 0) soccunns 5 nett « xamaence « acenae 310 Luggage compartment lid............... 35 Luggage compartmentlid with foot motion . 37 Panoramic glass roof.................0. 43 Sliding/tilting sunroof.................. 42 SUMSHAGE s sescr zs wee s xeee et Se a 2 tee 43 WiNdOWS ... 2... eee eee 4l
Cockpit (Overview). 2s scm eo oie ov eaten a a oe 8
Collapsible sparetire Inflating... 0. eee eee eee 355
Collapsible tire refer to Collapsible spare tire........... 355
Colornumber........... 0c cece eee eee 372
Command (voice recognition system) ...... 164
Compactsparestires. sc omnes so caver se ecsuen oo 355
COMpPAFtMENtSi crs sv sce vv sna ov ener ¥ 6 wwe 63
Compasstin the MIMOr's s ¢ wows sy coves « & eae 56
GoitipliatiC@ls: « » wesc ss sews 2 9 ewe = eae 2 370
GONNMECE cx < s seuss « + Sete & = wens et ee ee 186 Dataiplanss « 2 ssw sv ween ev emi wo wauee « 194 Data Privacy.................0..0.00. 194 Emergency Calls sass = s eeu 5 i come so ves 196 ANnfOtaNMeNtrecen «2 seve so ase «a oawon oo 186 Infotainment services............00005 187 Online roadside assistance............. 197 Vehicle control services................ 190
Connection manager............--..005 241
Connections referto Medidbicis 5 cess se ween so ow 220, 229
Consumer information..............0004 367
Consumption (UE): « sees =< aes se pees ses 19

376

8W0012721BG

CONTACES esiine wo cewwaie ow cess Seem TH 181 Additional directory.............000008 242 Importing/exporting..............0005 183
Memionyicapacityfics. «+ sucene o + mame sv anew 184
Storing as destination................. 206 Control buttons (operating the MMI)...... 147 Control knob with joystick function (MMI operation)... 62. 150 Convenience key......... 0: cece eens 28
Switching the ignitionon............... 78 Unlocking and locking...............005 31 Convenience opening and closing Setting « scccsan ao eweceue mw cesses o « ounroae a 0 pimteme 41 Windowsor roof... 2... eee eee 41 Convertible child safety seats............ 293 Convertible locking retractor ACCIVECINIG's 3 < meus 5 § Meee ¥ eee aa 8 298 DSaCtiVatinig = sem 2 + sacs 5 3 meme 2 9 mom oo 299 Using to secure a child safety seat....... 298 Cooled glove compartment............... 63 Cooling mode (climate control system) ..... 72 Cooling system Adding coolant...............00 eee 316 Coolant...............0.00000 2c eee 315 Coolant level checking................. 316 Coolant temperature indicator........... 14 GrOSSMAL RS. « cecvine ww swesuue ww awawece s stcnae to = eH 200
Cruise control system.............-+--05- 95 Cup holdersic: « ¢ sees x ¢ anes 5 ¢ ewes ¥ a cas & s 63
CUFFENE CONSUMPEOM was « < ees sa owed + He 19
D
Data plarisiecs: « 2 wes x y sme 5 2 eee 3 ees 194
Data Privacy............. cece cece eee 194
Date... cece eee eee 19, 240 Date display.............. 00.0002 eee 240 Daytime running lights.................. 47 Declaration of compliance.............4. 370 Defrosting (windows) ................0005 74 DEF (instrument cluster) . 00.06 060.6 cee a 15 Demo mode
refer to Presentation mode............. 206 Destination on the map
Using the MMI touch..............-00. 200 Determining correct load limit........... 336 Digital :compassiccie «ssc eo mine ve neve oo 56

Digital Rights Management.............. 220
DiMenSiIONSss « & asswna o + wasim ov seme % % somes 4 3 372 Dimming the exterior mirrors............. 52 Dimming the rearview mirror............. 52
Directory
refer'to Contacts on = 2 eww = vom we ren 181 Display acc « « ews 3 0 ewes ¥ o ga ev ee os Be 15
Cleaning? cw « x naneae a smenens 2 m1 comes © 4 0 344 Infotainment system display....... 146, 241 INStrUMeNt CLUStEn were: x ¢ ewe sw seme 2 oe 18 Multifunction steering wheel............ 15 Versions (MMI) .............-..0.0008 146 Disposal.... 0... 0... cee eee eee eee 367
Distames envis os. seme sa erecene wa: anesane oo anmane a os 19
Doors Child safety lock.............02.000000- 40 Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 33
Driver information system Changing ViewSiw. . 2 ces ss eer es owen ces 15 EM@RGY:COMSUIMEES vcs » serene ie 6 mienean ao annsnue 20 Outside temperature display............. 13 Trip COMPUTER ox ¢ e205 se ews oe Ceres ee 19 VACWin «5 cresnne ss avegnia ew econ @ a ecerene ao enero a 17
Driver seat refer to Seating position............... 248
Drives
refer to Media...........-00e0 eee 220, 229
Drive select refer to Audi drive select.............0. 126
Drivingoffroad s « « sews ss wees oe wes ¥ a wee 84 Drivinig'sately's + acws < ¢ sero ¢ & Sesee ¢ o RG G 247 Driving through water................05- 76 Driving time... 1.6... eee eee 19 Driving tips
Efficient-niving « scan < & ees 3 & eaves 3 x Same 76 DVD drive (media drives) ................ 221 Dynamic steering ...... 0.00. eevee eee ae 126 Dynamic volume
refer to System volume.........-...0-- 245
E
| 180 Economical route.............00e2 eae 205 EDS occ eee eee eee 138 Electrical system. .... 0.0.2... eee ee eee 317 Electromechanical parking brake.......... 82

Index

Electromechanical steering.............. 142
Electronic immobiliZetisivie . ¢ vee av aie 6 6 oes 29
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)
refertoESC.......... 2.0 c eee eee 138, 139
Embedded SIMseard « esswiis i x sosowe vo ssoeine wo 0 186
Emergencyassistance .......... 20000005 348
Emergency braking function.............. 82
EMergency Callus seas « = eemw < ween + Bee 196
Emergency flashers. ........seseeeeeneee 49
Emergency operation DOOMS « caw « aereu ee ees es ec epee ae 33 Fuelifillerdoor ion = cvssioe we» anausae wo sussents a axe 308 Luggage compartment lid............... 39 Panoramic glass roof..............00-05 43 Sliding/tilting SUNMTOOF sce. so seasaie so ern x 42
Emergency'starting)s « ecea ss isco <6 mene 6s 362 Emissions control systems...........4.. 308
Energy Management': « cas xs asea < aaem ae 143
Engine Breaking in « esc se esis oe enews so omens 6 @ ow 76 Coolant.................000 0.2 e eee 315 Start/Stop'systeM wane + ¢ sree a x eae ys eae 80 Starting/Stopping's « « se. 2 eees ee eon os 78 Starting with jumper cables............ 362
Engine compartment Opening and closing the hood.......... 310 OVERVIEW sors x x aeus 3 2 eee 5 o ewes ce ee 311 Safety precautions:. « ves « + sce ao avsea «0 309
Engine oil Adding........... 0c eee cece eee ee 312 CHANGING: « = snes ¢ s aeoH ce Geo FE eee 314 CheckingoiLleveli: so scsi s ecue swam ae 312 Consumption...........000 ese eee eee 312 Indicator light...........-...0.-000 0 312 Replacement interval................. 320 Temperature display.................0- 20
Engine SOUNG « sissies s sswine 3 6 aenvave sw arenine 6 126
Engine Start/Stop mode refer to Start/Stop system........... 80, 81
Engine stop refer to Start/Stop system........... 80, 81
Enhanced vieW........ 0.00 cence eee eee 7
Entering characters/numbers(speller) ..... 152
Entering letters (speller)................ 152
Entertainmentsliding menu............. 150
Entry/exit lighting). ©. ese 62 eww se erwe soe 49

Environment Unleaded gasoline.................00. 305
AS) Cl 138 Hill descent assist.................00. 140 Offroad Mode: « wiv: =o sews se wee se ey 139 Sport mode....... ce eee eee eee eee 139
eSIM refer to Embedded SIM card............ 186
Evasive steering support................ 114 Event Data Recorder (EDR) « wens «scene «2 143 Exterior LiQhtingisc: «a cris © a cvenere +o cevene © «one 47 Exterior MURPOKS sein 2 v wees 2 6 som © wenn wo 51
Folding settings...............-.000005 33 External voice operation................ 169
F
Factory default settings Multi Media Interface................. 241
Fader (Sound) ......... 00sec eee eee eee 244 Fastening
Booster seats. ..........0..0..0.0000. 294 Convertible child safety seats........... 293 Infant seats...... 0.02. eee eee eee 291 Fast forwarding and rewinding (audio/video file) eee 229 Fast forwarding (audio/video file)......... 229 FaStinoutes « xaceus x 2 emeneus ao ome 2 6 stems © eee 205
Favorites Media... ... cece cece eee ee eens 232 NaViGatiOniscs: + wes & + see § = seme & 5 es 200 Telephone wrssics x cave ov maser oo renee 6 voce 178
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) . 370 File formats (media drives) .............. 235
FLOOR THatS:: = ems < = sees so wees cs eee: we 252 Foot pedals........... 2.0.0 eee eee ee eee 252 For the sake of the environment
Disposing Of engine Oibwws x «ees ss awe 314 FUeUING sass oa sxnsene x a sonuene oo evacens 4 w coaeern 6 ove 306 Leaks... 2... eee eee eee 310 Warming up the engine..............64. 78 Free text SCQreh acs & x eames ¥ aero x Hams 5 154 Mediates = «sea ¢ scree s wome oe eee os ee 231 NaViGatiOMseness « ccstioss 6 + wcacwes we sieneie wv eneiene 198 Radio... 2... ee eee eee eee ee 216 Telephone esses s & seems sx cain vv eevee a exe 182

378

Index

Freeze protection Coolant... .. 6. ee ee eee eee 315
Frequency band.................4. 215, 218 also refer to Frequency band........... 215
Front airbags D@SEFPtOM s s » eeew ¢ wees ¢ pes 5 2 eee 265 How: they: works. « scszeis o snssine +o snows 3 @ one 271
Frontal collisions and the lawsof physics... 254
Front seats Adjusting... 0.0.0... eee eee eee eee 249 Child restraints in the front seat......... 262 also refer to Seats wc ss esas eee crews 58
FUGL is sens x eas & 2 come 5 2 RUG © © GeeRR F 8 305 AddiBIVeS « ascscxe vo swosci wo awavers vw anseeits 6 shaw 306 Current consumption..............00005 19 FUeL GAUGE: = s aves es sees ev nee se ee 13,15 Fuelitank.capacity'. « sacs so iauier «x mesic © 3 373 Gasoline... 0.0... cece 305 Saving fuel sss 2 x sees ¢ 5 sees ye eee se oe 126 Saving fuel consumption................ 76
Fueling Fuel filler door emergency release....... 308 Fuel gauge........ 2... eee cece ee eee ee 15 Fuel tank capacity.................000. 373 Opening the fuel filler door............ 306
Fuses Assignment........ 2.000 cece eee eee 358 Replaciig scx « « emu ¢ e aeee se eee es pee 357
G
GALA refer to Speed dependent volume control. 244
Garment hooks » = wees sy aoe 2 a eee eee 63
Gas discharge lamps............--..0-- 361
Gasoline... 2.6.6... eee eee eee eee 305 ACGIEIVES « cuss se mewm 2 2 neue a x eee 3 eS 306 Gasolime MiXEUC bess « « cece ao acaie aw avwsere 305
GAWR refer to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . 373
Glossaryof tire and loading terminology... 325
Glove compartment..............-00000- 63 Valet parking.................. eee eee 43
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)........ 373
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)...... 373

GVWR refer to Gross Vehicle Weight Ratirig (GVWR) « wows 2 2 wore = 4 eee 5 2 oes 373
H
HandSTree': « 5 ewas = yawn es news go came 5 ee 171 Head-up display...................00005 27
AGjUStING wap + » sages ¥ & cows yo pes ev eee ge 27 Operatiings, « 5 cmos « sueness w 0 someon wo wnomems © 6 298 27 Headlight range control system........... 47 Headlights'. = sccms se even se aaa ee sire 6 2 wey 47 CLEATIOG). « 4. asexsne 0 « saunene 1. oi etenene #91 anenene aw 6 343 Headlight range control system.......... 47 Washerisystem's « s sve os sews e ween ey oes 53
Head PEStrainits « sux s camees ¢ neem 3 5 Be 59, 250
AGJUSTIAG) cca & 2 comweue w 6 ower @ 6 scmsan 2 6 save 250 Heath ING secs ic @ acca 3 wanes 6 wont ww aT ow ae 71 Heavy clothing and safety belts.......... 255 HIGH DGS fSicum. « » eves y 2 ems go que ze GR 48
ASSIStANGS & sascane « 2 ences oo eecins © o cairn 6 woe 48 Hill descentiassists cic cv sauce 6 6 wane a ow 140 Hill descent controls + asus 2 ¢ eum 2 y eae a es 88 Hill Wold assist = wes ss eae so eee < eaewg oe 84
also refer to Hill hold assist............. 83
Homeaddress:: « = sceiic s nica + savin « « 200, 205 HOEN « = sews 7 ¢ caw 7 ¢ ewe Fo ewes ¥ 8 eee Fee 8 HOESDOES exes 3 x awa ¢ e peoe Eee e Mo 193
Howare child restraint system anchorsrelated torchild safetyoens = sn ee seen ee en ve 299 How manyairbags does my vehicle have?.. 268 Howsafety belt pretensioners work....... 259
I
Imbalance (wheels) .............22--005 331 Immobilizer
refer to Electronic immobilizer........... 29 Important things to do before driving..... 247 Importing and exporting (contacts)....... 183 Improperly worn safety belts............ 259 Indicator lights...... 20.0.0... eee eee eee 10
Airbag SYSteitiews « ¢ xeces «seems be oe ge 273 PASSENGER:AIR BAG ic i & sxaiane ow cxiwne © 2 0 273 INFANTSEAES & secon. so oemcos ao sume oo sa eo 291.

8W0012721BG

379

Index

Input Using the MMI touch................4. 148 Using the:speller vs... eee. s eevee se een 152
Input leVel. (media)... 6 cass i howe ss sees 232 Inspection interval........ 00... eee eae 320 Installing the upper tether strap on the anChOrage cx « = pown ¢ e oes 2p eee ge ee ee 303 IMStRUMIENECIUStEr: <i case ¢ sees oe ewe a os 13
GUS AMIN) s 2 & sacri oo oeawos oo snamie © suena @ owe 344 MessageS... 1.0... cee cece eee eee eee 21 Service interval display................ 320 Instrument illumination................. 51 Interior lighting.................000 eee 50 IMterlOrMONitOriNg®. « eres a 0 sweet oo memes oo 34 Internet refer toconnect...........0.-00e ee eee 186 Internet radio... 2... eee eee ee 225 Interval mode (Wipers). . cess a «ons 0 « emeien 53 iPhone refer to Audi music interface........... 226
J
Jukebox... eee eee 222 JUNUPFASTARELIAG « ccorses » « saysene 9 0 seeders a @ seenein i 6 362
Jumpstart Cableiiccas es cee a 6 wena «6 sana oo 363
K
Key's ccc oe ramen ow mon 6 min o waT wo a 28,29 Convenience opening and closing......... 41 Key Not recognized wus « : wen ss opus 5 2 are 79 Key replacement... 0.0... cece ewww ee ee 29 Mechanical key.............0.-000. 29, 30 Replacing the battery.................. 30 Unlocking and locking................0. 31 Vehicle code... 1... 2. eee eee eee eee 29
Kick-down (automatic transmission) ........ 89 Kineerairbagsy. « sess 6 3 cow os maui © somes 8 od 277
Description. ...........0. 002 eee eee 277 How they Works: ; «sees se see8i se eene ee 278 Important safety instructions.......... 279
L
Lane assist refer to Audi active lane assist.......... 117

Lapstiimert « 2 cscs © sscewms va amenene so ater wow oe 99 Evaluating. ..... 00... cece cece 99 StartitiGiews « « weuvs ¢ ¢ eeews & 2 eee oe oe ee 99
LATGHes ¢ 5 sans s Saas 8 3 auieu G 2 eae 3 2 299
DeScriptioninc = sensi « osc oo ammwes oo sees 300 Installing a child restraint............. 301 Location. .......... ec eee ee eee eee eee 300 Mounting and releasing the anchorage MOOK Gees is 3 aeavece ox samme ew soos em aemENIE = 2 see 301
Launch control program............2..005 89
Leather care and cleaning............... 345
Left control buttorie, « « ecw s «exes vy owes ae 16 License plate bracketie.s < ¢ ess5 2 eass ee por 369
Licensing agreements (MMI)............. 246
Lifting points (vehicle jack).............. 352
Light/rain sensor Heaglights cus « wenn s ¢ mews ¥ ¢ wees se eee 47 Interval mode (wipers) ..............04. 53
Light functions «2 onan ee aie + 3 ore © 0 oe 47 High beam assistant................... 48 Instrument illumination................ 51 Interior GhtinG sss s 2 aca « x ees ye soewE 6 50
Lighting EXteriOrs & sssn a awn 2 6 saosave « @ arenine w 8 Ber 47 Interior... 0... eee 50
Lights Headlight range control system.......... 47
Listening to music
referto Medidsc. s ¢ cess ye ees ses 220, 229
HOad + aye 2 x yuene a ¥ maeE aE Heme sy were ge 373
Loading the luggage compartment......... 64 Low beam headlights..................-. 47
Luggage compartment.................. 64 Gover(manual)'s « » aces « semn « = some « = vee 65 Passsthroug ts. & s sous «3 coven so own 3 somes 69 Power SOUrCES .. 6... ee eee eee eee eee 62 Tie -dOWiSiccs & s yam » y Bayes 3 gee so eR 68 Valet:parking's « @ wscna s & em oe wanes ¥ 6 ernie 43 also refer to Loading the luggage compartIMGNE's ¢ 5 Senos 4 2 agua ¥ ¢ MeKOR Ye RUE sa eR 64
Luggage compartment lid................ 35 Closing buttotis.; «ees sews oe pees ee oe 36 Emergency releasing...............0085 39 Opening and closing............-..0005 35 Opening and closing with foot motion.... . 37 Power opening and closing.............. 36
Luggage compartment net............... 68

380

8W0012721BG

Lumbar'Support svcse 5 x ececene ao esesese 2 v anevece © ¥ 58
M
Maintenance « sues «sess 6 o osers @ @ sores 2 oo 367
Maintenanceintervals.................. 320 Making an emergency call............... 178 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)........ 308
Map Display » nswa ¢ owen = woven 2 ¢ ween & 3 eR s 212 OPeratiing « » mises + 2 esseem 3 a ceamene © steteay @ & at 207 SettingS ... 0.6... cece 209 Update « awe = s eeu ¢ e eee : Seni = cen 198
Map Updates: « « sews se maw + x coms + eee 211 Mechanical key...........00eeeeeeeee 29, 30 Media... .. ccc cece cece ee eee eee 220, 229
Drives': ¢ < ews ¢ < eng so gee sb ees ¢ eee 221 Supported formats............-000005 235
Mediaicenter's + sews © v mers a 2 mre 2 a emwan & 230 Memory buttons
refer to Shortcut keys............. 145,152
Memory capacity Directory.......... 0.00... c eee eee 183
JOKEDOR sows s ¢ exes zs eaews = 2 ees =e eee 222.
Memorycard SD card reader (MMI). 2 ccs x 2 owes «2 wen 221 Supported types and formats........... 235
Memory function. ............00 2.000 e eee 60 MENU Button « scorn. oo ssncie ov ceoere a amauete to 3 145 Menu language
refer to Setting the language........... 240 Menu paths (Owner's Manual)............ 148 Menus/symbolsini es saws v cccmice as isewane a 20 155
MESSAGES: 2 soscasius 2 soso a 2 mime w 2 or & BOs 178
Mirrors Adjusting exterior mirrors.............-. 51 Compass... 12... 2... ee eee eee eee 56 DINGIMING eauys 5 x saps & = eEeE se miR x BEE 52 NaniitysMenOn iwsses «sess 3» aanins 3 suas wo 53:
MMI refer to Multi Media Interface.......... 145
MMI search refer to Free text search. .......... 154, 231
MMI touch.......... 0.0.0 c ee eee eee 148 Mobile device
refer to Telephone...........-eeeeeeee 171 Mobile device reminder signal............ 240

MODE Button « « asccens oo comes eo cece ww cee vo 18 Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System... 273
MP3
refer to Jukebox...........0-.000 eee ee 222
Multifunction steering wheel............ 157
Button... 0... ee eee eee eee 17 MApiZO0ND sco: = ¢ ees = 5 ee © 2 capes ge ee 16
Operating 's « s vse « viwin v v mem 6 mano 15,18
Switching tabs.......... 0.02. eee eee 15,18 Voice recognition system............... 17
Multi Media Interface.................. 145 Music collection
FefEF LO JUKEBOX: = secs <= somes x enews ge ee 222 MUt@iss g : sors 5 ¥ eae § 2 Heme & bee 2g 17, 245 MyAUdi... eee eee eee eee eee 187, 202
N
Natural leather care and cleaning......... 345 NAV/MAP button...........20200020 00s 198 Navigation ....... 00... cee eee eee eee 198
Announcements ..........-.0005-00ee 207 Better TOUt@ es + 2 mean x 9 cams ¥ 2 gow 2 Kare 213 Driver information system............- 161 also refertoMap..............000000 207 Navigation (instrument cluster) ...... 159, 160 Net... cece eee eee eee 63 NETSAe 2 succor © meron < o caine 2 1 ctor mo cenit 369 Number of seats: scrin «cise x x iain oo onsen 0 253
O
Occupant protection................00. 112 Occupant seating positions.............. 248 Octane rating (gasoline) ................ 305
OGOMECEHS scene = = ews & y ewE eG gt ee 15 Offroad... eee tees 84
Offroad mode.................00000005 139 OFF (button) ........ 0.0... eee eee eee eee 72 Oil
referto Engine oil................-05 312 On/Off knob (MMI) ....... 0. eee eee eee 145 On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)........ 308 Online destinations
refer to Point of interest search......... 201 Online map... ... 2... eee eee eee ees 210 Online map update................000. 211

Index

Onlimenmed ibis: i sesvoue os ssuuroee wo axeeens w a ane 225: Online roadside assistance.............. 197 Online services
refer toconnect...........0..00 ee eee 186
OPeninigis «= wesc & x assess ov cesveds vv emanee @ a saree 28 Automatic luggage compartment lid...... 36 Convenience opening...............0.08. 41 Fuel filler:doOrss: ¢ esses ¢ cscs & 6 cw oo 306 HOOd .. 1... eee 310 Luggage compartment lid............... 35 Luggage compartment lid with foot motion . 37 Panoramic glass roof..............2000. 43 Sliding/tilting sunroof..............0005 42 SUNSHAGE: owivins 2 a savers oo secon ow cece 2 oem 4 43 Windows ....... 0... e eee eee eee eee 41
Opening and closing refer to Unlocking and locking........ 28,31
Operating Head-up display: < : ecu s 2 see8s2 yeux ex 27. Multifunction steering wheel......... 15,18 Multi Media Interface................. 147 Voice recognition system............4- 164
Optional equipment number............. 372
Options menu.........-. 0. eee eee 147,151
Other consumers........--..00 0000s 20
Outside temperature display.............. 13 Overview: (Cockpit) « « cscs os ssoeine v6 sensi wv ee 8
P
Paint:damageses « « sees 2 @ owe ¥ 6 eerie 3 6 wens 344 PainEMUMbEM: « acu = x neues x 2 eae a 2 eeewn 372 Pani¢ DUGEOR seur: + x ses 3 2 ees Fe eae 2 2 eee 31.
PanOramicGlass OOP. ; excu s seus a = wee es 43 Convenience opening and closing......... 41 Emergency closing...........220200000- 43 SUNMSHACE sasaz ss case 2 Hee ¢ AGRA s Baa & 43
Parental control DV Deve: © = coe 2 ¢ ees & 2 Sete yo RRR ge 232
Park assist Cleaning the sensors/camera........... 343
Parking aidvwe x « man ¢ owen xo geen sa wows @ 129 Parking brake
refer to Electromechanical parking brake.. 82 Parking lightshis is oom a 6 comm oo ous 6 9 even 47
Parking lock emergency release........... 91

Parking system Peripheral cameraS......-...0- 00 eee 133 RearvieW Camera wnss ss evens y eeu s Koes 132 SOPHIAS wicca se wanes vo ewes oo oer a a soaeews 136 also refer to Parking system....... 130, 132
PartiGiOM MOE «sever « siccens sw weve «© 0 onngens 0 « 67, 68 Passsthnough veinses » v sseveve « evautous © casinos 5 ai 69 PASSENGER AIR BAG light............... 273
Pause (audio/video file)................. 229
Pedals wc: x + swam & = meme = ¢ See & E ROO g 8 252 Perchlorate': « vane x y saum «x seme © ¢ seem 2 2 367
Personal convenience settings............ 29
Personal route assistance. ...........4.. 204 Phonebook
refer to Contacts «cs =< yews st wees 2 eee 181 Physical principles of a frontal collision.... 254 Picture format (video) .................- 232 Playback (media) .............0.200000. 229 Playlist... 2. eee eee eee eee ee 232 Pointiofiinterests. « o wiscvs a» sviwene wo wwesani oe 201 Point of interest search.............0005 201
also refer to Point of interest........... 201 Polishing. ........ 0... e eee e eee eee 344 Pollutant filter (automatic A/C system) ..... ZL POWer SOUCES io: oven ce ve 62,174, 226, 228 POWer WINdOWS': « caja 2 smune 2 ¢ aause & 2 eau 41
Malfunctions 1 = sera a 2 ame so oemine 6 sme 42 Predictive efficiency assist............... 100
Pregnant women Special considerations when wearing a safeTY DElt's sass ¢ = sous ¢ o Sas Fo See EB ee = 258
pre sense refer to Audi presense................ 112
Presetitation MOdeixc< . caus ys gman « x seme 2 207 Presets (radio). ................000000 218
Pressure Tire pressure monitoring system........ 340 THRO Sie so anions vo autuese i a coanare a 6 ackmbes ot ean 332
Program guide Radio... 2.2... 66 eee eee eee eee 216
Programming buttons (multifunction steering
wheel)... ... 0. ccc cece ee ee ee ee eee ences 17.
Proper occupant seating positions........ 248 Proper safety belt position.............. 257

382

Proper seating position Front passenger. .......--.e eee eee e eee 249 OCGUPANES www 2 2 ages ¢ 2 eee oe eoRD e HOE 248 Reali PaSSOnQerSiacs «+ aves = v sane & 2 ssavees 250
PROEGCLING': 2 o sev wo cami 2 @ oem 2 6 me Yoo 344 Pyrotechnic elements............-...0- 367
Q
QUGEEIO 2 sway « seems ¢ & eee se eee ee a 143 Selective wheel torque control.......... 138
Question What happens to unbelted occupants?... 254
Radio... . eee eee eee Additional station information PreS@tSus « cor ¢ x geges ¢ Rams a 3 BeEER oo Hee Radio text Station list
Radio communications equipment........ 369 Radio equipment................0- 00 369 Radio Standards Specification (RSS)....... 370 Rain/light sensor
Headlights.............. 0.00 e ee eee 47 Interval mode (wipers) ...........-.0005 53:
Raising the vehicle................0000. 365 Range (fuel level) .................000002 19 Reading lights.................0002000. 50
Rear center armrest
refer to Cup holders............--00 eee 63 Rear cross-traffic assist...........00000. 125 Rear lid
ESCADGIGUCH seaz 5 « ness 2 a Nee 5 ROR EES 38 also refer to Luggage compartment lid.... 35 Rear Seat Entertainment preparation refer to Audi Entertainment mobile...... 228 Rearview camera refer to Parking system........... 130, 132 Rear window defogger...............005- 74 Rear window shade............ce ee ee eee 53 Rear window washer system.............. 53
REAR (button) « © cess + won 2 o wen se eee 3G 74
Recirculation mode (automatic climate control system) sis sa sain i eons & a owen aw aoweeu 73 Rectiperationtins « + mess 3 2 esse s 2 orem ae cca 19

Refueling). « ssc <x esos vv ciewes oo comnene ¥ ¥ oe 306 Remote'control-key « cies view ss vein ov eae 29
Convenience opening and closing......... 4l Key replacement............ee eee eeeee 29 LED «seco 2 2 recom 2 seems 2 an ae eR Ke 30 Mechanical key... . 0.0... cece eee eee eee 30 Panic function................. eee eee 31 Replacing the battery.................. 30 Unlocking and locking................0- 31
Remote operation Garage door opener...........2.0200005 44
Removing the caps (wheel bolts) ......... 351
REPAitS wscccense = sunrams 5 ensemins 6 summit © © ainenene & 367 Airbag system. ........... 26. e eee eee 276
Replacement key............00-000 00 eee 29 Replacement parts............00 00 ee eee 369 Replacing
Light bulbs............... 0.0000 e eee 361
Replacing wiper blades..............0005 55 Reporting Safety Defects................ 369
Reset refer to Restart (MMI)..............--. 246
Reset button (trip odometer)............. 15 Resetting the trip odometer.............. 15 Residual heat (automatic climate control)... 74
Restart (MMI)............0 000 ceca eaee 246
REUFOCUOT sexes = 2 ower o cose vo een aw SORE 8 256
ReVéerse G6at': soe s eas « ¢ wee ce ew ee ee 85 Reversible cargo floor.............-.0005 69 Rewinding (audio/video file)............. 229 Right control button................0 00 16 RIMS... eee 337:
ClEQNING': < = sees ¢ © wows ce wees 2 wee 8: 343
Ringtone settings...................00. 183
Roof load... . 2... cee eee eee eee 70, 373
Roof rack... 20.0... eee eee eee 70 also refer to Roof rack...... 0.0... ee eee 70
Route criteria....... 20... eee eee eee 207 Route guidance
refer to Navigation eis: << cers se eee se oe 198 Running direction (tires)................ 354
Ss
Safe driving habits..................... 247

8W0012721BG

383

Index

Safety Airbag system... 60... eee eee eee eee 261 Belts ances 2 2 maw & ¥ eee 2 RaNeN 8s Ue Eee 253 Correct seating position............... 248 Pedal area........... cece eee eee 252 Telephone w<s = s see = y sees sy eee sc oes 171
Safety belt height adjustment........... 258
Safety belt position.................00. 257 Safety belt height adjustment.......... 258 Safety belts worn by pregnant women.... 258
Safety belt pretensioner Service and disposal.................. 260
Safety belts..............02.0000. 253, 256
Cleaning ............ 0. cece ee eee eee 345 Danger to passengers who do not wear a Safetysbelte. 2 sess « + csoans oo sommes 2 o omoces 254 Fastening................- 00 e eee ae 256 IMproperly Worcs = sears ss sere so Ree 259 NOE WORN « & seri oo vescats @ o sisens @ 6 teem & 6 0 254 Safety belt position................... 257 Safety instructions: « ¢ sews + ¢ were ss oes 255 Securing child safety seats............. 296 Special considerations for pregnant womGN sees 3 ¢ see ¢ » Wem se ees v Pee Sv eee 258 Unfastening icc oe ews a v ences ss wae 3 o oe 258 Warning/indicator light............... 253 Worn properly ¢ ccs: : secs es pees ss tees = 255
Safety belt warning light................ 253
Safety instructions for side curtain airbags................ 284 for using child safety seats............. 289 for using safety belts................. 255 Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System... 275
Saving fuel EnergycOnSUMENS wos « + eee v3 cows sp eee 20 RECUPERATION « « econ « 0 sxewowe © ccasions « @ etenae 6 19
Seam (RadiO) iss « x arevine « 2 overane a soewene wo evesane 216
Screen refer to Display.................0-. 15,18
Screwdriver... 2.0.0... cee eee ee eee eee 348
SD card reader (MMI) ..........-000 0000 221
Search area (point of interest)............ 201
Search function refer to Free text search........... 154, 231
Seat adjustment Head restraints.................0000. 250

Seat belts refer to Safety belts...............00. 253
Seat heating.............. 2... c eee eee 73
Seating capacityien ss ces <n arenes & wees wo ve 253
Seating position Driver... . eee eee eee 248 FrOnt passenger zoe s < sae 5 = seem « s see F 249 How to adjust the front seats........... 249 Incorrect seat position................ 251 OccUPANtS: s acc <= soon ss eames x y eee a es 248 Rear passengers ...... 06. eee c eee eens 250
Seats Adjusting. ......... 0... c eee ee eee eee 58 Cleaning ........... 60... eee cece 345 Correct seating position............... 248 Numbertofiseatss, « « snscs 2 o vceuie « » ewan © 0 253
Seatvertilatiomesce: s+ wesw x ¢ wma a 2 smu © os 74
Secondary phone.................. 173, 242
Selecting a source (media).............. 229
Selection menu..............4. 16,147,151
Selective door unlocking................- 28
Selective wheel torque control........... 138
Selector lever Selector lever positions................. 85
Self-learning navigation refer to Personal route assistance....... 204
Service and disposal Safety belt pretensioner............... 260
Service interval display...............0. 320
Service position refer to Replacing wiper blades.......... 55
SET REAR:(DUttON) cicssve oo cesvace x v eonsvoe 0 cones 73
Settings Directory... 2... cece eee eee eee 184 MAD sacs 2 5 Mose § OE ASSAR E ER GE 209 Me diaiie: 2 2 acco os senur 2 wien a 2 mae ee oo 232 Navigation........ 0.0... eee eee eee 206 Radio... 2.2.2.6... 2c eee eee ee 218 System (MMD) ess ss sees s een es wee ee 240 Telephone............ 0.0 eee eee eee 183 Voice recognition system.............. 241
Setting the language.................-- 240
Shade Rear window/rear doors..............- 53
Shifting into gear (manual transmission) .... 77
Shift paddles.... 0.0... cee eee eee eee 88

384

Shortcut: Keys « esccnse ov aevace ev mae a 2 ow 145,152
Shuteben 2 2 ows wo mer oe wane 6 wan Go tee 232 also refer to Shuffle................-. 232
Side airbags .............0 0. eee eee eee 279 How they work. ...... 0. cece eee eee 281
Side assist Cleaning the sensors..............0--- 343 also refer to Audi side assist............ 121.
Side curtainairbagsiers ¢ « swow ss vse oo meson 282 Description.......... 2... cee eee eee 282 How they work. ..........000-20 eee eee 283 Safety instructions... + cum » x yeas s x ecoe 284
SIM CAO sees s « ees 3 x oes 3 e eee EE EER = 186
SiriusXM alert notifications.............. 217
Sliding/tilting sunroof...............0008 42 Convenience opening and closing......... 41 Emergency closing............-..00-005 42 Sunshade............... 0c cece 42
Snow chainS....... 00. eee 338
Socket refer to Power sources..........--.000-- 62
Software update refer to System update (MMI).......... 244
Software (MMI) Licensing agreements............00005 246 Update ........ ee eee eee eee 244
NGTSIOlis xawes : sews a 2 BoE GE eee & Y Bee 244
Sources of information about child restraints and theirs': « 4 gems + aaa v s gum @ x oo a 304
Space-saving spare tire (compactspare tire) . 355
SParetiies « sass ¢ = RAGES Te BOHR TE Bae 2 355
Speed dependent volume control......... 244
Speed limit information refer to Traffic sign recognition.......... 97
Speed limits refer to Traffic sign recognition.......... 97
Speedometer « evs se see ss teen ev eR eee 13
Speed warning system..............--00. 95
Speller..... 0... 2 eee eee eee ee 152
Sport differential.................. 126, 143
Indicator Wht see. » s ee 2 2 saws 5 2 emi es 26
SPOFC VIEW ox = « mace se Rem te eee Eee ee 17
Stabilization program Peer to ESC seas a & esas 3 & sews s ¢ cave 138, 139

Start/Stop'syste miss « 2 www =o ween ¥ raven oo 80 MessageS ... 0.6... cece eee eee eee 81 Switching offandon.............000 ee 81
START ENGINE STOP button.............. 78 Starting to drive... 2... eee eee eee 83
Starting (engine) ...............00005 78, 80
Steering Electromechanical steering............ 142 LOCKINGievc 2 2 enews 2 2 wee 2 eee vv eee oo 78 also refer to Electromechanical steering.. 142
Steering wheel Adjusting... 0.0.20... eee eee eee eee ee 77 Shitt\paddles = saws s < sews sz news se eee ge 88 Steering wheel heating................. 74 also refer to Multifunction
steering wheel...............-- 15, 17, 18
Steps for determining correct load limit... 336 Stopover (navigation) ................0. 202 Stopping (engine).......... cece eee ee eee 80 Storage compartments................0. 63 Streaming
refer to Online media................. 225 S tronic (automatic transmission) .......... 85 Subtitles (DVD) ....... 0... cece eee eee 232 Subwoofer... 0.0... 00 eee eee eee eee 244 Sunshade
Rear window/rear doors.............04 53
SUN VISOFS . 1... eee eee eee 53
SuSPeNsion COMUHOlsn «6 ices a 6 mae a 6 omen 126 SWap Call wise 2 o wisioos i @ wwnns wo + ween © + eesere 177 Switching tabs
refer to Multifunction
steering wheel.............0-05 15, 17,18
Switching the ignition on/off.............. 78 Symbols... 0.00... eee eee eee ee 155
Navigation ............ 0c cece eee eee 207 Tratticsicin © 2 sem = vrei es ness eo roe 2 > 212 also refer to Indicator lights............. 10 SYNC (button) 2.0... eee eee eee 73 System settings (MMI)................. 240 System update (MMI)... «evs. <2 eevee os 244 System VOlUME sacs ss eevee e eees eee es 245
T
Tachometer cis « x esau x waens ¢ neem 3 ¢ ee 13,14

8W0012721BG

385

Index

Tail lights Cleaning.......... 0. cece eee eee eee 343
Technical data.....................00. 372
Technical modifications................. 367
Telephones « = sive « 5 scorer raven ee run =o ae 171 Audi phone box...........00. 000 ee eee 174 GONMECCING « s seuss = & ewe & 5 eee 5 eee es L72 Dialing armam ber. cess ac esan os ween oe we 176 Options during a phone call............ 177 Playing THUSIE seen x x yene: o 2 eyes 2s gems = 223 Settings oss + saci a 2 eae oo eam se we 183
Temperature display COOLAME wisest o a canes wo aes @ oxtige « e owemNE 13 Outside temperature...............0... 13
Tether anchors.............0 000s eee 302
Tether strap... 6... cece cece eee eee 302
Text Me@SSageSecun « « wens so come a 1 erenen 4 #0 178 also refer to Text messages............ 178
Tie-dOWNS «6.6... cece eens 68 Tightening specification
Wheel bolts...............0 00 ee eee ee 354
Tightening specification (wheel bolts) .... . 354
TMG eens 240
Tire Mobility System (tire repair set)....... 349
TRIRCS scowes 2 = nynawen 3 © wieaente «9 eansene ¥ # cameos © ¥ 322 Changing........... eee eee eee ee eee 351 LOW=PrOfil@tireS ¢ seg yaey a x news % s Ox 338 Repaitesets. «isis: o 0 sso « & suanins « & oxewens 0 8 349 Service life... 0... eee eee eee eee 331 Tire preSSUfe wea s news ss yews oe wom ee 332 Tire pressure monitoring system.... 339, 340 Tire pressure table............--.-000- 334 Tire pressure (trailer towing)............ 93 Treadwear indicators...............00- 331
Unidirectional................... 324,354
Uniform tire quality grading............ 339
Tires and wheels Glossaryof tire and loading terminology .. 325 Tires and vehicle load limits............ 335
TMC
refer to Traffic information............. 212
Tone (sound) refer to Adjusting the sound............ 244
oo) Cn 348
Torn or frayed safety belts............... 255
Touch refertoMMI touch.................4. 148

Towing Tow truckS .. 2... cece eee eee 364
Towing loop.........-... eee eee ee 364, 365 Towing protection monitoring............. 34 TPMS
Tire pressure monitoring system........ 340
Traffic information................ 212, 213
Traffic jamiassisti. « cre = 4 somes 5 2 cen x 109 Trafficsmessages « sss ¢ o soeuee ve een ee ees 208 Traffic sign recognition.................. 97 Trailer mode (navigation)............... 206 Trailer tOWiniG es = s esas 2 = neue «2 eee 5 eee 93
Trailer loads: = 2 ccawss x amine av maine a amare we 93 Treble Gourd) ise: « 2 suse 2 2 wanes 2 arene © 2 ave 244 Trippeomiputet': ¢ sees ¢ senuse = geen 5 3 deme cE 19 Trunk lid
Trankiescape latch, « 2 sna 2 wasn 3 omeam a 3 38
TUPiNaSSISbe wee 5 2 eos & x ER Be ROE & eB 114 Turnisignals: = y sexs s = sews ¥ = ees 5 e ews ee 48
U
Unfastening safety belts..............0. 258 Uniform tire quality grading............. 339 Unlocking and locking.............020005 28
By remote'control:. « » scm. 3s saws ze eeee ee 31 Using the lock cylinder................. 33 With the central locking switch.......... 32 With the convenience key..............- 31 With the vehicle key.............--0005 31 Updating stations (radio)................ 215 USB charging port.............. 62, 226, 228 USB stick refer to Audi music interface........... 226
V
Valet parking « esc <x sewa s wane a 2 mae oo we 43 Vanity MirrOl ces « « exjas « 2 aaune « ¥ eames & ¥ eee 53 Vehicle
GCare/cleaning « were ss ccuce sv wares ov eee 342 Dimensions.......... 0.0.00 .00 000 eee 372 Identification dataley. « seas sy wows y a ware 372 QUE ORSERVICE @ cme 1 x wecsinin 2 x epaiee = a wana 347 Raising... 2... ccc eee eee ee 352 Vehicle battery Charge level.............-.00 eee ee eee 143

386

Vehicle:careisc: « & esas +e oscars so cemane v2 nese 342
Vehicle identification number............ 372 Vehicle jack's «eas ss vous as ews ao ewe to 348
Lifting points. ............... 0.00008 352
Vehicle:key'. « cise. «a csewos vv comets ¥ 2 meen 28, 29
Convenience opening and closing......... 41 LED cece: 2 seme 2 3 eet © ¥ BORE = Hee go Se 30 Mechanical keypccwon + won wo asco ao aon wv 30 Personal convenience settings........... 29 Replacing the battery................-. 30 Unlocking and locking...............005 31
Vehicle toolkit': esas sx eswe ss news ev owes x 348
Ventilation « 2 ase = seas s x pemg & & eemE so ne 71
Version information............-.00000 244
VIEW button... 0... eee eee eee 15 Voice guidance
refer to Multifunction steering wheel................. 15,17,18
Voicetmiatlss = siis oo aawom os mauis 6 2 mnie 2 8 c8u 181
Voice recognition system................ 164 Commands.........0 eee eee eee ee 165 External... 2.6.0... cece cece eee ee eee 169 Multifunction steering wheel............ 17 OPerating xo cwssisn so ccswavs a 0 susnowe o wanes a ae 164 Settings................000 0.2 241 NOLOMGhn 2 s agen & x pera 4 meee ee eee 17, 245
VOlWITIGs « seaje y = ewes ¥ Rees 2 2 ReeS gL eG 245
WwW
Warning lights refer to Indicator lights...........e0.005 10
Washing matte finish paint.............. 342 Wave band
refer to Frequency band............... 215 Web'fadio « sess x 2 agen x 2 saws 2 9 eum 2 8 ew 225 Weights': < sees < x eens ¢ ¢ eee & o eaters a sire 373 What happens if you wear your safety belt too LOOSE? ss i scene so mei Z oa ee MUR ew aM 4 257 What happens to unbelted occupants?.... 254 What impairs driving safety?............ 247 WITGCLDOLES sarcn x mamas ¢ & Sarum @ Sean FS ee 337
GChanging'a'tire sis so swiss x cee «= ee 351 Wheels sn « : sums 2 sem s x meee 6 2 eee eo 322
CLEARING « s sesusas so anveams a o oxaians mw 6 oneuans & 0 oni 343 Glossaryof tire and loading terminology .. 325 REDIAGIAG sere < v wawis > 2 eee 2 x mame 2 nee 351

Tire pressure monitoring system........ 340 Tires and vehicle load limits............ 335 Wheelwrench....................0005 348 When musta safety belt be replaced?..... 255 When mustthe airbag system be inspected? .273 Whereare lower anchorages located?..... 300 Wi-Fi Audi music stream... . 2... eee eee 224 Audio player. ..... 0.0.0. c cee eee eee 224 HOtspOtss < xcs « 2 pee: © & gues ee eee gee 193 Online Medias « anes s ssemere we a enavine : avavens 225 also refer to Wi-Fi............-0000005 224 Windows Child Safety LOCK sess + ¢ ewes 5 s eves so ease 40 Cleaning and removing ice............. 344 Convenience opening and closing......... Al DGRFOStING = & ams 3 = savas & & cere 4s Ee Ee 74 Opening and closing.................-. 4l Power wind OWSicue « « sures acne 6 6 etna wwe 41 Windshield Cleaning........ 0... eee eee eee 53 DeTrOSEIIG « « cews a x cows 4 « wows oo ewe ga 74 also refer to Windshield................ 53
Windshield washer system..........- 53, 320 Reservoir capacity...............0000. 373
Windshield wipers................000005 53
Winter operation Battery... 2.0.2... ec ee eee 318 Gar Washes « sew « 2 smae 2 x some te eee ges 342 Cooling:systems « csv. oo wae so eens ov ecw 315 Defrosting the windows................ 74 Removing ice from windows............ 344 Seat heating's « sass + sam a 2 mac ae enewa ae 73 Snow chains....................00005 338 Steering wheelheating................. 74 THRO Si. 3. scone 2 & cries o cee © © sommes oo oer 337 Windshield washer system............. 320
WntPRES cscs 6 « cesesss « 2 axceans © 0 oneeias oH oe 337
xX
Xenon headlights................-00 00s 361
Zz
Zooming on the map Multifunction steering wheel............ 16
Zoom (Map)......--.. eee eee eee 200, 207

8W0012721BG

387

It has always been Audi's policy to continuously improve its products. AUDI AG reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and to make additions or improvementsin its products without incurring any obligation to install them on products previously manufactured. This owner's manual is based on the current data
available when it was printed. Text, illustrations,
and specifications in this owner's manual are based on the mostcurrent information available at the time of printing, and shall not constitute a basis for liability claims.

These instructions may not be reproduced or translated in whole or in part without written consent of AUDI AG. All rights reserved by AUDI AG.
(4) For the sake of the environment Printed on eco-friendly paper (bleached without chlorine, recyclable).

Owner's Manual Englisch Nordamerika
8W0012721BG

07.2018

8W0012721BG

www.audi.com

audi-a4-s4-2019-owner-manual

References